1050 Series of HPLC Modules Service Handbook
1050 Series of HPLC Modules Service Handbook
1050 Series of HPLC Modules Service Handbook
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
<strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong><br />
<strong>Modules</strong><br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong>
© Copyright Agilent<br />
Technologies 2001<br />
All rights reserved.<br />
Reproduction, adaption,<br />
or translation without<br />
prior written permission<br />
is prohibited, except as<br />
allowed under the<br />
copyright laws.<br />
Part No. NONE<br />
09/2001<br />
Printed in Germany<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
Hewlett-Packard-Strasse 8<br />
76337 Waldbronn<br />
Germany<br />
Warranty<br />
The information<br />
contained in this<br />
document is subject to<br />
change without notice.<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
makes no warranty <strong>of</strong><br />
any kind with regard to<br />
this material,<br />
including, but not<br />
limited to, the implied<br />
warranties or<br />
merchantability and<br />
fitness for a particular<br />
purpose.<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
shall not be liable for<br />
errors contained herein<br />
or for incidental or<br />
consequential damages<br />
in connection with the<br />
furnishing, performance,<br />
or use <strong>of</strong> this material.<br />
IMPORTANT NOTE<br />
This version <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong><br />
service manual includes<br />
all sections from the<br />
0<strong>1050</strong>-90102 edition 4<br />
(1995).<br />
The series I opticals<br />
information (79854A<br />
MWD and G1306A DAD)<br />
and the 79853A VWD<br />
information has been<br />
removed (products went<br />
out <strong>of</strong> support during<br />
2000).<br />
Part numbers have been<br />
updated as <strong>of</strong> 09/2001.<br />
Contact your local<br />
Agilent support <strong>of</strong>fice in<br />
case <strong>of</strong> part number<br />
issues or upgrades.<br />
The latest version <strong>of</strong> this<br />
manual is available as<br />
Adobe Acrobat Reader<br />
(PDF) version only and<br />
can be downloaded from<br />
the Agilent Technolgies<br />
web page<br />
www.agilent.com.
Contents<br />
1 Common: General Information<br />
This chapter provides general information about the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong><br />
<strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> 29<br />
Safety Information 30<br />
General 30<br />
Operation 30<br />
Safety Symbols 32<br />
Radio Interference 33<br />
Manufacturer’s Declaration 33<br />
Sound Emission 33<br />
Manufacturer’s Declaration 33<br />
UV-Radiation 34<br />
Solvent Information 35<br />
Flow Cell 35<br />
Solvents 35<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Introduction 36<br />
The <strong>Modules</strong> Overview 36<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Identification 38<br />
Repair Policy 38<br />
2 Common: Electronic Information<br />
This chapter provides common electronic information about<br />
the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> 39<br />
Overview 41<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP) 42<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Functions 42<br />
CMP Details 44<br />
Remote Control 47<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001 3
Contents<br />
Firmware Board (FIM) 53<br />
Firmware Description 53<br />
Fluorescent Indicator Module (FIP) 55<br />
External Contacts 56<br />
Power Supply (DPS-B / DPS-A) 57<br />
General Description 57<br />
Base Supply (DPS-B) 58<br />
Lamp Supply (DPS-A) 60<br />
Communication Interface (CIB / CRB) 64<br />
3 Common: Cable Information<br />
This chapter provides information on cables for the <strong>1050</strong><br />
<strong>Modules</strong> 67<br />
Overview 68<br />
Analog Cables 70<br />
Remote Cables 72<br />
BCD Cables 77<br />
4 Pumps: General Information<br />
This chapter provides general information about the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Pumps 83<br />
Introduction 84<br />
About this Manual 84<br />
About the Pumps 85<br />
Repair Policy 85<br />
Product Structure 86<br />
4 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001
Contents<br />
Capillaries 87<br />
Specifications 88<br />
5 Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
This chapter provides hardware information about the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Pumps 91<br />
Overview 93<br />
How does the Pump Work? 95<br />
Isocratic Operation 95<br />
Gradient Operation 96<br />
Overview <strong>of</strong> the Electronics 96<br />
Overview <strong>of</strong> the Flow Path 98<br />
Solvent Cabinet 99<br />
Helium Degassing 99<br />
Manual Injection Valve 100<br />
Column Heater 100<br />
Multi Channel Gradient Valve (MCGV) 102<br />
Metering Drive Assembly 103<br />
Pump Head Assembly 104<br />
Continuous Seal Wash 105<br />
Active Inlet Valve 107<br />
Outlet Ball Valve 108<br />
Frit Adapter Assembly 109<br />
Purge Valve 110<br />
High Pressure Damper 111<br />
Column Holder 112<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001 5
Contents<br />
6 Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
This chapter provides electronic information about the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Pumps 113<br />
Overview 115<br />
Pump Drive Control Board (PDC2) 118<br />
Relative A/D Converter Board (RAD) 123<br />
Firmware Board (SFW) 127<br />
HRI Board - Heater Isocratic Board 128<br />
Heater Quaternary Board (HRQ) 131<br />
High Pressure Transducer Board (HPT) 134<br />
Connector Board (CON) 136<br />
Pump Motherboard (HPS) 138<br />
7 Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
This chapter provides information on error messages and diagnostic<br />
features <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps 143<br />
How to use the Diagnostic Test Functions 145<br />
Pump Pressure Ripple 146<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests 147<br />
Prerequisites for the Pressure Tests 148<br />
Normal Pressure Test 149<br />
The Modified Pressure Test 150<br />
Flow Test Method 151<br />
Flow Test Method - Firmware Rev. 1.0 152<br />
Flow Test Method - Firmware Rev. 3.0 and above 157<br />
Gradient Test Method 159<br />
Prerequisites for the Gradient Test Method 159<br />
Running the Gradient Test Method 159<br />
6 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001
Contents<br />
Error Messages 162<br />
Selftest 163<br />
ROM/RAM Test 163<br />
Panic Error / Bus Error Address Error 164<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Error Messages 165<br />
Pump Initialization Error Messages 167<br />
Normal Operation Error Messages 171<br />
Column Heater Error Messages 175<br />
Online Monitor Messages 177<br />
Troubleshooting Hints 180<br />
Standard Pressure Tests with different Solvents 181<br />
Modified Pressure Tests 181<br />
Pressure Tests - Firmware Revision 1.0 182<br />
Pressure Tests - Firmware Revision 3.0 and above 184<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken 185<br />
Pressure Tests - Leak at Piston Seal 1 186<br />
Pressure Tests - Leak at Piston Seal 2 189<br />
Pressure Tests - Defective Piston 1 192<br />
Pressure Tests - Defective Piston 2 196<br />
Pressure Tests - Defective Active Inlet Valve 200<br />
8 Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
This chapter provides provide procedures for service and maintenance<br />
<strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps 203<br />
Solvent Cabinet and Column Heater 205<br />
Replacing the Heat Exchanger 205<br />
Replacing the Cable Assembly 206<br />
Replacing the Active Inlet Valve 207<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001 7
Contents<br />
Replacing the Outlet Ball Valve 209<br />
Maintaining the Frit Adapter Assembly 210<br />
Maintaining the Purge Valve 211<br />
Maintaining the Pump Head Assembly 212<br />
Procedure 1: Pump Head with old Plunger Housing 213<br />
Stage 1: Removing the Pump Head Assembly 213<br />
Stage 2: Disassembling the Pump Head assembly 213<br />
Stage 3: Replacing the Seals 214<br />
Stage 4: Disassembling the Plunger Housing 215<br />
Stage 5: Reassembling the Plunger Housing 216<br />
Stage 6: Reassembling the Pump Head Assembly 217<br />
Stage 7: Mounting the Pump Head Assembly 217<br />
Procedure 2: Pump Head with new Plunger Housing 218<br />
Stage 1: Removing the Pump Head Assembly 218<br />
Stage 2: Disassembling the Pump Head Assembly 218<br />
Stage 3: Replacing the Seals 219<br />
Stage 4: Reassembling the Pump Head Assembly 220<br />
Stage 5: Mounting the Pump Head Assembly 220<br />
Continuous Seal Wash Option 221<br />
Replacing the Fan 222<br />
Removing the Metering Drive Assembly 223<br />
9 Pumps: Parts Information<br />
This chapter provides information on parts <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Pumps 225<br />
Electronic Boards 227<br />
Complete List <strong>of</strong> Ti-Parts 229<br />
Solvent Cabinet 230<br />
8 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001
Contents<br />
Solvent Cabinet with Helium Degassing 232<br />
Solvent Cabinet with Column Heater and Manual Injection<br />
Valve 234<br />
Overall Diagram 236<br />
Hydraulic Flow Path 240<br />
Metering Drive Assembly 243<br />
Pump Head Assembly (old version) 244<br />
Pump Head Assembly (new version) 245<br />
Pump Head Assembly with Seal Wash 246<br />
Active Inlet Valve 248<br />
Outlet Ball Valve 249<br />
Frit Adapter Assembly 250<br />
Purge Valve Assembly 251<br />
Column Holder Assembly 252<br />
Special Tools 253<br />
10Pumps: Additional Information<br />
This chapter provides additional information about the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Pumps 255<br />
Product History 257<br />
Firmware History 259<br />
Revision 1.0 259<br />
Revision 3.0 259<br />
Revision 3.1 260<br />
Revision 3.2 260<br />
How does the On-line Monitor work 261<br />
Normal Operation 262<br />
M2 Gas Bubble 263<br />
M4 Leak at first Piston 265<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001 9
Contents<br />
M6 Valve Backflow 266<br />
M8 Outlet Valve Problem 267<br />
If You Need Operational Hints 268<br />
Helium Degassing Principle 269<br />
Helium Regulators 269<br />
Bottle Head Assembly 270<br />
Isocratic Pumps 270<br />
Pump Head Assembly 271<br />
PDC Board 271<br />
PDC2 Board 271<br />
HRQ Board 272<br />
GVD Board 272<br />
Wear Retainer 272<br />
Outlet Ball Valve 273<br />
Flow Test Method 273<br />
Method loading 273<br />
Flow Gradients 273<br />
Manual Injection Valve 273<br />
Metering Drive Repairs 274<br />
Troubleshooting E27 Errors (Max Motor Drive Power Exceeded) 275<br />
Piston with Conical Holder 276<br />
Ghost Leak messages 276<br />
PANIC Errors 276<br />
11Sampler: General Information<br />
This chapter provides general information about the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Autosampler 281<br />
About this Manual 282<br />
About the Autosampler 282<br />
Repair Policy 283<br />
10 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001
Contents<br />
Product Structure 283<br />
Capillaries 284<br />
Specifications 285<br />
12Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
This chapter provides hardware information about the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Autosampler 287<br />
Overview 289<br />
Solvent Flow Path 290<br />
How Does The Autosampler Work? 291<br />
The Injection Sequence 293<br />
What happens when the 18596L/M Sample Tray is<br />
connected? 294<br />
Overview <strong>of</strong> the Electronics 295<br />
Sampling Unit 297<br />
Metering Drive 299<br />
Analytical Head Assembly 300<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve 301<br />
Pneumatic Assembly 302<br />
Actuator Air Solenoids 303<br />
Additional 100 Sample Capacity 304<br />
13Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
This chapter provides electronic information about the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Autosampler 307<br />
Overview 309<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001 11
Contents<br />
Max Tray Drive Board (MTD) 312<br />
Needle Mini Tray Drive Board (NMD) 316<br />
Valve Metering Drive Board (VMD) 320<br />
Firmware Board (FIM) 324<br />
Autosampler Motherboard (ALM) 325<br />
Extender Test Board (ET) 330<br />
14Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
This chapter provides information on error messages and diagnostic<br />
features <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler 333<br />
Single Steps 335<br />
Entering the Test Functions 335<br />
Single Steps For The 21 Sample Tray 336<br />
Single Steps for the 100 Sample Tray 338<br />
Entering the Additional Single Steps 338<br />
18596L/M Sample Tray Diagnostic Mode 340<br />
Entering Diagnostic Mode 340<br />
Z Test (Gripper Assembly) 340<br />
R Test (radial arm movement) 341<br />
Theta Test (angular movement) 341<br />
Error Messages 342<br />
Selftest 343<br />
Panic Error 343<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Error Messages 344<br />
Error Messages for Firmware Revision 4.0 and greater 346<br />
Injector Program Error Messages 350<br />
Normal Operation Messages for Firmware Revision 3.1 and<br />
below 351<br />
Events Messages 354<br />
12 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001
Contents<br />
18596L/M Vial Tray 355<br />
15Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
This chapter provides provide procedures for service and maintenance<br />
<strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler 357<br />
Sampling Unit 359<br />
Stage 1: Removing the Sampling Unit 359<br />
Stage 2: Removing the Needle 360<br />
Stage 3: Installation <strong>of</strong> the Needle 361<br />
Stage 4: Removing the Seat Capillary 361<br />
Stage 5: Disassembling the Needle Arm 362<br />
Stage 6: Reassembling the Needle Arm 362<br />
Stage 7: Disassembling the Tray Mechanic 363<br />
Metering Device 365<br />
Removing the Metering Device 365<br />
Removing the Gear Belt 365<br />
Analytical Head Assembly 366<br />
Procedure 1: Analytical Head Assembly with old Adapter Housing 366<br />
Procedure 2: Analytical Head with new Adapter Housing 369<br />
Reassembling the Metering Device 371<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve 372<br />
Stage 1: Removing 372<br />
Stage 2: Disassembling 372<br />
Adjust the Sensors 374<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Only Level 374<br />
Sensors <strong>of</strong> the Sampling Unit 376<br />
Sensor <strong>of</strong> the High Pressure Switching Valve 379<br />
Metering Device Home Sensor 380<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001 13
Contents<br />
16Sampler: Parts Information<br />
This chapter provides information on parts <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Autosampler 381<br />
Electronic Boards and Fuses 383<br />
Electronic Boards 383<br />
Fuses 383<br />
Complete List <strong>of</strong> Ti-Parts 384<br />
Overall Diagram 79855A/B 385<br />
Hydraulic Flow Path 389<br />
Sampling Unit 391<br />
Arm Assembly Spare Parts 395<br />
Metering Drive and Analytical Head 396<br />
Metering Drive 396<br />
Analytical Head (Old Version) 396<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve 399<br />
Pneumatic Valve Assembly 401<br />
17Sampler: Additional Information<br />
This chapter provides additional information about the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Autosampler 403<br />
Product History 405<br />
Firmware Revisions 406<br />
Firmware Revision 1.0 406<br />
Firmware Revision 2.0 406<br />
Firmware Revision 2.1 407<br />
Firmware Revision 3.0 408<br />
Firmware Revision 3.1 409<br />
Firmware Revision 4.0 410<br />
14 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001
Contents<br />
Firmware Revision 4.1 411<br />
Firmware Revision 4.2 411<br />
If you update the firmware to revision 4.0 and greater 412<br />
If you add a 100 vial tray to the autosampler 412<br />
If you have Intermittant E17: Needle cannot move out <strong>of</strong> vial 413<br />
If you have to update the autosampler with a fan 413<br />
If the fan in the autosampler does not work properly 413<br />
If the needle lifts the vial out <strong>of</strong> the tray 414<br />
If the injections are not reproducible (grooved needle) 414<br />
18DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
This chapter provides general information about the <strong>1050</strong> Diode<br />
Array and Multiple Wavelength Detectors 419<br />
About the Detector 420<br />
General 420<br />
Repair Policy 420<br />
Identification 421<br />
Compatibility 421<br />
DAD Differences 422<br />
Added features 422<br />
Removed features from local keyboard 422<br />
Restrictions <strong>of</strong> user interface 423<br />
Compatibility 423<br />
Local User Interface 424<br />
Workstation Interface 426<br />
Test Functions 428<br />
Options 428<br />
Specifications DAD/MWD 429<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001 15
Contents<br />
19DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
This chapter provides hardware information about the 050 Diode<br />
Array and Multiple Wavelength Detectors 433<br />
Overview: Optical System 435<br />
Overview: Electronics 436<br />
Optical Unit 438<br />
Flow Cell Assemblies 439<br />
Slit Assembly 441<br />
Deuterium Lamp Assembly 442<br />
Heat Exchanger Assembly 444<br />
Shutter Assembly 445<br />
Leak Sensor Assembly 446<br />
Fans 447<br />
20DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
This chapter provides electronic information about the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Diode Array and Multiple Wavelength Detectors 449<br />
Overview 451<br />
Array Signal Conversion Board (ASC) 454<br />
Data Acquisition Board (AQB) 459<br />
Firmware Board (FIM) 463<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP) 464<br />
Remote Control 466<br />
Communication Interface (CRB) 467<br />
Digital to Analog Conversion Board (DAC) 468<br />
Fluorescent Indicator Module (FIP) 472<br />
Motherboard (LUM) 473<br />
LPC Board 477<br />
16 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001
Contents<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A) 478<br />
21DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
This chapter provides information on error messages and diagnostic<br />
features <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Diode Array and Multiple Wavelength<br />
Detectors 483<br />
STATUS Information 485<br />
Status Modes 485<br />
Status LEDs 486<br />
Warnings 486<br />
Error Messages 487<br />
Selftest 487<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Error Messages 488<br />
<strong>1050</strong> DAD/WMD Error Messages 490<br />
Diagnostic Features 493<br />
Entering the Test Functions 493<br />
Measure Intensity Pr<strong>of</strong>ile 494<br />
Lamp Intensity Test 496<br />
Measure Holmium Spectrum 498<br />
D/A Converter Test 500<br />
Electronic Noise Test 502<br />
Check <strong>of</strong> Wavelength Calibration 504<br />
ASC Test 505<br />
Shutter Position 506<br />
ROM/RAM/DISPLAY Tests 507<br />
Using the Built-in Test Chromatogram 508<br />
How to print the DAD Pr<strong>of</strong>iles 510<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001 17
Contents<br />
22DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
This chapter provides provide procedures for service and maintenance<br />
<strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Diode Array and Multiple Wavelength<br />
Detectors 513<br />
Tools Needed 514<br />
Warnings and Notes 515<br />
Removing the Optical Unit 516<br />
Flow Cell Maintenance 517<br />
Flushing Procedure 517<br />
Replacements on Standard Flow Cells 518<br />
Replacements on High Pressure Flow Cells 520<br />
Lamp House Window Maintenance 522<br />
Removing the Quartz Window 522<br />
Replacing the Achromat 524<br />
Replacing Fans 525<br />
Replacement <strong>of</strong> Shutter or LPC Board 526<br />
Replacement <strong>of</strong> Leak Sensor 527<br />
Upgrade to from 79854A MWD to G1306A DAD 528<br />
Upgrade MWD with <strong>Series</strong> II Optical 529<br />
Verifying the Performance 530<br />
Specifications 530<br />
What You Need 530<br />
Preparations 530<br />
Scaling Factors 532<br />
23DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
This chapter provides information on parts <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Diode<br />
Array and Multiple Wavelength Detectors 533<br />
18 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001
Contents<br />
Overall Diagram 535<br />
Optical Unit 538<br />
Heat Exchanger and Flow Cell 540<br />
Flow Cell Parts (STD-SST) 541<br />
High Pressure Flow Cell Parts (HP-STD-SST) 542<br />
High Pressure Flow Cell Parts (HP-Micro-SST) 543<br />
Cell Repair Kits 544<br />
Lamp Housing 545<br />
Upgrade Parts MWD to DAD 546<br />
Upgrade Parts MWD to <strong>Series</strong> II Optical 547<br />
List <strong>of</strong> Accessories 548<br />
24DAD/MWD: Additional Information<br />
This chapter provides additional information about the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Diode Array and Multiple Wavelength Detectors 549<br />
Product History 551<br />
Hardware Changes 551<br />
Firmware Changes 552<br />
Known Problems 553<br />
Panic Errors 553<br />
25VWD: General Information<br />
This chapter provides general information about the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Variable Wavelength Detectors 559<br />
About the Detector 561<br />
Versions vs. Support Periods (EOS) 561<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001 19
Contents<br />
79853A 561<br />
79853C 561<br />
Repair Policy 562<br />
Specifications 563<br />
26VWD: Hardware Information<br />
This chapter provides hardware information about the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Variable Wavelength Detectors 565<br />
Overview 566<br />
Optical System Overview 568<br />
Leak Interface Assembly 569<br />
Leak Sensor Assembly 570<br />
Fan Assemblies 571<br />
Optical Unit 572<br />
Flow Cells 573<br />
Deuterium Lamp 576<br />
Photodiodes Assemblies 579<br />
Filter Assembly 580<br />
Grating Assembly and Motor 581<br />
Mirrors 582<br />
Slit Assemblies 582<br />
Beam Splitter 582<br />
Enhanced Optical Unit (“D”) 583<br />
27VWD: Electronic Information<br />
This chapter provides electronic information about the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Variable Wavelength Detectors 585<br />
20 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001
Contents<br />
Location <strong>of</strong> Electronic Assemblies 587<br />
Interconnection Diagram 589<br />
Detector Controller Board (DCB) 590<br />
Digital Section 592<br />
Analog Sections 594<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A) 601<br />
Keyboard 602<br />
Keyboard Electronics (KDI / VFD) 603<br />
Pre-Amplifier Boards 605<br />
Power Supply Connection Board (PSC) 606<br />
GPIB Communication Interface 607<br />
GPIB Firmware Revisions 608<br />
28VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
This chapter provides information on error messages and diagnostic<br />
features <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Variable Wavelength<br />
Detectors 609<br />
Self Diagnosis 611<br />
During Power On 611<br />
During Normal Operation 611<br />
Error Messages Before Lamp Ignition 612<br />
At Power ON 612<br />
Error Messages After Lamp Ignition 616<br />
Error Messages During Normal Operation 617<br />
Error Messages During Use <strong>of</strong> Control Functions 619<br />
User Control Functions 620<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions 622<br />
Entering the <strong>Service</strong> Mode 622<br />
Zero Order Calibration 624<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001 21
Contents<br />
Wavelength Calibration 626<br />
Wavelength Calibration Check 628<br />
SET WL Parameter 629<br />
Fix Signal 631<br />
Leak Sensor Voltage 634<br />
Voltage Test 635<br />
ADC Noise 636<br />
Grating Photo Sensor 637<br />
Filter Photo Sensor 638<br />
Remote Test 639<br />
Filter Check 640<br />
Zero Order Test 641<br />
DAC Test 642<br />
Pre-amplifier Gain 644<br />
EEROM Test 645<br />
DAC Calibration 646<br />
Wavelength Compensation 647<br />
29VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
This chapter provides provide procedures for service and maintenance<br />
<strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Variable Wavelength Detectors 649<br />
Warnings 650<br />
Securing for Transport 651<br />
Replacement <strong>of</strong> Deuterium Lamp 652<br />
Step 1: Replacement 652<br />
Step 2: 0th Order Calibration 653<br />
Step 3: WL CALIBRATION 654<br />
Flow Cell Maintenance 655<br />
Flow Cell Maintenance Kits 655<br />
Replacing Cell Parts 655<br />
22 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001
Contents<br />
Flushing Procedure 656<br />
Leak Test 657<br />
Using the Cuvette Holder 658<br />
Replacing DCB Board and Firmware 661<br />
DCB Board 661<br />
DCB Firmware 661<br />
Replacing Display Boards 662<br />
Replacing the Leak Interface 663<br />
Leak Sensor Assembly 663<br />
Leak Interface 664<br />
Replacements in the Optical Unit 665<br />
Removing the Optical Unit 666<br />
Replacing the PSC Board 667<br />
Replacing Pre-amplifiers or Photodiodes 667<br />
Replacing Grating Assembly Parts 668<br />
Replacing Filter Assembly Parts 670<br />
Replacing Mirrors, Beamsplitter and Slits 670<br />
Optical Alignment Procedures 671<br />
Procedure 1: Simple Alignment 671<br />
Procedure 2: Sample Beam Alignment 672<br />
Procedure 3: Reference Beam Alignment 674<br />
Cleaning <strong>of</strong> Optical Unit Parts 675<br />
Upgrade to GPIB 676<br />
Performance Verification 677<br />
What you need 677<br />
Preparations 677<br />
Starting a run 678<br />
Scaling Factors 679<br />
30VWD: Parts Information<br />
This chapter provides information on parts <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Vari-<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001 23
Contents<br />
able Wavelength Detectors 681<br />
Overall Diagram 683<br />
Front Panel Parts 686<br />
Leak Interface 686<br />
Font Panel 687<br />
Optical Unit “C” 688<br />
Optical Unit “C” Inner Parts Top 689<br />
Optical Unit “C” Inner Parts Bottom 690<br />
Grating Assembly 691<br />
Filter Assembly 692<br />
Standard Flow Cell “C” (SST/Ti) 693<br />
Semi-Micro Flow Cell (SST) 695<br />
High Pressure Flow Cell (SST) 696<br />
Ultra High Pressure Flow Cell (SST) 697<br />
Preparative Flow Cell (Ti) 698<br />
Cuvette Holder 700<br />
Accessories 701<br />
Screws 702<br />
31VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
This chapter provides information about the enhanced optical<br />
unit “D” 705<br />
Compatibility 706<br />
Support <strong>of</strong> Previous Optical Units 706<br />
Introduction 707<br />
Support Considerations 708<br />
Prefix Change 708<br />
Identification 708<br />
24 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001
Contents<br />
Compatibility Matrix 708<br />
Part Numbers for Enhanced “D” Optical Unit 709<br />
Standard Flow Cell “D” Repair Parts 710<br />
Repair and Mainenance 711<br />
Tools required: 711<br />
Pre-requisites: 711<br />
Additional Information 712<br />
Replacements and Calibrations 712<br />
Installing the Test Slit 713<br />
Replacing Mirror #1 Assembly 715<br />
Replacing Mirror #3 or #4 Assembly 716<br />
Replacing the Grating or Grating Motor 718<br />
Replacing the Beam Splitter 720<br />
Cleaning or Replacing the Lens 721<br />
Unlocking the Reference Aperture 723<br />
Optimizing the Reference Readings 725<br />
Installing the Standard Slit 726<br />
32VWD: Additional Information<br />
This chapter provides additional information about the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Variable Wavelength Detectors 727<br />
Product History 729<br />
Prefix Changes 729<br />
DCB ROM Firmware Revisions 731<br />
GPIB ROM Firmware Revisions 733<br />
Hardware Changes and <strong>Service</strong> Notes 734<br />
Modified Pre-Amplifier Gain 734<br />
Important <strong>Service</strong> Note 734<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001 25
Contents<br />
26 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 09/2001
<strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong><br />
<strong>Modules</strong><br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> -<br />
Common Information
© Copyright Agilent<br />
Technologies 2001<br />
All rights reserved.<br />
Reproduction, adaption,<br />
or translation without<br />
prior written permission<br />
is prohibited, except as<br />
allowed under the<br />
copyright laws.<br />
Part No. NONE<br />
11/2001<br />
Printed in Germany<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
Hewlett-Packard-Strasse 8<br />
76337 Waldbronn<br />
Germany<br />
Warranty<br />
The information<br />
contained in this<br />
document is subject to<br />
change without notice.<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
makes no warranty <strong>of</strong><br />
any kind with regard to<br />
this material,<br />
including, but not<br />
limited to, the implied<br />
warranties or<br />
merchantability and<br />
fitness for a particular<br />
purpose.<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
shall not be liable for<br />
errors contained herein<br />
or for incidental or<br />
consequential damages<br />
in connection with the<br />
furnishing, performance,<br />
or use <strong>of</strong> this material.<br />
IMPORTANT NOTE<br />
This version <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong><br />
service manual includes<br />
all sections from the<br />
0<strong>1050</strong>-90102 edition 4<br />
(1995) and G1306-90102<br />
edition 2 (May 1994). It<br />
merges both sections,<br />
the MWD and the DAD.<br />
The series I opticals<br />
information (79854A<br />
MWD) information has<br />
been removed (product<br />
went out <strong>of</strong> support<br />
during 2000).<br />
Part numbers have been<br />
updated as <strong>of</strong> 11/2001.<br />
Contact your local<br />
Agilent support <strong>of</strong>fice in<br />
case <strong>of</strong> part number<br />
issues or upgrades.<br />
The latest version <strong>of</strong> this<br />
manual is available as<br />
Adobe Acrobat Reader<br />
(PDF) version only and<br />
can be downloaded from<br />
the Agilent Technolgies<br />
web page<br />
www.agilent.com.
1<br />
1 Common: General Information<br />
This chapter provides general information about<br />
the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong>
Common: General Information<br />
Safety Information<br />
Safety Information<br />
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases<br />
<strong>of</strong> operation, service, and repair <strong>of</strong> this instrument. Failure to comply with<br />
these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates<br />
safety standards <strong>of</strong> design, manufacture, and intended use <strong>of</strong> the instrument.<br />
Agilent Technologies assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply<br />
with these requirements.<br />
General<br />
This is a Safety Class I instrument (provided with terminal for protective<br />
earthing) and has been manufactured and tested according to international<br />
safety standards.<br />
Operation<br />
Before applying power, comply with the installation section. Additionally the<br />
following must be observed.<br />
Do not remove instrument covers when operating. Before the instrument is<br />
switched on, all protective earth terminals, extension cords,<br />
auto-transformers, and devices connected to it must be connected to a<br />
protective earth via a ground socket. Any interruption <strong>of</strong> the protective earth<br />
grounding will cause a potential shock hazard that could result in serious<br />
personal injury. Whenever it is likely that the protection has been impaired,<br />
the instrument must be made inoperative and be secured against any<br />
intended operation.<br />
Make sure that only fuses with the required rated current and <strong>of</strong> the specified<br />
type (normal blow, time delay, and so on.) are used for replacement. The use<br />
<strong>of</strong> repaired fuses and the short-circuiting <strong>of</strong> fuseholders must be avoided.<br />
Some adjustments described in the manual, are made with power supplied to<br />
the instrument, and protective covers removed. Energy available at many<br />
points may, if contacted, result in personal injury.<br />
Any adjustment, maintenance, and repair <strong>of</strong> the opened instrument under<br />
voltage should be avoided as much as possible. When inevitable, this should<br />
be carried out by a skilled person who is aware <strong>of</strong> the hazard involved. Do<br />
not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person, capable <strong>of</strong><br />
30 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: General Information<br />
Safety Information<br />
rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present. Do not replace components<br />
with power cable connected.<br />
Do not operate the instrument in the presence <strong>of</strong> flammable gases or fumes.<br />
Operation <strong>of</strong> any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a<br />
definite safety hazard.<br />
Do not install substitute parts or make any unauthorized modification to the<br />
instrument.<br />
Capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged, even though the<br />
instrument has been disconnected from its source <strong>of</strong> supply. Dangerous<br />
voltages, capable <strong>of</strong> causing serious personal injury, are present in this<br />
instrument. Use extreme caution when handling, testing and adjusting.<br />
When working with solvents please observe appropriate safety procedures<br />
(for example, goggles, safety gloves and protective clothing) as described in<br />
the material handling and safety data sheet by the solvent vendor, especially<br />
when toxic or hazardous solvents are used.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 31
Common: General Information<br />
Safety Information<br />
Safety Symbols<br />
Table 1 Safety Symbols<br />
Table 1 shows safety symbols that are used on the instrument and in the<br />
manuals.<br />
Symbol Description<br />
The apparatus is marked with this symbol when the user should refer to the<br />
instruction manual in order to prevent risk <strong>of</strong> harm to the operator and protect<br />
the apparatus against damage.<br />
Indicates dangerous voltages.<br />
Indicates a protected ground terminal.<br />
Eye damage may result from directly viewing the light produced by the<br />
deuterium lamp used in this product. Always turn <strong>of</strong>f the deuterium lamp<br />
before opening the metal lamp door on the side <strong>of</strong> the instrument.<br />
WARNING A warning alerts you to situations that could cause physical injury or<br />
damage to the equipment. Do not proceed beyond a warning until you<br />
have fully understood and met the indicated conditions.<br />
CAUTION A caution alerts you to situations that could cause a possible loss <strong>of</strong> data. Do<br />
not proceed beyond a caution until you have fully understood and met the<br />
indicated conditions.<br />
32 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: General Information<br />
Radio Interference<br />
Radio Interference<br />
Manufacturer’s Declaration<br />
This is to certify that this equipment is in accordance with the Radio<br />
Interference Requirements <strong>of</strong> Directive FTZ 1046/1984. The German<br />
Bundespost was notified that this equipment was put into circulation, the<br />
right to check the series for compliance with the requirements was granted.<br />
Test and Measurement<br />
If test and measurement equipment is operated with equipment unscreened<br />
cables and/or used for measurements on open set-ups, the user has to assure<br />
that under operating conditions the radio interference limits are still met<br />
within the premises.<br />
Sound Emission<br />
Manufacturer’s Declaration<br />
This statement is provided to comply with the requirements <strong>of</strong> the German<br />
Sound Emission Directive <strong>of</strong> 18 January 1991.<br />
This product has a sound pressure emission (at the operator position)<br />
Common: General Information<br />
UV-Radiation<br />
UV-Radiation<br />
Table 2 UV-Radiation Limits<br />
Emissions <strong>of</strong> ultraviolet radiation (200-315 nm) from this product is limited<br />
such that radiant exposure incident upon the unprotected skin or eye <strong>of</strong><br />
operator or service personnel is limited to the following TLVs (Threshold<br />
Limit Values) according to the American Conference <strong>of</strong> Governmental<br />
Industrial Hygienists:<br />
Exposure/day Effective Irradiance<br />
8hours 0.1 µW/cm 2<br />
10 minutes 5.0 µW/cm 2<br />
Typically the radiation values are much smaller than these limits:<br />
Table 3 UV-Radiation Typical Values<br />
Position Effective Irradiance<br />
Lamp installed, 50-cm distance average 0.016 µW/cm 2<br />
Lamp installed, 50-cm distance maximum 0.14 µW/cm 2<br />
34 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: General Information<br />
Solvent Information<br />
Solvent Information<br />
Observe the following recommendations on the use <strong>of</strong> solvents.<br />
Flow Cell<br />
Long term operation at pH > 11 should be avoided. Never leave strongly<br />
alkaline solutions in the flow cell without flow.<br />
Solvents<br />
Always filter solvents through 0.4 µm filters, small particles can permanently<br />
block the capillaries. Avoid the use <strong>of</strong> the following steel-corrosive solvents:<br />
Solutions <strong>of</strong> alkali halides and their respective acids (for example, lithium<br />
iodide, potassium chloride, and so on).<br />
High concentrations <strong>of</strong> inorganic acids like sulfuric acid, especially at<br />
higher temperatures (replace, if your chromatography method allows, by<br />
phosphoric acid or phosphate buffer which are less corrosive against<br />
stainless steel).<br />
Halogenated solvents or mixtures which form radicals and/or acids, for<br />
example:<br />
2CHCl 3 + O 2 → 2COCl 2 + 2HCl<br />
This reaction, in which stainless steel probably acts as a catalyst, occurs<br />
quickly with dried chlor<strong>of</strong>orm if the drying process removes the<br />
stabilizing alcohol.<br />
Chromatographic grade ethers, which can contain peroxides (for example,<br />
THF, dioxane, di-isopropylether) such ethers should be filtered through<br />
dry aluminium oxide which adsorbs the peroxides.<br />
Solutions <strong>of</strong> organic acids (acetic acid, formic acid, and so on) in organic<br />
solvents. For example, a 1-% solution <strong>of</strong> acetic acid in methanol may attack<br />
steel.<br />
Mixtures <strong>of</strong> carbon tetrachloride with 2-propanol or THF dissolve stainless<br />
steel.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 35
Common: General Information<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Introduction<br />
Table 4 <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Modules</strong><br />
<strong>1050</strong> Introduction<br />
The <strong>Modules</strong> Overview<br />
<strong>1050</strong> is a series <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> products based on a modular concept. The<br />
necessary functions are broken down into independent stand-alone modules<br />
with standardized external design hydraulic- and external interfaces.<br />
Following modules will be available at introduction:<br />
Module Product Number<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Isocratic Pump 79851A<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Quaternary Pump 79852A<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Quaternary Pump (bio compatible) 79852B<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Variable Wavelength Detector 79853C<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Multiple Wavelength Detector 79854A<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Diode Array Detector G1306A<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Autosampler 79855A<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Autosampler (bio compatible) 79855B<br />
36 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: General Information<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Introduction<br />
Figure 1 <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Modules</strong><br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 37
Common: General Information<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Introduction<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Identification<br />
Each module is identified by a 5 digit product number and a 10 unit serial<br />
number on a label attached to the wall inside the module. The first four digits<br />
<strong>of</strong> the serial number are the serial prefix. The letter identifies the country <strong>of</strong><br />
origin. The last five digits are an identification number unique to each<br />
module. Any changes to the modules will be covered initially by <strong>Service</strong><br />
Notes. They will be sent out to all <strong>Service</strong> personnel prior to implementation<br />
<strong>of</strong> the change to the instrument. With every reprint these changes will be<br />
incorporated into the documentation.<br />
Repair Policy<br />
Major mechanical and electrical assemblies inside the <strong>1050</strong> modules will be<br />
repaired on an assembly-exchange level. All other items have to be repaired<br />
on board/component level. Repair procedures are given in the respective<br />
sections <strong>of</strong> this manual (refer to Table <strong>of</strong> Contents). Assemblies can be set up<br />
to the Blue Stripe Exchange system or can be removed. If in doubt contact<br />
Waldbronn Product Support (Europe/ICON) or Little Falls Product Support<br />
(USA/Canada).<br />
38 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
2<br />
2 Common: Electronic Information<br />
This chapter provides common electronic<br />
information about the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong><br />
<strong>Modules</strong>
Common: Electronic Information<br />
This chapter gives information about the common electronics used in more<br />
than one <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> modules:<br />
Overview<br />
Common Main Processor (CMP)<br />
Remote Control<br />
Firmware Boards (FIM, SFW)<br />
Fluorescent Indicator Module (FIP)<br />
External Contacts<br />
Poweer Supplies (DPS-B, DPS-A)<br />
Communication Interfaces (CIB, CRB)<br />
40 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Overview<br />
Overview<br />
Some <strong>of</strong> the electronic boards are used in more than one <strong>1050</strong> module.<br />
The following table shows common electronic assemblies:<br />
Table 5 Common Electronic Boards<br />
Description <strong>Modules</strong> Part Number Exchange<br />
Power Supply (DPS-B) pump, sampler 5061-3374 0<strong>1050</strong>-69374<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A) MWD, DAD, VWD 5061-3375 0<strong>1050</strong>-69375<br />
Common Main Processor (CMP) pump, sampler, MWD, DAD 5061-3380 0<strong>1050</strong>-69580<br />
Display Interface Board (FIP) pump, sampler, MWD, DAD 5061-3376 no<br />
Communication Interface (CIB) pump, sampler 5061-3382 no<br />
Communication Interface (CRB) MWD, DAD 5062-2482 no<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 41
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 6 Part Numbers for CMP Board<br />
Item Part Number<br />
CMP Board (Exchange) 0<strong>1050</strong>-69580<br />
CMP Board (NEW) 5061-3380<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Functions<br />
display handling<br />
keyboard polling<br />
remote control input and output<br />
leak sensing<br />
option interfacing<br />
time programming<br />
method storage<br />
module configuration<br />
memory switching<br />
32 kbyte RAM with battery back-up for parameter storage.<br />
42 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
Figure 2 Blockdiagram CMP<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 43
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
According to the above functions the main processor board contains some<br />
basic hardware which is common to all <strong>1050</strong> modules:<br />
68008 main processor running at 8 MHz;<br />
64 kByte RAM (32 kbyte RAM with battery back-up for parameter storage.<br />
The data will be lost when CMP is removed from the slot);<br />
interrupt logic for system communication;<br />
3 channel s<strong>of</strong>tware controlled timer;<br />
interface to keyboard/display module;<br />
remote I/O hardware;<br />
leak sensor electronics;<br />
interface to backplane bus;<br />
watchdog hardware.<br />
Firmware is not part <strong>of</strong> this board, because parts <strong>of</strong> the main processor’s<br />
s<strong>of</strong>tware are module specific. The main processor firmware will be located<br />
on the ’personality module’ (AQB-, RAD, VMD-Board) or on an optional<br />
board.<br />
CMP Details<br />
Interrupt system<br />
There are one non-maskable interrupt six high priority hardware interrupt<br />
lines and seven low priority mail interrupt lines. The non-maskable interrupt<br />
is connected to the powerfail line <strong>of</strong> the power supplies (DPS-A/B).<br />
The high priority interrupt lines are: One from timer 6840 for hardware<br />
synchronization and five from remaining slots (these lines are disabled by<br />
SOK- = HIGH (system not ok).<br />
The low priority interrupt lines are: Five lines from all slots except power<br />
supply used for communication with local processors via dual port RAMs and<br />
two lines for CMP controlled s<strong>of</strong>tware interrupts.<br />
Watchdog timer<br />
(Test for CPU hang-up) This circuitry is s<strong>of</strong>tware retriggerable and is<br />
disabled during CPU initialization. In case <strong>of</strong> CPU hang-up SOK line is set the<br />
CPU is halted and the remote line ’shutdown’ is set.<br />
44 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
LED on board<br />
There is a RED LED on the board which is the output <strong>of</strong> the watchdog circuit.<br />
It is ON during initialization and when the processor has a hang-up (LD 101).<br />
Programmable timer<br />
It includes 3 independent timers:<br />
Timer 1 is connected to the backplane bus it’s free for module special use.<br />
Timer 2 is used as s<strong>of</strong>tware timer for the CMP.<br />
Timer 3 is used to generate the BUS ERROR signal.<br />
Reset system<br />
A harware reset is performed<br />
at power<br />
manually by on-board switch<br />
Hardware reset will reset all devices connected to the bus but main<br />
processor can reset these devices by s<strong>of</strong>tware too.<br />
Reset for display unit<br />
The latch for the status LEDs and the brigthness control will not be reseted<br />
by power on or by s<strong>of</strong>tware reset. The alphanumeric display is reseted at<br />
power on.<br />
I/O<br />
Two remote connectors are at the rear panel. They provide start, stop, not<br />
ready, shutdown, prepare-run and power on signals. The remote lines are<br />
input and output and are decoupled for EMC. The shutdown line is set by<br />
hardware in the case <strong>of</strong> leak or CPU hang-up.<br />
System control<br />
The POK (peripheral OK) is driven from all devices. The SOK- (system OK)<br />
is outputted from main processor to all devices;<br />
is hardware and s<strong>of</strong>tware controlled<br />
disables/enables all devices by main s<strong>of</strong>tware;<br />
disables all devices if main processor watchdog becomes active (main<br />
processor hang-up);<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 45
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
All devices are enabled after initialization. Bus control After bus request the<br />
main processor will pass bus control to the requesting external controller.<br />
The local main processor areas including I/O are accessible too.<br />
This may be a feature for diagnostics or if data rate is increasing to much<br />
with later options. For this second case an external fast transfer hardware<br />
(for example DMA device) could do the transfers after set-up by the main<br />
processor.<br />
Leak sensing<br />
The leak detection circuit is located on the CMP board and checks<br />
continuously for presence and leak conditions. If the sensor is missing<br />
(defect) or in leak condition the PTC is cooled down the error message<br />
appears. When the module is turned on the leak message is disabled for some<br />
time to allow the sensor to reach its working range.<br />
Actions:<br />
❏ Check for leak.<br />
❏ Check connector <strong>of</strong> the sensor.<br />
❏ Check resistance <strong>of</strong> leak sensor.<br />
❏ Change leak sensor.<br />
❏ Change CMP board.<br />
❏ Change FIM board.<br />
Working condition <strong>of</strong> the PTC<br />
Normal: about 75°C 400...500 Ohm<br />
Error: below 55°C about 150 Ohm<br />
46 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
Remote Control<br />
The CMP board provides two remote connectors.<br />
Remote control allows easy connection between single instruments or<br />
systems to ensure coordinated analysis with simple coupling requirements.<br />
When <strong>1050</strong> System is started from the autosampler the following signals can<br />
be measured at the remote lines. The START REQUEST signal is only<br />
available when the autosampler was started from any other module (remote<br />
configuration set to HPSystem).<br />
Figure 3 Remote Control Analysis<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 47
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
For the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> the subminiatur D connector is used.<br />
Each module provides two remote connectors which are both parallel and<br />
inputs/outputs (wired-or technique).<br />
To provide maximum safety within a distributed analysis system one line is<br />
dedicated to SHUT DOWN the system’s critical parts in case any module<br />
detects a serious problem.<br />
To detect whether all participating modules are switched on or properly<br />
powered one line is defined to summarize the POWER ON state <strong>of</strong> all<br />
connected modules.<br />
Control <strong>of</strong> analysis is maintained by signal readiness READY for next<br />
analysis followed by START <strong>of</strong> run and optional STOP <strong>of</strong> run triggered on the<br />
respective lines. In addition PREPARE and START REQUEST may be issued.<br />
Signal description<br />
SHUT DOWN (L) System has serious problem (e.g. leak: stops pump). Receiver is<br />
any module capable to reduce safety risk.<br />
POWER ON (H) All modules connected tosystem are switched on. Receiver is any<br />
module relying on operation <strong>of</strong> others.<br />
READY (H) System is ready for next analysis. Receiver is any sequence<br />
controller.<br />
PREPARE (L) Request to prepare for analysis (e.g. calibration detector lamp on).<br />
Receiver is any module performing preanalysis activities.<br />
START REQUEST (L) Request to start injection cycle (e.g. by start key on any module).<br />
Receiver is the autosampler.<br />
START (L) Request to start run / timetable. Receiver is any module<br />
performing runtime controlled activities.<br />
STOP (L) Request to reach system ready state as soon as possible (e.g.<br />
stop run abort or finish and stop injection). Receiver is any module<br />
performing runtime controlled activities.<br />
The signal level are defined as standard TTL levels (0 V is logic true, + 5 V is<br />
logic false). The remote lines can be input or output (wired or technique).<br />
Fan-out is 10<br />
Input Load 2 kOhm against + 5 V<br />
Outputs are open collector type<br />
48 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
The REMOTE Connector<br />
To help you make the correct connections the signals carried on each pin are<br />
listed in the table below (the colors refer to wires <strong>of</strong> remote cable<br />
01046-60201).<br />
Figure 4 APG Remote Connector<br />
Table 7 Remote Signals<br />
Pin Signal Active Color<br />
1 Digital ground white<br />
2 Prepare run LOW brown<br />
3 Start LOW gray<br />
4 Shut down LOW blue<br />
5 Reserved pink<br />
6 Power ON HIGH yellow<br />
7 Ready HIGH red<br />
8 Stop LOW green<br />
9 Start request LOW black<br />
Remote Configuration<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> provides three remote configurations:<br />
HPsystem Start <strong>of</strong> automatic operation from any modules’ start key.<br />
Start request is outputted.<br />
GLOBAL Synchronized start <strong>of</strong> several modules for a single run.<br />
Start / Stop is outputted.<br />
LOCAL Single modules’ start. No pulses outputted.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 49
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
Figure 5 Table <strong>of</strong> line definition<br />
Notes<br />
Y1 is done by balance key <strong>of</strong> MWD only.<br />
Y2 BALANCE on detectors is performed.<br />
Y3 is not used in the module.<br />
The remote line SHUT DOWN will always be active.<br />
The remote line POWER ON will not be processed.<br />
50 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
Figure 6 Schematic <strong>of</strong> Remote Control<br />
NOTE Above schematic is for Pump, Autosampler, MWD and DAD.<br />
The signal level are defined as standard TTL levels<br />
(0 V is logic true, +5 V is logic false).<br />
The remote lines can be input or output (wired or technique).<br />
Fan-out is 10<br />
Input Load >=2.2 kOhm against + 5 V<br />
Outputs are open collector type<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 51
Figure 7 Board Layout CMP<br />
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
52 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Firmware Board (FIM)<br />
Firmware Board (FIM)<br />
Repair Level: Exchange Board<br />
Table 8 Part Numbers for Firmware Boards<br />
Item Part Number Exchange<br />
for Pumps (79851/2A/B) on RAD Board 01018-66518 no<br />
for Autosamplers (79855A/B) on VMD Board 01078-66504 no<br />
for Multiple Wavelength Detectors (79854A) on AQB<br />
Board<br />
Firmware Description<br />
01048-66504 no<br />
for Diode ArrayDetectors (G1306A) on AQB Board G1306-66524 no<br />
Figure 3-7 shows the firmware structure for the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> modules<br />
(pump, autosampler, multiple wavelength detector and diode array detector).<br />
As many as possible tasks use the same core firmware and only special<br />
routines for each module are developed seperate (control <strong>of</strong> the hardware<br />
sensors motors and so on). This common structure gives maximum flexibility<br />
for later development <strong>of</strong> similar products.<br />
It is obvious that also in the common firmware different commands display<br />
contents method parameters and so on. appear (Dialog, Method Handler,<br />
Parameter Handler). But nevertheless the structure is the same. In each part<br />
<strong>of</strong> the firmware there exist tables which hold the module specific commands<br />
parameters and so on, which are all handled under the same conditions.<br />
The firmware works with a foreground background mode. All time critical<br />
tasks (timetable execution, sensor and motor information) are working in the<br />
foreground mode and have highest priority. All other tasks share the<br />
remaining time in the background. If there are no tasks running the processor<br />
goes into the idle state.<br />
The firmware per module has approxmiately 300 kByte, where 170 kByte is<br />
Common and 130 kByte module specific).<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 53
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Firmware Board (FIM)<br />
Figure 8 Firmware Structure<br />
The firmware is located on the module specific firmware board which is<br />
piggy back on the personality board <strong>of</strong> each module (AQB-, RAD- or<br />
VMD-board) and can be exchanged easily.<br />
54 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Fluorescent Indicator Module (FIP)<br />
Fluorescent Indicator Module (FIP)<br />
Repair Level: Board or Fuse ICP1<br />
Table 9 Part Numbers for FIP Board<br />
Figure 9 Board Layout FIP<br />
Item Part Number used for<br />
FIP Board 5061-3376 pumps, autosampler, MWD amd DAD<br />
Fuse 1 A 2110-0099<br />
The FIP module is located behind the keyboard module <strong>of</strong> pump,<br />
autosampler and multiple wavelength detector.<br />
The function <strong>of</strong> the FIP module is to provide an interface between a host<br />
system and the user. Messages can be displayed with up to 32 characters<br />
(2 lines x 16 characters/line). A matrix keyboard is scanned for numeric or<br />
special function input and status information is displayed through 4 LEDs.<br />
The characters are displayed in a 5 x 7 dot matrix.<br />
In case <strong>of</strong> a dark display, check the on board fuse ICP1 (1 A) which is<br />
soldered in close to the connector P1/P2.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 55
Common: Electronic Information<br />
External Contacts<br />
External Contacts<br />
Figure 10 External Contacts<br />
The personality boards <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> modules (MWD/DAD: AQB, Pumps: RAD<br />
and Autosampler: VMD) have two external conacts at the rear.<br />
1 contact without supply (contact closure) max. 30 V/250 mA<br />
(fused with 250 mA)<br />
1 contact with internal 24 V supply (max. 250 mA output with fuse)<br />
The schematic for all three boards (AQB, NMD and RAD) is in general the<br />
same. Only the values <strong>of</strong> the components vary from board to board due to<br />
internal specifications.<br />
Table 10 Components <strong>of</strong> External Contacts<br />
Components AQB RAD VMD<br />
L1, L2, L3, L4 4.7 µH 10 µH 1 µH<br />
C1, C2, C6, C7 100 nF 1 nF<br />
C3, C4, C8, C9 10 nF 10 nF 10 nF<br />
C5, C10 1 nF<br />
Fuse F250 mA (2110-0004)<br />
56 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Power Supply (DPS-B / DPS-A)<br />
Power Supply (DPS-B / DPS-A)<br />
Repair Level: Fuses and DPS-B / DPS-A<br />
Table 11 Part Numbers for LUC/LPC Board<br />
Item Part Number used for<br />
DPS-B (Exchange) 0<strong>1050</strong>-69374 Pumps and Autosamplers<br />
DPS-B (New) 5061-3374 Pumps and Autosamplers<br />
DPS-A (Exchange) 0<strong>1050</strong>-69375 MWD, DAD, VWD<br />
DPS-A (New) 5061-3375 MWD, DAD, VWD<br />
Fuse for 110 V operation 3 A 2110-0003<br />
Fuse for 220 V operation 2 A 2110-0002<br />
General Description<br />
The power supply is a primary switching regulated type. It consists <strong>of</strong> two<br />
parts. the Base Supply and the Lamp Supply. The Base Supply provides<br />
outputs <strong>of</strong> +5 V, ±19 V, +24 V and +36 V. In addition the Lamp Supply<br />
provides all circuits necessary for the operation <strong>of</strong> a deuterium lamp.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 57
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Power Supply (DPS-B / DPS-A)<br />
Base Supply (DPS-B)<br />
Figure 11 on page 59 shows the base part <strong>of</strong> the DPS-A. The line voltage is<br />
rectified filtered and switched with about 50 kHz by a power MOS-FET. The<br />
complete control <strong>of</strong> frequency and pulsewidth is made by the control<br />
board #1 containing the logic needed and the FET driver.<br />
The isolation between the primary and the secondary part is made by<br />
opto-couplers and the switching transformer. The DC-output voltages are<br />
generated by single-phase rectifiers and LC-filtering with the additional<br />
features: The +36 V output has an separate over-voltage protection to limit<br />
the voltage to +45 V maximum. The +5 V output contains an additional analog<br />
series regulator to provide a stable output for all load conditions under<br />
different applications. The synchronization input is used in the <strong>1050</strong><br />
MWD/DAD only to synchronize the switching frequency to a value <strong>of</strong> three<br />
times (54 kHz) <strong>of</strong> the diode array readout frequency. This output is not used<br />
in the other modules.<br />
The power supply status is monitored by the processor system to detect a<br />
powerfail condition and to save all important data. The Power Supply<br />
STATUS LED (GREEN) at the rear panel shows the OK condition <strong>of</strong> the<br />
power supply.<br />
NOTE OK means that the pulsewidth <strong>of</strong> the switching FET is inside the allowed<br />
limits. OK does not means that all voltages at the output are present (for<br />
example a broken inductor is not detected).<br />
58 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Power Supply (DPS-B / DPS-A)<br />
Figure 11 Block Diagram DPS-B (Base Supply)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 59
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Power Supply (DPS-B / DPS-A)<br />
Lamp Supply (DPS-A)<br />
Figure 12 on page 61 and Figure 13 on page 62 show the additional circuits<br />
necessary for the deuterium lamp:<br />
a DC output <strong>of</strong> 5.5 V for the regulated heater output (located on the<br />
primary board);<br />
a regulated constant current source with selectable current <strong>of</strong> 320 mA,<br />
360 mA or 400 mA;<br />
a 600 V lamp ignition circuit;<br />
a 12 V regulated output for future use.<br />
WARNING Hazardous voltage present at the output connector with instrument<br />
power cord connected to AC line.<br />
The main feature <strong>of</strong> this power supply is a low noise current source for the<br />
deuterium lamp. For realization a pulse-width modulated DC-DC converter<br />
(36 V input, 170 V no load output) is built-up with a switching FET and high<br />
voltage transformer. The pulse-width is regulated so that the DC-output is<br />
about 12V above the actual anode voltage <strong>of</strong> the deuterium lamp.<br />
This design allows minimum power loss if the anode voltage varies from<br />
lamp to lamp and by aging between 65 V and 100 V. The final regulation to the<br />
selected current is made by an analog power regulator. Again the switching<br />
frequency is synchronized to 54 kHz in the <strong>1050</strong> MWD/DAD.<br />
60 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Power Supply (DPS-B / DPS-A)<br />
Figure 12 Block Diagram DPS-A (Lamp Supply I)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 61
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Power Supply (DPS-B / DPS-A)<br />
Figure 13 Block Diagram DPS-A (Lamp Supply II)<br />
62 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Power Supply (DPS-B / DPS-A)<br />
Lamp Ignition<br />
To ignite the deuterium lamp a 0.5 µF capacitor loaded with 600 V is<br />
discharged via a 10 kOhm resistor to the anode. These 600 V are generated by<br />
a separate winding.<br />
The lamp status output signal shows "OK" if the lamp current has the selected<br />
value. Otherwise an error message is generated.<br />
The heater output made by a series regulator is in the pre-heating status 2.5 V<br />
always. After ignition a different output voltage is selected depending on the<br />
lamp type used:<br />
In the 79853C VWD, 79854A MWD and the G1306A DAD, the heater is<br />
switched <strong>of</strong>f after ignition.<br />
The 12 V low noise output is made by a series regulator connected to the<br />
+19 V output.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 63
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Communication Interface (CIB / CRB)<br />
Communication Interface (CIB / CRB)<br />
Repair Level: Exchange Board<br />
Table 12 Part Numbers for CRB Board<br />
Item Part Number used for<br />
CIB Board (NEW) 5061-3382 Pumps and Autosampler<br />
CRB Board (NEW) 5062-2482 79854A MWD / G1306A DAD<br />
NOTE This section describes the communication interface for the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps<br />
(79851/2A/B), Autosamplers (79855A/B), Multiple Wavelength Detectors<br />
(79854A) and Diode Array Detector (G1306A) only.<br />
The communication interface for the <strong>1050</strong> Variable Wavelength Detector<br />
(79853C) is described in the chapter <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> VW Detector.<br />
The communication interface board is necessary for the control by a<br />
Personal Computer and to connect printer or plotter devices. The<br />
communication interface board provides one GPIB and one RS-232 interface.<br />
The CRB for the <strong>1050</strong> MWD/DAD has a 96 kbyte runbuffer for the<br />
data/spectrum operation with the Multiple Wavelength Detector. The<br />
interface is located in Slot #2 <strong>of</strong> the module.<br />
64 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Communication Interface (CIB / CRB)<br />
Compatibilities<br />
Table 13 CIB/CRB Compatibility<br />
Instrument CIB CRB Firmware<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Pump R P REV 3.1<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Sampler R P REV 3.1<br />
<strong>1050</strong> MWD C R REV 3.1<br />
<strong>1050</strong> DAD C R REV 1.0<br />
R recommended configuration<br />
P possible but not neccessary<br />
C only for instrument control<br />
Firmware<br />
To use the communication interface board it is mendatory to have the <strong>1050</strong><br />
<strong>Modules</strong> equipped with the latest firmware revisions (see Table 13).<br />
Baud rate<br />
The board contains a baudrate generator. The baudrate is setable up to<br />
19200 baud from the keyboard. The transmitter and receiver baudrate are<br />
independent adjustable.<br />
RS-232 Interface<br />
The implemented serial interface is a subset <strong>of</strong> the RS-232 standard only. It<br />
contains at<br />
PIN 2 RxD receive data (data input)<br />
PIN 3 TxD transmit data (data output)<br />
PIN 4 GND (Ground)<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> modules are designed as DCE (data communication equipment)<br />
without hardware handshake.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 65
Common: Electronic Information<br />
Communication Interface (CIB / CRB)<br />
66 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
3<br />
3 Common: Cable Information<br />
This chapter provides information on cables for<br />
the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Modules</strong>
Common: Cable Information<br />
Overview<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> provide<br />
Analog Signal Output (Pumps, Detectors)<br />
Remote Control Connector (all)<br />
BCD Connector (Autosampler)<br />
WARNING Never use cables other than the ones supplied by Agilent Technologies<br />
to ensure proper functionality and compliance with safety or EMC<br />
regulations.<br />
68 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Cable Information<br />
Overview<br />
Table 14 Cables Overview<br />
Type Description Part Number<br />
Analog<br />
cables<br />
Remote<br />
cables<br />
BCD<br />
cables<br />
GP-IB<br />
cable<br />
3390/2/3 integrators 01040-60101<br />
3394/6 integrators, 35900A A/D converter 35900-60750<br />
General purpose (spade lugs) 01046-60105<br />
3390 integrator 01046-60203<br />
3392/3 integrators 01046-60206<br />
3394 integrator 01046-60210<br />
3396A (<strong>Series</strong> I) integrator 03394-60600<br />
3396 <strong>Series</strong> II / 3395A integrator, see page 74<br />
3396 <strong>Series</strong> III / 3395B/96C/97A integrator 03396-61010<br />
1100 / <strong>1050</strong> modules / 1046A FLD / 35900A A/D<br />
converter<br />
5061-3378<br />
1040 DAD / 1090 liquid chromatographs / SDM 01046-60202<br />
3392/3 integrators obsolete<br />
3396 integrator 03396-60560<br />
General purpose (spade lugs) 18594-60520<br />
1100 module to ChemStation, 1 m 10833A<br />
1100 module to ChemStation, 2 m 10833B<br />
1100 module to ChemStation, 5 m 10833D<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 69
Common: Cable Information<br />
Analog Cables<br />
Analog Cables<br />
One end <strong>of</strong> these cables provides a BNC connector to be connected to <strong>1050</strong><br />
<strong>Series</strong> modules. The other end depends on the instrument to which<br />
connection is being made.<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to 3390/2/3 Integrators<br />
Connector<br />
01040-60101<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to 3394/6 Integrators<br />
Connector<br />
35900-60750<br />
Pin<br />
3390/2/3<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name<br />
1 Shield Ground<br />
2 Not connected<br />
3 Center Signal +<br />
4 Connected to pin 6<br />
5 Shield Analog -<br />
6 Connected to pin 4<br />
7 Key<br />
8 Not connected<br />
Pin<br />
3394/6<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name<br />
1 Not connected<br />
2 Shield Analog -<br />
3 Center Analog +<br />
70 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Cable Information<br />
Analog Cables<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to BNC Connector<br />
Connector<br />
8120-1840<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to General Purpose<br />
Connector<br />
01046-60105<br />
Pin<br />
BNC<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name<br />
Shield Shield Analog -<br />
Center Center Analog +<br />
Pin<br />
3394/6<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name<br />
1 Not connected<br />
2 Black Analog -<br />
3 Red Analog +<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 71
Common: Cable Information<br />
Remote Cables<br />
Remote Cables<br />
One end <strong>of</strong> these cables provides a Agilent Technologies APG (Analytical<br />
Products Group) remote connector to be connected to <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> modules.<br />
The other end depends on the instrument to be connected to.<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to 3390 Integrators<br />
Connector<br />
01046-60203<br />
Pin<br />
3390<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name<br />
2 1 - White Digital ground<br />
Active<br />
(TTL)<br />
NC 2 - Brown Prepare run Low<br />
7 3 - Gray Start Low<br />
NC 4 - Blue Shut down Low<br />
NC 5 - Pink Not connected<br />
NC 6 - Yellow Power on High<br />
NC 7 - Red Ready High<br />
NC 8 - Green Stop Low<br />
NC 9 - Black Start request Low<br />
72 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Cable Information<br />
Remote Cables<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to 3392/3 Integrators<br />
Connector<br />
01046-60206<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to 3394 Integrators<br />
Connector<br />
01046-60210<br />
4 - Key<br />
Pin<br />
3392/3<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name<br />
3 1 - White Digital ground<br />
Active<br />
(TTL)<br />
NC 2 - Brown Prepare run Low<br />
11 3 - Gray Start Low<br />
NC 4 - Blue Shut down Low<br />
NC 5 - Pink Not connected<br />
NC 6 - Yellow Power on High<br />
9 7 - Red Ready High<br />
1 8 - Green Stop Low<br />
NC 9 - Black Start request Low<br />
Pin<br />
3394<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name<br />
9 1 - White Digital ground<br />
Active<br />
(TTL)<br />
NC 2 - Brown Prepare run Low<br />
3 3 - Gray Start Low<br />
NC 4 - Blue Shut down Low<br />
NC 5 - Pink Not connected<br />
NC 6 - Yellow Power on High<br />
5,14 7 - Red Ready High<br />
6 8 - Green Stop Low<br />
1 9 - Black Start request Low<br />
13, 15 Not connected<br />
NOTE START and STOP are connected via diodes to pin 3 <strong>of</strong> the the 3394 connector.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 73
Common: Cable Information<br />
Remote Cables<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to 3396A Integrators<br />
Connector<br />
03394-60600<br />
Pin<br />
3394<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name<br />
9 1 - White Digital ground<br />
Active<br />
(TTL)<br />
NC 2 - Brown Prepare run Low<br />
3 3 - Gray Start Low<br />
NC 4 - Blue Shut down Low<br />
NC 5 - Pink Not connected<br />
NC 6 - Yellow Power on High<br />
5,14 7 - Red Ready High<br />
1 8 - Green Stop Low<br />
NC 9 - Black Start request Low<br />
13, 15 Not connected<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to 3396 <strong>Series</strong> II / 3395A Integrators<br />
Use the cable 03394-60600 and cut pin #5 on the integrator side. Otherwise<br />
the integrator prints START; not ready.<br />
74 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Cable Information<br />
Remote Cables<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to 3396 <strong>Series</strong> III / 3395B Integrators<br />
Connector<br />
03396-61010<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to <strong>1050</strong>, 1046A or 35900 A/D Converters<br />
Connector<br />
5061-3378<br />
Pin<br />
33XX<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name<br />
9 1 - White Digital ground<br />
Active<br />
(TTL)<br />
NC 2 - Brown Prepare run Low<br />
3 3 - Gray Start Low<br />
NC 4 - Blue Shut down Low<br />
NC 5 - Pink Not connected<br />
NC 6 - Yellow Power on High<br />
14 7 - Red Ready High<br />
4 8 - Green Stop Low<br />
NC 9 - Black Start request Low<br />
13, 15 Not connected<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> / …<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name<br />
1 - White 1 - White Digital ground<br />
Active<br />
(TTL)<br />
2 - Brown 2 - Brown Prepare run Low<br />
3 - Gray 3 - Gray Start Low<br />
4 - Blue 4 - Blue Shut down Low<br />
5 - Pink 5 - Pink Not connected<br />
6 - Yellow 6 - Yellow Power on High<br />
7 - Red 7 - Red Ready High<br />
8 - Green 8 - Green Stop Low<br />
9 - Black 9 - Black Start request Low<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 75
Common: Cable Information<br />
Remote Cables<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to 1090 LC, 1040 DAD or Signal Distribution Module<br />
Connector<br />
01046-60202<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to General Purpose<br />
Connector<br />
01046-60201<br />
5 - Key<br />
Pin<br />
1090<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name<br />
1 1 - White Digital ground<br />
Active<br />
(TTL)<br />
NC 2 - Brown Prepare run Low<br />
4 3 - Gray Start Low<br />
7 4 - Blue Shut down Low<br />
8 5 - Pink Not connected<br />
NC 6 - Yellow Power on High<br />
3 7 - Red Ready High<br />
6 8 - Green Stop Low<br />
NC 9 - Black Start request Low<br />
Pin<br />
Universal<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name<br />
1 - White Digital ground<br />
Active<br />
(TTL)<br />
2 - Brown Prepare run Low<br />
3 - Gray Start Low<br />
4 - Blue Shut down Low<br />
5 - Pink Not connected<br />
6 - Yellow Power on High<br />
7 - Red Ready High<br />
8 - Green Stop Low<br />
9 - Black Start request Low<br />
76 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Common: Cable Information<br />
BCD Cables<br />
BCD Cables<br />
One end <strong>of</strong> these cables provides a 15-pin BCD connector to be connected to<br />
the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> modules. The other end depends on the instrument to be<br />
connected to.<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to 3392/3 Integrators (Obsolete)<br />
Connector<br />
18584-60510<br />
6 - Key<br />
Pin<br />
3392/3<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name BCD Digit<br />
10 1 BCD 5 20<br />
11 2 BCD 7 80<br />
3 3 BCD 6 40<br />
9 4 BCD 4 10<br />
7 5 BCD 0 1<br />
5 6 BCD 3 8<br />
12 7 BCD 2 4<br />
4 8 BCD 1 2<br />
1 9 Digital ground<br />
2 15 +5V Low<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 77
Common: Cable Information<br />
BCD Cables<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to 3396 Integrators<br />
Connector<br />
03396-60560<br />
<strong>1050</strong> to General Purpose<br />
Pin<br />
3392/3<br />
Connector<br />
18594-60520 Wire Color<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name BCD Digit<br />
1 1 BCD 5 20<br />
2 2 BCD 7 80<br />
3 3 BCD 6 40<br />
4 4 BCD 4 10<br />
5 5 BCD 0 1<br />
6 6 BCD 3 8<br />
7 7 BCD 2 4<br />
8 8 BCD 1 2<br />
9 9 Digital ground<br />
NC 15 +5V Low<br />
Pin<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Signal Name BCD Digit<br />
Green 1 BCD 5 20<br />
Violet 2 BCD 7 80<br />
Blue 3 BCD 6 40<br />
Yellow 4 BCD 4 10<br />
Black 5 BCD 0 1<br />
Orange 6 BCD 3 8<br />
Red 7 BCD 2 4<br />
Brown 8 BCD 1 2<br />
Gray 9 Digital ground<br />
White 15 +5 Vt Low<br />
78 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
In This Book<br />
This manual contains technical<br />
information about the Agilent <strong>1050</strong><br />
liquid chromatographs.<br />
This manual is available as electronic<br />
version (Adobe Acrobat Reader file)<br />
only.
<strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong><br />
<strong>Modules</strong><br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> -<br />
Pumps (79851A/79852A/B)
© Copyright Agilent<br />
Technologies 2001<br />
All rights reserved.<br />
Reproduction, adaption,<br />
or translation without<br />
prior written permission<br />
is prohibited, except as<br />
allowed under the<br />
copyright laws.<br />
Part No. NONE<br />
11/2001<br />
Printed in Germany<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
Hewlett-Packard-Strasse 8<br />
76337 Waldbronn<br />
Germany<br />
Warranty<br />
The information<br />
contained in this<br />
document is subject to<br />
change without notice.<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
makes no warranty <strong>of</strong><br />
any kind with regard to<br />
this material,<br />
including, but not<br />
limited to, the implied<br />
warranties or<br />
merchantability and<br />
fitness for a particular<br />
purpose.<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
shall not be liable for<br />
errors contained herein<br />
or for incidental or<br />
consequential damages<br />
in connection with the<br />
furnishing, performance,<br />
or use <strong>of</strong> this material.<br />
IMPORTANT NOTE<br />
This version <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong><br />
service manual includes<br />
all sections from the<br />
0<strong>1050</strong>-90102 edition 4<br />
(1995) and G1306-90102<br />
edition 2 (May 1994). It<br />
merges both sections,<br />
the MWD and the DAD.<br />
The series I opticals<br />
information (79854A<br />
MWD) information has<br />
been removed (product<br />
went out <strong>of</strong> support<br />
during 2000).<br />
Part numbers have been<br />
updated as <strong>of</strong> 11/2001.<br />
Contact your local<br />
Agilent support <strong>of</strong>fice in<br />
case <strong>of</strong> part number<br />
issues or upgrades.<br />
The latest version <strong>of</strong> this<br />
manual is available as<br />
Adobe Acrobat Reader<br />
(PDF) version only and<br />
can be downloaded from<br />
the Agilent Technolgies<br />
web page<br />
www.agilent.com.
4<br />
4 Pumps: General Information<br />
This chapter provides general information about<br />
the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps
Pumps: General Information<br />
Introduction<br />
This chapter gives general information on<br />
about this pump<br />
repair policy<br />
product structure<br />
capillaries<br />
specifications<br />
About this Manual<br />
This manual provides service information about the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps (isocratic<br />
and quaternary). The following sections give the detailed descriptions <strong>of</strong> all<br />
electronic and mechanical assemblies. You will find illustrated<br />
part-breakdowns interconnection tables connector configurations as well as<br />
all necessary replacement procedures in this manual. Detailed diagnostic<br />
procedures using firmware resident test methods and error messages are<br />
also given in this manual.<br />
84 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: General Information<br />
About the Pumps<br />
About the Pumps<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> Pump modules houses the mechanical devices and the electronic<br />
circuitry for either the isocratic or quaternary module which control the<br />
various functions <strong>of</strong> the flow system. The module is controlled via the user<br />
interface through which the operator defines his requirements<br />
(flow-composition and so on) and which provides the required analytical<br />
information.<br />
Repair Policy<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> Pumps are designed that all components are easy accessible<br />
Customers are able to repair certain parts <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps see Operator’s<br />
<strong>Handbook</strong>.<br />
For details on repair policy refer to “Repair Policy” on page 38.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 85
Pumps: General Information<br />
Product Structure<br />
Product Structure<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> modules are available in two versions. In the<br />
standard version most <strong>of</strong> the parts used are stainless steel.<br />
In the <strong>1050</strong> Ti <strong>Series</strong> the flow path <strong>of</strong> the quaternary pump consists solely <strong>of</strong><br />
corrosion resistant materials such as titanium, tantalum, quartz, sapphire,<br />
ruby, ceramic and fluorocarbon polymers. It is recommended for use with<br />
mobile phases containing high salt concentrations, extreme pH solutions and<br />
other aggressive mobile phases.<br />
Isocratic Pump 79851A<br />
Quaternary Pump 79852A<br />
Ti - Quaternary Pump 79852B<br />
NOTE The isocratic pump was also introduced as Ti - version (79851B) but due to the<br />
insufficient orders it became obsolete end <strong>of</strong> FY 91.<br />
86 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: General Information<br />
Capillaries<br />
Capillaries<br />
Table 15 Capillary Color Code<br />
In the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps the capillary shipped with the module will have a plastic<br />
color coating for identification in terms <strong>of</strong> material and internal diameter.<br />
All capillaries before the injector have a internal diameter <strong>of</strong> 0.25 mm. From<br />
the injector the internal diameter is reduced to 0.17 mm.<br />
color Internal Diameter Material<br />
blue 0.25 mm<br />
green 0.17 mm<br />
red 0.12 mm<br />
white tantalum<br />
NOTE For the Ti pumps the fittings are always titanium with a titanium nitrite<br />
coating and the front and back ferrules are gold plated.<br />
The Ti capillaries have two color coatings. One for identifying the material<br />
covering the main part <strong>of</strong> the capillary and a small one for the internal<br />
diameter.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 87
Pumps: General Information<br />
Specifications<br />
Specifications<br />
Table 16 Specifications <strong>of</strong> <strong>1050</strong> Pumps<br />
Hydraulic System Dual-pistons in-series with proprietary servo-controlled<br />
variable stroke drive floating pistons and active inlet<br />
valve.<br />
Flow Range Setpoint from 0.001 to 9.999 ml/min in 0.001 ml/min<br />
increments.<br />
Piston Displacement 20 to 100 µl, automatic matched to flow rate or<br />
user-selectable.<br />
Flow Precision
Pumps: General Information<br />
Specifications<br />
Table 16 Specifications <strong>of</strong> <strong>1050</strong> Pumps<br />
Oven Temperature Range Ambient +5°C to ambient +60°C in 0.1°C<br />
increments.Display in °C, °F or K.<br />
Oven Temperature Stability ±0.15°C<br />
Oven Capacity Two 25-cm or three 20-cm columns.<br />
Control Integrated keyboard with function keys; parameter editing<br />
during run possible; keyboard lock; optional control by PC.<br />
Parameters Flow rate, compressibility, stroke volume, upper and<br />
lower pressure limits, 2 external contacts; %B, %C, %D<br />
(for quaternary pump). Time-programmable Parameters:<br />
Flow rate, upper pressure limit, external contacts; %B,<br />
%C, %D.<br />
Methods Battery-backed storage <strong>of</strong> up to 10 methods. Automatic<br />
start up and shut down methods. Editing <strong>of</strong> stored<br />
methods possible in run.<br />
Analog Output For pressure monitoring, 2 mV/bar.<br />
Communications Outputs: ready signal and two external outputs (one 24 V<br />
relay and one 30V (AC/DC) contact closure, both with 0.25<br />
A. In-and outputs: start, stop and shut down signals.<br />
Optional interface for GPIB and RS-232C.<br />
Safety Aids Extensive diagnostics, error detection and display via<br />
front-panel LED's and status logbook. User-definable<br />
shutdown method activated in case <strong>of</strong> error. Leak<br />
detection and safe leak handling. Low voltages in major<br />
maintenance areas. Column pressure protection with<br />
maximum rate <strong>of</strong> pressure change <strong>of</strong>
Pumps: General Information<br />
Specifications<br />
Table 16 Specifications <strong>of</strong> <strong>1050</strong> Pumps<br />
Dimensions Height: 208 mm (8.2 in)<br />
Width: 325 mm (12.8 in)<br />
Depth: 560 mm (22.0 in)<br />
For complete description <strong>of</strong> test conditions used to obtain specifications, see<br />
Owner’s Manual.<br />
90 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
5<br />
5 Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
This chapter provides hardware information<br />
about the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
This chapter gives general and technical information about the hardware<br />
components <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps.<br />
Solvent Cabinet<br />
Pump Hardware<br />
❏ Multi Channel Gradient Valve (MCGV)<br />
❏ Metering Drive Assembly<br />
❏ Pump Head Assembly<br />
❏ Continuous Seal Wash<br />
❏ Active Inlet Valve<br />
❏ Outlet Ball Valve<br />
❏ Frit Adapter Assembly<br />
❏ Purge Valve<br />
❏ High Pressure Damper<br />
Column Holder<br />
92 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Overview<br />
Overview<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> Pump is based on a dual piston series design which comprises all<br />
essential functions a solvent delivery system has to fulfill. Metering <strong>of</strong> solvent<br />
and delivery to the high pressure side are performed by one metering<br />
assembly which can generate pressure up to 400 bar.<br />
The basic system (isocratic) comprises the metering assembly including an<br />
active inlet valve, an outlet valve, a frit adapter assembly and a damping unit.<br />
The gradient operation system includes a highs peed proportioning valve<br />
allowing quaternary operation and a solvent cabinet with separate Helium<br />
degassing for each solvent channel.<br />
Since the introduction <strong>of</strong> the G1303A Online Degasser (December 1,1991) the<br />
Helium degassing might be replaced by the degasser module.<br />
A purge valve is installed on the pump head for convenient priming <strong>of</strong> the<br />
pump.<br />
An continuous seal wash is available when the pump is used with buffer<br />
solutions. It is mandatory in the Ti - pump and can be ordered as an option<br />
for the standard version.<br />
The solvent cabinet for the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps can be equipped with a manual<br />
injection valve and a column heater.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 93
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Overview<br />
Figure 14 Overview Pump System<br />
94 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
How does the Pump Work?<br />
How does the Pump Work?<br />
The metering assembly comprises two substantially identical piston pump<br />
units. Both pump units comprise a ball screw drive and a pump head with a<br />
sapphire piston for reciprocating movement in it. The servo controlled<br />
variable reluctance motor drives the two ball drive screws in opposite<br />
direction. The gears for the ball screw drives have different circumferences<br />
(ratio 2:1) allowing the first piston to move double the stroke length <strong>of</strong> the<br />
second piston. The solvent enters the pump heads close to the bottom limit<br />
and leaves it at its top. The outer diameter <strong>of</strong> the piston is smaller than the<br />
inner diameter <strong>of</strong> the pump head chamber allowing the solvent to fill the gap<br />
in between. The first piston has a stroke volume in the range <strong>of</strong> 20 µl to 100 µl<br />
depending on the flow rate. The microprocessor controls all flow rates in a<br />
range <strong>of</strong> 1 µl to 10 ml.<br />
The inlet <strong>of</strong> the first pumping unit is connected to the active inlet valve which<br />
is processor controlled opened or closed allowing solvent to be sucked into<br />
the first pump unit. The outlet <strong>of</strong> the first pump unit is connected via the<br />
outlet ball valve and the damping unit to the inlet <strong>of</strong> the second pump unit.<br />
The outlet <strong>of</strong> the metering assembly is than connected to the following<br />
chromatographic system.<br />
Isocratic Operation<br />
When turned on the pump runs through a initialization procedure to<br />
determine the upper dead center <strong>of</strong> the first piston. The first piston moves<br />
slowly upwards into the mechanical stop <strong>of</strong> the pump head and from there it<br />
moves back a predetermined path length. The controller stores this piston<br />
position in memory. After this initialization the pump starts operation with<br />
the set parameters. The active inlet valve is opened and the down moving<br />
piston draws solvent into the first pump head. At the same time the second<br />
piston is moving upwards delivering into the system. After a controller<br />
defined stroke length (depending on the flow rate) the drive motor is stopped<br />
and the active inlet valve is closed. The motor direction is reversed and<br />
moves the first piston up until it reaches the stored upper limit and at the<br />
same time moving the second piston downwards. Then the sequence starts<br />
again moving the pistons up and down between the two limits.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 95
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Overview <strong>of</strong> the Electronics<br />
During the up movement <strong>of</strong> the first piston the solvent in the pump head is<br />
pressed through the outlet ball valve and the damping unit into the second<br />
pumping unit. The second piston draws in half <strong>of</strong> the volume displaced by the<br />
first piston and the remaining half volume is directly delivered into the<br />
system.<br />
During the drawing stroke <strong>of</strong> the first piston the second piston delivers the<br />
drawn volume into the system.<br />
Gradient Operation<br />
For gradient operation the multi channel gradient valve (MCGV) connected<br />
to solvent containers A, B, C and D is required. The controller makes sure<br />
that each intake stroke <strong>of</strong> the first piston contains the required solvent<br />
composition. The controller divides the length <strong>of</strong> the intake stroke in certain<br />
fractions in which the MCGV connects the specified solvent channel to the<br />
pump input.<br />
Overview <strong>of</strong> the Electronics<br />
The figure 2-2 shows the block diagram <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps including all<br />
currently available options.<br />
The common main processor (CMP) controls all functions <strong>of</strong> the modules.<br />
The controller firmware is attached to the relative A/D converter board<br />
(RAD).<br />
The column heater can be installed into the solvent cabinet. The electronic<br />
control is done via the pump module. Two different boards will be available<br />
for supporting the column heater in either the isocratic pump (79851A) or the<br />
quaternary pump (79852A/B).<br />
For the quaternary pump (79852A/B) the heater quaternary board (HRQ)<br />
controls the column heater and drives the multi channel gradient valve<br />
(MCGV).<br />
For the isocratic pump (79851A) the heater isocratic board (HRI) controls<br />
only the column heater. The HRI board is a subtract <strong>of</strong> the HRQ Board; the<br />
blank board is identical but the components for the gradient operation are<br />
not mounted.<br />
96 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Overview <strong>of</strong> the Electronics<br />
The communication interface board (CIB) provides an GPIB and RS232C<br />
interface. With the CIB installed the pump can be controlled via the<br />
ChemStation or via the 3396B integrator.<br />
Figure 15 Block Diagram <strong>1050</strong> Pumps<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 97
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Overview <strong>of</strong> the Flow Path<br />
Figure 16 Hydraulic Path<br />
Overview <strong>of</strong> the Flow Path<br />
From the bottle head assembly (tube #1) the solvent moves via the gradient<br />
valve (MCGV), the connection tube #2 and the active inlet valve into the<br />
pump. From the outlet ball valve the capillary #3 is connected to the damper<br />
and from there the solvent streams back to the second piston chamber<br />
(capillary #4). The standard interface capillary #5 (70 cm long 0.25 mm ID)<br />
connects the pump to the next module (for example the autosampler).<br />
In the isocratic pump the solvent sucking tube #2 is directly connected to the<br />
solvent bottle and the interface capillary (#5) is connected to the frit adapter.<br />
In the quaternary pump the interface capillary (#5) is connected to a purge<br />
valve.<br />
The purge valve allows convenient priming <strong>of</strong> the system. When opened the<br />
flow is directed via tubing (#7) in to the waste.<br />
The typical delay volume for the pump is in the range 900 to 1100 µl<br />
(depending on system back pressure).<br />
If the seal wash accessory is installed the wash bottle on top <strong>of</strong> the<br />
instrument (tube #6) is connected to the two support rings for back flushing<br />
<strong>of</strong> the piston seals. From the second support ring the wash solvent flows into<br />
the collecting vessel.<br />
98 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Solvent Cabinet<br />
Solvent Cabinet<br />
Repair Level: Component<br />
Table 17 Product Numbers for Solvent Cabinet<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Solvent Cabinet 79856A<br />
Ti - Solvent Cabinet 79856B<br />
The solvent cabinet allows storage <strong>of</strong> 4 four 1 liter solvent bottles. It is<br />
designed to hold the following options:<br />
Helium degassing; later it was replaced by <strong>1050</strong> online degassing<br />
Manual injection valve<br />
Column Heater<br />
Manual injection valve and column heater<br />
Helium Degassing<br />
NOTE For low pressure mixing degassing is a must. Therefore the Helium degassing<br />
or the Online Degasser G1303A is mandatory for the quaternary pump.<br />
If the Helium degassing is selected a internal tubing guides the Helium from<br />
the back <strong>of</strong> the solvent cabinet to an on/<strong>of</strong>f valve and from there to four<br />
regulators. Each <strong>of</strong> the regulator supplies helium to one bottle head assembly<br />
for separate sparging <strong>of</strong> each bottle. The bottle head assembly consists <strong>of</strong> a<br />
sintered glass sparger, stainless steel or titanium filter and a cap with vent<br />
position. It is designed for the provided standard bottle, but allows also<br />
operation with supply bottles from certain vendors. The bottle head assembly<br />
has also a connection for a fume hood tubing (see also “Helium Degassing<br />
Principle” on page 269).<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 99
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Solvent Cabinet<br />
NOTE The connected helium pressure has to be in the range 2 to 4 bar (30 to 60 psi).<br />
With pressures below 2 bar the helium degassing system may not work<br />
correctly. Pressure above 4 bar might damage the helium regulators.<br />
Manual Injection Valve<br />
If ordered with manual injection valve a Rheodyne 7125 valve with 20 µl loop<br />
will be installed in the solvent cabinet. If ordered as a Ti version a Rheodyne<br />
7125 titanium valve with Tefzel rotor seal will be present in the cabinet. A<br />
remote-start output is available at the back <strong>of</strong> the cabinet.<br />
Column Heater<br />
The column heater fits into the recess <strong>of</strong> the cabinet. Electronic control is<br />
done via the pump module. The column heater can hold up to 25 cm long<br />
columns. The flow path <strong>of</strong> the column heater is stainless steel even in the Ti -<br />
version.<br />
The heater uses a heating foil which is attached to a aluminum heating block<br />
where the solvent capillaries are leading through (heat exchanger). The<br />
column rests in the U-shaped heat exchanger. When turned on, the heat<br />
exchanger will heat up the solvent, the column and the surrounding air in the<br />
compartment.<br />
Temperature is monitored on the heating block via a Pt. 100. A multi (3) color<br />
LED shows the actual status <strong>of</strong> the column heater. The power consumption<br />
<strong>of</strong> the heater is reduced by heat recycling. Incoming and outgoing capillaries<br />
<strong>of</strong> the heat exchanger are in close thermal contact allowing radial heat<br />
exchange while the solvent is streaming through.<br />
100 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Solvent Cabinet<br />
Figure 17 Solvent Cabinet including all options<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 101
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Multi Channel Gradient Valve (MCGV)<br />
Multi Channel Gradient Valve (MCGV)<br />
Repair Level: Exchange Assembly<br />
Table 18 Part Numbers MCGV<br />
Figure 18 MCGV<br />
Item Part Number Exchange<br />
MCGV 79835-67701 79835-69701<br />
Ti - MCGV 01019-67701<br />
The multi channel gradient valve (MCGV) works like a multi position switch.<br />
Depending on the timing <strong>of</strong> the control electronic the Heater Quaternary<br />
Board (HRQ) activates one <strong>of</strong> the four solenoids connecting the selected<br />
channel to the output <strong>of</strong> the valve.<br />
In the Ti-version <strong>of</strong> the gradient valve only the materials have been changed.<br />
Table 19 Technical Data <strong>of</strong> MCGV<br />
Switching Time: approximately 2 ms<br />
Solenoid Voltage: +12 V (+36 V Chopper Drive)<br />
Ti <strong>Series</strong><br />
Materials in contact with solvent: PFA, PTFE, sapphire, ruby, ceramic, Titanium<br />
102 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Metering Drive Assembly<br />
Metering Drive Assembly<br />
Repair Level: Exchange Assembly<br />
Table 20 Part Numbers Metering Drive Assembly<br />
Item Part Number Exchange<br />
Metering Drive Assembly 01018-60001 01018-69100<br />
The metering drive assembly is identical for the stainless steel and the Ti<br />
version. The metering pump system is driven by a variable reluctance motor<br />
(servo) and electrically controlled by the Pump Drive Control Board (PDC).<br />
Feedback about actual movement is sensed by a shaft encoder mounted on<br />
top <strong>of</strong> the motor. In order to achieve required flow resolution a gear is used<br />
to transmit motor movement to the two pistons. The gears for the ball screw<br />
drives have different circumferences (ratio 2:1) allowing the first piston a<br />
twice as large stroke volume as the second piston. The second piston<br />
operates with a fixed 180° difference relative to the first piston. A sensor on<br />
the motor surface checks for over temperature conditions (90°C).<br />
Table 21 Technical Data <strong>of</strong> Metering Drive<br />
Resolution <strong>of</strong> mechanical system: 6.6 nl/steps <strong>of</strong> Encoder<br />
Resolution <strong>of</strong> Encoder: 0.25 degree<br />
Lowest Frequencies: 2.5 Hz<br />
Highest Frequencies: 25 KHz<br />
Number <strong>of</strong> steps between piston extension limits: 8191<br />
Figure 19 Metering Drive Assembly<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 103
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Pump Head Assembly<br />
Pump Head Assembly<br />
Repair Level: Component<br />
Table 22 Part Numbers Pump Head Assembly<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Pump Head Assembly 01018-60004<br />
Ti - Pump Head Assembly 01019-60002<br />
Figure 20 Pump Head Assembly<br />
Two identical piston move inside the solvent filled chamber in the pump head<br />
assembly. The piston are ball loaded on the spindles and center itself in the<br />
seal. The built in spring prevents clearances <strong>of</strong> the plunger affecting flow<br />
accuracy (see also “Pump Head Assembly” on page 271).<br />
Table 23 Technical Data <strong>of</strong> Pump Head<br />
Maximum displacement volume: 108 µl<br />
Ti - <strong>Series</strong><br />
Materials in contact with solvents titanium, gold, sapphire, ceramic<br />
104 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Continuous Seal Wash<br />
Continuous Seal Wash<br />
Repair Level: Component<br />
Table 24 Part Numbers Seal Wash<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Seal Wash Kit 01018-68722<br />
Velocity regulator 3/pk 5062-2486<br />
Bioscience application do very <strong>of</strong>ten use high concentrated buffer solutions.<br />
Therefore the seal wash is installed in each Ti pump. For the stainless steel<br />
version it is available as an option and should be used when buffer solutions<br />
are used in the instrument. If high buffer concentration are used in the pump<br />
the continuous seal wash will maintain the life time <strong>of</strong> the pump seal. Buffer<br />
solutions below 0.1mol normally do not require the seal wash option.<br />
The option is customer installable.<br />
The option consists <strong>of</strong> a support ring (1) a secondary seal (2) and a gasket (3)<br />
for both piston sides. A wash bottle filled with water/isopropanol (90/10) will<br />
be placed above the pump module and gravity will maintain a flow through<br />
the pump head removing all possible buffer crystals from the back <strong>of</strong> the<br />
pump seal.<br />
NOTE Running dry is the worst case for a seal and drastically reduces the life time <strong>of</strong><br />
it. Therefore the tubings <strong>of</strong> the wash option should always be filled with<br />
solvent to maintain the life time <strong>of</strong> the wash seal. Use always a mixture <strong>of</strong><br />
distilled water (90%) and isopropanol (10%) as wash solvent. The mixture<br />
prevents bacteria growth in the wash bottle and reduces also the surface<br />
tension <strong>of</strong> the water. The flow rate should be regulated to approximately<br />
20 drops/minute (velocity regulator 5062-2486).<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 105
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Continuous Seal Wash<br />
Figure 21 Continuous Seal Wash<br />
106 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Active Inlet Valve<br />
Active Inlet Valve<br />
Repair Level: Assembly<br />
Table 25 Part Numbers Active Inlet Valve<br />
Table 26 Ti - <strong>Series</strong><br />
Figure 22 Active Inlet Valve<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Active Inlet Valve 01018-60010<br />
Ti - Active Inlet Valve 01019-60010<br />
The active inlet valve is a solenoid driven check valve. In the Ti version all<br />
parts in contact with solvents are corrosion resistant. The solenoid is<br />
controlled by the Pump Drive Control Board (PDC). A spring loaded ruby ball<br />
sitting in a sapphire seat closes or opens the flow path. If the solenoid is<br />
deactivated the keeper <strong>of</strong> the magnet presses the ruby ball down opening the<br />
flow path. At the same time the down moving first piston draws solvent into<br />
the pump head. The activated solenoid enables the spring to press the ruby<br />
ball in its seat and the flow path is blocked. Older versions do have a solvent<br />
protection cover installed.<br />
Materials in contact with solvents titanium, gold, sapphire, ceramic,<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 107
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Outlet Ball Valve<br />
Outlet Ball Valve<br />
Repair Level: Assembly<br />
Table 27 Part Numbers Outlet Ball Valve<br />
Table 28 Ti - <strong>Series</strong><br />
Figure 23 Outlet Ball Valve<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Outlet Ball Valve G1311-60012<br />
The outlet ball valve is made <strong>of</strong> corrosion resistant materials and can be used<br />
in both pump versions. The outlet valve cartridge contains two seat / ball<br />
pairs with the necessary seals. A slight weight on top <strong>of</strong> each ball limits the<br />
movement <strong>of</strong> the ball and maintains a small delay volume. The cartridge (3) is<br />
fixed with adhesive and the valve will be damaged if opened. The valve<br />
should always be tightened at the housing screw (2) and never at the<br />
cartridge (3) itself.<br />
Materials in contact with solvents titanium, gold, ruby, sapphire<br />
108 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Frit Adapter Assembly<br />
Frit Adapter Assembly<br />
!Repair Level: Component<br />
Table 29 Part Numbers Seal Wash<br />
Table 30 Ti - <strong>Series</strong><br />
Item Part Number<br />
Frit Adapter Assembly 01018-60007<br />
Figure 24 Frit Adapter Assembly<br />
The housing <strong>of</strong> the frit adapter assembly is made from titanium and is<br />
suitable for both pump versions. The frit adapter assembly is installed in each<br />
isocratic pump. It is the interface to the following system components (for<br />
example autosampler) and holds a PTFE frit. The capacity <strong>of</strong> the frit when<br />
installed correctly is large enough to collect all the particles during the<br />
normal life time <strong>of</strong> the piston seal. It is recommended to replace the frit each<br />
time the seal has to be replaced as part <strong>of</strong> the normal pump maintenance. The<br />
second criteria for replacing the frit is the pressure across over it. If the<br />
pressure drop is more then approximately 10 bar with 5ml/min H 2O the frit<br />
should be changed.<br />
Materials in contact with solvents Titanium, PTFE, gold<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 109
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Purge Valve<br />
Purge Valve<br />
Repair Level:Assembly except <strong>of</strong> PTFE frit and gold seal (item 1 to 3)<br />
Table 31 Part Numbers Purge Valve<br />
Table 32 Ti - <strong>Series</strong><br />
Item Part Number<br />
Purge Valve (replacement) G1311-60009<br />
Purge Valve Update Kit 01018-68723<br />
Figure 25 Purge Valve Assembly<br />
The purge valve was introduced in November 1990. The purge valve is made<br />
from corrosion resistant materials and is suitable for both pump versions.<br />
The purge valve will be installed on all quaternary pumps and can be ordered<br />
as an option to the isocratic pump. The lower part <strong>of</strong> the purge valve is<br />
designed like the frit adapter assembly and holds the PTFE frit. A ball seat<br />
combination builds the purge valve. When opened at the thumb screw the<br />
ball is lifted out <strong>of</strong> its seat allowing the solvent to flow through the waste<br />
outlet. When the thumbscrew is turned down the internal springs press the<br />
ball into the seat. Flow is directed to the following system components.<br />
Materials in contact with solvents Titanium, PTFE, gold, ceramic<br />
110 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
High Pressure Damper<br />
High Pressure Damper<br />
Repair Level:Assembly<br />
Table 33 Part Numbers High Pressure Damper<br />
Table 34 Ti - <strong>Series</strong><br />
Item Part Number<br />
Damper 79835-60005<br />
Ti - Damper 01019-60005<br />
Figure 26 High Pressure Damper<br />
For the Ti version <strong>of</strong> the high pressure damper all parts which are in contact<br />
with solvents are gold plated. Two functions are obtained from the High<br />
Pressure Damper. Flow is damped (flow ripple reduction) and the pressure in<br />
the system is measured. The damping function is provided by an aluminum<br />
housing partly filled with water as the compressible medium and a solid steel<br />
block (3) which compensates for different coefficients <strong>of</strong> expansion <strong>of</strong> water<br />
and the aluminum housing. A protection plate (2) mounted between cover<br />
and housing prevents membrane (1) damage resulting from pressure excess<br />
or pressure shocks. Pressure is measured with a pressure transducer. The<br />
electrical circuit that outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure<br />
measured is mounted directly to the pressure transducer.<br />
Materials in contact with solvents gold<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 111
Pumps: Hardware Information<br />
Column Holder<br />
Column Holder<br />
Repair Level:Assembly<br />
Table 35 Part Numbers High Pressure Damper<br />
The column holder is standard for the <strong>1050</strong> Ti Pumps. It is designed for use<br />
with any <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> modules either separately or in a stack. A <strong>1050</strong><br />
module will fit onto the column holder base (1) and the stand (2) can be used<br />
to attach columns which do not fit into the solvent module compartment<br />
using the clamp (3). Possible leaks will be collected in the groove (5). The<br />
support block (4) maintains the correct height adjustment <strong>of</strong> the autosampler<br />
foot support (100 vial tray).<br />
WARNING The column holder is not intended for use with solvents which are<br />
flammable or toxic. If such solvents are used you must use a leak tray<br />
or equivalent. You must also position the column so that any leaking<br />
solvent is collected by the leak tray.<br />
Figure 27 Column Holder<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Column Holder Assembly 5062-2469<br />
112 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
6<br />
6 Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
This chapter provides electronic information<br />
about the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
This chapter gives information about the electronic <strong>of</strong> the pumps:<br />
Overview<br />
Pump Drive Control Board (PDC)<br />
Relative A/D Converter Board (RAD)<br />
Firmware Board (SWF)<br />
Heater Isocratic Board (HRI)<br />
Heater Quaternary Board (HRQ)<br />
High Pressure Transducer Board (HPT)<br />
Connector Board (CON)<br />
Pump Motherboard (HPS)<br />
114 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Overview<br />
Overview<br />
Table 36 Electronic Boards<br />
All electronic boards (except the FIP, behind the keyboard and the CON,<br />
above the MCGV) are located in the rear part <strong>of</strong> the module and they are<br />
connected to the Motherboard (HPS). Excess to the boards is from the back<br />
<strong>of</strong> the instrument. Slot numbers for the boards (as shown in the status<br />
screen) are counted from left to right. The power supply board is located in<br />
slot 1 and the common main processor is located in slot 7.<br />
In the <strong>1050</strong> pumps the following electronic assemblies are available:<br />
Description Part Number Exchange<br />
Power Supply (DPS-B) 5061-3374 0<strong>1050</strong>-69374<br />
Common Main Processor (CMP) 5061-3380 0<strong>1050</strong>-69580<br />
Pump Drive Control (PDC 2 )<br />
01018-66532<br />
Relative A/D Converter (RAD) 01018-66503 01018-69503<br />
Firmware Board (SFW) 01018-66506<br />
Heater Isocratic Board (HRI) 01018-66517<br />
Heater Quaternary Board (HRQ) 01018-66518 01018-69518<br />
Connector Board (CON) 01018-66505<br />
Motherboard (HPS) 01018-66501<br />
Display Interface Board (FIP) 5061-3376<br />
Communication Interface (CIB) 5061-2482<br />
NOTE For information about Power Supply, Common Processor and Fluorescent<br />
Interface refer to “Common: Electronic Information” on page 39.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 115
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Overview<br />
Figure 28 Rear <strong>of</strong> <strong>1050</strong> Pumps<br />
116 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Overview<br />
Figure 29 Block Diagram <strong>1050</strong> Pumps<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 117
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Pump Drive Control Board (PDC2)<br />
Pump Drive Control Board (PDC 2 )<br />
Repair Level: Board, Fuses and U78, U79<br />
Table 37 Part Numbers for ASC Board<br />
Item Part Number<br />
PDC2 01018-66532<br />
PDC replaced by PDC2 Fuse: F16 (PDC), F481 (PDC2) 1.5 A 2110-0304<br />
Fuse F891, F892 (PDC); F112, F113 (PDC2)<br />
on board 500 mA<br />
2110-0934<br />
U78 (MC78L15ACP) 1826-0274<br />
U79 (MC79L15ACP) 1826-0281<br />
The main functions <strong>of</strong> the PDC board are the control <strong>of</strong> the pump motor and<br />
the active inlet valve.<br />
For the quaternary system the PDC board has also to generate the control<br />
signals for the gradient valve circuit on the Heater Quaternary Board (HRQ).<br />
The PDC2 board succeeds the PDC board. For standardization and cost<br />
reduction reasons part <strong>of</strong> the circuit has been implemented in ASIC<br />
(Application Specific Integrated Circuit). The board size was reduced the<br />
board is also used in the other APG products and a stainless steel plate<br />
extends the board to <strong>1050</strong> board size.<br />
Fuses<br />
Fuse F16 (PDC) or F481 (PDC2) (1.5 A) protects the +36 V for servo motor<br />
and active inlet valve for overcurrent conditions on the old PDC board. F891<br />
(PDC) or F113 (PDC2) (500 mA) protects the active inlet valve for<br />
overcurrent conditions while F892 (PDC) or F112 (PDC2) is for future use<br />
(space for additional connector on CON board).<br />
118 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Pump Drive Control Board (PDC2)<br />
Figure 30 Block Diagram PDC 2 Board<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 119
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Pump Drive Control Board (PDC2)<br />
U78, U79<br />
PDC Boards revision A need an replacement <strong>of</strong> U78 and U79 when the<br />
metering drive (01018-69100) <strong>of</strong> the instrument has to be changed.<br />
Clock Generator<br />
The clock generator provides the clocks for the different pump boards. The<br />
pump control chip needs the 2 MHz clock and the pump control logic on the<br />
Relative A/D Board (RAD) and the Gradient Valve Driver Board (GVD) need<br />
the 1 MHz clock.<br />
Filter and Logic<br />
The filter and logic circuit disables the operation <strong>of</strong> the control chip in case<br />
<strong>of</strong> malfunctions in the system. Input signals for the block is the system OK<br />
(SOK) signal from the common main processor (CMP) which is active when<br />
the processor has locked up. The second signal connected to the circuit<br />
comes from the over temperature sensor on the surface <strong>of</strong> the pump motor.<br />
The TOK signal is active when the motor temperature exceeds 90°C.<br />
12 V Check<br />
The +12 V voltage will be checked for under voltage conditions. In case the<br />
voltages drops below approximately +10 V a proper working <strong>of</strong> the pump is<br />
no longer possible and the pump control chip will be disabled.<br />
Pump Control Chip<br />
The pump control chip is the brain <strong>of</strong> the PDC board. It handles all time<br />
critical and time consuming tasks for the digital position control <strong>of</strong> the<br />
pumping system. The chip works independent from the processor which<br />
supplies only the pump parameters (for example flow, stroke, compensation,<br />
gradient information and so on). All parameter changes will be transferred<br />
directly to the pump control chip. The feedback from the motor comes to the<br />
chip via the shaft encoder and allows accurate control <strong>of</strong> the motor (speed,<br />
direction and so on).<br />
The control chip sends the signals for the motor driver to energize the<br />
various motor windings. The control chip influences the current through the<br />
motor windings by changing the pulse width and by an amplification factor<br />
(Gain). The actual value <strong>of</strong> the current is supplied by the current amplifier<br />
and comparator circuit.<br />
120 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Pump Drive Control Board (PDC2)<br />
Figure 31 Inlet Valve Control<br />
The active inlet valve gets its control signals from the control chip. The<br />
optional gradient valve driver board (GVD), which controls the MCGV works<br />
under the supervision <strong>of</strong> the control chip.<br />
Motor Driver<br />
The motor driver circuit block contains the power stages for the motor. The<br />
motor is a three phase variable reluctance motor.<br />
Current Amplifier and Comparator<br />
One task <strong>of</strong> this circuit block is to measure the current through all the<br />
windings and to feed this signal into the control chip. From the control chip<br />
the circuit gets the pulse width (PW) and gain (GA) signals. With the pulse<br />
width the current value through the windings is determined. If the gain signal<br />
is active the amplifier multiplies the current with a factor (1.4). This is<br />
necessary to assure a constant torque at all motor positions.<br />
Active Inlet Valve<br />
The control chip provides the signals to activate or deactivate the active inlet<br />
valve. Figure 31 shows the control signal from the control chip and the<br />
current in the solenoid valve. The high current allows fast switching <strong>of</strong> the<br />
valve while the holding current reduces the heat dissipation <strong>of</strong> the solenoid.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 121
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Pump Drive Control Board (PDC2)<br />
Figure 32 Board Layout PDC<br />
122 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Relative A/D Converter Board (RAD)<br />
Relative A/D Converter Board (RAD)<br />
Repair Level: Exchange Board or Fuses<br />
Table 38 Part Numbers for ASC Board<br />
Item Part Number Exchange<br />
RAD 01018-66503 01018-69503<br />
Fuse: F12, F22, 250 mA 2110-0004<br />
The main function <strong>of</strong> the board is the relative A/D conversion with an analog<br />
pressure output and overpressure measurement for the flow reduction. In<br />
addition the RAD board controls the two external contacts and checks for<br />
the status <strong>of</strong> active inlet valve and motor temperature. The firmware board<br />
(SFW) which contains the module firmware is attached to the RAD board and<br />
is used by the common main processor (CMP).<br />
Control Logic<br />
The control logic synchronizes the communication between the RAD and the<br />
main processor.<br />
Status Register<br />
The status register sends information about board identification motor<br />
temperature and active inlet valve to the main processor.<br />
Via the board identification the main processor identifies the board in the<br />
card cage. In case <strong>of</strong> a wrong board position the processor does not allow<br />
signals to the board.<br />
The over temperature sensor on the pump motor surface generates an error<br />
message when the motor temperature exceeds 90°C (fan defective?).<br />
If the active inlet valve is not connected an error message is generated (when<br />
pump will be turned on) and the operation <strong>of</strong> the pump is inhibited.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 123
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Relative A/D Converter Board (RAD)<br />
Figure 33 Block Diagram RAD<br />
124 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Relative A/D Converter Board (RAD)<br />
Relay Contact Register<br />
The relay contact register activates the two relay contact circuits on request<br />
<strong>of</strong> the processor. When activated contact 1 provides fused (250 mA) +24 V<br />
while contact 2 provides a fused (250 mA) 30 V (AC/DC) rated contact<br />
closure. For more technical information about the relay contacts see<br />
“External Contacts” on page 56.<br />
Relative A/D Conversion<br />
The relative A/D conversion consist <strong>of</strong> a A/D converter a D/A converter with<br />
differential amplifier and a divider and filter. In addition a filter and amplifier<br />
for the pressure signal is needed and a comparator for the overpressure<br />
signal.<br />
The relative A/D converter delivers a binary data word which is independent<br />
from the absolute value <strong>of</strong> the signal. The output data word shows the %<br />
difference <strong>of</strong> the actual value compared to a reference value.<br />
The 8 bit D/A converter and the differential amplifier provide the reference<br />
voltage U Ref. The dynamic range for the relative measurement represents<br />
±6.4% <strong>of</strong> the absolute value <strong>of</strong> the signal. The divider and filter stage<br />
determines the Reference signal which is Ref=U Ref x 12.8%.<br />
The pressure signal from the high pressure damper is filtered and amplified.<br />
The outlet <strong>of</strong> this stage is the input voltage (U In) for the A/D converter. The<br />
same signal is directly fed to the BNC output which has a resolution <strong>of</strong><br />
2 mV/bar for the range between 0 to 440 bar. The output has an <strong>of</strong>fset <strong>of</strong><br />
30 mV (typical value) for <strong>of</strong>fset compensation <strong>of</strong> the damping unit.<br />
The comparator compares reference signal and actual pressure signal. In<br />
case <strong>of</strong> overpressure conditions the flow will be reduced via the PDC board.<br />
The A/D converter allows different operation modes. Measurements <strong>of</strong> the<br />
difference between U Ref - U In in relation to the reference (Ref) value or the<br />
absolute measurement <strong>of</strong> U In - AGND in relation to Ref is possible. The<br />
results will be used by the processor to show the pressure ripple and the<br />
actual pressure on the display. It is also used to reduce the flow in case <strong>of</strong><br />
overpressure conditions and for the online diagnostic (for example gas<br />
bubble detector, ball valve check, and so on).<br />
The BNC output is an additional diagnostic tool for checking the<br />
performance <strong>of</strong> the pump. For normal operation the use <strong>of</strong> the displayed<br />
pressure ripple is sufficient.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 125
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Relative A/D Converter Board (RAD)<br />
Figure 34 Board Layout RAD<br />
126 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Firmware Board (SFW)<br />
Firmware Board (SFW)<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 39 Part Numbers for FIM Board<br />
Figure 35 Layout <strong>of</strong> SFW Board<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Firmware Board (SWF) 01018-66506<br />
The SFW board is a piggy back board, placed on RAD board (’personality<br />
module’).<br />
The programmed SFW contains the firmware <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> pump module.<br />
The board is designed for on board programming.<br />
The FIM contains 128K x 8bit EPROMs.<br />
All inputs/outputs are pulled down for electrostatic discharge protection.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 127
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
HRI Board - Heater Isocratic Board<br />
HRI Board - Heater Isocratic Board<br />
Repair Level: Board or Fuses<br />
Table 40 Part Numbers for HRI Board<br />
Item Part Number<br />
HRI 01018-66517<br />
Fuse: F4, 2.5 A 2110-0083<br />
The main function <strong>of</strong> the board is to control the column heater in the solvent<br />
conditioning module <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Isocratic Pump.<br />
Fuse<br />
Fuse F4 (2.5A) protects the +24V for the heater foil for overcurrent<br />
conditions.<br />
Control Logic<br />
The control logic synchronizes the communication between the HRI and the<br />
main processor.<br />
Status Register<br />
The register provides the main processor with the board identification.<br />
Synchronization<br />
The circuit receives the timing for the D/A converter from the main processor<br />
via the control logic. Synchronization adapts the timing to the needs <strong>of</strong> the 12<br />
bit D/A converter.<br />
Pulse Width Modulator<br />
When the column heater is turned on the main processor provides control<br />
signals to the pulse width modulator. The output is a TTL signal with a duty<br />
cycle which depends on the temperature difference (error signal) between<br />
actual and setpoint temperature.<br />
128 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
HRI Board - Heater Isocratic Board<br />
Figure 36 Block Diagram HRI/HRQ Board<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 129
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
HRI Board - Heater Isocratic Board<br />
Temperature Measurement<br />
The temperature <strong>of</strong> the heat exchanger is measured with a Pt. 100<br />
temperature sensor. (Resistance 1000 Ohm; at 0°C and approximately<br />
1400 Ohm; at 100°C). The temperature converter circuit provides an analog<br />
signal (0V to +5V) correlating to the temperature <strong>of</strong> the heating block. The<br />
chosen setpoint temperature is converted in a reference voltage via the 12 bit<br />
A/D converter. Actual and setpoint temperature are then compared in the<br />
comparator.<br />
The derived error signal is send via Latch 1 to the main processor which<br />
updates the necessary signals for the heating section. The sensor check<br />
circuit provides information whether the temperature sensor is installed or<br />
not.<br />
Heater Driver<br />
The heater driver circuit contains the power stages for the heater foil. If the<br />
temperature <strong>of</strong> the heater block exceeds 100°C a over-temperature switch on<br />
the heater foil interrupts the connection to the heater driver.<br />
Latch 2<br />
The latch provides the signals to the multi color LED which gives visible<br />
information about the heater status. The LED shines green when the heater is<br />
on and at correct temperature. When maintaining the temperature the LED<br />
flashes yellow indicating the percentage <strong>of</strong> power used. The LED shines<br />
yellow when the heater is on and is at correct temperature but the not ready<br />
time has not been elapsed. During the heating up phase the LED flashes<br />
yellow. A red LED appears in case <strong>of</strong> error conditions.<br />
The system ok signal (SOK) <strong>of</strong> the processor is connected to the latch. In<br />
case <strong>of</strong> problems Latch 1 and the PWM are disabled and the heating process<br />
is interrupted.<br />
Board Layout<br />
Refer to “Board Layout HRI/HRQ” on page 133.<br />
130 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Heater Quaternary Board (HRQ)<br />
Heater Quaternary Board (HRQ)<br />
Repair Level: Exchange Board or Fuses<br />
Table 41 Part Numbers for HRQ Board<br />
Item Part Number Exchange<br />
HRQ 01018-66518 01018-69518<br />
Fuse: F4, 2.5 A 2110-0083<br />
Fuse: F16, 1 A 2110-0007<br />
The main function <strong>of</strong> the board is the control <strong>of</strong> the column heater as well as<br />
the multi channel gradient valve (MCGV). The board comprises the function<br />
<strong>of</strong> the HRI Board. Therefore only the multi channel gradient control has been<br />
described. The HRQ board replaced the gradient valve driver board (GVD)<br />
which controlled the MCGV.<br />
Block Diagram<br />
Refer to “Block Diagram HRI/HRQ Board” on page 129.<br />
Fuses<br />
Fuse F16 (1A) protects the +36V for the multi channel gradient valve (MCGV)<br />
for overcurrent conditions. Originally the fuse had 500 mA which was a<br />
incorrect value.<br />
Control Logic<br />
The control logic synchronizes the communication between the HRQ and the<br />
main processor.<br />
Valve Sequence Register<br />
The valve sequence register contains the information about the sequence in<br />
which the solenoids <strong>of</strong> the MCGV should be activated (for example A, B, C, D<br />
or A, C, D and so on).<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 131
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Heater Quaternary Board (HRQ)<br />
4 Bit Counter<br />
The control chip divides the piston path length for one stroke into four parts.<br />
The length for each part is depending on the flow composition. The four bit<br />
counter gets a pulse each time the portion is changed. The output is a 2 bit<br />
data word for the valve select memory.<br />
Valve Select Memory<br />
The following figure shows an example for the input and output <strong>of</strong> the valve<br />
select memory circuit. The channel number information comes from the 4 bit<br />
counter. The pump drive control board (PDC) supplies the gradient power<br />
pulse (GPP) and the blank out pulse (BOP). GPP delivers the power<br />
switching signals for the multi channel gradient valve (MCGV). BOP makes<br />
sure that all solenoids <strong>of</strong> the MCGV are switched <strong>of</strong>f before opening the next<br />
one. Valve sequence register gives the relation between the four piston<br />
portions and the solvent channels. Output <strong>of</strong> the valve select memory is the<br />
accurate timing for the four solenoids <strong>of</strong> the MCGV.<br />
Figure 37 Valve Select Memory Signals<br />
Valve Driver<br />
The valve Driver contains the power stages for the multi channel gradient<br />
valve (MCGV).<br />
132 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Heater Quaternary Board (HRQ)<br />
Common Valve Switch<br />
Fast switching <strong>of</strong> the four valves without any interference between the<br />
channels is achieved with the common valve switch. One side <strong>of</strong> all the four<br />
valves is connected together and is opened each time before switching to the<br />
next valve (BOP).<br />
Figure 38 Board Layout HRI/HRQ<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 133
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
High Pressure Transducer Board (HPT)<br />
High Pressure Transducer Board (HPT)<br />
Repair Level: Damper<br />
The High Pressure Transducer Board (HPT) is built into the High Pressure<br />
Damper and measures the system pressure on the high pressure side. A<br />
negative going voltage is provided showing a linear characteristic between 0<br />
bar to 440 bar from -1 V to -8 V. The measurement is taken with a strain gauge<br />
bridge. The firmware <strong>of</strong> the pump allows a interactive <strong>of</strong>fset adjustment for<br />
the damping unit. In certain limits the s<strong>of</strong>tware compensates the <strong>of</strong>fset <strong>of</strong> the<br />
high pressure transducer.<br />
NOTE The HPT is installed and preadjusted in the factory. In case <strong>of</strong> malfunctions the<br />
complete assembly should be replaced in the field.<br />
Figure 39 HPT Pressure Diagram<br />
134 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
High Pressure Transducer Board (HPT)<br />
Figure 40 Block Diagram HPT<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 135
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Connector Board (CON)<br />
Connector Board (CON)<br />
Repair Level: Board or Fuse<br />
Table 42 Part Numbers for CON Board<br />
Figure 41 Board Layout CON<br />
Item Part Number<br />
CON (NEW) 01018-66505<br />
Fuse: F2, 375 mA 2110-0421<br />
The connector board (CON) allows easy access to plugs for the multi channel<br />
gradient valve (MCGV) active inlet valve and the leak sensor. The connector<br />
cable transmits the signals to the motherboard and from there it is fed to the<br />
various boards. The fuse protects the active inlet valve circuit for overcurrent<br />
conditions (only on board revisions B and greater).<br />
136 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Connector Board (CON)<br />
Table 43 CON Connectors<br />
Connector Function<br />
J1 MCGV<br />
J2 not used<br />
J3 Active Inlet Valve<br />
J4 Leak Sensor<br />
J5 Cable<br />
J1 MCGV<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 137
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Pump Motherboard (HPS)<br />
Pump Motherboard (HPS)<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 44 Part Numbers for LUM Board<br />
Item Part Number<br />
HPS Board 01018-66501<br />
The Motherboard connects the various boards <strong>of</strong> the pump to each other and<br />
supplies the signals for the front parts like metering drive, damper, MCGV,<br />
fan and keyboard. Figure 42 shows the location <strong>of</strong> all connectors, Figure 43<br />
to Figure 45 show the main signals <strong>of</strong> the pump.<br />
Figure 42 Layout <strong>of</strong> Pump Motherboard<br />
J1 - Power Supply J6 - Not used J11 - Fan<br />
J2 - PDC Board J7 - CMP J12 - High Pressure Damper<br />
J3 - RAD/SFW Board J8 - FIP Keyboard J13 - Connector Board Cable<br />
J4 - not used yet J9 - Temperature Sensor J14 - Metering Drive Motor<br />
J5 - HRI/HRQ Board J10 J15 - Shaft Encoder<br />
138 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Pump Motherboard (HPS)<br />
Figure 43 Connection Table HPS (I)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 139
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Pump Motherboard (HPS)<br />
Figure 44 Connection Table LUM (II)<br />
140 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Pump Motherboard (HPS)<br />
Figure 45 Connection Table LUM (III)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 141
Pumps: Electronic Information<br />
Pump Motherboard (HPS)<br />
142 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
7<br />
7 Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
This chapter provides information on error<br />
messages and diagnostic features <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Pumps
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
This chapter provides information about:<br />
Test Functions<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests<br />
Pump Pressure Ripple<br />
Normal Pressure Test<br />
Modified Pressure Test<br />
Flow Test Method - Firmware Revision 1.0<br />
Flow Test Method - Firmware Revision 3.0 and above<br />
Gradient Test<br />
Error Messages<br />
Selftest<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Messages<br />
Pump Initialization<br />
Normal Operation<br />
Column Heater<br />
Online Monitor<br />
Troubleshooting Hints (Pressure Tests)<br />
Pressure Tests with water and methanol<br />
Pressure Tests when the pump is broken<br />
144 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
How to use the Diagnostic Test Functions<br />
How to use the Diagnostic Test Functions<br />
The test function <strong>of</strong> the firmware is part <strong>of</strong> the control section. The first test<br />
function is a online monitor <strong>of</strong> the actual pressure ripple. The two other<br />
programs allow verification <strong>of</strong> the pump performance. The two test methods<br />
are also used for the final test <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Pump modules.<br />
Press CTRL and with Next move the cursor to<br />
TEST FUNCTIONS (enter)<br />
After pressing Enter the following TEST FUNCTIONS are accessible.<br />
PUMP PRESSURE RIPPLE YY.Y%<br />
Monitors the actual flow ripple if the diagnosis level (Configuration) is turned<br />
on (1, 2 or 3).<br />
LOAD FLOW TEST METHOD<br />
Loads a special program (pressure test) for performance verification <strong>of</strong> the<br />
flow system.<br />
LOAD GRADIENT TEST METHOD<br />
Loads a gradient test program (tracer test) for the performance <strong>of</strong> the<br />
gradient system.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 145
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pump Pressure Ripple<br />
Pump Pressure Ripple<br />
The pressure ripple display shows the actual pressure variation <strong>of</strong> the solvent<br />
flow. It can be used as a quick check for determination <strong>of</strong> gas bubbles in the<br />
system. If the online diagnostic is turned on no pressure ripple (--.-%)<br />
indicates either no flow in the system or too many gas bubbles in the system<br />
exceeding the measurement range or a pressure below 30 bar to 50 bar.<br />
Positive pressure ripple values (for example 0.5%) are shown when the pump<br />
is overcompensated. Negative pressure ripple values (for example -0.8%) are<br />
shown in case <strong>of</strong> an under compensated pump.<br />
Whether the values in the display are either positive or negative is strictly<br />
depending on the solvents in use and the respective pressure compensation<br />
values which are user selectable. Typical pressure ripple readings are in the<br />
range ±1%. A higher ripple which can not be reduced by pressure<br />
compensation changes may indicate an air bubble.<br />
NOTE In purge mode the pressure ripple is not measured. The display might show<br />
incorrect values during this time.<br />
146 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests<br />
The pump has an analog output for the pressure signal for monitoring and<br />
troubleshooting purposes. The tightness and performance <strong>of</strong> the pump can<br />
be tested with various pressure tests. The outlet <strong>of</strong> the pump will be blocked<br />
and depending on the chosen pressure test the system pressure rises until it<br />
is stopped either by the program itself or the pressure limit.<br />
The plotted pressure signal provides information about the performance <strong>of</strong><br />
the system. In case <strong>of</strong> system failures it might be possible to combine the<br />
pressure tests for clear identification <strong>of</strong> the failing part.<br />
Firmware revision 3.0 and above<br />
These firmware provide an additional feature which allows to monitor which<br />
<strong>of</strong> the two piston is delivering into the system. This is a very helpful tool<br />
when troubleshooting the system. Pressure drops in the pressure tests can be<br />
related to the delivering piston. Conclusions which parts failed are much<br />
easier done.<br />
Press Status and twice Next to get the following display.<br />
currently active piston 1<br />
The display shows whether piston 1 or piston 2 are just delivering into the<br />
system. ** indicates that the change from one piston to the other is to fast to<br />
be monitored (flow >1.2 ml/min).<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 147
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests<br />
Prerequisites for the Pressure Tests<br />
1 Place a bottle <strong>of</strong> isopropanol (<strong>HPLC</strong> grade) into the solvent cabinet and<br />
connect it to one <strong>of</strong> the solvent channels (lets take channel B).<br />
2 Switch on the degassing for that channel and establish an appropriate<br />
helium flow rate in the bottle.<br />
3 Connect the signal cable between RAD board and integrator input (for<br />
example a 339X integrator). The pressure signal provides 2 mV/bar.<br />
4 Purge the channel (B). Observe the pressure reading until the value is<br />
stable. The pump pressure ripple display should show a value in the range<br />
±0.5% for isopropanol (with default settings).<br />
NOTE If the system is not well primed or degassed incorrect measurements may be<br />
taken resulting in wrong interpretation <strong>of</strong> the plots.<br />
5 Set Integrator parameters (339X series).<br />
Zero 10<br />
ATT 2 10<br />
CHART SPEED 2 cm/min<br />
148 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests<br />
Normal Pressure Test<br />
This test is well known for verifying system tightness.<br />
❏ Turn on pump and set FLOW 0.000 ml/min and disconnect the interface<br />
tubing at pump outlet.<br />
❏ Plug pump outlet with a blank nut (01080-83202).<br />
❏ Start the integrator with the plot mode.<br />
❏ Set Flow FLOW 1.000 ml/min to start the pressure test.<br />
Figure 46 Normal Pressure Plot with IPA<br />
Explanations to Plot<br />
The plot shows a typical pressure pr<strong>of</strong>ile <strong>of</strong> a normal performing <strong>1050</strong> Pump.<br />
With the flow <strong>of</strong> 1 ml/min the pressure in the system raises until the pump<br />
stops via the overpressure condition at 400 bar. After one minute wait time<br />
the pressure drop should not exceed 5 bar/min.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 149
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests<br />
The Modified Pressure Test<br />
This test is a slight modification <strong>of</strong> the previous used normal pressure test.<br />
❏ Turn pump on, set FLOW 0.000ml/min and disconnect the interface<br />
capillary at the outlet <strong>of</strong> the pump.<br />
❏ Plug pump outlet with a blank nut (01080-83202).<br />
❏ Start the integrator with the plot mode.<br />
❏ Set Flow FLOW 1.000ml/min to start the pressure test.<br />
❏ Observe the pressure display and reduce the flow to FLOW 0.100ml/min<br />
at approximately 200 bar.<br />
Figure 47 Modified Pressure Test with IPA<br />
Explanations to the Modified Pressure Plot<br />
The plot shows a typical pressure pr<strong>of</strong>ile <strong>of</strong> a normal performing <strong>1050</strong> Pump.<br />
The pressure in the system rises as seen in the previous test. When switched<br />
to the reduced flow rate the pressure increases with a lower slope. During<br />
the time until the system pressure limit will be reached piston I and II deliver<br />
alternately into the system. A straight line as seen indicates that both piston<br />
chambers are leak free. After switched <strong>of</strong>f at 400 bar and one minute wait<br />
time the pressure drop should not exceed 5 bar/min.<br />
150 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests<br />
Flow Test Method<br />
The firmware <strong>of</strong> the pump module holds a firmware resident flow test<br />
method which contains the parameters for the pressure test. The parameters<br />
cannot be displayed. During the life time <strong>of</strong> the instrument the firmware has<br />
been changed (communication update rev. 1.0 to 3.0) and the flow test<br />
method was revised. Therefore firmware revision 1.0 and 3.0 run different<br />
tests when the flow test method will be executed.<br />
❏ Place a bottle <strong>of</strong> isopropanol (<strong>HPLC</strong> grade) into the solvent cabinet and<br />
connect it to one <strong>of</strong> the solvent channels (lets assume its channel B).<br />
❏ Set PRIMARY CHANNEL B<br />
NOTE The Test Method uses exclusively the solvent specified by the primary<br />
channel and ignores the setting <strong>of</strong> the % display. However for flushing the<br />
system a setting %B 100 is necessary.<br />
❏ Connect the signal cable between RAD board and integrator input.<br />
❏ Flush the system. Observe the pressure reading until the value is stable.<br />
(hint: use pressure ripple display).<br />
❏ Set FLOW 0.000ml/min and disconnect interface tubing at pump outlet.<br />
❏ Load Flow Test Method.<br />
NOTE Loading the flow test method resets the pump an action which moves the<br />
pistons into a predefined position. In addition the instrument sets the actual<br />
flow to zero (FLOW 0.000ml/min) if not already set.<br />
❏ Plug the pump outlet with a blank nut (01080-83202).<br />
❏ Set integrator parameters (339XA)<br />
Attenuation 2 10<br />
Chart Speed 1 cm/min (PLOT mode).<br />
❏ Press START, then ENTER to run the test method.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 151
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests<br />
Flow Test Method - Firmware Rev. 1.0<br />
Figure 48 Pressure Test (Rev. 1.0) with IPA<br />
Explanations to Pressure Plot<br />
The plot shows a typical pressure pr<strong>of</strong>ile <strong>of</strong> a normal performing <strong>1050</strong> Pump.<br />
Following are some remarks to the various steps in the plot.<br />
NOTE The pump displaces approximately 150 µl until the first plateau will be<br />
reached at a pressure <strong>of</strong> 120 to 130 bar. After pump initialization the 1. piston<br />
is in its upper position which means the 2. piston starts delivering into the<br />
system. With the given stroke length <strong>of</strong> 70 µl strokes <strong>of</strong> both pistons (II-I-II- I)|<br />
are necessary to reach the 1. plateau. Drastic leaks at active inlet valve outlet<br />
ball valve or seals will disturb the intake stroke <strong>of</strong> the 1. piston. The result<br />
might be a pressure drop when the 1. piston takes over to deliver into the<br />
system at a pressure between 20 to 40 bar. If the pressure test does not reach<br />
the first plateau the pressure plot cannot give any reliable diagnostic or<br />
troubleshooting hints.<br />
152 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests<br />
1 From the predefined position the pistons start moving with a flow <strong>of</strong> 150 µ|<br />
and rises the pressure in the pump.<br />
2 At the first plateau the firmware makes sure that the first piston is delivering<br />
into the pump. With the very small flow rate <strong>of</strong> 2 µl the pump pressure should<br />
remain stable. During the 1min at this plateau a maximum pressure drop <strong>of</strong><br />
5 bar is allowed (pressure display). At this position the tightness <strong>of</strong> the whole<br />
system is measured.<br />
3 Pressure is increased until the second piston is delivering.<br />
4 At the second plateau the second piston is delivering into the system with a<br />
flow <strong>of</strong> 2 µl. Again a straight line is expected. A pressure drop <strong>of</strong> 5 bar during<br />
the 1min is allowed.<br />
5 The pistons move now with a higher speed (flow 500 µl/min) increasing the<br />
pressure in the system.<br />
6 While increasing system pressure the pistons move with a stroke volume <strong>of</strong><br />
4 µl. The system pressure must reach a value <strong>of</strong> 330 bar ±30 bar. This part <strong>of</strong><br />
the test checks for the mechanical tolerances from system to system and is <strong>of</strong><br />
minor interest for system troubleshooting.<br />
7 The system pressure is increased until the system shows an overpressure<br />
condition (>400 bar) which turns the pump <strong>of</strong>f. 1 min after turning <strong>of</strong>f the<br />
pump pressure drop should not exceed 5 bar/min.<br />
Possible Failure Modes<br />
The most relevant service information are obtained from the plot <strong>of</strong> the first<br />
(2) and second (4) plateau <strong>of</strong> the pressure plot. Three major failure modes<br />
are possible. For troubleshooting the system both plateaus should be seen<br />
together and not separately.<br />
The following plots show the different failure modes.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 153
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests<br />
Straight line at first plateau but negative slope at second plateau<br />
Figure 49 Negative Slope at second Plateau<br />
The plot shows a leak free system when the first piston provides the flow.<br />
But during the stroke <strong>of</strong> the second piston the pressure drops down<br />
indicating a internal leak. The pump seals are definitely ok.<br />
Possible failure:<br />
Contaminated outlet ball valve (backflow).<br />
154 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests<br />
Figure 50 First Plateau unstable<br />
Negative slope at first plateau and stable plot at second plateau<br />
Plot shows malfunction in the system when the first piston maintains the<br />
pressure in the system. The delivery stroke <strong>of</strong> the second piston is separated<br />
from the first one via the outlet ball valve and shows no problem.<br />
Possible failure:<br />
leak at first piston seal<br />
leak at active inlet valve<br />
no tight connection at outlet ball valve.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 155
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests<br />
Negative slope at both pistons<br />
Figure 51 Problems at both Plateaus<br />
Plot shows same failure mode on both pistons when maintaining the pressure<br />
in the pump. Under the assumption that the slope has the same angle for both<br />
“plateaus” it can be said that the problem is probably coming from the second<br />
piston chamber. Different angles indicate more than one leak in the pump.<br />
Possible failure<br />
Blank nut not tight enough<br />
Fittings at frit adapter assembly or damper not tight<br />
Leaking piston seal at second piston.<br />
156 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests<br />
Flow Test Method - Firmware Rev. 3.0 and above<br />
Figure 52 Pressure Test (Rev. 3.0) with IPA<br />
Explanations to Pressure Plot<br />
NOTE This flow test method is pressure controlled. The actual pressure has to<br />
exceed at least 270 bar for the first step otherwise the test cannot reach the<br />
following steps.<br />
1 Starting with a flow <strong>of</strong> 500 µl/min and a stroke <strong>of</strong> 20 µl the pump starts<br />
delivering into the system. The pressure rises until the damper detects a<br />
system pressure <strong>of</strong> more than 270 bar. The pump continues to deliver with<br />
the same parameters until piston I reaches its upper limit. At this position<br />
the stroke is changed to 80 µl and piston II delivers one stroke with the<br />
larger stroke volume.<br />
2 Now the flow is changed to 100 µl/min (stroke 80 µl) and piston I continues<br />
with this parameters for about 1/3 <strong>of</strong> its stroke.<br />
3 At the plateau piston I delivers for approximately 1 minute with a very low<br />
flow rate (4 µl) into the system. A straight line or a slight pressure increase<br />
is expected for a normal performing pump. A pressure drop during this<br />
minute indicates a problem in the pump.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 157
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Flow (Pressure) Tests<br />
4 Piston II delivers into the system. At the end <strong>of</strong> the first plateau the flow is<br />
increased back to 500 µl until piston II reaches approximately 1/3 <strong>of</strong> its<br />
stroke. At the second plateau piston II delivers with a very low flow rate<br />
(4 µl) into the system. A straight line or a slight pressure increase is<br />
expected for a normal performing pump. A pressure drop during this<br />
minute indicates a problem in the pump.<br />
5 The flow is increased to 250 µl and the pumps works with this rate until the<br />
damper detects more than 390 bar. The flow is set to zero and the test is<br />
finished. It might happen that the system stops with a pressure slightly<br />
below 400 bar. This allows to restart the pump without reset. In most <strong>of</strong> the<br />
cases the pressure will exceed the upper pressure limit <strong>of</strong> 400 bar and will<br />
show the error message. 1 minute after reaching the maximum pressure <strong>of</strong><br />
the test the pressure drop should not exceed 5 bar/min.<br />
Possible Failure Modes<br />
The plateaus (3, 4) <strong>of</strong> the pressure test provide the same information like in<br />
the previous test (Rev. 1.0). The only difference is that the two plateaus are<br />
moved to higher pressure values. The section pressure plots <strong>of</strong> this manual<br />
will provide additional pressure tests under failure conditions <strong>of</strong> the pump.<br />
158 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Gradient Test Method<br />
Gradient Test Method<br />
The test measures all the relevant data which have an influence on the pump<br />
performance. The step performance <strong>of</strong> the MCGV and the gradient linearity<br />
are controlled with this tracer test. The tracer test is a chromatographic test<br />
and therefore requires a UV detector connected (no column installed) to the<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Pump module. The gradient test is decided into two parts. The first part<br />
tests the step reproducibility <strong>of</strong> a gradient and the second part tests the<br />
linearity <strong>of</strong> a gradient.<br />
Prerequisites for the Gradient Test Method<br />
Place the following solvents (<strong>HPLC</strong> grade) into the solvent cabinet and degas<br />
them thoroughly.<br />
Channel A Distilled Water<br />
Channel B Tracer (Isopropanol + 0.5% Acetone)<br />
Channel C Isopropanol<br />
Channel D Isopropanol<br />
Running the Gradient Test Method<br />
1 Flush each channel for a couple <strong>of</strong> minutes.<br />
2 Connect the outlet capillary <strong>of</strong> the pump to a detector.<br />
3 Set detector parameters Sample Wavelength 267 nm (Bandwidth 4 nm) or<br />
equivalent, Reference Wavelength 550 nm, 100 (if available) or equivalent<br />
or fixed reference.<br />
4 Connect the signal cable between detector and integrator.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 159
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Gradient Test Method<br />
5 Set integrator parameters (339X).<br />
Zero = 5<br />
Att 2^ = **<br />
CHT SP = 1.0<br />
PK WD = 0.01<br />
THRSH = 11<br />
AT 12 min Att 2^ = **<br />
AT 12 min CHT SP = 0.5<br />
AT 45 min STOP<br />
** The tracer concentration may vary from mixture to mixture. Therefore<br />
check for the appropriate integrator attenuation. Start the integrator<br />
manually change %B = 7 observe the plot and adjust the attenuation to a<br />
value which gives the highest deflection without exceeding the paper<br />
range.<br />
Proceed in the same way with %B = 100. Set the pump parameters back to<br />
start values (%B = 0).<br />
6 Load gradient test method.<br />
7 Press START, then ENTER to run the test method.<br />
Figure 53 Gradient Test Method (part 1)<br />
160 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Gradient Test Method<br />
Figure 54 Gradient Test Method (part 2)<br />
Explanations to Gradient Test<br />
In the first part <strong>of</strong> the test the step reproducibility will be tested. The steps<br />
should have all the same height except the last two steps. The last steps<br />
(from 2% to 1% to 0%) will not have the same step height because <strong>of</strong> a too<br />
small solvent volume versus the switching time at this positions. In addition<br />
the composition precision can be tested. The noise on each <strong>of</strong> the steps<br />
should not exceed 50% <strong>of</strong> the step height. Typically values <strong>of</strong> 30%<br />
representing a composition precision <strong>of</strong> ±0.15% are reached.<br />
In the second part <strong>of</strong> the test the gradient linearity will be verified. Except <strong>of</strong><br />
the bump at the upper end <strong>of</strong> the gradient the curve should show a straight<br />
line indicating a good linearity <strong>of</strong> the system. Be aware that the performance<br />
<strong>of</strong> the detector (linearity, stray light, and so on) will have a significant impact<br />
on the results.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 161
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Error Messages<br />
Error Messages<br />
The error messages will help to locate and repair a failure. In case an error<br />
message appears the Error LED will be turned on and the message will be<br />
written into the system logbook. Reset Pump or switching on the pump<br />
again will reset the error. The entry in the logbook remains.<br />
The error messages can be divided into the following blocks:<br />
Selftest<br />
PANIC Error<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Messages<br />
Pump Initialization<br />
Normal Operation<br />
Column Heater<br />
Online Monitor<br />
162 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Selftest<br />
Selftest<br />
ROM/RAM Test<br />
RAM and display can be tested via the build in selftest. The selftest will be<br />
performed when CRTL will be pressed while the module is turned on at the<br />
LINE~ switch. In case <strong>of</strong> a failure one <strong>of</strong> the following messages appears. The<br />
complete test requires approximately two minutes.<br />
ROM test failed ( ROM test failed )<br />
The ROMs on the SFW board are tested. In case <strong>of</strong> a checksum error the<br />
ROM test fails.<br />
❏ Replace the SFW board.<br />
RAM test failed ( RAM test failed )<br />
The RAM’s on the CMP board will be tested. In case <strong>of</strong> a failure the error<br />
message appears and the CMP has to be replaced.<br />
❏ Replace the CMP board.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 163
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Panic Error / Bus Error Address Error<br />
Panic Error / Bus Error Address Error<br />
PANIC: XXXXXXH BUS ERROR<br />
PANIC: XXXXXXH Address ERROR<br />
The panic error messages should not appear under normal operation<br />
conditions. In case <strong>of</strong> hardware or firmware problems the instrument might<br />
try to access a wrong or not existing address which results in the error<br />
message on the display. The instrument is locked up and has to be switched<br />
<strong>of</strong>f/on.<br />
Reason for the PANIC error message can be any disturbance on the bus lines<br />
due to bad contacts (high resistance) or defective IC on any <strong>of</strong> the boards.<br />
❏ Check boards for good connections or corrosions at the contacts (clean<br />
contact pins).<br />
❏ Check revision <strong>of</strong> firmware board (SWF). It should be revision C or higher.<br />
Revision C boards do have a dynamic bus termination for spike<br />
suppression on the bus lines.<br />
❏ Replace one board at a time to identify the faulty one.<br />
❏ If board replacement will not cure the problem replace the motherboard.<br />
164 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Error Messages<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Error Messages<br />
The common messages are either event or error messages which may appear<br />
in all the <strong>1050</strong> series modules. The messages are identical or very similar in<br />
the various modules.<br />
E00 : Power Fail E00 HH:MM DDMMM power fail ><br />
This message indicates that the instrument has either been disconnected<br />
from line source or a line power voltage drop has occurred. System clock will<br />
stop and has to be set again after turning on the pump.<br />
E01 : Leak Detected E01 HH:MM DDMMM leak detected ><br />
leak detected in pump<br />
The leak detection system uses a PTC resistor as leak sensing item. Liquid<br />
cooling the PTC results in a decrease <strong>of</strong> the resistance. The PTC is built in a<br />
resistor divider which is connected to a constant voltage. From the voltage<br />
divider a signal can now be obtained depending on the current through the<br />
PTC and hence depending on the temperature. The leak detection circuit is<br />
located on the CMP board and checks continuously for presence and leak<br />
conditions. If the sensor is missing (defect) or in leak condition the PTC is<br />
cooled down the error message appears (only when pump motor was turned<br />
on beforehand otherwise only a status information is given). When the<br />
module is turned on the leak message will be disabled for a short period <strong>of</strong><br />
time (30 seconds) to allow the sensor to warm up and stabilize.<br />
Working condition <strong>of</strong> the PTC<br />
Normal: about 75°C 400...500 Ohm<br />
Error: below 55°C about 150 Ohm<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 165
E02 : Shutdown In<br />
Other Module<br />
E03 : Error Method<br />
loaded<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Error Messages<br />
Actions:<br />
❏ Check for leaks in the pump module.<br />
❏ Check connector <strong>of</strong> the sensor.<br />
❏ Check resistance <strong>of</strong> leak sensor.<br />
❏ Change leak sensor.<br />
❏ Change CMP board.<br />
❏ Change SFW board.<br />
E02 HH:MM DDMMM shut down ><br />
error in other module<br />
An external device pulled the shut down line <strong>of</strong> the remote connector down.<br />
This forces the pump to stop the pump motor inhibiting a flow into the<br />
system. Probably a leak appeared in one <strong>of</strong> the connected modules.<br />
E03 HH:MM DDMMM error method ><br />
error method has been loaded<br />
The operator may define a method as a error method. The event message<br />
indicates that the module detected an error and that the error method was<br />
loaded.<br />
E04 : Time Out E04 HH:MM DDMMM time out<br />
The operator may define a time after which the instruments stops all further<br />
actions. Mainly two cases will lead to the time out message. First if a normal<br />
run is finished the pump is turned <strong>of</strong>f after the specified time (only if no new<br />
start command appears during this time). Second a not ready condition in a<br />
sequence mode or in multiple run mode will start the time out timer<br />
eventually leading to the message.<br />
166 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
E11 : Gradient<br />
feedback failed<br />
E12 : Servo restart<br />
failed<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pump Initialization Error Messages<br />
Pump Initialization Error Messages<br />
During the pump initialization the system performs some start up routines to<br />
prepare the motor drive system for normal operation. The system starts the<br />
servo system and measures the upper dead center <strong>of</strong> the first piston.<br />
Malfunctions during the turn on process will lead to the following error<br />
messages.<br />
E11 HH:MM DDMMM init failed ><br />
gradient feedback failed<br />
In case the gradient valve (MCGV) is installed and recognized during boot up<br />
the system turns on the Primary Channel before it starts with any other<br />
action. The error message indicates that the primary channel could not be<br />
turned on. Reason is an communication problem between the pump drive<br />
control board (PDC) and gradient valve driver board (HRQ).<br />
❏ Check for proper connection <strong>of</strong> HRQ and PDC boards.<br />
❏ Replace HRQ board.<br />
❏ Replace PDC board.<br />
Work around: Set different primary channels one <strong>of</strong> them should work. Use<br />
pre mixed solvents and connect the solvent directly to the active inlet valve.<br />
E12 HH:MM DDMMM init failed ><br />
servo restart failed ><br />
The first action for the servo motor is to switch on the C-phase <strong>of</strong> the variable<br />
reluctance motor. The rotor will move to one <strong>of</strong> the C-positions. This action<br />
is called the Servo Restart. From such a rotor stator relation the servo will be<br />
able to take over the phase sequencing with the commutator (on the PDC<br />
board). If the rotor is not able to move or the C-phase cannot be reached the<br />
error message appears.<br />
❏ Check Fuse on the PDC board.<br />
❏ Check cables to pump motor.<br />
❏ Check for mechanical blockage <strong>of</strong> the drive system.<br />
❏ Change PDC board.<br />
❏ Change drive assembly.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 167
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pump Initialization Error Messages<br />
E13 : Pump timeout E13 HH:MM DDMMM init failed ><br />
pump timeout<br />
After restart the pump will move the first piston to its upper position. The<br />
upper position is recognized when the piston touches the mechanical stop<br />
rising drive power for the blocked motor. If the piston will not reach the<br />
upper limit within one minute the initialization will be stopped and the error<br />
message appears.<br />
❏ Check gears <strong>of</strong> the drive assembly (broken coupler?).<br />
❏ Change PDC board.<br />
❏ Change the drive assembly.<br />
E14 / E15 / E16 The following three error messages use the same measurement principle<br />
with different limits. During the pump initialization the first piston hits the<br />
upper dead center <strong>of</strong> the pump head and stops there. To make sure that the<br />
piston will not run into this mechanical stop during normal operation the<br />
index hole <strong>of</strong> the motor shaft encoder wheel is used as the initialization<br />
reference. From the upper center the piston travels back until it reaches the<br />
index hole. There will be no reinitialization during normal operation<br />
(initialization only during pump on procedure or pump reset command). The<br />
Index position is expected in a certain range from the upper dead center. If<br />
the Index does not appear in this range one <strong>of</strong> the three messages will show<br />
up on the display.<br />
E14 : Home position<br />
not found<br />
E14 HH:MM DDMMM init failed ><br />
home position not found<br />
After the piston has hit the upper limit it will move down to find the first<br />
Index hole <strong>of</strong> the encoder. If the Index is not found in the maximum allowed<br />
number <strong>of</strong> steps this error message appears. The communication to the shaft<br />
encoder index hole is missing.<br />
❏ Check cable and connector <strong>of</strong> the encoder.<br />
❏ Check PDC board connection.<br />
❏ Change PDC board.<br />
❏ Change Drive Assembly.<br />
168 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
E15 : Home position<br />
out <strong>of</strong> limit<br />
E16 : Pump head<br />
missing<br />
E17 : Idle power<br />
exceeded<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pump Initialization Error Messages<br />
E15 HH:MM DDMMM init failed ><br />
home position out <strong>of</strong> limit<br />
When the motor is stopped for reversing the direction the moment <strong>of</strong> inertia<br />
<strong>of</strong> motor and spindle will continue the movement for certain steps until it<br />
finally stops. Therefore an minimum number <strong>of</strong> steps is necessary until the<br />
Index should be reached. In case the number is to small this error message<br />
appears. Changed adjustment or sticking movement <strong>of</strong> the system can be the<br />
reason for this.<br />
❏ Check drive system for smooth movement.<br />
❏ Change motor drive assembly.<br />
❏ Change PDC board.<br />
E16 HH:MM DDMMM init failed ><br />
pump head missing<br />
The mechanical tolerances from one system to the other need an <strong>of</strong>fset<br />
compensation to make sure that the piston reverses its direction always at<br />
the same position. If the distance between the upper limit and the first index<br />
exceeds the compensation range but is still below the maximum limit (E14)<br />
the error message will show up. Reason can be that the pump head is missing<br />
or not mounted in the right way.<br />
❏ Mount pump head correctly.<br />
❏ Check drive system for smooth movement.<br />
❏ Change motor drive assembly.<br />
❏ Change PDC board.<br />
E17 HH:MM DDMMM init failed ><br />
idle power exceeded<br />
The PDC board measures the actual electrical current. If the motor needs<br />
more then a defined current for a pressure free pump it indicate a failure in<br />
the system. Reason is either an tight mechanical system or a defective motor.<br />
❏ Check drive system for smooth movement.<br />
❏ Check PDC board.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 169
E18 : Stroke length<br />
misadjusted<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pump Initialization Error Messages<br />
E18 HH:MM DDMMM init failed ><br />
stroke length misadjusted<br />
This error message appears only when the pump is running in DIAGNOSE<br />
LEVEL 3 which is a manufacturing test. The error indicates a incorrect<br />
spindle position adjustment.<br />
Hint: If error message E27 occurs when pump works with 100 µl stroke<br />
volume diagnose level 3 allows a quick check <strong>of</strong> the pump. Set diagnose level<br />
3 and turn on pump. If E18 occurs the metering drive is mis-adjusted and<br />
generates the E27 problem. Metering drive has to be changed.<br />
170 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
E19 : Pressure above<br />
upper limit<br />
E20 : Pressure above<br />
maximum limit<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Normal Operation Error Messages<br />
Normal Operation Error Messages<br />
Operation error messages can be detected at any time <strong>of</strong> a normal operation.<br />
They are normally independent <strong>of</strong> the current state <strong>of</strong> the pump. The ERROR<br />
LED will be ON and the message will be entered in the logbook. Restarting<br />
the pump will reset the error.<br />
E19 HH:MM DDMMM press too high ><br />
pressure above upper limit<br />
The actual pressure in the system is continuously monitored during<br />
operation <strong>of</strong> the pump. The firmware allows only operation up to the user<br />
defined upper limit, if not in purge mode. If the high pressure damper detects<br />
more than the upper limit the pump is turned <strong>of</strong>f or a specified error method<br />
will be activated and the error message appears. All this measurements are<br />
performed on the RAD board.<br />
❏ Check flow system for blockages.<br />
❏ Check Flow setting.<br />
❏ Change RAD board.<br />
E20 HH:MM DDMMM press too high ><br />
pressure above maximum limit<br />
The system pressure is normally checked with the upper and lower limit<br />
values. In case <strong>of</strong> any malfunction (for example pump does not stop at<br />
400 bar rapid fast pressure increase) in the system which allow the pressure<br />
to rise above 420 bar the pump is stopped and the error message appears.<br />
This message shows up when the system is blocked and the pressure shoots<br />
up very fast (pressure test).<br />
❏ Check flow system for blockages.<br />
❏ Check flow setting.<br />
❏ Change RAD board.<br />
❏ Change PDC board.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 171
E21 : Pressure below<br />
lower limit<br />
E22 : Temperature<br />
sensor failed<br />
E23 : Motor<br />
temperature<br />
exceeded limit<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Normal Operation Error Messages<br />
E21 HH:MM DDMMM press too low ><br />
pressure below lower limit<br />
The lower limit value function is firmware controlled. In case the system<br />
pressure drops once below a user defined value the pump motor will be<br />
turned <strong>of</strong>f or the specified error method will be activated and the error<br />
message appears. The error message allows to check the system for empty<br />
solvent bottles, broken capillaries, fitting leakage and so on.<br />
❏ Check flow value and solvent composition.<br />
❏ Check all seals and fittings in the complete LC system.<br />
E22 HH:MM DDMMM sensor failed ><br />
temperature sensor failed<br />
While the pump is turned on the firmware checks for the presence <strong>of</strong> the<br />
temperature sensor. In case the sensor is disconnected defective or the<br />
sensor is activated (switch open) by an over temperature condition the error<br />
message appears. The temperature sensor switch opens at 90°C and the<br />
pump motor will be turned <strong>of</strong>f.<br />
❏ Check fan.<br />
❏ Check air filters.<br />
❏ Check sensor with meter.<br />
❏ Change metering drive.<br />
❏ Change RAD board.<br />
E23 HH:MM DDMMM overtemperature><br />
motor temp exceeded limit<br />
The highest power consumption in the module is inside the variable<br />
reluctance motor. High system back pressure at low flow rates results in<br />
maximum heat dissipation. A fan and a special designed foam part make sure<br />
that the heat <strong>of</strong> the motor is brought out <strong>of</strong> the instrument. In case the<br />
airstream <strong>of</strong> the module is interrupted or the fan fails the motor temperature<br />
will rise above allowed limits. A thermal switch is mounted on the surface <strong>of</strong><br />
the motor and turns <strong>of</strong>f the pump when the temperature exceeds 90°C.<br />
The error event circuit reacts immediately on the PDC board and turns <strong>of</strong>f<br />
the pump motor power. The same signal line on the PDC board is also used<br />
from the system ok command (SOK). This means that the error also appears<br />
in case <strong>of</strong> a SOK error. The SOK is set when the processor has locked up<br />
172 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
E24 : Inlet valve<br />
disconnected<br />
E25 : Adjust pressure<br />
<strong>of</strong>fset<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Normal Operation Error Messages<br />
preventing damage <strong>of</strong> pump or others or one <strong>of</strong> the boards holds the signal<br />
down.<br />
❏ Check fan.<br />
❏ Check air flow path.<br />
❏ Check temperature <strong>of</strong> the motor.<br />
❏ Change PDC board.<br />
❏ Check all other boards in the system.<br />
❏ Change CMP board.<br />
E24 HH:MM DDMMM valve missing ><br />
inlet valve disconnected<br />
If the active inlet valve is disconnected and the first piston is delivering<br />
solvent the valve may be damaged. Therefore the presence <strong>of</strong> the active inlet<br />
valve is controlled. In case the active inlet valve is not connected during the<br />
initialization <strong>of</strong> the pump the pump motor is turned <strong>of</strong>f and the message<br />
occurs.<br />
❏ Check Connector <strong>of</strong> the valve.<br />
❏ Check the connector cable to the motherboard.<br />
❏ Change RAD board.<br />
E25 HH:MM DDMMM pressure <strong>of</strong>fset><br />
adjust pressure <strong>of</strong>fset<br />
The high pressure damping unit measures the system pressure in the range<br />
from 0 to 400 bar. Thermal drift <strong>of</strong> the electronic components may cause drift<br />
to negative values. If the pressure <strong>of</strong>fset is below -15 bar the error message<br />
appears on the display. Incorrect adjustment may influence the pump<br />
performance (pressure ripple measurement and so on).<br />
❏ Perform <strong>of</strong>fset adjustment.<br />
❏ Check connector <strong>of</strong> damping unit.<br />
❏ Change RAD board.<br />
❏ Change damping unit.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 173
E26 : Pump drive lost<br />
init values<br />
E27 : Max motor drive<br />
power exceeded<br />
E28 : Secondary<br />
Powerfail<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Normal Operation Error Messages<br />
E26 HH:MM DDMMM init lost<br />
pump drive lost init values<br />
The reference position for the upper limit <strong>of</strong> the piston is reached during<br />
each pump cycle. In case the difference <strong>of</strong> the actual value in relation to the<br />
value <strong>of</strong> the initialization is too large the system will turn <strong>of</strong>f the pump and<br />
the error message appears.<br />
❏ Check connector and cable <strong>of</strong> the encoder.<br />
❏ Change PDC board.<br />
❏ Change motor drive assembly.<br />
E27 HH:MM DDMMM power use high><br />
max motor drive power exceeded<br />
The power consumption <strong>of</strong> the motor drive will be monitored. In case <strong>of</strong><br />
servo failures or blockages <strong>of</strong> the ball screw drive the motor current will<br />
exceed the maximum limit and the processor will turn <strong>of</strong>f the pump.<br />
❏ Check motor drive for smooth movement.<br />
❏ Check the +12 V on the PDC board.<br />
❏ Change PDC board.<br />
❏ Change motor drive assembly.<br />
❏ Check outlet ball valve for blockages.<br />
E28 HH:MM DDMMM Sec Powerfail ><br />
+12 V analog supply failed<br />
The +12 V generated on the PDC board will be continuously checked for<br />
under voltage conditions. In case the voltages drops below approximately<br />
+10 V the pump will shut down and the error message will appear. The +12 V<br />
will be also used on the RAD board and the pressure transducer board <strong>of</strong> the<br />
damping unit.<br />
❏ Change the PDC Board.<br />
❏ Change the RAD Board.<br />
❏ Change the Damping Unit.<br />
174 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
E33 : Column heater<br />
cable disconnected<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Column Heater Error Messages<br />
Column Heater Error Messages<br />
The following messages may appear as you work with the column heater.<br />
E33 HH:MM DDMMM column heater ><br />
cable disconnected<br />
The firmware recognizes the column heater option when the cable is correct<br />
installed. If afterwards the cable is disconnected or a wrong cable is<br />
connected to the HRI/HRQ board the error message appears and the red<br />
error LED is turned on.<br />
NOTE When the remote cable is connected to the HRI/HRQ board the error message<br />
will appear and the +24 V <strong>of</strong> the board is disabled to prevent damage <strong>of</strong> the<br />
modules which are connected to the remote cable.<br />
E34 : Column heater<br />
board failed<br />
If the column heater cable is connected to the remote connector <strong>of</strong> the pump<br />
module the LED on the heater module will lit yellow/red.<br />
❏ Check for correct cabling <strong>of</strong> the column heater module.<br />
E34 HH:MM DDMMM column heater ><br />
board failed<br />
The watch dog circuit on the CMP board (SOK signal) controls the correct<br />
communication between processor and interface boards. If the SOK signal is<br />
activated the error massage appears and the error LED <strong>of</strong> the pump module<br />
is turned on and the column heater LED shines red. Reason for the error can<br />
be either an electronic component failure or interference on the bus lines.<br />
❏ Reboot the pump module.<br />
❏ Reseat all boards in the card cage.<br />
❏ Change the HRI/HRQ board.<br />
❏ Change the CMP board.<br />
❏ Change the CIB board.<br />
❏ Change the SFW board.<br />
❏ Change the HPS board.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 175
E35 : Column heater<br />
overtemperature<br />
E36 : Column heater<br />
fuse blown<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Column Heater Error Messages<br />
E35 HH:MM DDMMM column heater ><br />
overtemperature<br />
The column temperature is normally checked with the Pt. 100. In case <strong>of</strong><br />
malfunctions the temperature may exceed the normal working range. At 90°C<br />
the firmware disables the heater circuit, sets the error message and turns on<br />
the red error LED at the pump and the column heater. In case the heater<br />
transistor is defective and still heats up the heat exchanger the over<br />
temperature switch on the heater foil opens at 100°C and interrupts heating.<br />
❏ Change the HRI/HRQ board.<br />
E36 HH:MM DDMMM column heater ><br />
fuse blown<br />
With the column heater turned on the firmware checks for the presence <strong>of</strong><br />
the +24 V on the HRI/HRQ board. If fuse F4 is blown, the +24 V is missing and<br />
the instrument shows the error message, turns on the red error LED on the<br />
pump and the column heater module. The fuse blows in case <strong>of</strong> a shortage on<br />
the +24 V line.<br />
❏ Replace fuse F4.<br />
176 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
M01 : Pump reference<br />
initialized<br />
M02 / M03 : Gas<br />
bubble<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Online Monitor Messages<br />
Online Monitor Messages<br />
The online monitor function checks the metering pump during normal<br />
operation and is described in the diagnostic section. Messages may appear<br />
when the chromatographic performance might be influenced or the<br />
instrument is in a special mode (initialization purge).<br />
The messages except <strong>of</strong> M01 and M11 are related to the Diagnose Level<br />
(0, 1, 2) <strong>of</strong> the instrument. If the diagnose level is turned <strong>of</strong>f (0) the messages<br />
will be suppressed. Diagnose Level 1 writes the messages into the logbook<br />
with no further action. Diagnose Level 2 writes the messages into the<br />
logbook and the Not Ready LED will be turned ON. For more information<br />
about the online monitor, see the diagnostic chapter.<br />
M01 HH:MM DDMMM initialized ><br />
pumps reference initialized<br />
The initialization <strong>of</strong> the metering drive reference values appears under three<br />
conditions. First after initial turn on <strong>of</strong> the pump after boot up second with a<br />
reset pump command (Control Function) and third when the pump is turned<br />
on and the reference values have been lost for any reasons. In this case the<br />
message is an indication that a covered problem appeared while the pump<br />
was turned <strong>of</strong>f. Because <strong>of</strong> its state (<strong>of</strong>f) the pump could not show the<br />
malfunction and the instrument performs a new initialization. During this<br />
initialization the probable error will be cleared and when the error is not<br />
solid the pump will be turned on without problem.<br />
M02 HH:MM DDMMM gas bubble ><br />
gas problem ripple too high<br />
M03 HH:MM DDMMM bubble solved ><br />
problem solved ripple in range<br />
If the pressure ripple <strong>of</strong> the pump exceeds a certain range the message M02<br />
appears. In case <strong>of</strong> a temporary disturbance the ripple might return to its<br />
normal working range and indicates this with message M03.<br />
❏ Check for proper degassing.<br />
❏ Check for appropriate compressibility setting.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 177
M04 / M05 : 1st piston<br />
leak<br />
M06 / M07 : Valve<br />
backflow<br />
M08 / M09 : Outlet<br />
Valve<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Online Monitor Messages<br />
M04 HH:MM DDMMM 1st piston leak><br />
check seals or inlet valve<br />
M05 HH:MM DDMMM 1st piston ok ><br />
problem solved leak in range<br />
If the online monitor function detects a leak in the first piston chamber the<br />
above message M4 appears. If the instrument returns to normal operation<br />
(problem solved by user) the message M5 indicates a good working<br />
instrument. The occurrence <strong>of</strong> M4 is a very good indicator when the seals<br />
should be changed.<br />
❏ Check for leaks a fittings.<br />
❏ Check for tight connection <strong>of</strong> the active inlet valve.<br />
❏ Change seals.<br />
❏ Change active inlet valve.<br />
M06 HH:MM DDMMM valve backflow><br />
check outlet valve<br />
M07 HH:MM DDMMM valve tight ><br />
problem solved no backflow<br />
M06 indicates that the pump detected a backflow in the outlet valve which<br />
indicates that the valve has been closed but is not tight. M07 indicates that<br />
the problem was solved.<br />
❏ Clean outlet valve.<br />
❏ Change outlet ball valve.<br />
M08 HH:MM DDMMM outlet valve ><br />
clean outlet valve<br />
M09 HH:MM DDMMM outlet valve ok><br />
problem solved outlet valve ok<br />
M08 appears when the outlet ball valve shows a time delay before it blocks<br />
the flow path in the correct way. This is an indication that the valve sticks<br />
and need to be cleaned.<br />
❏ Clean outlet ball valve.<br />
❏ Change outlet ball valve.<br />
178 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
M11 : Purging mode<br />
activated<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Online Monitor Messages<br />
M11 HH:MM DDMMM purging ><br />
purge mode activated<br />
This message shows when the instrument was purged the last time.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 179
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Troubleshooting Hints<br />
Troubleshooting Hints<br />
This section gives practical hints in troubleshooting the pumps according to<br />
the pressure plots:<br />
Pressure Tests with different Solvents (water methanol)<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
180 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Standard Pressure Tests with different Solvents<br />
Standard Pressure Tests with different<br />
Solvents<br />
The factory tests all the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps with isopropanol (IPA). Therefore the<br />
tests should be done with this solvent for comparison reasons. Sometimes<br />
isopropanol is not available at customer side. Following are pressure tests<br />
which are performed with water and methanol.<br />
Modified Pressure Tests<br />
The pressure pr<strong>of</strong>ile looks very similar to the one with isopropanol. There are<br />
little steps when the piston change there direction. This is due to the<br />
compressibility compensation setting (default 100). It is important that the<br />
slope for both pistons are parallel to each other.<br />
With methanol the pressure drop at 400 bar is larger than with isopropanol<br />
because <strong>of</strong> the lower viscosity.<br />
Figure 55 Modified Pressure Test with Water<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 181
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Standard Pressure Tests with different Solvents<br />
Figure 56 Modified Pressure Test with Methanol<br />
With methanol the pressure drop at 400 bar is larger than with isopropanol<br />
because <strong>of</strong> the lower viscosity.<br />
Pressure Tests - Firmware Revision 1.0<br />
The results with water and methanol are similar than the one with<br />
isopropanol. The plateaus reach approximately the same height. Also the<br />
step 6 should be in the range 300 bar to 360 bar. The test with water shows<br />
that the step 6 exceeds already the upper pressure limit (400 bar). Reason is<br />
the lower compressibility <strong>of</strong> water compared to isopropanol.<br />
182 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Standard Pressure Tests with different Solvents<br />
Figure 57 Pressure Test (Rev. 1.0) with Water<br />
Figure 58 Pressure Test (Rev. 1.0) with Methanol<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 183
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Standard Pressure Tests with different Solvents<br />
Pressure Tests - Firmware Revision 3.0 and above<br />
Due to the pressure controlled test the results are very similar as the one with<br />
isopropanol. The pressure drop with methanol is slightly larger.<br />
Figure 59 Pressure Test (Rev. 3.0) with Water<br />
Figure 60 Pressure Test (Rev. 3.0) with Methanol<br />
184 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
The pressure plots <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps are a helpful tool for troubleshooting<br />
the pumping system. Online diagnostic messages and flow related error<br />
messages should be always verified by the previous described pressure plots.<br />
This section shows examples <strong>of</strong> pressure plots for different in the factory<br />
generated failure modes. They should give indications how a possible failure<br />
looks like. The modified pressure test and the flow test method for firmware<br />
revision 1.0 and 3.0 are shown for the same failure symptom.<br />
The modified test and the flow test method should be always used together to<br />
get a clear information about the problem <strong>of</strong> the pump.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 185
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Pressure Tests - Leak at Piston Seal 1<br />
Figure 61 Modified Pressure Test - Leak at Piston Seal 1<br />
The flow is reduced to 0.1 ml/min at approximately 240 bar. From this point<br />
both piston deliver with a constant value and increase the pressure to<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Figure 62 Pressure Test (Rev. 1.0) - Leak at Piston Seal 1<br />
The flow test method shows a quite normal pressure pr<strong>of</strong>ile. Only on the<br />
slope to reach the upper limit some pressure fluctuations can be seen. The<br />
modified pressure test showed that the seal leaked at more than 320 bar.<br />
Therefore the flow test method cannot detect this defective seal.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 187
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Figure 63 Pressure Test (Rev. 3.0) - Leak at Piston Seal 1<br />
The flow test method reduces the flow to 100 µl at approximately 320 bar.<br />
The pressure drops and when the piston I delivers with its small flow rate a<br />
continuous pressure drop can be observed at the first plateau. The second<br />
plateau shows a slight pressure increase and the upper limit shows stable<br />
conditions. The pressure drop at the first plateau indicates a leak on the first<br />
piston side. In this case a leaky piston seal.<br />
188 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Pressure Tests - Leak at Piston Seal 2<br />
Figure 64 Modified Pressure Test - Leak at Piston Seal 2<br />
The flow is reduced to 0.1 ml/min at approximately 240 bar. From this point<br />
both piston deliver into the system with a constant rate. At 360 bar to<br />
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Figure 65 Pressure Test (Rev. 1.0) - Leak at Piston Seal 2<br />
The pressure pr<strong>of</strong>ile shows a pressure drop at the upper limit. The modified<br />
test showed that the leak appears at more than 370 bar. Therefore the two<br />
plateaus cannot show the malfunction. At the upper limit the outlet ball valve<br />
is closed which indicates that the problem is on the second piston side. In<br />
this case the flow test method cannot clearly identify the leaky seal. The<br />
modified test is needed in addition.<br />
190 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Figure 66 Pressure Test (Rev. 3.0) - Leak at Piston Seal 2<br />
Both plateaus for piston 1 and piston 2 and the upper limit <strong>of</strong> the test show a<br />
certain pressure drop. Here it is very obvious that the problem is on the<br />
second piston side. In this case it is the second piston seal.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 191
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Pressure Tests - Defective Piston 1<br />
Figure 67 Modified Pressure Test - Defective Piston 1 (Stroke AUTO)<br />
The pump is working with the default stroke (AUTO) setting. The flow is<br />
reduced to 0.1 ml/min at approximately 260 bar. The pressure moves up to<br />
the upper pressure limit in a oscillating curve. At the upper limit the pressure<br />
remains stable. One <strong>of</strong> the two pistons generates a small leak when delivering<br />
(pressure drop). The stable pressure line at 400 bar points to a problem on<br />
the first piston side. Firmware revision 3.0 allows to verify that the pressure<br />
drop appears on piston 1.<br />
NOTE When the piston is scratched in a certain part the failure cannot be always<br />
detected when using the default stroke setting. Therefore the test should be<br />
done also with a stroke <strong>of</strong> 100 µl.<br />
192 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Figure 68 Modified Pressure Test - Defective Piston 1 (Stroke 100 µl)<br />
Here the pressure test has been done with a stroke <strong>of</strong> 100 µl. The pressure<br />
pr<strong>of</strong>ile gives additional information to the previous plot. When delivering<br />
with the small flow rate the pressure increases for a long time but drops only<br />
for a relatively short time. With the currently active display <strong>of</strong> firmware<br />
revision 3.0 it can be seen that the pressure drops while the first piston is in<br />
the middle <strong>of</strong> its stroke. This indicates that the piston itself is the source <strong>of</strong><br />
the problem. The test checks the pressure tightness <strong>of</strong> the seal over the full<br />
length <strong>of</strong> the piston.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 193
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Figure 69 Pressure Test (Rev. 1.0) - Defective Piston Seal 1<br />
Before the pressure reaches the two plateaus there is always a pressure dip<br />
when the piston change there direction. Before the pressure reaches the<br />
upper limit an oscillating curve can be seen. At the upper limit the pressure is<br />
stable. All this indicates that the pump is not working correctly but it is very<br />
difficult to locate the source <strong>of</strong> the problem.<br />
194 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Figure 70 Pressure Test (Rev. 3.0) - Defective Piston 1<br />
The pressure increases in an oscillating curve. When exceeding 270 bar<br />
piston 2 delivers with one large stroke into the system and increases the<br />
pressure by more than 40 bar. This points already to a problem on the first<br />
piston side. Now piston 1 delivers into the system increases the pressure for<br />
a short time and then the pressure decreases for the whole plateau. The<br />
second plateau looks quite normal and also the upper value when reached<br />
after some pressure dips is stable. It is quite obvious that the problem is on<br />
the first piston side. In this case the piston is defective.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 195
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Pressure Tests - Defective Piston 2<br />
Figure 71 Modified Pressure Test (Stroke AUTO) - Defective Piston 2<br />
Even with the reduced flow <strong>of</strong> 0.1 ml/min the pistons deliver with constant<br />
rate into the system. After reaching the upper pressure value a continuous<br />
pressure drop occurs. This indicates a problem. Therefore the test was<br />
repeated with a stroke <strong>of</strong> 100 µl.<br />
196 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Figure 72 Modified Pressure Test (Stroke 100 µl) - Defective Piston 2<br />
This pressure pr<strong>of</strong>ile shows a totally different behavior then the previous<br />
one. There are already pressure drops when the flow is 1.0 ml/min and the<br />
piston change there directions. When the flow is reduced to 0.1 ml/min the<br />
pressure drops with each stroke <strong>of</strong> the pistons until it is zero. With firmware<br />
revision 3.0 it can be checked that the pressure drops appear on both pistons<br />
but that the slight pressure increase is generated by piston 1. The piston is<br />
scratched in its lower part. Delivering with a small stroke volume into the<br />
system generates no problem. With the maximum flow rate <strong>of</strong> 100 µl the<br />
scratched part has to move through the seal and is obviously leaking.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 197
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Figure 73 Pressure Test (Rev. 1.0) - Defective Piston 2<br />
The both pressure plateaus cannot be reached but when switching to the part<br />
where the instrument uses a stroke volume <strong>of</strong> 4 µl the pressure increases up<br />
to its normal value. At the upper limit a slight leak rate is visible. The<br />
scratches in the lower part <strong>of</strong> the piston are not visible when the pump is<br />
working with its small stroke volume.<br />
198 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Figure 74 Pressure Test (Rev. 3.0) - Defective Piston 2<br />
The pressure pr<strong>of</strong>ile looks very strange. In the first part the pressure<br />
increases up to approximately 320 bar and than it drops down to about<br />
100 bar with normal behavior <strong>of</strong> the two plateaus and afterwards an increase<br />
<strong>of</strong> the pressure to 400 bar with a slight pressure decrease at the upper limit.<br />
Before reaching the first plateau the second piston performs one large (80 µl)<br />
stroke. At this point the pressure drops. When the piston is moving only with<br />
the upper part through the seal no leak can be seen. But when the scratched<br />
part <strong>of</strong> the piston moves through the seal the system is no longer tight and the<br />
pressure drops. At the low pressure value the system is still tight and<br />
therefore the plateaus show no problem. The pump then reaches the upper<br />
limit with 250 µl and a stroke volume <strong>of</strong> 20 µl. Here the piston uses again only<br />
the unscratched part <strong>of</strong> the piston.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 199
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Pressure Tests - Defective Active Inlet Valve<br />
Figure 75 Modified Pressure Test - Defective Active Inlet Valve<br />
With the reduced flow rate <strong>of</strong> 0.1 ml/min the pressure increases slowly in an<br />
oscillating curve until the upper limit is reached. At the upper limit the<br />
pressure is stable pointing onto a problem on the first piston side. The<br />
actively current piston display <strong>of</strong> firmware revision 3.0 shows that the<br />
pressure drop is on the first piston side.<br />
200 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Figure 76 Pressure Test (Rev. 1.0) - Defective Active Inlet Valve<br />
The test fails completely. The pressure in the system cannot be increased to<br />
reach the plateaus at a pressure <strong>of</strong> more than 100 bar. Also the rest <strong>of</strong> the test<br />
does not reach useful pressure values. Therefore the test provides no<br />
information about the problem in the system.<br />
NOTE In such a case the pump can be troubleshooted in the following way. Move the<br />
solvent inlet tubing out <strong>of</strong> the bottle and let the pump draw a large air bubble<br />
(for example 5 cm in the tubing). In a normal working pump the bubble will<br />
move during the intake stroke <strong>of</strong> piston 1 and will stop when the first piston is<br />
delivering into the system. If the active inlet valve is internally leaky the air<br />
bubble will move forwards during the intake stroke and the whole time<br />
backwards when the piston is delivering into the system.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 201
Pumps: Diagnostic Information<br />
Pressure Tests when the Pump is broken<br />
Figure 77 Pressure Test (Rev. 3.0) - Defective Active Inlet Valve<br />
Also the new version <strong>of</strong> the test fails. The pressure in the system cannot be<br />
increased to the two plateaus (>270 bar). The pressure in the system<br />
stabilizes below that value. The pump can be troubleshooted as described<br />
before.<br />
202 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
8<br />
8 Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
This chapter provides provide procedures for<br />
service and maintenance <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
This section provides information on the procedures used for maintenance<br />
replacement and alignment <strong>of</strong> assemblies in the pump. You will find<br />
procedures for:<br />
Solvent Cabinet and Column Heater<br />
❏ Heat Exchanger<br />
❏ Solvent Cabinet Cable Assembly<br />
Pump Mainframe<br />
❏ Active Inlet Valve<br />
❏ Outlet Ball Valve<br />
❏ Frit Adapter Assembly<br />
❏ Purge Valve<br />
❏ Pump Head Assembly<br />
❏ Continuous Seal Wash<br />
❏ Fan<br />
❏ Metering Drive Assembly<br />
204 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Solvent Cabinet and Column Heater<br />
Solvent Cabinet and Column Heater<br />
Replacing the Heat Exchanger<br />
❏ Open column heater door and disconnect all capillaries from the heat<br />
exchanger.<br />
❏ Using a flat screw driver loosen the solvent cabinet screws.<br />
❏ Carefully take out the front panel with helium valves and manual injection<br />
valve and place on top <strong>of</strong> the solvent module.<br />
❏ Move the insulation out <strong>of</strong> its position and take it out.<br />
❏ Take out the plastic heat shield.<br />
❏ Disconnect the heater flex cable from the zero insertion force connector<br />
on the cable board.<br />
NOTE Pull the outer sleeve <strong>of</strong> the connector to its front position. This releases the<br />
tension from the cable and it can be removed from the connector without<br />
problem.<br />
❏ The heat exchanger holding screws are accessible from underneath the<br />
solvent module. Therefore move the module above the table and remove<br />
the two screws with the washers.<br />
❏ Take the heat exchanger out <strong>of</strong> the column heater compartment.<br />
❏ Place the new heat exchanger assembly into the column heater<br />
compartment. Place the washers onto the screws and fix the heat<br />
exchanger assembly in its position.<br />
❏ Insert the flex cable into the zero insertion force connector and push the<br />
sleeve back to fix the cable in its position.<br />
❏ Insert the heat shield into the compartment.<br />
❏ Place the insulation into the heat shield and carefully press it into its<br />
position. Make sure that the parts are inserted underneath the plastic ledge<br />
at the back panel <strong>of</strong> the compartment.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 205
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Solvent Cabinet and Column Heater<br />
❏ Slide the front base back into its guiding slits. Assure that the front edge <strong>of</strong><br />
the plastic heat shield is guided into the gap between the front panel and<br />
the connected metal panel.<br />
❏ Tighten the two solvent cabinet screws.<br />
❏ Reinstall all capillaries at the column heater assembly.<br />
Replacing the Cable Assembly<br />
❏ Follow the above mentioned steps for replacing the heat exchanger<br />
assembly.<br />
❏ Remove bottle tub and solvent bottles from the cabinet.<br />
❏ Remove the front base by pushing the plastic knobs from underneath the<br />
solvent cabinet and slide it out <strong>of</strong> the instrument.<br />
❏ Put the solvent cabinet onto the side loosen the cable holding screw at the<br />
back <strong>of</strong> the module and slide the cable out <strong>of</strong> the position.<br />
❏ Loosen the screw which fixes the cable connector board in its position and<br />
slide the board out <strong>of</strong> the recess.<br />
❏ Remove the tape which fixes the multi color LED.<br />
❏ Put the solvent cabinet onto the side and move the cable assembly through<br />
the holes in the back panels to get it out <strong>of</strong> the solvent cabinet.<br />
❏ Place the new cable assembly into the solvent cabinet that the board is<br />
located in the column heater compartment.<br />
❏ Slide the board into its recess place the end <strong>of</strong> the cable insulation under<br />
the washer and tighten the holding screw.<br />
NOTE Do not clamp the single wires <strong>of</strong> the cable.<br />
❏ Fix the multi color LED with a piece <strong>of</strong> tape in the groove.<br />
❏ Reinsert the base plate and fix it with the two plastic knobs. Make sure that<br />
the LED is positioned correctly and that the cables are not clamped.<br />
NOTE The rear end <strong>of</strong> the front base must fit into the recess at the back panel <strong>of</strong> the<br />
compartment.<br />
❏ Reinstall the heat exchanger assembly by following steps described in<br />
section replacing the heat exchanger assembly.<br />
206 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacing the Active Inlet Valve<br />
Replacing the Active Inlet Valve<br />
❏ Remove the ESD cover.<br />
❏ Disconnect the solenoid cable from the connector board.<br />
❏ Loosen the screw which holds the shield cable and unplug the spade lug.<br />
❏ Disconnect the active inlet valve inlet tubing.<br />
❏ Using the supplied 12 mm wrench (8710-1841) loosen the valve and<br />
remove it.<br />
NOTE It is recommended to insert a new gold seal into the plastic cap when changing<br />
the active inlet valve.<br />
❏ Place new inlet seal into the plastic cap and fix it onto the valve.<br />
❏ Insert the active valve and screw it hand tight. In this position counter hold<br />
the screw with the wrench. By hand turn the solenoid itself in either<br />
direction until the capillary connection hole is about 60° to 90° away from<br />
its final position.<br />
Figure 78 Valve Final Position (Pump head disassembled)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 207
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacing the Active Inlet Valve<br />
❏ Using the 12 mm wrench tighten the screw <strong>of</strong> the valve by turning the<br />
assembly in its final position (should not be more than a quarter turn).<br />
Make sure that the ESD cover and the solvent sucking tube can be installed<br />
with the valve in its position.<br />
❏ Fix the spade lug <strong>of</strong> the shield cable in its position and reconnect the<br />
solenoid cable to the connector board.<br />
NOTE If the active inlet valve is installed in an instrument without connection for the<br />
shield connector connect the spade lug to the holding screw <strong>of</strong> the connector<br />
board.<br />
❏ Connect the valve inlet tube to the active inlet valve.<br />
❏ Install the ESD cover<br />
❏ Perform the pressure tests to verify tightness <strong>of</strong> the system.<br />
208 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacing the Outlet Ball Valve<br />
Replacing the Outlet Ball Valve<br />
❏ Using the 14 mm wrench (8710-1924) loosen the valve screw and remove it.<br />
NOTE It is recommended to insert a new gold seal into the seal cap when the same<br />
valve will be used again.<br />
❏ Before inserting a new valve check for correct center position <strong>of</strong> the cap<br />
with the gold seal.<br />
❏ Insert the valve into the pump head and screw it hand tight. Fix the valve<br />
by turning another quarter turn with the 14 mm wrench.<br />
NOTE The plastic cover should always be installed. This prevents loosing the holding<br />
screw when disassembled and does not allow to damage the outlet ball valve<br />
by tightening at the cartridge itself.<br />
❏ Perform the pressure tests to verify the tightness <strong>of</strong> the system.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 209
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Maintaining the Frit Adapter Assembly<br />
Maintaining the Frit Adapter Assembly<br />
❏ Using the 14 mm wrench (8710-1924) loosen the frit adapter assembly and<br />
remove it.<br />
❏ Remove the cap (6) with the gold seal (5) and take out the dirty frit (4).<br />
❏ Clean the adapter chamber from all particles. Best is to use a degreaser<br />
spray.<br />
❏ Insert the new frit into the adapter. Ensure that the slit <strong>of</strong> the frit is facing<br />
downwards, otherwise the filter capacity is reduced.<br />
❏ Place cap and gold seal onto adapter.<br />
NOTE It is recommended to use always a new gold seal when the frit adapter<br />
assembly was removed from the pump head.<br />
Figure 79 Frit Adapter Assembly<br />
❏ Insert the frit adapter assembly into the pump head and screw it hand tight.<br />
Fix the assembly by turning another quarter turn with the 14 mm wrench.<br />
❏ Perform the pressure tests to verify the tightness <strong>of</strong> the pump.<br />
210 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Maintaining the Purge Valve<br />
Maintaining the Purge Valve<br />
Changing the PTFE Frit<br />
❏ Disconnect capillary to injector and waste tube from purge valve outlet.<br />
❏ Using the 14 mm wrench open the purge valve at the hexagonal nut.<br />
❏ For the next steps refer to “Maintaining the Frit Adapter Assembly” on<br />
page 210.<br />
Cleaning the Purge Valve<br />
NOTE Leaks in the purge valve can be due to particles (for example salt<br />
precipitation) between seat and ball. Therefore the cleaning procedure should<br />
be performed before replacing the whole valve.<br />
❏ Remove the purge valve from the pump head as described before.<br />
❏ Open the purge valve counter clockwise until the had screw (6) is loose.<br />
NOTE Do not open the securing ring on top <strong>of</strong> the hand screw and do not change the<br />
seat.<br />
Figure 80 Purge Valve<br />
❏ Clean the upper and lower part in a ultrasonic bath using methanol or<br />
isopropanol.<br />
❏ Re-assemble the purge valve parts and re-install purge valve.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 211
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Maintaining the Pump Head Assembly<br />
Table 45 Pump Head Versions<br />
Maintaining the Pump Head Assembly<br />
There are two different versions <strong>of</strong> the pump head available. In the latest<br />
version the spring is integrated in the plunger housing. The following table<br />
shows the serial number prefix at introduction <strong>of</strong> the new plunger housing<br />
design.<br />
Pump SN Prefix Procedure<br />
79851A 3447 G ..... 2<br />
79852A/B 3447 G ..... 2<br />
79851A 3448 A ..... 2<br />
79852A/B 3448 A ..... 2<br />
212 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Procedure 1: Pump Head with old Plunger Housing<br />
Procedure 1: Pump Head with old Plunger<br />
Housing<br />
NOTE The pump head has two identical channels. When disassembling the pump<br />
head it is advisable not to interchange the parts <strong>of</strong> each channel for better<br />
failure identification.<br />
NOTE Since introduction <strong>of</strong> the new plunger housing design the old plunger housing<br />
parts are no longer available. The new parts are fully compatible to all existing<br />
pump heads.<br />
Stage 1: Removing the Pump Head Assembly<br />
❏ Disconnect all four capillaries from the pump head assembly.<br />
❏ Remove the ESD cover and disconnect the cable <strong>of</strong> the active inlet valve.<br />
❏ Remove the two pump head screws and take out the pump head assembly.<br />
Stage 2: Disassembling the Pump Head assembly<br />
❏ Place the assembly on the head and remove the three holding screws.<br />
❏ Carefully separate the head from the plunger housing.<br />
CAUTION Do not twist the parts while separating. This could break the sapphire plunger.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 213
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Procedure 1: Pump Head with old Plunger Housing<br />
Stage 3: Replacing the Seals<br />
❏ Remove the two seal keeper (8) or the support seal assembly (7a).<br />
❏ Using the three millimeter hexagonal key remove the two seals (9).<br />
❏ Remove the two wear retainer (10).<br />
❏ Clean the pump head chamber from all seal particles. Best is to use a<br />
degreaser spray.<br />
❏ Place new wear retainer (10) into the pump chambers.<br />
❏ Insert new seals (9).<br />
Figure 81 Pump Head Assembly<br />
❏ Place the two seal keeper (8) onto the seal. The support seal assembly will<br />
be installed onto the plunger housing.<br />
214 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Procedure 1: Pump Head with old Plunger Housing<br />
Stage 4: Disassembling the Plunger Housing<br />
WARNING The very strong spring will catapult the adapter up when released<br />
without holding it down.<br />
Figure 82 Plunger Housing<br />
❏ Remove the two support rings (1) or the support seal assembly.<br />
❏ Hold the adapter (2) down on a table and loosen the setscrew (3) <strong>of</strong> one <strong>of</strong><br />
the plungers (5). Carefully release the tension <strong>of</strong> the spring.<br />
❏ Proceed with the second plunger in the same way.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 215
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Procedure 1: Pump Head with old Plunger Housing<br />
Stage 5: Reassembling the Plunger Housing<br />
❏ Place the plunger keeper (6) on a table and insert plunger (5) and spring<br />
(4).<br />
❏ Take the plunger housing (2) and place it on top <strong>of</strong> the spring (4).<br />
NOTE Make sure that the spring (4) does not stick before the top <strong>of</strong> the housing (2).<br />
❏ Press the housing (2) down over the plunger keeper (6) and when flat on<br />
the table tighten the setscrew (3).<br />
NOTE The plunger keeper (6) should not stick out <strong>of</strong> the bottom <strong>of</strong> the plunger<br />
housing (2).<br />
❏ Proceed in the same way for the second plunger.<br />
❏ Slide the two support rings or the support seal assembly onto the plungers<br />
but do not try to press it in its position.<br />
NOTE If the support ring or the support seal assembly (1) sticks at the housing (2)<br />
carefully push the plunger from the bottom. This will center the plunger and<br />
the support ring slides into its final position.<br />
Check the alignment by lifting the support ring out <strong>of</strong> its position. Release the<br />
support ring and check that it slides back in its position without sticking.<br />
The support seal assembly should be installed onto the plungers as described<br />
before.<br />
216 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Procedure 1: Pump Head with old Plunger Housing<br />
Stage 6: Reassembling the Pump Head Assembly<br />
See Figure 81 on page 214.<br />
❏ Prepare the head and the plunger housing as described beforehand.<br />
NOTE The seal keeper (8) should be installed on the head in front <strong>of</strong> the seals. In this<br />
position they guide the plunger into the seal and reduce the possibility <strong>of</strong><br />
breaking the plunger during the assembling <strong>of</strong> head and plunger housing.<br />
❏ Mount the plunger housing onto the head. The guiding pins prevent<br />
incorrect mounting.<br />
❏ Grease the three screws with the white Teflon lubricant (79841-65501).<br />
❏ Insert the three screws and tighten them stepwise with increased torque.<br />
Observe the slit between the two parts and make sure that they are in<br />
parallel to each other.<br />
Stage 7: Mounting the Pump Head Assembly<br />
❏ Place the pump head assembly onto the two stay bolts <strong>of</strong> the metering<br />
drive. Make sure that no capillary sticks between pump head and metering<br />
drive.<br />
❏ Put a light coating <strong>of</strong> white Teflon grease onto the mounting screws.<br />
❏ Insert the two screws and tighten them crosswise.<br />
❏ Reinstall the capillaries to the valves and the connector screw.<br />
❏ Reconnect the active inlet valve connector and fix the shield to ground.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 217
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Procedure 2: Pump Head with new Plunger Housing<br />
Procedure 2: Pump Head with new Plunger<br />
Housing<br />
NOTE The pump head has two identical channels. When disassembling the pump<br />
head it is advisable not to interchange the parts <strong>of</strong> each channel for better<br />
failure identification.<br />
Stage 1: Removing the Pump Head Assembly<br />
❏ Disconnect all four capillaries from the pump head assembly.<br />
❏ Remove the ESD cover and disconnect the cable <strong>of</strong> the active inlet valve.<br />
❏ Remove the two pump head screws and take out the pump head assembly.<br />
Stage 2: Disassembling the Pump Head Assembly<br />
❏ Place the assembly on the head and remove the three holding screws.<br />
❏ Pull the block straight up from the head being careful not to put any<br />
sidewards strain on the sapphire pistons since they could shear and break.<br />
❏ Put the plunger housing aside taking care to avoid dropping the pistons<br />
from the plunger housing.<br />
NOTE The pistons are not secured in the plunger housing and will fall out when the<br />
housing is turned upside down.<br />
❏ Remove the pistons from the plunger housing.<br />
❏ Check for scratches and dirt on the piston.<br />
NOTE Dirt can be removed by using a small quantity <strong>of</strong> tooth paste.<br />
218 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Procedure 2: Pump Head with new Plunger Housing<br />
Stage 3: Replacing the Seals<br />
❏ Remove the two support seal assemblies.<br />
❏ Using the three millimeter hexagonal key remove the two seals.<br />
❏ Remove the two wear retainer.<br />
❏ Clean the pump head chamber from all seal particles. Best is to use a<br />
degreaser spray.<br />
❏ Place new wear retainer into the pump chambers.<br />
❏ Insert new seals.<br />
❏ Place the two support seal assemblies onto the seal.<br />
Figure 83 Pump Head Assembly (new plunger housing design)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 219
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Procedure 2: Pump Head with new Plunger Housing<br />
Stage 4: Reassembling the Pump Head Assembly<br />
❏ Prepare the head as described beforehand.<br />
❏ Place the plunger housing without the pistons onto the head.<br />
❏ Tighten the three socket head screws hand tight.<br />
NOTE Tightening the screws fully will require much more force to insert the pistons<br />
into its position in the seals.<br />
❏ Insert the pistons into the assembly and carefully push it into the seal.<br />
❏ Tighten the three screws stepwise with increasing torque. Make sure that<br />
the head and plunger housing surfaces are in parallel.<br />
Stage 5: Mounting the Pump Head Assembly<br />
❏ Place the pump head assembly onto the two stay bolts <strong>of</strong> the metering<br />
drive. Make sure that no capillary sticks between pump head and metering<br />
drive.<br />
❏ Put a light coating <strong>of</strong> white Teflon grease onto the mounting screws.<br />
❏ Insert the two screws and tighten them crosswise.<br />
❏ Reinstall the capillaries to the valves and the connector screw.<br />
❏ Reconnect the active inlet valve connector and fix the shield to ground.<br />
220 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Continuous Seal Wash Option<br />
Continuous Seal Wash Option<br />
NOTE The previous described procedures for the pump heads are also applicable for<br />
the seal wash option. This procedure will only describe the secondary seal<br />
replacement.<br />
❏ Remove the pump head assembly and disassemble it following stage 1 and<br />
stage 2.<br />
❏ Remove the two support rings from the plunger housing.<br />
❏ Remove the gasket from the support ring.<br />
❏ Using the tool from the upgrade kit (01018-23702) remove the wash seal.<br />
❏ Place the new seal onto the tool and insert the new wash seal into the<br />
support ring. Ensure that the wash seal clicks into place in the support<br />
ring.<br />
Figure 84 Pump Head with continuous seal wash<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 221
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacing the Fan<br />
Replacing the Fan<br />
❏ Remove the top cover.<br />
❏ Disconnect the fan cable at the motherboard.<br />
❏ Lift the foam part at the left side <strong>of</strong> the module and slide it out to the front.<br />
❏ Carefully remove the fan from the foam part (one edge after the other).<br />
NOTE In case it is not possible to get the fan out <strong>of</strong> the foam cut the foam part at the<br />
back side between the two naps.<br />
❏ With the blade <strong>of</strong> a screwdriver separate the protection cover from the fan.<br />
❏ Insert the new fan into the foam part. The air stream should be into the<br />
module (arrow pointing down). Cable should show to the back.<br />
❏ Place the fan protection cover onto the new fan.<br />
❏ Place the foam part into its place.<br />
NOTE The foam part must be inserted into the chassis and must be replaced close to<br />
the back panel. Make sure that the upper foam part fits behind the ridge <strong>of</strong> the<br />
bottom part. It might be more convenient to replace the foam part when the<br />
motor plug is disconnected.<br />
222 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Removing the Metering Drive Assembly<br />
Removing the Metering Drive Assembly<br />
❏ Remove the pump head assembly.<br />
❏ Remove the top cover.<br />
❏ Remove the foam part with the fan.<br />
❏ Disconnect the three cable <strong>of</strong> the metering drive.<br />
❏ Unscrew the three holding screws <strong>of</strong> the base <strong>of</strong> the metering drive.<br />
NOTE The third screw is accessible through the bottom foam part.<br />
❏ Move the motor <strong>of</strong> the metering drive out <strong>of</strong> the foam part and take it out.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 223
Pumps: Maintenance Information<br />
Removing the Metering Drive Assembly<br />
224 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
9<br />
9 Pumps: Parts Information<br />
This chapter provides information on parts <strong>of</strong> the<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Pumps
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
This chapter gives complete parts listings and exploded views for the<br />
HP <strong>1050</strong> (Ti) Pumps.<br />
Electronic Boards<br />
All Ti - Parts<br />
Solvent Cabinet<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Flow Path<br />
Metering Drive Assembly<br />
Pump Head Assemblies<br />
Active Inlet Valve<br />
Outlet Ball Valve<br />
Frit Adapter Assembly<br />
Purge Valve Assembly<br />
Special Tools<br />
226 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Electronic Boards<br />
Electronic Boards<br />
Table 46 Electronic Boards<br />
For fuses refer to Table 47 on page 228.<br />
Item Description Part Number Exchange PN<br />
1 Power Supply Board DPS-B 5061-3374 0<strong>1050</strong>-69374<br />
2 Pump Drive Control 2 Board PDC 2 01018-66532<br />
# U 78 MC78L15ACP 1826-0274<br />
# U 79 MC79L15ACP 1826-0281<br />
3 Relative A/D Converter RAD 01018-66503 01018-69503<br />
4 Firmware Board SFW 01018-66506<br />
5 Heater Isocratic Board HRI 01018-66517<br />
6 Heater Quaternary Board HRQ 01018-66518 01018-69518<br />
7 Communication Interface Board CIB 5061-3382 0<strong>1050</strong>-69582<br />
8 Common Main Processor Board CMP 5061-3380 0<strong>1050</strong>-69580<br />
9 Fluorescent Indicator Module FIP 5061-3376<br />
10 Connector Board CON 01018-66505<br />
11 Motherboard HPS 01018-66501<br />
# U 78 and U 79 have to be replaced when a new metering device<br />
01018-60001/-69100 (parts included) is installed in a pump with PDC board<br />
revision A.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 227
Table 47 Fuses<br />
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Electronic Boards<br />
Description Board Part Number<br />
Fuse 110V operation (3 A) DPS-B 2110-0003<br />
Fuse 220V operation (2 A) DPS-B 2110-0002<br />
Fuse F16 (PDC); F481 (PDC2 ) 1.5 A PDC2 2110-0304<br />
Fuse F891, F892 on board 500 mA PDC 2110-0934<br />
Fuse F112, F113 on board 500 mA PDC 2 2110-0934<br />
Fuse F12, F22 250 mA RAD 2110-0004<br />
Fuse F4 2.5 A HRI, HRQ 2110-0083<br />
Fuse F15 1 A HRQ 2110-0007<br />
Fuse ICP1 1 A FIP 2110-0099<br />
Fuse F1 375 mA CON 2110-0421<br />
228 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Complete List <strong>of</strong> Ti-Parts<br />
Complete List <strong>of</strong> Ti-Parts<br />
Table 48 Complete List <strong>of</strong> Ti-Parts<br />
Description Part Number Description Part Number<br />
Ti - Pump Head Assembly 01019-60002 Ti - Capillary ID 0.17 35 cm lg 01019-87608<br />
Ti - Pump Chamber Housing 01019-25205<br />
Ti - Active Inlet Valve 01019-60010 Accessories<br />
Ti - Piston Seal 0905-1199 PCTFE - Adapter 5021-1872<br />
Ti - Damping Unit 01019-60005<br />
Ti - MCGV 01019-67701 Ti - Maintenance Kit 01019-68724<br />
Ti - Manual Injection Valve obsolete includes:<br />
Ti - Rotor Seal Tefzel 0101-0620 Ti - Piston Seal (2x) 0905-1199<br />
Ti - Stator 0101-0663 PTFE Frits 5/PK 01018-22707<br />
Ti - Loop Capillary 20 µl 0101-0655 Gasket Seal Wash (2x) 6/pk 5062-2484<br />
Ti - Bottle Head Assembly obsolete Seal Wash (2x) 0905-1175<br />
Ti - Bushing 01019-21734 Seal Gold Outlet (5x) 5001-3707<br />
Solvent Glass Filter<br />
Adapter<br />
5041-2168<br />
5062-8517<br />
Ti - He - Sparge Assembly 01019-82702<br />
Cap Outlet (5x) 4/pk 5042-1346<br />
Ti - Screw Tube 01019-23232? Ti - High Pressure Solvent Filter Kit 01019-68709<br />
Ti - Name Plate includes:<br />
Ti - Capillary Piston 1 260 mm lg 01019-67301 Ti - Capillary ID 0.25 13 cm lg 01019-87308<br />
Ti - Capillary Piston 2 210 mm lg 01019-67302 Ti - Fitting Insert (2x) 01019-27601<br />
Ti - Tubing ID 0.25 mm 700 mm lg 01019-67305 Fitting Nut (1x) 79900-25701<br />
Ti - Sucking Tube see item 13 Fitting Screen (1x) 79900-22401<br />
Fitting Insert (1x) 01019-27601<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 229
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Solvent Cabinet<br />
Solvent Cabinet<br />
Table 49 Solvent Conditioning Module<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
1 Solvent Compartment incl. (2) 01018-60019 11 Holder He-Valves 01018-05501<br />
2 Bottle Tub no PN 12 Washer 5001-3746<br />
3 Front Panel no PN 13 Screw 0624-0045<br />
Cover Cap, no injection valve 6960-0024 14 Injector Tub 01018-44503<br />
Cover Cap, no Helium on/<strong>of</strong>f<br />
valve<br />
6960-0027 15 Screw M3 4 mm lg 0515-1508<br />
Cover Cap, no Helium Regulators 6960-0028 16 Capillary ID 0.17 400 mm lg 79826-87608<br />
4 Front Base 01018-40512 16 Ti - Capillary ID 0.17 35 cm lg 01019-87608<br />
5 Oven Door 01018-60302<br />
6 Bolt 01018-43701 17 Accessory Kit, includes following<br />
items<br />
7 Door Hinge 01018-45101 Angle Injection Position (part <strong>of</strong><br />
Sensor Assembly)<br />
01018-68704<br />
01018-00511<br />
8 Name Plate 5041-2170 Sensor Assembly 5062-2432<br />
9 Tubing Flexible ID 4 mm OD 5 mm Screw lock female (2x) 1251-7788<br />
10 Funnel Leak 01018-43211 Washer M4 (2x) 3050-0893<br />
230 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Solvent Cabinet<br />
Figure 85 Solvent Cabinet<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 231
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Solvent Cabinet with Helium Degassing<br />
Solvent Cabinet with Helium Degassing<br />
Table 50 Solvent Cabinet with Helium Degassing<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
1 Solvent Compartment, incl. (2) 01018-60019 14 Solvent Bottle, 1 liter 9301-0656<br />
2 Front Panel no PN 15 Bottle Head Assembly,<br />
includes item 16 to 25<br />
3 Holder He-Valves 01018-05501 15 Ti - Bottle Head Assembly,<br />
includes item 16 to 25<br />
01018-60017<br />
01019-60017<br />
4 Screw 0624-0045 16 Bottle Head Cap 01018-44111<br />
5 Washer 5001-3746 17 Bottle Head Shaft 01018-43711<br />
6 Regulator Knob A 01018-47413 18 Bottle Head Washer 01018-48811<br />
Regulator Knob B 01018-47414 Helium Sparge Assembly,<br />
includes item 19 and 20<br />
01019-82702<br />
Regulator Knob C 01018-47415 19 Connector Helium Sparger (6/pk) 5062-8515<br />
Regulator Knob D 01018-47416 20 Helium Sparger 10-16 µl 5041-8339<br />
7 Knob On/Off 01018-47412 21 Solvent Filter SST 01018-60025<br />
8 Helium Regulator Assembly,<br />
includes item 6 an 7<br />
01018-67001 21 Solvent Glass Filter<br />
Adapter<br />
5041-2168<br />
5062-8517<br />
9 Tubing PTFE ID 1/16” OD 1/8” 0890-0746 22 Tube Bushing Teflon 79835-21734<br />
10 Fitting 0100-1430 22 Ti - Bushing 01019-21734<br />
11 Tubing Flexible ID 0,156” 0890-0581 23 Tube Screw 5041-2163<br />
12 Fitting 0100-1047 24 Tubing FEP ID 1.5 mm OD 3 mm<br />
5 m<br />
Filter Disc (part <strong>of</strong> 12) 25 Tubing PTFE ID 1.45 mm<br />
OD 2.5 mm 5 m<br />
13 Air Tubing Flexible 5 m 5021-7127<br />
5062-2483<br />
5062-2461<br />
232 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Solvent Cabinet with Helium Degassing<br />
Figure 86 Solvent Cabinet with Helium Degassing<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 233
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Solvent Cabinet with Column Heater and Manual Injection Valve<br />
Solvent Cabinet with Column Heater and<br />
Manual Injection Valve<br />
Table 51 Solvent Cabinet with Column Heater and Manual Injection Valve<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
1 Solvent Compartment, incl. (2) 01018-60019 Rheodyne Valve 7125 complete,<br />
includes item 22 to 29<br />
0101-0607<br />
2 Front Panel no PN 22 Isolation Seal 1535-4046<br />
3 Plug 01018-44103 23 Rotor Seal Vespel 0101-0623<br />
4 Cable Assembly Heater 01018-61600 23 (Ti) Rotor Seal Tefzel (high pH) 0101-0620<br />
5 Washer 5001-3746 24 Stator Face Assembly no PN<br />
6 Screw M4 6 mm lg 0515-0915 25 Stator (Head) 1535-4044<br />
7 Heater Assembly 01018-66901 25 Ti - Stator (Head) 0101-0663<br />
8 Washer 3050-0893 26 Loop Capillary 20µl 0101-0377<br />
9 Screw M3 16 mm lg 0515-0986 26 Ti - Loop Capillary 20 µl 0101-0655<br />
10 Insulation 01018-45401 27 Stator Screw 1535-4857<br />
11 Heat Shield 01018-40601 28 Connector Capillary no PN<br />
12 Front Base 01018-40512 29 Valve Transport Protection no PN<br />
13 Oven Door 01018-60302 30 Capillary ID 0.17 400 mm lg 79826-87608<br />
14 Bolt 01018-43701 30 Ti - Capillary ID 0.17 35 cm lg 01019-87608<br />
15 Door Hinge 01018-45101 31 Tubing ID 0.25 mm 700 mm lg 01018-67305<br />
16 Waste Vial 9301-1168 31 Ti - Tubing ID 0.25 mm 700 mm lg 01019-67305<br />
17 Vial Holder 01018-44901 32 Sensor Assembly 5062-2432<br />
18 Holder He-Valves 01018-05501 33 Remote Cable 5061-3378<br />
19 Screw 0624-0045 Syringe 25 µl 9301-0633<br />
20 Washer 5001-3746 Needle 10-100 µl 9301-0679<br />
21 Angle Injection Position 01018-00511<br />
234 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Solvent Cabinet with Column Heater and Manual Injection Valve<br />
Figure 87 Solvent Cabinet with Column Heater and Manual Injection Valve<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 235
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Table 52 Overall Diagram<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
1 Fan Grill 3160-0544 35 Screw (plastic) for MCGV 0515-1256<br />
2 DC Fan 01048-68500 36 no longer used no PN<br />
3 Cooling Drain 01018-47706 37 no longer used no PN<br />
4 Push Button, white 5041-1203 38 no longer used no PN<br />
5 Power Actuator 5041-2162 39 Leakage Tray right 01018-44502<br />
6 Spring Compression 1460-1510 40 High Pressure Damper 79835-60005<br />
7 Cover Hinge 5041-2147 41 Active Inlet Valve 01018-60010<br />
8 Sheet Metal Kit 01018-68701 42 Frit Adapter Assembly 01018-60007<br />
9 Foot Front 5041-2161 42 Purge Valve G1311-60009<br />
10 Cable to Connector Board 5062-2416 43 Adapter short 01018-23207<br />
11 Connection Tube 150 mm lg G1311-67304 44 Outlet Ball Valve G1311-60008<br />
12 MCGV<br />
Exchange<br />
79835-67701<br />
79835-69701<br />
45 Metering Drive Assembly 01018-60001<br />
13 Connector Board 01018-66505 46 Pump Head Assembly includes<br />
item 41 to 44<br />
01018-60004<br />
14 Front Plate 01018-04106 47 Pump Plate 01018-04704<br />
15 Leakage Tray, left 01018-44501 48 Capillary Piston 1 ID 0.5 27 cm lg 01018-67309<br />
16 Leak Sensor 5061-3356 49 Capillary Piston 2 ID 0.5 21 cm lg 01018-67302<br />
17 Logo Base 5041-2144 50 Power Supply (DPS-B)<br />
Exchange<br />
5061-3374<br />
0<strong>1050</strong>-69374<br />
18 Name Plate 5041-2170 51 PDC 2 Board 01018-66532<br />
19 Front Door 01018-60301 52 SFW Board (Firmware) 01018-66506<br />
20 Power Switch Base 5041-2145 53 RAD Board<br />
Exchange<br />
01018-66503<br />
01018-69503<br />
236 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Table 52 Overall Diagram<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
21 ESD Cover 01018-44106 54 HRI Board 01018-66517<br />
22 Cover Keyboard 5001-3736 54 HRQ Board 01018-66518<br />
23 Leak Assembly, includes item 24,<br />
25, 26<br />
5062-8551 56 Motherboard 01018-66501<br />
27 Keyboard Module 01018-60201 57 Cover Plate P/S 5001-3728<br />
28 Fluorescent Interface 5061-3376 58 Top Cover 5001-3724<br />
29 Cable to Display Board 5061-3400 59 Plate Cover, 1.5 inch 5001-3722<br />
30 Screw M3.5 6 mm lg 0515-0889 60 Plate Cover, 1.3 inch 5001-3721<br />
31 Bumper 0403-0427 61 Card Cage no PN<br />
32 Screw M4 6 mm lg 0515-0898 62 Screw M3.5 6 mm lg<br />
also for AIV ground cable<br />
0515-0887<br />
33 Screw M4 20 mm lg (special) 0515-1918 Screw, ESD cover 5021-1862<br />
34 Screw M3 8 mm lg 0515-0912<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 237
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Figure 88 Overall Diagram Part 1<br />
238 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Figure 89 Overall Diagram Part 2 (Pars II)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 239
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Hydraulic Flow Path<br />
Hydraulic Flow Path<br />
Table 53 Hydraulic Flow Path Quaternary Pump<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
1 Drawing Tubing consists <strong>of</strong> no PN Gripper MCGV 0100-1431<br />
Solvent Filter SST 01018-60025 Connector MCGV 0100-1432<br />
Helium Sparger 10-16 µl 5041-8339 Ferrule, inlet valve 20/pk 5061-3321<br />
Connector Helium Sparger (6/pk) 5062-8515 Gripper, inlet valve 20/pk 5061-3322<br />
Tubing FEP ID 1.5 mm OD 3 mm<br />
5 m<br />
5062-2483 Male, inlet valve 20/pk 5061-3323<br />
Tube Bushing Teflon 79835-21734 Buffer Disc, inlet valve 40/pk 5061-3324<br />
Screw Tube 5041-2163 3 Capillary Piston 1 ID 0.5 27 cm lg 01018-67309<br />
3 Ti - Capillary Piston 1 260 mm lg 01019-67301<br />
1 Ti - Drawing Tubing, consists <strong>of</strong> no PN 4 Capillary Piston 2 ID 0.5 21 cm lg 01018-67302<br />
Solvent Glass Filter<br />
Adapter<br />
Tubing FEP ID 1.5 mm OD 3 mm<br />
5 m<br />
5041-2168<br />
5062-8517<br />
4 Ti - Capillary Piston 2 210 mm lg 01019-67302<br />
5062-2483 5 Tubing ID 0.25 mm 700 mm lg 01018-67305<br />
Ti - Bushing 01019-21734 5 Ti - Tubing ID 0.25 mm 700 mm lg 01019-67305<br />
Screw Tube 5041-2163 6 Teflon Tubing ID 1 mm OD 3 mm 0890-1764<br />
2 Connection Tube, consists <strong>of</strong> G1311-67304 7 Tubing PTFE ID 1.45 mm<br />
OD 2.5 mm 5 m<br />
Flex Tubing PTFE ID 0.7 mm5 m lg 5062-2462<br />
5062-2461<br />
240 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Hydraulic Flow Path<br />
Table 54 Hydraulic Flow Path Isocratic Pump<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
2 Drawing Tubing, consists <strong>of</strong> 01018-67303 2 Ti - Drawing Tubing, consists <strong>of</strong> 01019-67303<br />
Solvent Filter SST 01018-60025 Solvent Glass Filter<br />
Adapter<br />
Tubing FEP ID 1.5 mm OD 3 mm<br />
5 m<br />
5062-2483 Tubing FEP ID 1.5 mm OD 3 mm<br />
5 m<br />
5041-2168<br />
5062-8517<br />
5062-2483<br />
Nut 79835-25731 Nut 79835-25731<br />
Screw Tube 79835-23231 Ti - Screw Tube 01019-23232<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 241
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Hydraulic Flow Path<br />
Figure 90 Hydraulic Path<br />
242 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Metering Drive Assembly<br />
Metering Drive Assembly<br />
Table 55 Metering Drive Assembly<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
3 Metering Drive Assembly 01018-60001 5 Bumper 5021-1839<br />
Exchange Assembly,<br />
includes item 1, 2, 4, U78 and<br />
U79 for PDC board rev. A<br />
Figure 91 Metering Drive Assembly<br />
01018-69100 6 Screw M3.5 8 mm lg 0515-0887<br />
1 Cover 01018-44102 7 Pump Plate 01018-04704<br />
2 Screw M2.5 6 mm lg 0515-0894 8 Screw M4 5021-1841<br />
4 Stay Bolt 01018-23704<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 243
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Pump Head Assembly (old version)<br />
Pump Head Assembly (old version)<br />
Table 56 Pump Head Assembly (old version)<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
Complete Assembly 01018-60004 11 Pump Chamber Housing 01018-25203<br />
1 Plunger Keeper 12 Screw M5 50 mm lg 0515-1220<br />
2 Sapphire Plunger 5063-6586 13 Active Inlet Valve 01018-60010<br />
3 Spring Compression 1460-2220 14 Adapter short 01018-23207<br />
4 Screw M4 40 mm lg 0515-0850 15 Outlet Ball Valve G1311-60008<br />
5 Plunger Housing see page 245<br />
6 Set Screw M3 8 mm lg 0515-1917 Tools<br />
7 Support Seal Assembly 5001-3739 Wrench 12 mm 8710-1841<br />
8 Seal Keeper part <strong>of</strong> (7) Wrench 14 mm 8710-1924<br />
9 Plunger Seal (2/Pk) 5063-6589 Insert Tool Seals 01018-23702<br />
10 Wear Retainer (10/pk) 5064-8249 Teflon Grease 79841-65501<br />
Figure 92 Pump Head Assembly (old version<br />
244 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Pump Head Assembly (new version)<br />
Pump Head Assembly (new version)<br />
Table 57 Pump Head Assembly (new version)<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
Complete Assembly 01018-60004 9 Adapter short 01018-23207<br />
1 Sapphire Plunger 5063-6586 10 Active Inlet Valve 01018-60010<br />
2 Screw M4 40 mm lg 0515-0850 11 Screw M5 50 mm lg 0515-1220<br />
3 Plunger Housing 01018-60006 Tools<br />
4 Support Seal Assembly 5001-3739 Wrench 12 mm 8710-1841<br />
5 Plunger Seal (2/Pk) 5063-6589 Wrench 14 mm 8710-1924<br />
6 Wear Retainer (10/pk) 5064-8249 Insert Tool seals 01018-23702<br />
7 Outlet Ball Valve G1311-60008<br />
8 Pump Chamber Housing 01018-25203 Teflon Grease 79841-65501<br />
Figure 93 Pump Head Assembly (new version)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 245
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Pump Head Assembly with Seal Wash<br />
Pump Head Assembly with Seal Wash<br />
Table 58 Pump Head Assembly with Seal Wash<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
Complete Assembly 01018-60005 17 Sapphire Plunger 5063-6586<br />
Ti - Complete Assembly 01019-60002 18 Plunger Keeper no PN<br />
1 Screw M5 50 mm lg 0515-1220 19 Plunger Housing 01018-60006<br />
2 Active Inlet Valve 01018-60010<br />
2 Ti - Active Inlet Valve 01019-60010 Tools<br />
3 Adapter short 01018-23207 Wrench 12 mm 8710-1841<br />
4 Pump Chamber Housing 01018-25203 Wrench 14 mm 8710-1924<br />
4 Ti - Pump Chamber Housing 01019-25205 Insert Tool, seals 01018-23702<br />
5 Outlet Ball Valve G1311-60008 Teflon Grease 79841-65501<br />
6 Wear Retainer (10/pk) 5064-8249<br />
7 Plunger Seal (2/Pk) 5063-6589 Accessories<br />
7 Ti - Seal 0905-1199 Seal Wash Option Update Kit 01018-68722<br />
8 Seal Keeper 5001-3743<br />
includes tubing, seals (2x),<br />
support ring (2x) and items #<br />
9 Gasket, seal wash (6/Pk) 5062-2484 # Syringe 9301-0411<br />
10 Seal Wash 0905-1175 # Adapter Luer (3x) 0100-1681<br />
11 Support Ring Seal Wash 5062-2465 # Abrasive Paper TP 240<br />
12 Teflon Tubing ID 1 mm OD 3 mm 0890-1764 # Insert Tool Seal 01018-23702<br />
13 Set Screw M3 8 mm lg 0515-1917 # Seal Keeper (item 8) (2x) 5001-3743<br />
14 Plunger Housing (old version) order 19<br />
15 Screw M4 40 mm lg 0515-0850 Velocity Regulator (3/pk) 5062-2486<br />
16 Spring Compression 1460-2220<br />
246 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Pump Head Assembly with Seal Wash<br />
Figure 94 Pump Head Assembly with Seal Wash<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 247
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Active Inlet Valve<br />
Active Inlet Valve<br />
Table 59 Active Inlet Valve<br />
Figure 95 Active Inlet Valve<br />
# Description Part Number<br />
AIV Assembly, complete 01018-60010<br />
Ti - AIV Assembly, complete 01019-60010<br />
1 Cap Inlet Valve 01018-21207<br />
2 Gold Seal 5001-3708<br />
3 Retainer Ring, gold coated 5021-1874<br />
248 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Outlet Ball Valve<br />
Outlet Ball Valve<br />
Table 60 Outlet Ball Valve<br />
Figure 96 Outlet Ball Valve<br />
# Description Part Number<br />
Outlet Ball Valve Assembly, complete G1311-60008<br />
Ti - Outlet Ball Valve Assembly, complete 01018-60032<br />
1 Socket Cap 5042-1345<br />
2 Housing Screw 01018-22410<br />
3 Outlet Valve Cartridge no PN<br />
4 Gold Seal, Outlet 5001-3707<br />
5 Cap 5062-2485<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 249
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Frit Adapter Assembly<br />
Frit Adapter Assembly<br />
Table 61 Frit Adapter Assembly<br />
Figure 97 Frit Adapter Assembly<br />
# Description Part Number<br />
Frit Adapter Assembly, complete 01018-60007<br />
1 O-ring (12/Pk) 5180-4167<br />
2 Housing Screw 01018-22410<br />
3 Adapter 01018-23209<br />
4 PTFE Frit (5/Pk) 01018-22707<br />
5 Gold Seal 5001-3707<br />
6 Cap (4/pk) 5062-2485<br />
250 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Purge Valve Assembly<br />
Purge Valve Assembly<br />
Table 62 Purge Valve Assembly<br />
Figure 98 Purge Valve Assembly<br />
# Description Part Number<br />
Purge Valve Assembly, complete G1311-60009<br />
1 Gold Seal 5001-3707<br />
2 Cap (4/pk) 5062-2485<br />
3 PTFE Frit (5/Pk) 01018-22707<br />
4 Tubing PTFE ID 1.45 mm OD 2.5 mm 5 m 5062-2461<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 251
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Column Holder Assembly<br />
Column Holder Assembly<br />
Table 63 Column Holder Assembly<br />
Figure 99 Column Holder Assembly<br />
# Description Part Number<br />
Column Holder Assembly 5062-2469<br />
1 Holder Brass no PN<br />
2 Stand 5001-3738<br />
3 Clamp no PN<br />
4 Support Block no PN<br />
252 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Special Tools<br />
Special Tools<br />
Table 64 Special Tools<br />
# Description Part Number<br />
Wrench, 12 mm 8710-1841<br />
Wrench, 14 mm 8710-1924<br />
Insert Tool, Seals 01018-23702<br />
Teflon Grease 79841-65501<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 253
Pumps: Parts Information<br />
Special Tools<br />
254 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
10<br />
10 Pumps: Additional Information<br />
This chapter provides additional information<br />
about the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
This section gives information about:<br />
Pumps Prefix History<br />
Pumps Firmware History<br />
Online Monitor<br />
Operational Hints<br />
Helium Degassing Principle<br />
Isocratic Pumps<br />
Pump Head Assembly<br />
PDC Board<br />
HRQ Board<br />
Wear Retainer<br />
Outlet Ball Valve<br />
Flow Test Method<br />
Method Loading<br />
Flow Gradients<br />
Manual Injection Valve<br />
256 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
Product History<br />
Product History<br />
Since introduction <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps in 1988 a couple <strong>of</strong> hardware and<br />
firmware changes have been implemented in production. With most <strong>of</strong> this<br />
changes the serial number prefix has been changed too. Following is a list <strong>of</strong><br />
all prefix changes done in Waldbronn and Little Falls.<br />
Table 65 Product History 79851A and 79852A/B<br />
S/N Prefix Changes<br />
2813 G ..... Introduction <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps<br />
2913 G ..... ESD cover added to the gradient valve. Hardware<br />
changes <strong>of</strong> extrusion and holding bracket for the<br />
MCGV.<br />
2949 G ..... 2949 A..... Wear retainer installed in front <strong>of</strong> each seal.<br />
3010 G ..... 3012 A ..... Introduction <strong>of</strong> the current pump head version. In the<br />
meantime all old pump heads have been updated.<br />
3016 G ..... 3019 A ..... Introduction <strong>of</strong> firmware revision 3.0 and introduction<br />
<strong>of</strong> column heater. Introduction <strong>of</strong> HRI/HRQ Board<br />
(HRQ replaces GVD board).<br />
3031 G ..... 3034 A ... (51A) or<br />
3032 A ... (52A)<br />
Introduction <strong>of</strong> firmware revision 3.1<br />
3045 G ..... Purge Valve added to all quaternary pumps<br />
3106 G ..... 3106 A ... (51A) or<br />
3107 A ... (52A)<br />
3117 G ..... 3117 A ... (51A) or<br />
3118 A ... (52A)<br />
New voltage regulators on PDC board (rev B),<br />
exchange metering drives require a PDC update.<br />
Introduction <strong>of</strong> firmware revision 3.2<br />
3206 G ..... Introduction <strong>of</strong> dedicated seal and hardware<br />
modifications <strong>of</strong> pump chamber and seal keeper<br />
3243 G .....3244 A...(51A) or<br />
3145 A...(52A)<br />
Introduction <strong>of</strong> PDC 2 board.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 257
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
Product History<br />
Table 65 Product History 79851A and 79852A/B<br />
S/N Prefix Changes<br />
3312 G ..... Integrated spindle for metering drive assembly<br />
01018-60001<br />
3334 G ..... Support seal assembly replaces support ring and seal<br />
keeper<br />
3404 G ..... 3404 A ... (51A) or<br />
3405 A ... (52A)<br />
Introduction <strong>of</strong> Damper with new pressure sensor and<br />
electronic board (Rev. G)<br />
3447 G ..... 3448 A ..... Spring integrated in plunger housing<br />
June 1996 Active Inlet Valve with Exchangeable Valve Cartridge<br />
March 1998 Plunger Housing with new springs available<br />
November 1998 Part Number Change for DC-Fans<br />
September 2001 End <strong>of</strong> Support <strong>of</strong> <strong>1050</strong> Isocratic Pump 79851B TI ends<br />
September 30, 2001<br />
Table 66 Product History Solvent Cabinet<br />
S/N Prefix Changes<br />
3019 G ..... Solvent Cabinet 79856A/B serialized<br />
3205 G ..... Improvement <strong>of</strong> Helium Regulators; better regulation<br />
range and tightening behavior.<br />
3216G... Modification <strong>of</strong> Bottle Head Shaft <strong>of</strong> the Bottle Head<br />
Assembly.<br />
258 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
Firmware History<br />
Firmware History<br />
Revision 1.0<br />
Revision 1.0 was the firmware at introduction <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps.<br />
Known Problems<br />
In purge mode flow values above 5 ml/min will not be shown on the display.<br />
At higher values the display remains at 5 ml/min but the pump is purging with<br />
the set value.<br />
Revision 3.0<br />
Europe/ICON SN 3016 G.....<br />
US/Canada SN 3019 A .....<br />
Revision 3.0 incorporates:<br />
Communication with the GPIB communication interfaces.<br />
Support <strong>of</strong> the column heater.<br />
Improved flow test method.<br />
Known Problems<br />
1 If a gradient test method is started directly after running the build in flow<br />
test method the gradient might be distorted. Switching the pump <strong>of</strong>f and<br />
on again after a pressure test solves the problem.<br />
2 For applications with system pressures below 30 to 40 bar the lower<br />
pressure limit is not applicable.<br />
3 Internal tests <strong>of</strong> the DOS workstation (Phoenix) revealed a couple <strong>of</strong> bugs<br />
in the communication part <strong>of</strong> the firmware.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 259
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
Firmware History<br />
Revision 3.1<br />
Europe/ICON SN 3031 G.....<br />
US/Canada SN 3034 A ..... (for 79851A/B)<br />
This firmware revision fixes the bugs encountered with the ChemStation.<br />
Known Problems<br />
Due to an internal timing problem relay contact 1 and 2 may switch<br />
incorrectly when used together in the timetable. Relay contact 2 might be<br />
activated together with contact 1 even when the timetable shows only an<br />
entry for contact 1.<br />
Revision 3.2<br />
Europe/ICON SN 3117 G.....<br />
SN 3033 A ..... (for 79852A/B)<br />
US/Canada SN 3117 A .....<br />
This revision fixes the known bug <strong>of</strong> firmware revision 3.1.<br />
260 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
How does the On-line Monitor work<br />
How does the On-line Monitor work<br />
The online monitor is part <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Pump firmware and checks the<br />
performance <strong>of</strong> the metering pump. The online Monitor detects appearing<br />
leaks 1st piston leak valve problems valve backflow and checks via<br />
the pressure ripple for gas bubbles in the system gas bubble.<br />
NOTE The online monitor is a user selectable function and can be enabled or<br />
disabled via the diagnose level in the configuration displays. The online<br />
monitor is only active if the pressure in the pump is above 50 bar.<br />
DIAGNOSIS LEVEL 0 disables the online monitor and none <strong>of</strong> the following<br />
messages will be generated.<br />
DIAGNOSIS LEVEL 1 turns the online monitor on. Any measured deviation<br />
from the normal operation modes will generate an entry in the logbook.<br />
DIAGNOSIS LEVEL 2 comprises the same functions like level 1 and in<br />
addition lids the not ready LED at the keyboard. The remote output shows the<br />
not ready condition and disables further injections when connected to the<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Autosampler.<br />
DIAGNOSIS LEVEL 3 is used for factory adjustment <strong>of</strong> the metering drive.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 261
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
How does the On-line Monitor work<br />
Normal Operation<br />
The figure below shows the normal pressure pr<strong>of</strong>ile <strong>of</strong> the instrument. The<br />
curve is ideal and can only be recorded with a very fast transient recorder. A<br />
normal integrator (339X) is too slow to record the very fast changes <strong>of</strong> the<br />
curve and shows a smoothed one. However occurring operation problems<br />
can be also seen on a integrator plot. During the delivering strokes <strong>of</strong> the two<br />
pistons the instrument measures the pressure at the points D1 to D10. Failure<br />
conditions like leaks or gas bubbles influence the pressure curve from which<br />
the processor can determine certain failure modes.<br />
Figure 100 Online Diagnostic: Normal Operation<br />
262 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
How does the On-line Monitor work<br />
M2 Gas Bubble<br />
The following figure shows the pressure pr<strong>of</strong>ile when a gas bubble was<br />
drawn from the bottle. During the delivery phase <strong>of</strong> piston I the gas bubble<br />
will be compressed first before solvent can be delivered into the second<br />
chamber. This means the pressure will drop during the compression phase <strong>of</strong><br />
the air bubble before it returns to normal behavior. The pressure pr<strong>of</strong>ile <strong>of</strong><br />
the second piston shows no deviation. The pressure drop at the beginning <strong>of</strong><br />
the stroke generates a higher pressure ripple which is used to determine a<br />
gas bubble problem.<br />
The pressure ripple is depending on various parameters like solvent, flow,<br />
compressibility and so on. For this reasons the pressure ripple has to exceed<br />
a certain range before a gas bubble can be detected. The relation between<br />
pressure ripple and compressibility setting is shown in the respective figure.<br />
NOTE Drastic pressure changes (for example suddenly no more solvent to pump due<br />
to empty bottle) can not be detected under all circumstances. To make sure<br />
that the system will stop in such a case (for example running out <strong>of</strong> solvent<br />
during an unattended sequence) a lower pressure limit should be set.<br />
Figure 101 Online Diagnostic: Gas Bubble<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 263
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
How does the On-line Monitor work<br />
Figure 102 Online Diagnostic: Compressibility vs. Pressure Ripple<br />
264 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
How does the On-line Monitor work<br />
M4 Leak at first Piston<br />
The following figure shows the pressure pr<strong>of</strong>ile when the system is leaky<br />
either at the inlet valve or at the piston seal. The delivery stroke <strong>of</strong> piston I<br />
shows a pressure drop while piston II delivers without any problems.<br />
Figure 103 <strong>1050</strong> Online Diagnostic: Leak at first piston<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 265
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
How does the On-line Monitor work<br />
M6 Valve Backflow<br />
The following figure shows the pressure pr<strong>of</strong>ile when the outlet ball valve is<br />
not working correctly. Delivery stroke <strong>of</strong> piston I shows normal behavior<br />
while during the stroke <strong>of</strong> piston II the pressure drops because <strong>of</strong> the<br />
internally leaking ball valve.<br />
Figure 104 Online Diagnostic: Outlet Ball Valve Backflow<br />
266 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
How does the On-line Monitor work<br />
M8 Outlet Valve Problem<br />
The following figure shows the pressure pr<strong>of</strong>ile when the outlet valve sticks<br />
in its position. During the delivery stroke <strong>of</strong> piston II the pressure drops<br />
because a sticky ruby ball needs longer time to be closed.<br />
Figure 105 Online Diagnostic: Outlet Ball Valve<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 267
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
If You Need Operational Hints<br />
If You Need Operational Hints<br />
You will find general information about the pumps and certain parts followed<br />
by description <strong>of</strong> known behaviors <strong>of</strong> the instrument.<br />
This section gives information about:<br />
Helium Degassing Principle<br />
Helium Regulators<br />
Isocratic Pumps<br />
Pump Head Assembly<br />
PDC Board<br />
HRQ Board<br />
Wear Retainer<br />
Outlet Ball Valve<br />
Flow Test Method<br />
Method Loading<br />
Flow Gradients<br />
Manual Injection Valve<br />
268 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
If You Need Operational Hints<br />
Helium Degassing Principle<br />
The Helium degassing works in two stages. First, replacing the dissolved gas<br />
in the solvent. Helium streams through the solvent and replaces the air<br />
dissolved. So after some time the solvent is saturated with Helium. Second,<br />
prevent that air diffuses back into the solvent. The compartment above the<br />
solvent will also be filled with Helium. The Helium above the solvent is<br />
absolutely necessary to make sure that no air can be introduced back into the<br />
solvent. So the bottle head has to be in its position otherwise the degassing<br />
will not work or it will require a too high Helium stream through the solvent.<br />
NOTE If the vent position <strong>of</strong> the bottle head is connected to a fume hood, make sure<br />
that the Helium is not sucked out <strong>of</strong> the bottle. Best is to install a restriction<br />
(for example change diameter from 1/4" to 1/8") to make sure that the Helium<br />
blanket above the solvent surface remains in its place. Otherwise<br />
performance problems especially with gradient runs or excessive high Helium<br />
consumption might be the result.<br />
Helium Regulators<br />
The helium regulators allow the regulation <strong>of</strong> the helium flow. The regulator<br />
design does not allow to set the helium stream to zero. A small flow <strong>of</strong> helium<br />
is still possible.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 269
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
If You Need Operational Hints<br />
Bottle Head Assembly<br />
During the lifetime <strong>of</strong> the solvent cabinet a problem with the bottle head<br />
assembly was encountered.<br />
The helium leaves the bottle head assembly through the vent connector. To<br />
reach this vent the helium has to pass the bottle head shaft. The helium<br />
passes through the gaps between the holes in the shaft and the supply tubings<br />
for helium and solvent. Variations in the tolerances for hole size and tubing<br />
diameter may restrict the helium flow out <strong>of</strong> the solvent bottle. This may<br />
cause the effect that the solvent gets oversaturated with helium.<br />
Oversaturation may lead to problems in pump and detector.<br />
For that reason the bottle head assemblies have been modified with a<br />
separate vent hole (1 mm to 2 mm in diameter) to the bottle head shaft<br />
(01018-43711). All solvent cabinets 79856A/B with serial number prefix<br />
3216 G... and greater will have the modification installed.<br />
Instruments without the vent hold should be updated. Using a screwdriver<br />
simply punch a hole <strong>of</strong> 1 mm to 2 mm diameter in the shafts <strong>of</strong> the bottle head<br />
assemblies (01018-43711).<br />
Isocratic Pumps<br />
Isocratic pumps are <strong>of</strong>ten sold without the solvent conditioning module<br />
option. The bottle is then placed beside the instrument. Tests have shown<br />
that best results in regards <strong>of</strong> pressure ripple stability, air sensitivity and so<br />
on are reached when the solvent bottle is placed on top <strong>of</strong> the module or even<br />
higher (for example on top <strong>of</strong> a stack <strong>of</strong> modules). The slight gravity pressure<br />
reduces the under pressure the pump requires to draw solvent from the<br />
solvent bottle.<br />
270 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
If You Need Operational Hints<br />
Pump Head Assembly<br />
In February 1992, the pump head assembly was improved. The seal, the pump<br />
chamber housing and the seal keeper have been changed. All together the<br />
changes will assure a higher lifetime for the pump seal.<br />
Seal<br />
A dedicated seal was designed for the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps. Compared to the old seal<br />
used in <strong>1050</strong> and in the 1090 the seal is the same material and color, but<br />
slightly different in appearance. Nevertheless the seals are fully backward<br />
compatible. They should be used in all existing <strong>1050</strong> pumps. Lifetime should<br />
be expected the same as always. The wear retainer is still required.<br />
Pump Chamber Housing and Seal Keeper<br />
A groove has been added to the seal surface <strong>of</strong> the pump chamber and a<br />
cutting edge was added to the seal keeper. These both changes ensure a<br />
better compression <strong>of</strong> the new seal resulting in a higher lifetime. Part<br />
numbers <strong>of</strong> the two parts were not changed because <strong>of</strong> there compatibility.<br />
PDC Board<br />
When exchanging the metering drive assembly 01018-69100 in a pump with<br />
PDC Board revision A installed (see “Product History” on page 257), the<br />
voltage regulators U78 and U79 on the board have to be replaced. Parts are<br />
included in the exchange metering drive. PDC Board revision B and greater<br />
and the PDC 2 Board do not have the new type voltage regulator already<br />
installed. A short in the active inlet valve cable (for example cable squeezed<br />
between pump head and metering drive) will generate excessive current on<br />
the components <strong>of</strong> the PDC board. This overcurrent will at least damage<br />
(unsolder) one resistor on the board. The fuse added to the CON board<br />
(introduction approximately January 1992) will prevent damage <strong>of</strong> the PDC<br />
board.<br />
PDC 2 Board<br />
In a standardization (board will also be used in other APG products) and cost<br />
reduction program part <strong>of</strong> the circuit was implemented in ASIC (Application<br />
Specific Integrated Circuit) which allowed a reduction in board size. A<br />
stainless steel plate and the cover plate assure compatibility to the <strong>1050</strong><br />
board.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 271
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
If You Need Operational Hints<br />
HRQ Board<br />
Originally the fuse F16 on the HRQ board was a 500 mA type. Evaluation <strong>of</strong><br />
returned defective exchange boards showed that the fuse was blown in most<br />
<strong>of</strong> the cases. The fuse was to weak and could be blown without circuit<br />
failure. Therefore the fuse was changed to a 1 A type.<br />
GVD Board<br />
At introduction <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Pumps the Gradient Valve Driver (GVD) board<br />
controlled the multi channel gradient valve (MCGV). During the design phase<br />
<strong>of</strong> the column heater option it was decided that the control <strong>of</strong> the heater<br />
should be also done via the same board. Therefore the GVD was replaced by<br />
the HRQ board for control <strong>of</strong> column heater and gradient valve (see “Product<br />
History” on page 257).<br />
Wear Retainer<br />
The abrasion <strong>of</strong> the seal is a very well known fact. The wear retainer is a<br />
device which keeps the departed particles around the seal instead <strong>of</strong> allowing<br />
to move immediately into the flow path. The retainer consist <strong>of</strong> a small<br />
porous Teflon disc placed directly in front <strong>of</strong> the seal. When installed the<br />
retainer disc deflects and with the piston diameter slightly bigger than the<br />
one <strong>of</strong> the Teflon disc a recess for the seal material is build.<br />
With the operation time the plunger will widen the diameter <strong>of</strong> the disc<br />
allowing part <strong>of</strong> the particles to move into the flow system. Therefore the<br />
wear retainer should always be changed together with the seal. The high<br />
pressure filter in the purge valve will collect all this materials without<br />
problem. When changing the seals also the high pressure filter should be<br />
changed too.<br />
272 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
If You Need Operational Hints<br />
Outlet Ball Valve<br />
The outlet ball valve is a cartridge type and does not need any maintenance.<br />
It is not spring loaded and therefore uses gravity and the back pressure for<br />
closing. To increase the reliability <strong>of</strong> this type <strong>of</strong> valve two ceramic seat/ ball<br />
packages are used. The valve is less sensitive to contaminations and does not<br />
require a sieve assembly in front. The cap in front <strong>of</strong> the valve holds a gold<br />
seal for proper tightening. If the valve fails it is probably contaminated.<br />
Cleaning can be done either in a sonic bath or by flushing using degreaser<br />
spray in flow direction. Disassembling will damage the valve. The outlet ball<br />
valve should only be tightened at the holding screw and not at the cartridge<br />
itself. Under worst case conditions this could damage the cartridge<br />
generating leaks at the seat/ball packages.<br />
Flow Test Method<br />
The flow test method should be always started with the remote mode in<br />
LOCAL.<br />
If set to GLOBAL the test method can be inhibited when a manual injection<br />
valve in inject position is connected via the remote connector.<br />
If the remote mode is set to HPSYSTEM the flow test will not be started at all,<br />
because <strong>of</strong> the start request which is send out instead <strong>of</strong> a start.<br />
Method loading<br />
If a method will be loaded while pumping, the pump might be switched <strong>of</strong>f<br />
when there is a lower pressure limit set in the new method.<br />
Flow Gradients<br />
Timetables containing flow gradients with a starting point <strong>of</strong> 0 ml/min will<br />
not be executed. Gradient parameter changes will always be executed at the<br />
culmination point <strong>of</strong> the first piston. With a flow set to zero, this point will<br />
never be reached.<br />
Manual Injection Valve<br />
Starting a 3390A or 3394A from the remote start <strong>of</strong> the manual injector<br />
requires a slight modification <strong>of</strong> the injection sensor. 3390/94 integrators<br />
need a dynamic signal which the manual injector can provide only if position<br />
sensor is installed into an upright position.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 273
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
If You Need Operational Hints<br />
Metering Drive Repairs<br />
Evaluation <strong>of</strong> defective metering drives 01018-69100 showed that the wiper in<br />
the spindle housing was broken or bent. The wiper defines the position <strong>of</strong> the<br />
spindles to each other. Discussions with CE’s revealed that some people try<br />
to check out the metering drive without the pump head installed, especially<br />
when troubleshooting E27 (max motor drive power exceeded) problems.<br />
When the pump head is removed and the pump is initialized the spindle<br />
movement is stopped by the wiper. The pump displays the message<br />
pumphead missing. This is generally no problem for the mechanical<br />
system. The following problems may occur when operating from this point<br />
on.<br />
❏ The pump is turned on again without reinstalling the pump head.<br />
Under this condition the pump will start with normal operation. The<br />
wiper position is used as reference point. The movement <strong>of</strong> the spindle is<br />
always stopped by hitting the wiper. This operation condition may<br />
damage the wiper or misalign the spindles.<br />
❏ The pump head is reinstalled without initializing the pump.<br />
The pump still uses the previous determined position as the reference<br />
values for the pump. So when started the piston may run with full flow<br />
speed into the mechanical stop. This can crack the pistons.<br />
This problems can be avoided by:<br />
❏ NOT running the pump without pump head installed (also not for test<br />
reasons).<br />
❏ Always do a pump initialization when the pump head is re-installed.<br />
274 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
If You Need Operational Hints<br />
Troubleshooting E27 Errors (Max Motor Drive Power<br />
Exceeded)<br />
The E27 can have two reasons - a problem in the metering drive and also a<br />
blocked outlet ball valve.<br />
❏ Blocked Outlet Ball Valve. It is possible that the valve is blocked (for<br />
example the pin on the ball canted). In such a case the first piston cannot<br />
deliver anything onto the high pressure side. The pressure in the first<br />
chamber rises to values far above 400 bar. This pressure in the first<br />
chamber cannot be detected by the pressure damper as it is located behind<br />
the outlet ball valve. The pump motor working against a too high pressure<br />
will exceed the maximum allowed drive power and gives error E27. This<br />
can also be an intermittent problem.<br />
Troubleshooting Procedure:<br />
❏ Remove outlet ball valve and let the pump run without the valve.<br />
❏ Replace the outlet ball valve and pump at high back pressure<br />
(restriction). Error E27 under this condition verifies metering drive<br />
problems. No error messages identify faulty outlet ball valves.<br />
❏ Problem with Metering Drive. Possible problems on the metering drive are<br />
defective bearings defective motors or misalignment <strong>of</strong> the wipers.<br />
Troubleshooting Procedure<br />
❏ Proceed in the same way as described before. Intermittent motor<br />
problems might be identified.<br />
❏ Remove pump head and press down spindle by hand. This should be<br />
possible without too much resistance. High resistance indicates a<br />
bearing defect.<br />
❏ Remove metering covers and check for broken or loose wipers.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 275
Pumps: Additional Information<br />
If You Need Operational Hints<br />
Piston with Conical Holder<br />
Reports from the field and evaluation <strong>of</strong> returned parts showed that the<br />
spring in the piston housing can scratch at the piston holder and may<br />
generate a squeaking noise. This will not lead to a malfunction <strong>of</strong> the pump<br />
but the noise has lead to customer complaints.<br />
The piston holder was changed and now has a conical shape. The spring<br />
should no longer scratch at the piston holder.<br />
Ghost Leak messages<br />
If the pump shows intermittent leak messages without any solvent in the leak<br />
tray you should check the following two points.<br />
Make sure that the leak sensor is not in close proximity <strong>of</strong> the plastic<br />
funnel. This can cool down the sensor to the trigger level resulting in ghost<br />
error messages.<br />
Check the revision <strong>of</strong> the CMP board. CMP boards with revision E and<br />
higher do have a improved leak sensor circuit installed. CMP boards with<br />
revision D or below can be modified by soldering two 100nF capacitors<br />
(0160-6623 or 0160-0576) between pin 12 and 11 and pin 12 and 9 <strong>of</strong> U45.<br />
U45 is the sixth IC in the bottom row <strong>of</strong> the board (main connector on right<br />
side). There are two fourteen pin IC beside each other. U45 is the right one.<br />
PANIC Errors<br />
Intermittent PANIC errors are mostly generated by spikes (disturbances) on<br />
the bus lines. A dynamic bus termination has been added to the FIM board to<br />
suppress the spikes and to reduce the possibility <strong>of</strong> this failure mode.<br />
All firmware boards with revision C and higher do have the dynamic bus<br />
termination installed (RC-network instead <strong>of</strong> a R-network). In case <strong>of</strong><br />
intermittent PANIC errors replace FIM boards (rev A or B) with the current<br />
version.<br />
276 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
In This Book<br />
This manual contains technical<br />
information about the Agilent <strong>1050</strong><br />
liquid chromatographs.<br />
This manual is available as electronic<br />
version (Adobe Acrobat Reader file)<br />
only.
<strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong><br />
<strong>Modules</strong><br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> -<br />
Sampler (79852A/B)
© Copyright Agilent<br />
Technologies 2001<br />
All rights reserved.<br />
Reproduction, adaption,<br />
or translation without<br />
prior written permission<br />
is prohibited, except as<br />
allowed under the<br />
copyright laws.<br />
Part No. NONE<br />
11/2001<br />
Printed in Germany<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
Hewlett-Packard-Strasse 8<br />
76337 Waldbronn<br />
Germany<br />
Warranty<br />
The information<br />
contained in this<br />
document is subject to<br />
change without notice.<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
makes no warranty <strong>of</strong><br />
any kind with regard to<br />
this material,<br />
including, but not<br />
limited to, the implied<br />
warranties or<br />
merchantability and<br />
fitness for a particular<br />
purpose.<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
shall not be liable for<br />
errors contained herein<br />
or for incidental or<br />
consequential damages<br />
in connection with the<br />
furnishing, performance,<br />
or use <strong>of</strong> this material.<br />
IMPORTANT NOTE<br />
This version <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong><br />
service manual includes<br />
all sections from the<br />
0<strong>1050</strong>-90102 edition 4<br />
(1995) and G1306-90102<br />
edition 2 (May 1994). It<br />
merges both sections,<br />
the MWD and the DAD.<br />
The series I opticals<br />
information (79854A<br />
MWD) information has<br />
been removed (product<br />
went out <strong>of</strong> support<br />
during 2000).<br />
Part numbers have been<br />
updated as <strong>of</strong> 11/2001.<br />
Contact your local<br />
Agilent support <strong>of</strong>fice in<br />
case <strong>of</strong> part number<br />
issues or upgrades.<br />
The latest version <strong>of</strong> this<br />
manual is available as<br />
Adobe Acrobat Reader<br />
(PDF) version only and<br />
can be downloaded from<br />
the Agilent Technolgies<br />
web page<br />
www.agilent.com.
11<br />
11 Sampler: General Information<br />
This chapter provides general information about<br />
the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler
Sampler: General Information<br />
This chapter gives general information on<br />
about this autosampler<br />
repair policy<br />
product structure<br />
capillaries<br />
specifications<br />
About this Manual<br />
This manual provides service information about the <strong>1050</strong> Autosamplers. The<br />
following sections give the detailed descriptions <strong>of</strong> all electronic and<br />
mechanical assemblies. You will find illustrated part-breakdowns<br />
interconnection tables connector configurations as well as all necessary<br />
replacement procedures in this manual. Detailed diagnostic procedures using<br />
firmware resident test methods and error messages are also given in this<br />
manual.<br />
About the Autosampler<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler module houses the mechanical devices and the<br />
electronic circuitry for control <strong>of</strong> the various functions <strong>of</strong> the injection<br />
system. The module is controlled through the user interface through which<br />
the operator defines his requirements (vial number, injection volume and so<br />
on) and which provides the required information.<br />
282 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: General Information<br />
Repair Policy<br />
Repair Policy<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler is designed that all components are easy accessible.<br />
Customers are able to repair certain parts <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler, see<br />
Operator’s <strong>Handbook</strong>.<br />
For details on repair policy refer to “Repair Policy” on page 38.<br />
Product Structure<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> modules are available in two versions.<br />
In the standard version most <strong>of</strong> the parts in the flow path are stainless steel.<br />
In the <strong>1050</strong> Ti <strong>Series</strong> the flow path <strong>of</strong> the autosampler consists solely <strong>of</strong><br />
corrosion resistant materials such, as titanium, tantalum, quartz, sapphire,<br />
ruby and fluorocarbon polymers. It is recommended for use with mobile<br />
phases containing high salt concentrations, extreme pH solutions and other<br />
agressive mobile phases.<br />
Autosampler 79855A<br />
Ti - Autosampler 79855B<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 283
Sampler: General Information<br />
Capillaries<br />
Capillaries<br />
Table 67 Capillary Color Code<br />
In the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> all capillary shipped with the modules will have a plastic<br />
colour coating for identification in terms <strong>of</strong> material and internal diameter.<br />
color Internal Diameter Material<br />
blue 0.25 mm<br />
green 0.17 mm<br />
red 0.12 mm<br />
white tantalum<br />
NOTE The capillaries for the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> will have only one color coating for the<br />
internal diameter.<br />
The capillaries for the <strong>1050</strong> Ti <strong>Series</strong> have two color coatings. One for<br />
identifying the material, covering the main part <strong>of</strong> the capillary, and a small<br />
one for the internal diameter. For the <strong>1050</strong> Ti <strong>Series</strong> the fittings are always<br />
titanium with a titanium nitrite coating and the front and back ferrules are<br />
gold plated.<br />
284 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: General Information<br />
Specifications<br />
Specifications<br />
Table 68 Specifications <strong>of</strong> <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler<br />
Injection Range Programmable from 0.1 to 100 µl in 0.1 µl increments<br />
without hardware change required. Up to 1.8 ml with<br />
larger injection valve capillary.<br />
Replicate Injections 1-99 from one vial.<br />
Precision Typically
Sampler: General Information<br />
Specifications<br />
Table 68 Specifications <strong>of</strong> <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler<br />
Methods Battery-backed storage <strong>of</strong> up to 10 methods.<br />
Automatic startup and shutdown methods. Editing <strong>of</strong><br />
stored methods possible during run.<br />
Sequence Parameters Up to 10 parameter sets, each with keyboard setup <strong>of</strong>:<br />
first- and last sample vial, # <strong>of</strong> injections per sample<br />
vial, first- and last calibration vial, # <strong>of</strong> injections per<br />
calibration vial, re-calibration frequency and injection<br />
method. Editing <strong>of</strong> stored parameter sets possible<br />
during run.<br />
Communications Inputs: start request. Outputs: BCD for bottle number;<br />
start; two external relay contacts (one 24 V relay, one<br />
30 V (AC/DC) contact closure, both 0.25A). In- and<br />
Outputs: stop, ready, shut, down. Optional interface<br />
for GPIB and RS-232C.<br />
Safety Aids Extensive diagnostics, error detection and display via<br />
front-panel LED’s and status logbook. User-definable<br />
shutdown method activated in case <strong>of</strong> error. Leak<br />
detection, safe leak handling, leak output signal to<br />
shutdown pump. Low voltages in major maintenance<br />
areas.<br />
Environment 4°C to 55°C (constant temperature) with
12<br />
12 Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
This chapter provides hardware information<br />
about the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
This chapter gives general and technical information about the hardware<br />
components <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler.<br />
Overview about the Autosampler<br />
Autosampler hardware<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
❏ Metering Drive<br />
❏ Analytical Head Assembly<br />
❏ High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
❏ Pneumatic Assembly<br />
Additional 100 vial capacity<br />
288 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
Overview<br />
Overview<br />
The 79855A/B Autosampler is a fully programmable module and is controlled<br />
via the user interface. The operator sets the parameters at the user interface<br />
which provides also the required analytical information. The processor<br />
controlled electronic drives the mechanic <strong>of</strong> the 79855A/B Autosampler<br />
consisting <strong>of</strong> sampling unit metering device and high pressure valve unit. The<br />
pump delivers flow to a six port high pressure valve unit in which a sampling<br />
unit and a metering device take the place <strong>of</strong> a sample loop. In normal mode<br />
the needle <strong>of</strong> the sampling unit is held firm in its seat forming a leak free seal.<br />
The valve unit directs the solvent through the metering device and the<br />
sampling unit to the column. During injection the flow is bypassed and the<br />
metering device loads the sample. Needle and metering device are always<br />
flushed and ready for the next injection.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 289
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
Solvent Flow Path<br />
Solvent Flow Path<br />
Figure 106 Solvent Flow Path<br />
Solvent coming from the pump (capillary #1) enters via port 1 <strong>of</strong> the<br />
switching valve the autosampler. In normal mode (switching valve in main<br />
pass) the flow is guided from port 2 to the analytical head (capillary #2) and<br />
from there via the loop capillary (#3) and the fitting (#4) to the needle (#5).<br />
The needle is pressed into the seat and via the seat capillary #6 the flow<br />
streams back to port 5 <strong>of</strong> the switching valve. The seat capillary can be<br />
extended for injection volumes above 100 µl (multiple injections). From port<br />
6 <strong>of</strong> the switching valve the solvent will be connected to the column<br />
(capillary #7). During the injection cycle (switching valve in bypass) ports 1<br />
and 6 are connected and flow is directly connected to the column. The<br />
metering device displaces its volume into the waste (capillary #8) before<br />
drawing the injection volume form the vial.<br />
290 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
How Does The Autosampler Work?<br />
How Does The Autosampler Work?<br />
The processor controls the injection sequence. To avoid malfunctions the<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Autosampler will perform a mechanical reset after initial turn-on <strong>of</strong> the<br />
module. It can also be reset using the {{CONTROL RESET}} instruction <strong>of</strong> the<br />
user interface.<br />
First step <strong>of</strong> the injection sequence is activating the pneumatic valve unit so<br />
that the air pressure can change the position <strong>of</strong> the high pressure switching<br />
valve (see step 1 on page 292).<br />
The flow is bypassed and sampling unit and metering device are without<br />
pressure. The stepper motor <strong>of</strong> the metering device is activated moving the<br />
piston to its home position displacing its volume into waste. Next the<br />
electrically driven sampling unit lifts the needle and moves the sampling tray<br />
with a programmed vial under the needle (see step 2 on page 292).<br />
If the additional 100 sample tray (18596L/M) is installed the arm <strong>of</strong> this tray<br />
moves the vial into the transfer position <strong>of</strong> the 21 sample tray (vial 16).<br />
The sampling unit lowers the needle into the vial and the programmed<br />
injection volume is then drawn up into the sampling unit by the metering<br />
device. The needle is raised the tray is moved back to home position and the<br />
needle is reseat. The valve unit returns to its normal position reconnecting<br />
the needle loop to the flow system (see step 3 on page 292). All <strong>of</strong> the sample<br />
is pumped out <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler onto the column.<br />
Sampling unit and metering device are always in the main flow path (normal<br />
mode) and therefore an extra flushing procedure is not necessary. In case <strong>of</strong><br />
air in the system (metering device) increase flow (for example 5 ml) or use<br />
appropriate solvent (for example isopropanol).<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 291
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
How Does The Autosampler Work?<br />
1 Injection Sequence I 2 Injection Sequence II<br />
3 Injection Sequence III<br />
292 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
The Injection Sequence<br />
The Injection Sequence<br />
The injection sequence is stored in controller memory. For each step <strong>of</strong> the<br />
sequence a time for execution is assumed. If execution takes too long<br />
(time-out) or fails, it will result in an aborted injection and an error message.<br />
Each single step <strong>of</strong> the sequence can be executed solely when the system is<br />
brought into the test functions.<br />
1 Switch Valve Unit to bypass flow.<br />
2 Initialize Metering Device.<br />
# Includes step 1 to 5 <strong>of</strong> 18596L/M sample tray if installed and selected.<br />
3 Raise needle.<br />
4 Move vial underneath needle.<br />
5 Lower needle into vial.<br />
6 Draw sample up from sample vial.<br />
7 Raise needle out <strong>of</strong> vial.<br />
8 Move vial back to home position.<br />
9 Lower needle onto seat.<br />
10 Switch Valve Unit to flow through sample loop.<br />
# Executes steps 6 to 9 <strong>of</strong> 18596L/M sample tray if installed and selected.<br />
NOTE Steps 1 through 5 can be aborted.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 293
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
What happens when the 18596L/M Sample Tray is connected?<br />
What happens when the 18596L/M Sample<br />
Tray is connected?<br />
If the optional 18596L/M sample tray is connected to the autosampler, the<br />
additional steps <strong>of</strong> the 100 sample tray will be incorporated into the injection<br />
sequence. The 100 sample tray arm will move each selected vial into the<br />
transfer position 16 <strong>of</strong> the 21 sample tray. After the injection, the 100 tray arm<br />
moves the vial back to the original position in the 100 vial tray.<br />
1 Initialize 100 vial tray.<br />
2 Move to selected vial position.<br />
3 Pick up vial.<br />
4 Move to 21 sample tray.<br />
5 Insert vial into position 16 <strong>of</strong> 21 sample tray.<br />
6 Remove vial from 21 sample tray.<br />
7 Move arm to vial position.<br />
8 Insert vial into 100 vial tray.<br />
9 Move the 100 tray arm to home position.<br />
294 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
Overview <strong>of</strong> the Electronics<br />
Overview <strong>of</strong> the Electronics<br />
Figure 107 shows the block diagram <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler including all<br />
currently available options.<br />
The Common Main Processor (CMP) controls all functions <strong>of</strong> the module.<br />
The firmware board (FIM) containing the EPROM’s with the sampler specific<br />
firmware is attached to the VMD board. Therefore the processor board<br />
(CMP) remains identical for all modules.<br />
The Max Tray Drive (MTD) controls the 18596L/M 100 sample tray when<br />
connected to the autosampler. This expands the vial range from 21 vials to a<br />
total <strong>of</strong> 119 vials. Two vial positions in the 21 vial tray are needed for access<br />
from the 100 vial tray. The rotor reader option can be connected to the<br />
18596L/M tray. Electronic control is done from the rotor reader board which<br />
is attached to the MTD board.<br />
The communication interface board (CIB) provides an GPIB and RS232C<br />
interface. With the CIB installed the autosampler can be controlled via the LC<br />
ChemStation or via the 3396 <strong>Series</strong> II integrator.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 295
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
Overview <strong>of</strong> the Electronics<br />
Figure 107 Block Diagram <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler<br />
296 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Repair Level: Component (see Parts ID)<br />
Table 69 Part Numbers Sampling Unit<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Sampling Unit 01078-60001<br />
Ti - Sampling Unit 01079-60001<br />
The Sampling Unit comprises two functions, control <strong>of</strong> needle movement and<br />
positioning the respective vial under the needle. The sampling unit is<br />
controlled by the needle mini tray drive board (NMD).<br />
The stepper motor for the needle movement is connected to a lead screw<br />
which moves the needle arm with the needle up and down. Lightswitches at<br />
the needle arm check for upper and lower limit <strong>of</strong> the needle and also check<br />
the presence <strong>of</strong> a vial during the injection cycle. The second stepper motor<br />
drives the coupler which holds the sample tray. The home position <strong>of</strong> the tray<br />
is determined when a little magnet in the tray is located directly above the<br />
home sensor. Standard sample tray with 21 vials or micro tray with 34 vials<br />
are identified by the polarity <strong>of</strong> the tray magnet (north pole for standard tray<br />
and south pole for the micro tray). A quadrature encoder on the coupler shaft<br />
allows accurate positioning <strong>of</strong> the tray.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 297
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Table 70 Technical Data Sampling Unit<br />
Figure 108 Sampling Unit<br />
Number <strong>of</strong> spindle motor steps between<br />
upper and lower limit<br />
Number <strong>of</strong> spindle motor steps between<br />
upper limit and needle in vial position<br />
5867 steps (44 mm)<br />
5334 steps (40 mm)<br />
Needle speed 20 mm/sec<br />
Spindle 200 steps (1.5 mm)/revolution<br />
Number <strong>of</strong> encoder wheel slits 500<br />
Resolution <strong>of</strong> the tray 2000 steps/revolution<br />
Reproducibility <strong>of</strong> tray position ±1 mm<br />
Tray speed 2.3 seconds/revolution<br />
Sealing Force 50-55 N<br />
Ti <strong>Series</strong><br />
Materials in contact with solvent: tantalum, titanium, Peek, gold<br />
298 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
Metering Drive<br />
Metering Drive<br />
Repair Level: Assembly or component level for given parts (see Parts ID)<br />
Table 71 Part Numbers Metering Drive<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Metering Drive 01078-60002<br />
The Metering Drive is responsible for drawing the sample into the sample<br />
loop. The stepper motor controlled by the Valve Metering Drive Board (VMD)<br />
drives the spindle via a belt. The circular movement <strong>of</strong> the spindle is<br />
transformed in a linear movement for the piston via a bronze nut. A light<br />
sensor determines the home position <strong>of</strong> the piston.<br />
Table 72 Technical Data Metering Drive<br />
Resolution <strong>of</strong> mechanical system 7 nl/step <strong>of</strong> motor<br />
Number <strong>of</strong> steps between extension limits 15000<br />
Figure 109 Metering Drive Assembly<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 299
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
Analytical Head Assembly<br />
Analytical Head Assembly<br />
Repair Level: Component (see Parts ID)<br />
Table 73 Part Numbers Metering Drive<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Analytical Head assembly 01078-60003<br />
Ti - Analytical Head assembly 01079-60003<br />
The sapphire piston moves up or down the spindle on a bronze nut. The built<br />
in spring prevents clearance affecting drawing accuracy. Piston movement in<br />
the analytical head is guided by a sapphire ring. On the backward stroke the<br />
piston draws sample from the vial.<br />
Table 74 Technical Data Analytical Head<br />
Maximum stroke 100 µl<br />
Ti <strong>Series</strong><br />
Materials in contact with solvent Filled Teflon, sapphire,<br />
titanium<br />
Figure 110 Analytical Head Assembly<br />
300 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
Repair Level: either Exchange Assembly or component level for given parts<br />
(see Parts ID)<br />
Table 75 Part Numbers Metering Drive<br />
Item Part Number Exchange<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve 01078-60004 01078-69004<br />
Ti - High Pressure Switching Valve 01079-60004 01079-69004<br />
The High Pressure Switching Valve bypasses the flow direct to the column<br />
during the injection cycle. The valve is air driven. The switching positions <strong>of</strong><br />
the valve are sensed with a light switch that provides a status signal to the<br />
Valve Metering Drive (VMD) indicating proper execution <strong>of</strong> any movement.<br />
Table 76 Technical Data High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
Ti <strong>Series</strong><br />
Materials in contact with solvent Tefzel, titanium, ceramic<br />
Figure 111 High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 301
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
Pneumatic Assembly<br />
Pneumatic Assembly<br />
Repair Level: Component (see Parts ID)<br />
Table 77 Part Numbers Pneumatic Assembly<br />
Figure 112 Valve Connections<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Pneumatic Assembly 01078-66101<br />
Air supply is connected from the rear <strong>of</strong> the module to a self latching<br />
solenoid valve. Pressure is sensed for an under pressure condition (
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
Pneumatic Assembly<br />
For test reasons the actuator air solenoid may be switched manually.<br />
Actuator Air Solenoids<br />
Table 78 Switching <strong>of</strong> Solenoids<br />
Figure 113 Pneumatic Assembly<br />
Manual air actuation is done in the following way:<br />
Screw A Screw B Cyl #1 Cyl #2 Comment<br />
0 0 SUP EXH Relaxed Position<br />
1 0 SUP EXH<br />
0 0 SUP EXH Solenoid ready for next switch<br />
0 1 EXH SUP<br />
0 0 EXH SUP Solenoid ready for next switch<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 303
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
Additional 100 Sample Capacity<br />
Additional 100 Sample Capacity<br />
Repair Level: Component<br />
This option for the autosampler comprises the max tray drive board<br />
assembly (MTD), the tray support and the foot support. A new firmware<br />
might be required when updating existing instruments.<br />
With these parts it is possible to adapt the unmodified 18596A/B GC tray to<br />
the 79855A Autosampler (See also Updating to an additional 100 vial tray).<br />
The 100 vial tray has to be ordered separately.<br />
NOTE The 18596A/B tray get a different order suffix when ordered for an <strong>1050</strong><br />
Autosampler. Reason are the different accessories (for example manuals and<br />
so) when ordered for an LC or GC.<br />
Table 79 100 Vial Tray<br />
GC LC<br />
18596A 18596L<br />
18596B 18596M<br />
For access <strong>of</strong> the additional vials the firmware adds 100 to each tray position<br />
so that the 100 sample tray holds the positions 101 to 200. The arm <strong>of</strong> the 100<br />
sample tray moves the selected bottle into position 16 <strong>of</strong> the 21 sample tray.<br />
Position 15 has to be empty for the undisturbed movement <strong>of</strong> the tray arm.<br />
After the injection the vial is placed back into its original position in the large<br />
tray. The remaining vial range <strong>of</strong> the 21 sample tray (1 to 14 and 17 to 21) is<br />
fully accessible. The firmware automatically skips vial 15 and 16.<br />
NOTE <strong>Service</strong> Information about the 18696A/B can be obtained from the 7673<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Manual for the A tray and for the B tray.<br />
304 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
Additional 100 Sample Capacity<br />
Figure 114 Additional Tray Option<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 305
Sampler: Hardware Information<br />
Additional 100 Sample Capacity<br />
306 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
13<br />
13 Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
This chapter provides electronic information<br />
about the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
This chapter gives information about the electronic <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> autosampler:<br />
Overview<br />
Max Tray Drive Board (MTD)<br />
Needle Mini Tray Drive Board (NMD)<br />
Valve Metering Drive Board (VMD)<br />
Firmware Board (FIM)<br />
Autosampler Motherboard (ALM)<br />
308 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Overview<br />
Overview<br />
Table 80 Electronic Boards<br />
All electronic boards (except the FIP, behind the keyboard) are located in the<br />
rear part <strong>of</strong> the module and they are connected to the Motherboard (ALM).<br />
Excess to the boards is from the rear <strong>of</strong> the instrument. Slot numbers (for<br />
example in the status display) are counted from left to right. The Power<br />
Supply (DPS-B) is located in slot 1 and the common main processor is<br />
located in slot 7. The rear <strong>of</strong> the autosampler is shown in Figure 115 on page<br />
310.<br />
In the Autosampler the following electronic assemblies are available:<br />
Description Part Number Exchange<br />
Power Supply (DPS-B) 5061-3374 0<strong>1050</strong>-69374<br />
Common Main Processor (CMP) 0<strong>1050</strong>-69380 0<strong>1050</strong>-69580<br />
# Max Tray Drive Assembly (18596A/L) (MTD) 01078-66503 01078-69503<br />
## Max Tray Drive Assembly (18596B/M) (MTD) 01078-66513 01078-69513<br />
# Rotor Reader Drive Assembly (G1926A) (RRC) 01078-66507<br />
Valve Metering Drive (VMD) 01078-66501 01078-69501<br />
Needle Mini Tray Drive (NMD) 01078-66502 01078-69502<br />
Firmware Board (SFW) 01018-66506<br />
Motherboard (ALM) 01078-66504<br />
Display Interface Board (FIP) 5061-3376<br />
Communication Interface (CIB) 5061-2482<br />
# Optional board<br />
## Optional board, attached to the MTD board (not described in this<br />
manual)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 309
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Overview<br />
NOTE For information about Power Supply, Common Processor and Fluorescent<br />
Interface refer to chapter <strong>1050</strong> Common Information.<br />
Figure 115 Rear <strong>of</strong> <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler<br />
NOTE The MTD board is optional.<br />
310 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Overview<br />
Figure 116 Block Diagram <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 311
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Max Tray Drive Board (MTD)<br />
Max Tray Drive Board (MTD)<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 81 Part Numbers for MTD Board<br />
Item Part Number Exchange<br />
MTD Board 18596M 01078-66513 01078-69513<br />
MTD Board 18596L 01078-66503 01078-69503<br />
RRC Board for both versions 01078-66507<br />
NOTE The RRC board will be attached to the MTD board when Rotor Reader Option<br />
(G1926A) for the 100 vial tray is installed.<br />
The function <strong>of</strong> the board is to control the 18596L/M sample tray and to<br />
provide the electrical interface to the common main processor (CMP). The<br />
18596L/M is part <strong>of</strong> the 7673A product family.<br />
I/O Control<br />
The I/O control circuit enables the common main processor (CMP) and the<br />
maxi tray drive (MTD) to exchange data. This is done via a bidirectional I/O<br />
buffer. A board identification (a resistor network) allows the processor to<br />
identify the board and to address.<br />
Sensor Status<br />
Via the sensors interface circuit the sensor status is transferred to the sensor<br />
status latch. The sensor status latch transfers the information via the<br />
common bus to the CMP.<br />
312 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Max Tray Drive Board (MTD)<br />
Data Conversion<br />
While the common main processor bus has a parallel data structure the Main<br />
Processor Unit (MPU) uses a serial data bus. The data conversion section<br />
performs the parallel to serial and serial to parallel conversion for the<br />
different bus structures.<br />
Figure 117 Block Diagram MTD Board<br />
Clock<br />
The clock circuit provides all necessary frequencies for the main processor<br />
unit (MPU) and the data conversion section. It uses a 4.9152 MHz clock<br />
generator.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 313
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Max Tray Drive Board (MTD)<br />
Main Processor Unit (MPU)<br />
The MPU is the heart <strong>of</strong> the MTD board and controls all the functions <strong>of</strong> the<br />
18596L sample tray. All the necessary memory needed to run the 100 tray<br />
resides inside the MPU chip. The MPU chip provides all the signals for the<br />
motor drivers and sends a tray fault signal out in case <strong>of</strong> malfunctions.<br />
To control all the steps <strong>of</strong> the tray the MPU reads the sensor status from the<br />
sensor interface.<br />
Reset and Watchdog<br />
This circuit checks for proper operation <strong>of</strong> the Main Processor Unit (MPU).<br />
In case <strong>of</strong> malfunctions (for example timing problems and so on), the reset<br />
and watchdog resets the system preventing any damage <strong>of</strong> the 18956L tray.<br />
The System OK Signal (SOK) from the Common Main Processor (CMP) is<br />
also fed into the reset and watchdog block. In case <strong>of</strong> 79855A processor<br />
problems or problems which influence the SOK status, the reset and<br />
watchdog will also reset the MTD board.<br />
Motor Drivers<br />
Three motors control all the movements <strong>of</strong> the 18596L 100 sample tray. The<br />
radial arm drives (R-Motor) and the gripper drives (Z-Motor) are similar. To<br />
keep the position <strong>of</strong> the arm or the gripper mechanism when not turning the<br />
motors are powered down to maintain a standby torque. The angular driver<br />
(Theta-Motor) provides a constant standby current in chopper mode and<br />
normal on/<strong>of</strong>f switching <strong>of</strong> the motor windings at standard speed.<br />
Sensor Interface<br />
Three position sensors are located in the tray to provide feedback as to the<br />
position <strong>of</strong> the tray arm. An additional sensor in the gripper on the arm to<br />
indicates the presence <strong>of</strong> a bottle. The bottle sensor is simply a micro switch<br />
which provides a short ground when the bottle is present. The two position<br />
sensors that are used to sense the home positions for radial (R) axis and<br />
gripper (Z) axis are hall sensors that provide a logic low output when they<br />
encounter a suitable magnetic field. Small permanent magnets are placed in<br />
the appropriate positions in the tray. The angular (Theta) axis position<br />
sensor is an optical photo diode transistor pair. The photo diode is turned on<br />
only when the motor is being actuated. The interlock is a sense line which<br />
identifies whether the sample tray (cable) is installed or not.<br />
314 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Max Tray Drive Board (MTD)<br />
Figure 118 Board Layout MTD<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 315
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Needle Mini Tray Drive Board (NMD)<br />
Needle Mini Tray Drive Board (NMD)<br />
Repair Level: Board, Capacitor<br />
Table 82 Part Numbers for NMD Board<br />
Item Part Number Exchange<br />
NMD Board 01078-66502 01078-69502<br />
Capacitor 100 pF (between pin 5 and 7 <strong>of</strong> U26) 0160-4801<br />
The main function <strong>of</strong> the NMD board is the control <strong>of</strong> needle motor and tray<br />
motor.<br />
Capacitor 100pF<br />
Firmware revision 4.0 and above require a modification <strong>of</strong> the NMD board.<br />
Otherwise incorrect positioning <strong>of</strong> the 21 or 34 vial tray may occur. The<br />
100 pF capacitor soldered between pin 5 and 7 <strong>of</strong> U26 solves the problem.<br />
Instruments with serial number prefix 3117 G ..... or 3121 A ..... do have this<br />
capacitor.<br />
I/O Control<br />
The I/O control circuit enables the common main processor and the needle<br />
mini tray drive (NMD) to exchange data. This is done via a bidirectional I/O<br />
buffer. A board identification circuit allows the processor to identify the<br />
board and to address it.<br />
BCD Output<br />
The circuit codes the bottle number into BCD and provides the signal to the<br />
connector on the back <strong>of</strong> the NMD board. The BCD code is implemented in<br />
positive true logic. Firmware REV 2.0 and above allow configuration <strong>of</strong> the<br />
output for either 2 digit BCD coded or 8 bit binary (HEX) coded information.<br />
316 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Needle Mini Tray Drive Board (NMD)<br />
Figure 119 Block Diagram NMD Board<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 317
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Needle Mini Tray Drive Board (NMD)<br />
Sensor Status<br />
The hall sensor, the bottle sensor and the needle sensor are connected to this<br />
circuit block. The hall sensor checks the presence <strong>of</strong> the sample tray and is<br />
used to set the home position. The bottle sensor checks for the presence <strong>of</strong> a<br />
bottle during injection cycle. The needle sensor checks upper and lower<br />
position <strong>of</strong> the needle. The status information from the sensors are<br />
transferred directly to the processor.<br />
Control Logic<br />
The control logic provides the motor parameters to the motor driver. The<br />
parameters are the direction, resolution and current for the motors. The<br />
control logic starts the timer and stops it under two conditions. In case a light<br />
sensor detects the home position or the number <strong>of</strong> steps <strong>of</strong> the motor have<br />
been elapsed, the timer will be stopped. To increase the life time <strong>of</strong> the<br />
sensors the control logic activates the light sensors only during the injection<br />
cycle and switches it <strong>of</strong>f afterwards.<br />
Timer<br />
The timer chip <strong>of</strong> the timer circuit consist <strong>of</strong> three independent timer/counter<br />
stages from which only two are used. One timer generates the speed (step<br />
frequency) <strong>of</strong> needle and sample tray motor. The second timer defines the<br />
number <strong>of</strong> steps the motor has to perform to reach its selected destination<br />
(needle position).<br />
Motor Driver<br />
The motor driver delivers the power to the two motors. A bipolar phase<br />
controller allows a high torque at high frequency for the movement.<br />
Quadrature Decoder<br />
The quadrature encoder on the tray coupler senses the movement <strong>of</strong> the<br />
sample tray. The derived signals contain information <strong>of</strong> the direction and the<br />
actual position <strong>of</strong> the tray motor. The decoder reads the signals and transfers<br />
the information to the processor.<br />
318 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Needle Mini Tray Drive Board (NMD)<br />
Figure 120 Board Layout NMD<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 319
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Valve Metering Drive Board (VMD)<br />
Valve Metering Drive Board (VMD)<br />
Repair Level: Board, Fuse<br />
Table 83 Part Numbers for NMD Board<br />
Item Part Number Exchange<br />
Valve Metering Drive (VMD) 01078-66501 01078-69501<br />
Fuse F12, F14 250 mA 2110-0004<br />
The main functions <strong>of</strong> the board is to control the Metering Drive and the High<br />
Pressure Switching Valve. In addition the VMD board holds also the firmware<br />
for the common main processor (CMP).The firmware is attached to the VMD<br />
board but has no functional connection to the board.<br />
I/O Control<br />
The I/O control circuit enables the common main processor and the Valve<br />
Metering Drive (VMD) to communicate data. This is done via a bidirectional<br />
I/O buffer. A board identification circuit allows the processor to identify the<br />
board and to address it.<br />
Control Logic<br />
The control logic provides the motor parameters to the motor driver circuit.<br />
The parameters are the direction, resolution and current for the metering<br />
drive motor. The control logic starts the timer. It stops it in case the home<br />
position light switch is activated or the motor steps have been elapsed. To<br />
increase the life time <strong>of</strong> the sensors the control logic activates the light<br />
sensors only during the injection cycle and switches it <strong>of</strong>f afterwards. The<br />
pneumatic valve will be switched via the valve driver circuit to change the<br />
position <strong>of</strong> the high pressure switching valve.<br />
320 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Valve Metering Drive Board (VMD)<br />
Figure 121 Block Diagram VMD Board<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 321
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Valve Metering Drive Board (VMD)<br />
Relay Contact Control<br />
Two relay contacts are controlled. When activated, contact 1 provides fused<br />
(250 mA) +24 V, while contact 2 provides a fused (250 mA) 30 V maximum<br />
(AC/DC) rated contact closure. For more information about the relay<br />
contacts see “External Contacts” on page 56 in the chapter <strong>1050</strong> Common<br />
Information.<br />
Timer<br />
The timer chip <strong>of</strong> the timer circuit consist <strong>of</strong> three independent timer/counter<br />
stages from which only two are used. One timer generates the speed (step<br />
frequency) <strong>of</strong> the metering motor. The second timer defines the number <strong>of</strong><br />
steps the motor has to perform to reach its selected destination (volume).<br />
Motor Driver<br />
The motor driver delivers the power to the motor. A bipolar phase driver<br />
allows a high torque for the movement.<br />
Sensor Status<br />
The metering home sensor the valve position sensor and the air pressure<br />
switch are connected to the sensor status circuit. The home position sensor<br />
checks whether the piston <strong>of</strong> the metering unit is in the maximum front<br />
position or not. The valve position sensor checks the switching <strong>of</strong> the bypass<br />
valve. The air pressure switch senses low air pressure in the system and<br />
inhibits further injections. The metering motion status signal gives the<br />
information whether the metering drive motor is running or not. The signal is<br />
derived from the timer circuit. The switch (S28) is not used so far and is<br />
reserved for future use.<br />
322 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Valve Metering Drive Board (VMD)<br />
Figure 122 Board Layout VMD<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 323
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Firmware Board (FIM)<br />
Firmware Board (FIM)<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 84 Part Numbers for FIM Board<br />
Figure 123 Layout <strong>of</strong> FIM Board<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Firmware Board (New) 01078-66506<br />
The FIM board is a piggy back board, placed on VMD board (“personality<br />
module”).<br />
The programmed FIM contains the firmware <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler.<br />
The board is designed for on board programming.<br />
The FIM contains 128K x 8bit EPROMs.<br />
All inputs/outputs are pulled down for electrostatic discharge protection.<br />
324 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Autosampler Motherboard (ALM)<br />
Autosampler Motherboard (ALM)<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 85 Part Numbers for ALM Board<br />
Item Part Number<br />
ALM Board 01078-66504<br />
The motherboard contains all connectors for the boards and the assemblies<br />
in the front part, like sampling unit, metering drive, high pressure switching<br />
valve, pneumatic valve and keyboard.<br />
Figure 124 on page 326 shows the location <strong>of</strong> all connectors. A mechanical<br />
Injection Counter displays the actual number <strong>of</strong> injections counted by<br />
switching valve transitions.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 325
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Autosampler Motherboard (ALM)<br />
Figure 124 Layout <strong>of</strong> Autosampler Motherboard<br />
Table 86 ALM Connectors<br />
J1 - Power Supply J9 - DGND J17 - Leak Sensor<br />
J2 - TAR Board J10 - Bottle Sensor J18 - Home Sensor<br />
J3 - VMD/FIM Board J11 - future option J19 - Metering Motor<br />
J4 - NMD Board J12 - Needle Motor J20 - Valve Position<br />
J5 - Not used J13 - Tray Motor J21 - Low Pressure Switch<br />
J6 - Not used J14 - Shaft Encoder J22 - Pneumatic Solenoid Valve<br />
J7 - CMP J15 - Hall Sensor<br />
J8 - FIP Keyboard J16 - Needle Sensor<br />
Figure 125 on page 327 to Figure 127 on page 329 show the main signals and<br />
voltages <strong>of</strong> the various boards and connectors.<br />
326 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Autosampler Motherboard (ALM)<br />
Figure 125 Connectors ALM (Part I)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 327
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Autosampler Motherboard (ALM)<br />
Figure 126 Connectors ALM (Part II)<br />
328 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Autosampler Motherboard (ALM)<br />
Figure 127 Connectors ALM (Part III)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 329
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Extender Test Board (ET)<br />
Extender Test Board (ET)<br />
Table 87 Part Numbers for Extender Test Board<br />
Figure 128 Extender Test Board<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Extender Test Board 01078-66509<br />
Cable Assembly 01078-61609<br />
The extender test board in combination with the cable assembly allows the<br />
operation <strong>of</strong> sampling unit metering drive and high pressure switching valve<br />
taken out <strong>of</strong> the autosampler module. The test board contains all the<br />
connectors for the different items and holds some electronic for<br />
troubleshooting and sensor adjustment. Figure 128 shows the circuit diagram<br />
<strong>of</strong> the test board. The LED’s CR1 to CR7 show the actual status <strong>of</strong> the<br />
sensors. An LED which is ON indicates that the sensor is either blocked or<br />
deactivated. The sensors are only activated during the injection cycle.<br />
330 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Extender Test Board (ET)<br />
Figure 129 Circuit Diagram ET Board<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 331
Sampler: Electronic Information<br />
Extender Test Board (ET)<br />
332 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
14<br />
14 Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
This chapter provides information on error<br />
messages and diagnostic features <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Autosampler
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
This chapter provides information about<br />
diagnostic steps<br />
error messages<br />
additional information<br />
334 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Single Steps<br />
Single Steps<br />
The autosampler has several test functions which are part <strong>of</strong> the control<br />
section. The test functions provides access to the single steps <strong>of</strong> the injection<br />
sequence. If the 18596L/M sample tray (100 sample tray) is installed the<br />
firmware provides also single steps for this tray.<br />
Entering the Test Functions<br />
❏ Press CTRL and with NEXT move the cursor to the TEST FUNCTIONS<br />
display and press ENTER.<br />
❏ With the PREV or NEXT keys all <strong>of</strong> the single steps are accessible.<br />
NOTE This section describes only the function <strong>of</strong> the single steps. In case <strong>of</strong><br />
malfunctions or error messages refer to the troubleshooting section <strong>of</strong> this<br />
manual.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 335
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Single Steps For The 21 Sample Tray<br />
Single Steps For The 21 Sample Tray<br />
CAUTION Single steps can be performed in any order and the step sequence is under the<br />
control <strong>of</strong> the operator. In case <strong>of</strong> incorrect step sequences damage <strong>of</strong> needle,<br />
seat, sample tray and other parts <strong>of</strong> the instrument might be possible. Multiple<br />
execution <strong>of</strong> the steps should be avoided because <strong>of</strong> occurring error messages<br />
or possible damage <strong>of</strong> the instrument. The single steps should always be<br />
performed with the inner cabinet installed.<br />
SINGLE STEP 1 SINGLE STEP 1 BYPASS<br />
The high pressure switching valve is activated and the mobile phase is<br />
directed to the column bypassing the metering device and the sampling unit.<br />
The correct switching <strong>of</strong> the valve is checked via a light sensor. Multiple<br />
execution <strong>of</strong> this step will create an error condition (E11).<br />
SINGLE STEP 2 SINGLE STEP 2 METERING HOME<br />
Metering device drives in the plunger to its mechanical limit named the home<br />
position. At home position a lever at the spindle system blocks the light path<br />
<strong>of</strong> a light switch. The metering device motor stops and reverses the direction<br />
until the lever has moved out <strong>of</strong> the light path. Multiple executions <strong>of</strong> this<br />
step are possible.<br />
SINGLE STEP 3 SINGLE STEP 3 NEEDLE UP<br />
Sampling unit raises needle. Interrupter sensor detects upper position <strong>of</strong> the<br />
needle. Multiple execution creates an error message (E13) because <strong>of</strong> the<br />
missing activation <strong>of</strong> the sensor.<br />
SINGLE STEP 4 SINGLE STEP 4 POS. MINITRAY<br />
Sample tray moves vial under needle. During the initialization <strong>of</strong> the<br />
autosampler the home position <strong>of</strong> the sample tray will be determined (hall<br />
sensor). From this home position the selected vial will be reached by<br />
counting the steps <strong>of</strong> the encoder, which is mounted to the tray shaft.<br />
Multiple execution <strong>of</strong> this step are possible.<br />
336 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Single Steps For The 21 Sample Tray<br />
SINGLE STEP 5 SINGLE STEP 5 NEEDLE INTO VIAL<br />
Sampling unit lowers needle into vial. The stepper motor executes a defined<br />
number <strong>of</strong> steps to lower the needle. No sensor is involved in this action. Do<br />
not execute this step a second time. Otherwise the needle will be lowered<br />
again by the same number <strong>of</strong> steps. This means that the needle hits either the<br />
bottom <strong>of</strong> the vial or the plastic <strong>of</strong> the sample tray (if no vial is present). No<br />
error message will occur.<br />
SINGLE STEP 6 SINGLE STEP 6 DRAW UP<br />
Metering device withdraws plunger drawing up sample according to selected<br />
injection volume. For each injection volume the metering device motor<br />
performs certain steps to withdraw the plunger. Multiple execution <strong>of</strong> this<br />
step will withdraw the plunger until it reaches the maximum position. No<br />
error will occur.<br />
SINGLE STEP 7 SINGLE STEP 7 NEEDLE OUT<br />
Sampling unit raises needle out <strong>of</strong> vial. The needle motor is activated until<br />
stopped by the interrupter sensor, which is activated at upper position.<br />
Multiple execution <strong>of</strong> the step are possible without any problem (needle<br />
moves always up until it reaches the upper position and is moved back).<br />
SINGLE STEP 8 SINGLE STEP 8 MINITRAY HOME<br />
Sample tray moves back to home position. The number <strong>of</strong> encoder steps<br />
performed under step 4 will be executed in opposite direction. The home<br />
sensor is not involved in this action. Multiple execution <strong>of</strong> this step are<br />
possible without any problem (tray remains in home position).<br />
SINGLE STEP 9 SINGLE STEP 9 NEEDLE DOWN<br />
Sampling unit lowers needle into needle seat. Lower position is determined<br />
by the activation <strong>of</strong> the interrupter sensor. Multiple execution will create an<br />
error message (E19) because light path <strong>of</strong> sensor is already blocked.<br />
SINGLE STEP 10 SINGLE STEP 10 MAINPASS<br />
Switches switching valve to direct mobile phase through metering device and<br />
sampling unit and then into column. Light switch recognizes the change <strong>of</strong><br />
the position. Multiple execution <strong>of</strong> this step will create an error message<br />
(E20) because the light switch will not be activated again.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 337
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Single Steps for the 100 Sample Tray<br />
Single Steps for the 100 Sample Tray<br />
If the 18596L/M 100 sample tray is connected to the autosampler the<br />
firmware provides also single steps capability for this tray.<br />
Entering the Additional Single Steps<br />
❏ Press CTRL and with NEXT move the cursor to the TEST FUNCTIONS<br />
display and press ENTER.<br />
❏ With the PREV NEXT keys move to the display<br />
SINGLE STEPS 100 vial tray and press ENTER.<br />
NOTE This section describes only the function <strong>of</strong> the single steps. In case <strong>of</strong><br />
occurring malfunctions or error messages refer to the troubleshooting section<br />
<strong>of</strong> this manual.<br />
CAUTION Single steps can be performed in any order and the step sequence is under the<br />
control <strong>of</strong> the operator. In case <strong>of</strong> incorrect step sequences damage <strong>of</strong> gripper<br />
assembly tray arm and other parts <strong>of</strong> the instrument might be possible.<br />
Multiple execution <strong>of</strong> the steps should be avoided, because <strong>of</strong> occurring error<br />
messages or possible damage <strong>of</strong> the instrument.<br />
SINGLE STEP 1 SINGLE STEP 1 INIT 100 TRAY<br />
100 sample tray performs an initialization. Multiple execution <strong>of</strong> this step<br />
causes no problem.<br />
SINGLE STEP 2 SINGLE STEP 2 MOVE TO POS 101<br />
From the home position the tray arm moves to the position 1 <strong>of</strong> the 100<br />
sample tray. The firmware does not support access to other vials. Do not<br />
execute the step a second time. Otherwise the arm performs the same<br />
number <strong>of</strong> steps again and moves into the mechanical stop.<br />
SINGLE STEP 3 SINGLE STEP 3 PICK UP VIAL<br />
The gripper assembly moves down, picks up the bottle and the gripper moves<br />
up to home position (determined by a hall sensor). Second execution <strong>of</strong> this<br />
step will lead to incorrect position in step 4.<br />
338 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Single Steps for the 100 Sample Tray<br />
SINGLE STEP 4 SINGLE STEP 4 MOVE TO 21 TRAY<br />
Tray arm moves vial to the 21 sample tray position and stops above vial<br />
position 16 <strong>of</strong> the tray. Do not execute this step a second time, because the<br />
arm would move into the mechanical stop.<br />
SINGLE STEP 5 SINGLE STEP 5 INSERT VIAL<br />
Gripper assembly moves down and places the vial into the 21 sample tray and<br />
gripper returns to home position. Down position <strong>of</strong> the gripper can be<br />
influenced via the teach tray mode. Do not execute the step a second time.<br />
Otherwise incorrect positioning <strong>of</strong> the tray arm will occur and the following<br />
steps might show incorrect results.<br />
SINGLE STEP 6 SINGLE STEP 6 REMOVE VIAL<br />
Gripper assembly picks up the vial from the 21 tray. Step is similar to step 2.<br />
SINGLE STEP 7 SINGLE STEP 7 MOVE TO POS 101<br />
From the 21 sample tray the arm moves back to the position 1 <strong>of</strong> the 100<br />
sample tray. Second execution should be avoided, otherwise the tray arm<br />
moves into the mechanical stop.<br />
SINGLE STEP 8 SINGLE STEP 8 INSERT VIAL<br />
The gripper assembly moves down and replaces the vial into its original<br />
position.<br />
SINGLE STEP 9 SINGLE STEP 9 HOME 100 TRAY<br />
The tray arm is moved back to the home position. This step is not identical<br />
with the initialization <strong>of</strong> the tray arm.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 339
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
18596L/M Sample Tray Diagnostic Mode<br />
18596L/M Sample Tray Diagnostic Mode<br />
Tray diagnostics mode isolates sample tray motion in each <strong>of</strong> the Z (gripper<br />
arm), R (radial movement <strong>of</strong> tray arm) and Theta (angular movement <strong>of</strong> tray<br />
arm) direction.<br />
Entering Diagnostic Mode<br />
❏ Turn <strong>of</strong>f power at the 79855A autosampler.<br />
❏ Take out the MTD board and put the RUN-TEST jumper J13 into TEST<br />
position.<br />
❏ Replace the board.<br />
❏ Take the sample quadrants out <strong>of</strong> the 18596L/M sample tray, if not taken<br />
out interference in Z direction will occur.<br />
❏ Turn on line power and the 18596L/M will go automatically into the Z test.<br />
Z Test (Gripper Assembly)<br />
First the tray will home itself to the Z sensor at the top <strong>of</strong> travel.<br />
The tray will then drive the gripper down in Z back up to the sensor and up<br />
further to the mechanical stop.<br />
If the test passed (for example no problem in Z direction), the tray will pause<br />
two seconds and then it will repeat the test.<br />
If the bottle switch is pressed after passing the test, the sample tray will<br />
advance to the R test.<br />
NOTE If the Z sensor was not found (due to shorted motor, board problem, bad flex<br />
circuit, bad sensor, and so on), the test will abort. Turn <strong>of</strong>f the autosampler<br />
and turn on again to restart the test. Pressing the bottle switch when in this<br />
error condition will advance the sample tray to the R test.<br />
340 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
18596L/M Sample Tray Diagnostic Mode<br />
R Test (radial arm movement)<br />
First the arm will drive to the hard stop in R and locate the R sensor.<br />
The arm will then be driven out to full extension in R, back to the R sensor<br />
and back to the hard stop.<br />
If the test was passed, the sample tray will pause two seconds and then it will<br />
repeat the R test.<br />
If the bottle switch is pressed after passing the test, the sample tray will<br />
advance to the Theta test.<br />
NOTE If the R sensor was not found, the test will abort. Turn <strong>of</strong>f the autosampler and<br />
on again to restart the test. Pressing the bottle switch when in this error<br />
condition will advance the sample tray to the Theta test.<br />
Theta Test (angular movement)<br />
First the sample tray will home itself in R and Theta direction. The R axis is<br />
homed so that the Theta motion can be made with R in its normal operating<br />
position. Failure <strong>of</strong> the R axis to home will not prevent the Theta test from<br />
running.<br />
The Theta test drives both R and Theta motors.<br />
After homing R and Theta, the arm will rotate 180° counter-clockwise, 360°<br />
clockwise and 180° counter-clockwise and check for the Theta sensor.<br />
If the test was passed, the tray will pause for two seconds and then it will<br />
repeat the test.<br />
If the bottle switch is pressed after passing the test, the sample tray will<br />
advance to the Z test.<br />
NOTE If motor steps are lost, the test will abort. Turn <strong>of</strong>f the autosampler and on<br />
again to restart the Z and R test.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 341
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Error Messages<br />
Error Messages<br />
The error messages will help to locate and repair a possible failure. In case an<br />
error message appears the Error LED will be turned on and the message will<br />
be written into the system logbook. RESET INJECTOR clears the error<br />
message. The entry in the logbook remains.<br />
The error messages are divided into the following blocks:<br />
Selftest<br />
PANIC Error<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Messages<br />
Error Messages for Firmware Revision 4.0 and greater<br />
Injector Program<br />
Error Messages for Firmware Revision 3.1 and below<br />
Events<br />
18596L/M vial tray<br />
342 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Error Messages<br />
Selftest<br />
RAM and display can be tested via the build in selftest. The selftest will be<br />
performed when CTRL will be pressed while the module is turned on at the<br />
LINE ~ switch. In case <strong>of</strong> a failure one <strong>of</strong> the following messages appears.<br />
The complete test requires approximately two minutes.<br />
ROM test failed ( ROM test failed )<br />
The ROMs on the FIM board are tested. In case <strong>of</strong> a checksum error the ROM<br />
test fails. Replacement <strong>of</strong> the FIM board will probably fix the problem.<br />
RAM test failed ( RAM test failed )<br />
Bus Error Address<br />
Error<br />
The RAM’s on the CMP board will be tested. In case <strong>of</strong> a failure the error<br />
message appears and the CMP has to be replaced.<br />
Panic Error<br />
PANIC: XXXXXXH BUS ERROR<br />
PANIC: XXXXXXH Address ERROR<br />
The panic error messages should not appear under normal operation<br />
conditions. In case <strong>of</strong> hardware or firmware problems the instrument might<br />
try to access a wrong or not existing address which results in the error<br />
message on the display. The instrument is locked up and has to be switched<br />
<strong>of</strong>f/on.<br />
Reason for the PANIC error message can be any disturbance on the bus lines<br />
due to bad contacts (high resistance) or defective IC on any <strong>of</strong> the boards.<br />
❏ Check boards for good connections or corrosions at the contacts (clean<br />
contact pins).<br />
❏ Check firmware revision <strong>of</strong> the firmware board (SWF). It should be<br />
revision C or higher. Boards with revision C do have a dynamic bus<br />
termination for spike suppression on the bus lines.<br />
❏ Replace one board at a time to identify the faulty one.<br />
❏ If board replacement will not cure the problem, replace the motherboard.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 343
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Error Messages<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Error Messages<br />
The common messages are either event or error messages which may appear<br />
in all the <strong>1050</strong> series modules. The messages are identical or very similar in<br />
the various modules.<br />
E00 : Power Fail E00 HH:MM DDMMM power fail<br />
E01 : Leak Detected In<br />
Detector<br />
This event message indicates that the instrument has either been turned <strong>of</strong>f<br />
or disconnected from line source or a line power voltage drop has occurred.<br />
The system clock will stop and has to be set after turning on the module.<br />
E01 HH:MM DDMMM leak detected ><br />
leak detected > in injector<br />
The leak detection system uses a PTC resistor as leak sensing item. Liquid<br />
cooling the PTC results in a decrease <strong>of</strong> the resistance. The PTC is built in a<br />
resistor divider which is connected to a constant voltage. From the voltage<br />
divider a signal can now be obtained depending on the current through the<br />
PTC and hence depending on the temperature. The leak detection circuit is<br />
located on the CMP board and checks continuously for presence and leak<br />
conditions. If the sensor is missing (defect) or in leak condition the PTC is<br />
cooled down the error message appears. When the module is turned on the<br />
leak message will be disabled for some time (30 seconds) to allow the sensor<br />
to reach its working range.<br />
Working condition <strong>of</strong> the PTC<br />
Normal: about 75°C 400...500 Ohm<br />
Error: below 55°C about 150 Ohm<br />
Actions:<br />
❏ Check for leaks in autosampler.<br />
❏ Check connector <strong>of</strong> the sensor.<br />
❏ Check resistance <strong>of</strong> leak sensor.<br />
❏ Change leak sensor.<br />
❏ Change CMP board.<br />
❏ Change FIM board.<br />
344 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Error Messages<br />
E02 : Shut down E02 HH:MM DDMMM shut down ><br />
error in other module<br />
E03 : Error Method<br />
loaded<br />
An external device pulled the shut down line <strong>of</strong> the remote connector down.<br />
This forces the autosampler to stop all further injections.<br />
E03 HH:MM DDMMM error method ><br />
error method has been loaded<br />
The operator may define an method as a error method. The event message<br />
gives the information that the instrument detected an error and that the error<br />
message has been loaded.<br />
E04 : Time Out E04 HH:MM DDMMM time out ><br />
The operator may define a time period after which the instruments stops all<br />
further actions. In case the instrument is in a sequence and a not ready has<br />
been detected in one <strong>of</strong> the other modules the instrument will stop the<br />
sequence after time out time has been elapsed.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 345
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Error Messages for Firmware Revision 4.0 and greater<br />
Error Messages for Firmware Revision 4.0<br />
and greater<br />
NOTE Firmware revision 4.0 and greater incorporates the injector program for the<br />
autosampler. The injector program required a restructure <strong>of</strong> the internal code<br />
<strong>of</strong> the injection cycle. Therefore some <strong>of</strong> the error messages had to be<br />
removed. This section shows the error messages for the current firmware<br />
revision 4.0 and greater. Nevertheless the same messages appear also in all the<br />
previous firmware versions. The additional error messages for firmware<br />
version 3.1 and below are described in section “Normal Operation Messages<br />
for Firmware Revision 3.1 and below” on page 351.<br />
E11 : Valve not moved<br />
to bypass<br />
The following messages might appear during the initialization, the injection<br />
cycle and a reset <strong>of</strong> the injector.<br />
At initialization and reset the system sets all components (sampling unit,<br />
metering device and high pressure switching valve) to home position. Missing<br />
or low air pressure will not result in an error condition.<br />
When started, the injection cycle will perform all the steps which are<br />
necessary to introduce the sample into the flow path.<br />
E11 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
valve not moved to bypass<br />
A light switch controls the movement <strong>of</strong> the high pressure switching valve. In<br />
case the sensor does not see a dynamic signal change the error message<br />
appears. Reason might be missing air (air pressure message?), a misadjusted<br />
lights witch or failures in the electronic circuit.<br />
❏ Check air supply.<br />
❏ Check sensor adjustment.<br />
❏ Check wether the solenoid is activated.<br />
❏ Change the VMD board.<br />
❏ Change the sensor.<br />
346 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
E13 : Needle has not<br />
been raised<br />
E14 : Vial position not<br />
found<br />
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Error Messages for Firmware Revision 4.0 and greater<br />
E13 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
needle has not been raised<br />
The motor is activated and moves the needle arm out <strong>of</strong> the seat or vial. In<br />
the upper position the interrupter pin blocks the light path <strong>of</strong> the interrupter<br />
sensor. The motor is stopped and the interrupter pin is moved out <strong>of</strong> the<br />
lights witch. Both positions upper limit and lower limit are determined by the<br />
same lights witch (interrupter sensor).<br />
❏ Check for blockages <strong>of</strong> the sensor.<br />
❏ Check for proper connection <strong>of</strong> motor and sensor.<br />
❏ Check for smooth movement <strong>of</strong> the spindle system.<br />
❏ Check for smooth movement <strong>of</strong> the bottle vane (bottle sensor).<br />
❏ Check drive nut.<br />
❏ Change NMD board.<br />
❏ Change interrupter sensor.<br />
E14 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
vial position not found<br />
During the initialization, the sample tray determines its home position<br />
(magnet above home sensor). The shaft encoder mounted onto the tray<br />
coupler provides the information to reach the various vial positions <strong>of</strong> the<br />
tray. If the selected position cannot be reached the error message will appear.<br />
Possible failure modes are blockages <strong>of</strong> the mechanical system, defective<br />
encoder or a electronic problem.<br />
❏ Check for mechanical blockages <strong>of</strong> the mechanical system (sample tray,<br />
tray coupler, belt and so on).<br />
❏ Check all cable connections.<br />
❏ Change NMD board.<br />
❏ Change encoder.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 347
E18 : Home position <strong>of</strong><br />
tray not found<br />
E19 : Needle has not<br />
been lowered<br />
E20 : Valve not moved<br />
to mainpass<br />
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Error Messages for Firmware Revision 4.0 and greater<br />
E18 HH:MMDDMMM inject failed ><br />
home position <strong>of</strong> tray not found<br />
After moving the requested vial to the injection position the sample tray<br />
moves back to its home position. The encoder checks the movement <strong>of</strong> the<br />
tray. If the tray cannot be moved the error message will appear. Failure<br />
modes might be mechanical blockages <strong>of</strong> the tray or problems from the<br />
encoder.<br />
❏ Check for blockages <strong>of</strong> the system.<br />
❏ Check Encoder signal.<br />
❏ Check Home sensor signal.<br />
❏ Change NMD board.<br />
E19 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
needle has not been lowered<br />
From the upper position the needle gets the command to move down into the<br />
seat or vial. In case <strong>of</strong> malfunctions the error appears. A defective bottle in<br />
place sensor might also generate the error.<br />
❏ Check the needle motor and sensor connection.<br />
❏ Check for blockages <strong>of</strong> the mechanical system.<br />
❏ Check sensor signal.<br />
❏ Check for smooth movement <strong>of</strong> the bottle vane (bottle sensor).<br />
❏ Lubricate bottle vane.<br />
❏ Change NMD board.<br />
❏ Check bottle in place sensor.<br />
E20 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
valve not moved to mainpass<br />
Last step in the injection sequence is to turn back the high pressure switching<br />
valve into its main pass position. Problems in the air supply, sensor or board<br />
problems may cause the error message to appear.<br />
❏ Check the pneumatic assembly.<br />
❏ Check cable connections.<br />
❏ Check sensor adjustment.<br />
❏ Change VMD board.<br />
348 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
E22 : Plunger home<br />
position not found<br />
E24 : Tray home<br />
position not found<br />
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Error Messages for Firmware Revision 4.0 and greater<br />
E22 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
plunger home pos not found<br />
The plunger <strong>of</strong> the metering device is moved forward until the home position<br />
sensor indicates the maximum allowed front position. In case the home<br />
sensor cannot be recognized the plunger moves into the mechanical stop.<br />
The motor will be stopped after the programmed time out has been elapsed.<br />
Second possibility is that the motor does not start and the plunger will not<br />
move at all. After time out the error message appears. Possible failure modes<br />
are a misadjusted or defective sensor or a defective motor.<br />
❏ Check for proper connection <strong>of</strong> motor and sensor.<br />
❏ Change VMD board.<br />
❏ Check alignment <strong>of</strong> sensor.<br />
❏ Change sensor.<br />
E24 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
tray home pos not found<br />
During the initialization the sample tray determines its home position<br />
(magnet above home sensor). If the home position could not be recognized<br />
the error appears (for example sample tray not installed). At the begin <strong>of</strong> an<br />
injection the system checks for the presence <strong>of</strong> the home sensor. If this<br />
cannot be recognized the tray will be positioned incorrectly and the error will<br />
show up.<br />
❏ Check the magnet <strong>of</strong> the sample tray.<br />
❏ Check for mechanical blockages <strong>of</strong> the mechanical system (sample tray,<br />
tray coupler and so on).<br />
❏ Check tray motor.<br />
❏ Change encoder.<br />
❏ Change NMD board.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 349
E16 : Plunger failed to<br />
draw/mix/eject<br />
sample<br />
E97 : Program wait<br />
time elapsed<br />
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Injector Program Error Messages<br />
Injector Program Error Messages<br />
The injector program introduced with the firmware revision 4.0 and greater<br />
comprises the programmable functions such as draw eject and mix sample.<br />
This allows to program particular injections for the autosampler. The injector<br />
program will be part <strong>of</strong> the method when stored.<br />
E16 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
inject failed to draw/mix/eject sample<br />
The program line cannot be performed because a lack <strong>of</strong> draw, eject or mix<br />
volume is left in the syringe. Use the verify function to identify the faulty<br />
program line and correct the volume.<br />
E97 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
program wait time elapsed<br />
The utility functions allow to wait for remote line changes. If a remote line<br />
change has not occurred before the time-out has elapsed, the error occurs.<br />
E98 : no device for vial E98 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
no device for vial<br />
E98 : Volume exceeds<br />
limit<br />
The vial number used exceeds the limit <strong>of</strong> the vial range. This is possible<br />
when using the SAMPLE+ command (adding a number to the actual vial<br />
number) in the injector program. This function cannot be tested with the<br />
verify function.<br />
E98 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
volume exceeds limit<br />
Incorrect setting <strong>of</strong> draw/eject commands may lead to a limit violation for the<br />
injection volume. This function cannot be tested with the verify if the volume<br />
was determined via the “def” command.<br />
350 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Normal Operation Messages for Firmware Revision 3.1 and below<br />
Normal Operation Messages for Firmware<br />
Revision 3.1 and below<br />
NOTE Following error messages describe the failure modes for instruments with<br />
firmware revision 3.1 and below. The error messages will appear in addition<br />
to the errors described before for revision 4.0 and greater.<br />
E12 : Plunger home<br />
position not found<br />
E15 : Needle did not<br />
move into vial<br />
E12 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
plunger home pos not found<br />
The plunger <strong>of</strong> the metering device is moved forward until the home position<br />
sensor indicates the maximum allowed front position. In case the home<br />
sensor cannot be recognized, the plunger moves into the mechanical stop.<br />
The motor will be stopped after the programmed time out has been elapsed.<br />
Second possibility is that the motor does not start and the plunger will not<br />
move at all. After time out the error message appears. Possible failure modes<br />
are a misadjusted or defective sensor or a defective motor.<br />
❏ Check for proper connection <strong>of</strong> motor and sensor.<br />
❏ Change VMD board.<br />
❏ Check alignment <strong>of</strong> sensor.<br />
❏ Change sensor.<br />
E15 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
needle did not move into vial<br />
The system assumes that the needle is in its upper position. From this<br />
position the needle will be lowered into the vial. The processor determines<br />
how many steps the motor has to perform. This information will be send to<br />
the NMD board. In case the needle will not be lowered a electrical<br />
malfunction should be the failure mode.<br />
❏ Check connection <strong>of</strong> the needle motor.<br />
❏ Change NMD board.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 351
E16 : Plunger failed to<br />
draw sample<br />
E17 : Needle did not<br />
move out <strong>of</strong> vial<br />
E23 : Needle has not<br />
been raised<br />
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Normal Operation Messages for Firmware Revision 3.1 and below<br />
E16 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
plunger failed to draw sample<br />
From the home position the plunger is moved back a certain number <strong>of</strong> steps<br />
to draw the requested volume. Failure mode is the electronics <strong>of</strong> the VMD<br />
board.<br />
❏ Check connections <strong>of</strong> metering motor.<br />
❏ Change VMD board.<br />
E17 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
needle did not move out <strong>of</strong> vial<br />
The needle motor is activated to move the needle in its upper position. If this<br />
action fails the error appears. Possible failure mode is the interrupter sensor,<br />
spindle motor or the NMD board.<br />
❏ Check interrupter sensor.<br />
❏ Change NMD board.<br />
E23 HH:MM DDMMM init failed ><br />
needle has not been raised<br />
During this step the needle is raised from any position. In case this step fails<br />
the error message appears.<br />
❏ Check for blockages <strong>of</strong> the sensor.<br />
❏ Check for proper connection <strong>of</strong> motor and sensor.<br />
❏ Check for smooth movement <strong>of</strong> the spindle system.<br />
❏ Check drive nut.<br />
❏ Change NMD board.<br />
❏ Change interrupter sensor.<br />
352 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
E25 : Needle has not<br />
been lowered<br />
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Normal Operation Messages for Firmware Revision 3.1 and below<br />
E25 HH:MM DDMMM init failed ><br />
needle has not been lowered<br />
From the upper position the needle driver gets the command to move the<br />
needle down into the seat. In case <strong>of</strong> malfunctions the error appears.<br />
Firmware revision 2.0 and above connect the functioning <strong>of</strong> the needle<br />
sensor and the bottle in place sensor. If the bottle in place sensor is defective<br />
the error will also appear.<br />
❏ Check the needle motor and sensor connection.<br />
❏ Check for blockages <strong>of</strong> the mechanical system.<br />
❏ Check for smooth movement <strong>of</strong> the bottle vane (bottle sensor).<br />
❏ Lubricate bottle vane.<br />
❏ Check sensor signal <strong>of</strong> interrupter and bottle in place sensor.<br />
❏ Change NMD board.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 353
E26 : No vial in<br />
sam[ple tray<br />
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
Events Messages<br />
Events Messages<br />
Event messages give the operator informations about the performed action<br />
<strong>of</strong> the instrument. Messages will appear in the logbook.<br />
E26 HH:MM DDMMM missing vial ><br />
no vial in sample tray<br />
During the injection sequence the bottle in place sensor checks for the<br />
presence <strong>of</strong> a vial. If no vial is in the tray the message appears in the logbook.<br />
Depending on the system configuration (stop/cont/skip at missing vial), the<br />
message is interpreted as an error or a event message. If the vial sensor is not<br />
connected or defective error message E19 will appear.<br />
❏ Place a bottle into vial position.<br />
❏ Check bottle in place sensor.<br />
❏ Check cabling <strong>of</strong> sensor board.<br />
❏ Change sensor.<br />
❏ Change NMD board.<br />
E29 : Sequence done E29 HH:MM DDMMM sequ done ><br />
sequ exec finished<br />
E30 : Sequence<br />
aborted<br />
Sequence finished is an event message. It records the correct termination <strong>of</strong><br />
an automated operation.<br />
E30 HH:MM DDMMM sequ aborted ><br />
sequ exec aborted<br />
Sequence either stopped by operator or error occurred during operation. In<br />
case <strong>of</strong> an error the Error lamp will be on. Check next logbook line for more<br />
information.<br />
354 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
18596L/M Vial Tray<br />
18596L/M Vial Tray<br />
The following error messages may occur when the 100 sample tray is<br />
connected to the autosampler.<br />
E31 : Vial in claw E31 HH:MM DDMMM init failed ><br />
vial in claw remove vial!<br />
E32 : Cannot remove<br />
vial from device<br />
E33 : Cannot insert<br />
vial in device<br />
After turning on the autosampler or the reset command the 18596L/M<br />
performs an initialization. The initialization fails when there is a bottle in the<br />
claw. If the initialization fails the Error lamp is on and the message appears in<br />
the logbook.<br />
❏ Remove vial from the claw and reset system.<br />
❏ Check bottle sensor.<br />
E32 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
cannot remove vial from device<br />
The 18596L/M sample arm tried to take a vial out <strong>of</strong> its own tray or the 21<br />
sample tray and failed.<br />
❏ Check claw position in teach tray mode.<br />
E33 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
cannot insert vial in device<br />
The 18596L/M sample arm tried to place a vial either in the transfer position<br />
<strong>of</strong> the 21 sample tray or the 100 sample tray and failed. Most common reason<br />
is the presence <strong>of</strong> a vial in this position. It is also possible that the claw<br />
position was not correctly set in the tray teach mode.<br />
❏ Remove vial from selected position.<br />
❏ Check claw position in teach tray mode.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 355
E34 : Failed to home<br />
axis<br />
E35 : Teach <strong>of</strong> 100 vial<br />
tray done<br />
E36 : Vial number for<br />
unknown device<br />
E38 : Barcode<br />
verification failed<br />
E39 : Error state <strong>of</strong> 100<br />
vial tray<br />
Sampler: Diagnostic Information<br />
18596L/M Vial Tray<br />
E34 HH:MM DDMMM inject failed ><br />
serious error in 100 vialtray<br />
Error appears when the tray arm is not able to move to its selected position.<br />
❏ Reset autosampler.<br />
❏ Check cable connection.<br />
❏ Change MTD board.<br />
❏ Check tray arm.<br />
E35 HH:MM DDMMM teach done ><br />
teach <strong>of</strong> 100 vialtray done<br />
Event message indicating use <strong>of</strong> the teach tray function.<br />
E35 HH:MM DDMMM teach done ><br />
teach <strong>of</strong> 100 vialtray done<br />
This error appears when an incorrect vial range has been set. Example: The<br />
vial range was specified 1 to 30 for the 34 vial tray. When the 21 vial tray is<br />
installed the autosampler will show error E36 when reading 22 or greater.<br />
E38 HH:MM:DDMMM verified failed<br />
barcode verification failed<br />
The error can only be seen when the DOS workstation is connected to the<br />
autosampler with 100 vial tray and barcode reader. The label from the vial<br />
will be verified with the setting for the analyzed vial position. A mismatch<br />
will generate the error message.<br />
❏ Check vial label and computer information for correctness.<br />
❏ Check/replace barcode reader and driver board.<br />
E39 HH:MM:DDMMM injector aborted ><br />
error state <strong>of</strong> 100 vial tray<br />
The error appears when a previous error on the 100 vial tray is still present<br />
(error LED blinking) and a new action for the 100 vial tray has been started.<br />
356 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
15<br />
15 Sampler: Maintenance<br />
Information<br />
This chapter provides provide procedures for<br />
service and maintenance <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Autosampler
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
This chapter describes the procedures that have to be performed during<br />
servicing and maintenance <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler.<br />
You will find procedures for:<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Metering Device<br />
Analytical Head<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
Sensor Adjustments<br />
358 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
NOTE Needle and needle seat changes can be performed without removing the<br />
sampling unit. For stage 2 it is necessary that the needle is in the needle<br />
change position.<br />
Stage 1: Removing the Sampling Unit<br />
❏ Remove front door.<br />
❏ Remove the Sample Tray.<br />
❏ Remove the Inner Cabinet.<br />
❏ Remove the Leak Tub.<br />
❏ Disconnect the loop capillary either at the needle or at the switching valve.<br />
❏ Disconnect the seat capillary at the switching valve.<br />
❏ Disconnect all cables <strong>of</strong> the sampling unit from the motherboard.<br />
❏ Remove the holding screw <strong>of</strong> the sampling unit.<br />
❏ Slide the unit backwards and then to the right to remove it from its place.<br />
❏ Take out the sampling unit.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 359
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Figure 130 Needle Change<br />
Stage 2: Removing the Needle<br />
❏ Move the needle in the needle change position (Control Configuration).<br />
❏ With the Pozidrive# 2 loosen the clamp screw.<br />
❏ Turn the needle with the ZDV fitting out <strong>of</strong> its recess and lift the needle to<br />
get it out <strong>of</strong> the clamp screw.<br />
❏ Disconnect the needle from the ZDV fitting.<br />
❏ Needle with laser welded fitting: Disconnect the loop capillary from the<br />
needle fitting<br />
360 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Stage 3: Installation <strong>of</strong> the Needle<br />
NOTE If a new needle will be installed the needle seat should be changed too<br />
otherwise leaks might be possible.<br />
❏ Needle with laser welded fitting: Connect the loop to the needle fitting and<br />
tighten it.<br />
❏ Connect the new needle to the ZDV fitting and screw it hand tight.<br />
❏ Insert the needle into the groove behind the clamp plate and swing the ZDV<br />
fitting back to the recess.<br />
❏ Tighten the connection at the ZDV fitting (only old version).<br />
❏ Tighten the clamp screw.<br />
NOTE No further needle adjustment necessary. In case the needle is not straight<br />
carefully bend the needle for proper alignment.<br />
Stage 4: Removing the Seat Capillary<br />
NOTE To avoid possible leaks, it is recommended to install a new needle seat when<br />
the seat capillary will be changed.<br />
❏ Raise the needle (Control Test Functions).<br />
❏ With a wrench 5/16” unscrew the seat and remove it.<br />
❏ Remove the seat capillary from the socket.<br />
❏ Disconnect the seat capillary at the High Pressure Switching Valve.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 361
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Stage 5: Disassembling the Needle Arm<br />
NOTE Follow the steps <strong>of</strong> this procedure when replacing either guide rod, spindle,<br />
needle arm or drive nut.<br />
❏ Remove needle (make sure that the needle is in its change position or turn<br />
the motor coupler to reach it) and interrupter sensor (only in case <strong>of</strong><br />
sensor or needle arm change readjustment necessary).<br />
❏ Loosen the set screw for the guide rod and remove it from the sampling<br />
unit. It might be necessary to use a mallet and a punch pin to get the guide<br />
rod out.<br />
❏ Remove the retainer on top <strong>of</strong> the spindle and save retainer and spring<br />
disc.<br />
❏ Loosen the screw <strong>of</strong> the motor coupler which holds the spindle.<br />
❏ Move the needle arm up to move the spindle out <strong>of</strong> its ball bearing (some<br />
force is required).<br />
❏ Remove the brass bearing sleeve from the top shaft <strong>of</strong> the spindle and<br />
carefully take out the assembly.<br />
Stage 6: Reassembling the Needle Arm<br />
❏ Insert the spindle into the top hole and then insert the small shaft into the<br />
ball bearing.<br />
❏ Push the motor coupler as close as possible to the bearing and fix it in this<br />
position.<br />
❏ Insert the guide rod and fix it with the set screw.<br />
❏ Insert the spindle bearing sleeve and the spring disc at the top <strong>of</strong> the unit<br />
and mount the retainer.<br />
❏ Reinstall needle and interrupter sensor and perform required adjustments<br />
(see “Adjustment <strong>of</strong> Interrupter Sensor with test board” on page 377).<br />
362 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Stage 7: Disassembling the Tray Mechanic<br />
NOTE Follow this instructions when either changing Tray Motor, Gear, Belt, Tray<br />
Coupler, toothed wheel or Quadrature Encoder, see Figure 131 on page 364.<br />
❏ Remove bottom cover <strong>of</strong> the sampling unit.<br />
❏ Remove the tray Motor.<br />
NOTE The Tray Motor is fixed from the bottom. Loosening the four screws on top <strong>of</strong><br />
the motor will damage the tray motor.<br />
❏ Remove the belt<br />
NOTE The belt roller will be pressed to the belt to stretch it. But the pretension <strong>of</strong> the<br />
belt should not affect the smooth movement <strong>of</strong> the tray coupler.<br />
❏ Remove the black cap in the sample unit housing to get access to the two<br />
set screws <strong>of</strong> the coupler toothed wheel.<br />
❏ Loosen the set screws and remove the coupler from the unit.<br />
❏ Carefully slide the toothed wheel out <strong>of</strong> its place, see Figure 131 on page<br />
364.<br />
NOTE The toothed wheel is coupled with the encoder slit wheel which is running in<br />
the quadrature encoder. Take care not to damage the slit wheel while lifting<br />
the assembly.<br />
❏ Disconnect the cable <strong>of</strong> the encoder unscrew it and take it out.<br />
NOTE The encoder cable is not keyed. Make sure that position 1 <strong>of</strong> the cable is<br />
connected to position 1 <strong>of</strong> the encode, see Figure 131 on page 364. If the cable<br />
is positioned in the wrong direction the system cannot initialize the tray. The<br />
behavior is like with a defective home sensor.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 363
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Figure 131 Bottom View <strong>of</strong> the Sampling Unit<br />
364 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Metering Device<br />
Metering Device<br />
NOTE Move the plunger into the plunger change position before removing the<br />
metering device from the instrument.<br />
Removing the Metering Device<br />
❏ Remove Top Cover.<br />
❏ Disconnect the two capillaries to the head <strong>of</strong> the Metering Device.<br />
❏ Disconnect motor and sensor cable.<br />
❏ Remove the transport securing screw.<br />
❏ Remove the screw which fixes the Metering Device on the High Pressure<br />
Switching Valve.<br />
❏ Take out the Metering Device.<br />
Removing the Gear Belt<br />
❏ Remove the cover <strong>of</strong> the gear box.<br />
❏ Remove the stepper motor.<br />
❏ Take out the gear belt.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 365
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Metering Device<br />
Analytical Head Assembly<br />
There are two different versions <strong>of</strong> the analytical head available. In the latest<br />
version the spring is integrated in the adapter housing. The following table<br />
shows the serial number prefix at introduction <strong>of</strong> the new adapter housing<br />
design.<br />
Table 88 New Analytical Head Assembly<br />
Autosampler SN Prefix Version<br />
79855A/B 3404 G ..... new; Procedure2<br />
79855A/B 3406 A ..... new; Procedure 2<br />
NOTE Follow this instruction when either changing Plunger Seal or Plunger. Do not<br />
forget to use the plunger change position in the control section before<br />
removing the analytical head assembly. The numbers in brackets refer to<br />
Figure 132 on page 367.<br />
Procedure 1: Analytical Head Assembly with old Adapter<br />
Housing<br />
Stage 1: Disassembling the Analytical Head Assembly<br />
❏ Unscrew the Analytical Head Assembly and remove it from the Metering<br />
Drive.<br />
❏ Place the Assembly on its round head (13) and remove the two screws<br />
(14).<br />
❏ Carefully pull the head (13) to separate it from the body (9).<br />
NOTE Do not twist the head while pulling. This could break the plunger.<br />
366 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Metering Device<br />
Stage 2: Changing the Seal<br />
❏ Remove the seal keeper (11) from the head (13).<br />
❏ Using the three millimeter hexagonal key remove the seal (12).<br />
❏ Clean the head chamber (13) from all seal particles. Best is to use a<br />
degreaser spray (for example 8500-0232).<br />
❏ Insert a new seal (12).<br />
Stage 3: Disassembling the Body<br />
❏ Remove the support ring (10) or the support seal assembly.<br />
❏ Hold the body down on a flat surface loosen the setscrew (15) and<br />
carefully release the tension <strong>of</strong> the spring.<br />
WARNING The spring will catapult the body up if released without holding it.<br />
Figure 132 Analytical Pump Head Assembly (old)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 367
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Metering Device<br />
Stage 4: Reassembling the Analytical Head Assembly<br />
❏ Place sapphire plunger (7) and spring (8) into the spring support (6).<br />
❏ Place the adapter (9) on a flat surface and insert the parts from the<br />
previous step.<br />
❏ Hold the adapter (9) from one side with the thumb and press the spring<br />
support (9) with plunger and spring with the fingers into the body.<br />
❏ Hold the spring support (6) with one hand in place and fix the setscrew.<br />
❏ Slide the support ring (10) or the support seal assembly onto the plunger.<br />
NOTE If the support ring (10) or the support seal assembly sticks at the body when<br />
sliding down the plunger push the plunger (7) slightly from the bottom. This<br />
will center the plunger and the ring keeper slides into its position.<br />
❏ Place the seal keeper (11) on the seal (12) <strong>of</strong> the head.<br />
NOTE In this position the seal keeper guides the plunger into the seal and reduces<br />
the possibility to break the plunger.<br />
❏ Carefully place the head (13) onto the adapter (9).<br />
❏ Turn the assembly upside-down insert the screws (14) and fix them<br />
stepwise with increased torque.<br />
NOTE It is important that the surface <strong>of</strong> head and adapter are parallel to each other<br />
to obtain a good seal.<br />
368 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Metering Device<br />
Procedure 2: Analytical Head with new Adapter Housing<br />
Stage 1: Disassembling the Analytical Head Assembly<br />
❏ Unscrew the Analytical Head Assembly and remove it from the Metering<br />
Drive.<br />
❏ Place the Assembly on its round head (6) and remove the two screws (2).<br />
❏ Pull the adapter (3) straight up from the head (6) being careful not to put<br />
any sidewards strain on the sapphire piston (1), since it could shear and<br />
break.<br />
❏ Put the adapter housing (3) aside taking care to avoid dropping the piston<br />
(1) from the housing.<br />
NOTE The piston is not secured in the adapter housing and will fall out when the<br />
housing is turned upside down.<br />
❏ Remove the piston (1) from the adapter (3).<br />
❏ Check for scratches and dirt on the piston.<br />
NOTE Dirt on the piston surface can be removed by using a small quantity <strong>of</strong><br />
toothpaste.<br />
Stage 2: Changing the Seal<br />
❏ Remove the support seal assembly 4) from the head (6).<br />
❏ Using the three millimeter hexagonal key remove the seal (5).<br />
❏ Clean the head chamber (6) from all seal particles. Best is to use a<br />
degreaser spray.<br />
❏ Insert a new seal (5).<br />
❏ Place the support seal assembly (4) onto the seal (5).<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 369
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Metering Device<br />
Figure 133 Analytical Pump Head Assembly (new)<br />
Stage 3: Reassembling the Analytical Head Assembly<br />
❏ Prepare the head (6) as described beforehand.<br />
❏ Place the adapter housing (3) without the piston (1) onto the head (6).<br />
❏ Insert the two screws (2) and tighten until hand tight.<br />
NOTE Tightening the screws fully will require much more force to push the piston<br />
into its position in the seal.<br />
❏ Insert the piston (1) into the adapter housing (3) and carefully push it into<br />
the seal.<br />
❏ Tighten the two screws (2) stepwise with increasing torque. Make sure<br />
that head and adapter surfaces are in parallel.<br />
370 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Metering Device<br />
Reassembling the Metering Device<br />
❏ Put the Analytical Head Assembly onto the metering drive and insert the<br />
two screws.<br />
NOTE The Head Assembly should be installed like shown in Figure 132 on page 367<br />
or Figure 133 on page 370. The capillary from the high pressure switching<br />
valve is connected to the bottom <strong>of</strong> the head assembly.<br />
❏ Tight the screws stepwise with increasing torque.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 371
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
Stage 1: Removing<br />
❏ Disconnect the air supply at the rear <strong>of</strong> the module.<br />
❏ Remove the top cover.<br />
❏ Remove front door and inner cabinet.<br />
❏ Remove the leak tub.<br />
❏ Remove the metering device.<br />
❏ Disconnect all capillaries from the valve.<br />
❏ Unscrew the holding screw at the base.<br />
❏ Slide the unit out <strong>of</strong> its holder.<br />
❏ Disconnect the air tubings.<br />
❏ Take out the High Pressure Switching Unit.<br />
Stage 2: Disassembling<br />
❏ Loosen and remove the three socket head stator screws (4).<br />
❏ Remove the stator (2) from the top <strong>of</strong> the valve.<br />
❏ Remove the stator ring from the valve. Take special care not to lose the<br />
stop pins in the stator ring.<br />
❏ Using the blade <strong>of</strong> a screwdriver, release the rotor seal from the valve.<br />
372 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
Figure 134 High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 373
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Adjust the Sensors<br />
Adjust the Sensors<br />
Adjusting <strong>of</strong> the sensors inside the instrument is very difficult. For that<br />
reason the extender test board (see chapter Electronics) has been designed.<br />
It allows to operate the assemblies outside <strong>of</strong> the instrument with easy<br />
access to the sensors.<br />
The firmware <strong>of</strong> the autosampler itself includes a service level which allows<br />
to verify the sensor positions and to perform the sensor adjustment.<br />
This section describes:<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Only Level<br />
Sensor adjustment Sampling Unit<br />
Sensor adjustment Metering Device<br />
Sensor adjustment High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Only Level<br />
The service only will be accessed with a “password” to avoid accidental<br />
changes <strong>of</strong> parameters.<br />
NOTE Do not enter or change any numbers in this part which are not described in the<br />
following sections. Accidental change <strong>of</strong> system parameters could damage the<br />
instrument.<br />
Entering <strong>Service</strong> Only<br />
❏ Press CTRL and with NEXT move the cursor to the < end <strong>of</strong> list >.<br />
❏ Enter password (79855) and SERVICE ONLY will be displayed.<br />
❏ With PREV or NEXT the following displays are accessible.<br />
EXECUTE STEP 1<br />
INSTR# 1 VAL 1 ; 0<br />
Read the notes on next page first.<br />
374 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Adjust the Sensors<br />
NOTE EXECUTE STEP allows the performance <strong>of</strong> the step commands (Test<br />
Functions) by entering the step number.<br />
#1 Switch Valve Unit to bypass.<br />
#2 Initialize Metering Device.<br />
#3 Raise needle.<br />
#4 Move vial underneath needle.<br />
#5 Lower needle.<br />
#6 Draw sample up from sample vial.<br />
#7 Raise needle.<br />
#8 Move vial to home position.<br />
#9 Lower needle.<br />
#10 Switch Valve Unit to flow through sample loop.<br />
INSTR# allows to read the position <strong>of</strong> the various sensors and can be used for<br />
adjustment <strong>of</strong> sensors. An negative number (for example -2) writes the actual<br />
value into the processor memory for adjustment calculations. For more<br />
information see chapter sensor adjustment.<br />
#1 Reads the position <strong>of</strong> the shaft encoder.<br />
for example INSTR# 1 VAL 1 ; 0<br />
#2 Reads the left stop <strong>of</strong> the sample tray.<br />
for example INSTR# 2 VAL -56 ; -56<br />
#3 Reads the right stop <strong>of</strong> the sample tray.<br />
for example INSTR# 3 VAL 53 ; 53<br />
#4 Calculate correction value for measurement performed under #2 and #3.<br />
The result is shown in µm.<br />
for example INSTR# 4 VAL 251 ; 251<br />
#5 Reads the data which represents the actual sensor status for the complete<br />
sampling unit (interrupter home and bottle sensor).<br />
for example INSTR# 5 VAL 227 ; 227 after initialization. Depending on<br />
the sensor which is activated or not the value changes in increments <strong>of</strong> 1, 4, 8.<br />
8 for the sample tray<br />
4 for the bottle in place sensor<br />
1 for interrupter sensor.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 375
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Adjust the Sensors<br />
NOTE #6 Reads the data which represents the actual sensor status for the metering<br />
home sensor and the valve position sensor. Readings can be used for sensor<br />
adjustment or troubleshooting.<br />
for example INSTR# 6 VAL 240 ; 240 after initialization. Depending on<br />
the sensor which is activated or not the value changes in increments <strong>of</strong> 1 or 8.<br />
8 for the metering device home sensor.<br />
1 for the valve position sensor.<br />
Sensors <strong>of</strong> the Sampling Unit<br />
NOTE Four sensors are controlling the various functions <strong>of</strong> the sampling unit.<br />
NOTE Interrupter Sensor:<br />
Initializes a signal to stop the needle motor at upper and lower limit. The<br />
adjustment ensures a defined force for the needle into the seat and determines<br />
the position <strong>of</strong> the needle in the sample vial during the injection cycle.<br />
Home Sensor:<br />
Determines the home position <strong>of</strong> the sample tray. The processor counts the<br />
selected vial number relative to the home position. Adjustment ensures that<br />
the needle hits the septa <strong>of</strong> the sample vial in each vial position.<br />
Bottle in Place Sensor<br />
Checks for presence <strong>of</strong> a vial during the injection cycle. No adjustment<br />
required.<br />
Quadrature Decoder<br />
Checks the actual position <strong>of</strong> the 21 sample tray for adjustment <strong>of</strong> the 21 vial<br />
tray. If the 34 vial tray is installed the more precise procedure should be<br />
selected. No adjustment required.<br />
The home sensor will be adjusted with the build in service level test features.<br />
For the interrupter sensor there are two adjustment procedures available.<br />
Adjustment can be done via the extender test board which is the easiest way<br />
because <strong>of</strong> the accessibility <strong>of</strong> the sensor. If the test board is not available the<br />
features <strong>of</strong> the service level also allow adjustment <strong>of</strong> the sensor.<br />
376 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Adjust the Sensors<br />
Adjustment <strong>of</strong> Interrupter Sensor with test board<br />
❏ With the test functions commands move the needle into upper position.<br />
❏ By turning the motor coupler move the needle arm downwards until the<br />
interrupter pin just touches the upper plate.<br />
❏ Now move the needle arm upwards 1 mm.<br />
NOTE One revolution <strong>of</strong> the spindle moves the needle arm 1.5 mm up. Therefore 240°<br />
represent 1 mm.<br />
❏ Position the sensor that the LED on the extender board just changes its<br />
state from on to <strong>of</strong>f (should remain <strong>of</strong>f) and fix it in this position.<br />
Adjustment <strong>of</strong> Interrupter Sensor via <strong>Service</strong> Only Level<br />
❏ Follow steps 1 to 3 <strong>of</strong> the previous described procedure.<br />
❏ Enter SERVICE ONLY level.<br />
❏ Move to the Instr# and enter #5 to get the following display.<br />
INSTR# 5 VAL 239 ; 239 (without sample tray)<br />
❏ Position the interrupter sensor that the value just changes to 238. Move it<br />
back until you reach 239 and fix it in this position.<br />
Adjustment <strong>of</strong> Home Sensor - procedure for 21/34 vial tray<br />
NOTE During RESET <strong>of</strong> the autosampler the processor finds the home position <strong>of</strong><br />
the sample tray and stores the actual dehydrator encoder reading as zero<br />
position.<br />
The position <strong>of</strong> vial #1 is used as reference for the adjustment. With<br />
INSTR# 1 the processor reads the steps from the home position to the actual<br />
position. If the tray is aligned correctly the encoder should read the following<br />
values for the position <strong>of</strong> vial #1:<br />
21 vial tray: VAL 0;-200 tolerance ±1<br />
34 vial tray: VAL 0;-191 tolerance ±1<br />
The above values can be obtained from the SERVICE ONLY level.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 377
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Adjust the Sensors<br />
Adjustment Procedure<br />
❏ Remove door, inner cabinet and the top cover from the autosampler.<br />
❏ Make sure that the tray is installed correctly and that the vial is in position<br />
#1.<br />
❏ Using the CTRL functions <strong>of</strong> the instrument RESET the autosampler.<br />
❏ Enter the TEST FUNCTIONS.<br />
❏ Use single steps 3 to raise the needle.<br />
❏ In the display SINGLE STEP 4 POS. TRAY AT 10 change the vial<br />
position to 1 (use > ) and press 1 ENTER. They tray moves to position #1.<br />
❏ The needle should point to the center <strong>of</strong> the vial. If not, turn the tray<br />
manually until the position is correct.<br />
❏ *Enter the service only level and select the following display<br />
INSTR# 1 VAL 0; -XXX.<br />
NOTE XXX is the value for the actual position <strong>of</strong> the tray. If the home sensor is<br />
adjusted correctly, the value should be -191 ±1 for the 34 vial tray or -200 ±1<br />
for the 21 vial tray. If XXX differs from the above values the sensor has to be<br />
adjusted.<br />
6 counts represent approximately 1mm.<br />
❏ Remove the tray, loosen the sensor screws and move the sensor<br />
❏ Towards the front <strong>of</strong> the autosampler (ccw) when the actual values <strong>of</strong><br />
XXX are larger then the nominal (for example -199 for 34 vial tray; or<br />
-205 for 21 vial tray).<br />
❏ Towards the back <strong>of</strong> the autosampler (cw) when the actual value <strong>of</strong> XXX<br />
is smaller then the nominal (for example -185 for 34 vial tray; or -195 for<br />
the 21 vial tray).<br />
❏ Verify the correct position. Insert the tray, RESET the injector and repeat<br />
step 4 to 8 <strong>of</strong> this procedure.<br />
378 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Adjust the Sensors<br />
Sensor <strong>of</strong> the High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
The sensor at the back side <strong>of</strong> the high pressure switching valve controls the<br />
correct movement <strong>of</strong> the valve.<br />
❏ Take the high pressure unit out <strong>of</strong> the instrument and make connection to<br />
the extender test board for operation outside <strong>of</strong> the instrument.<br />
❏ Make sure that the valve is in one <strong>of</strong> its end positions.<br />
❏ Connect the sensor to the holding arm and move it until the LED on the test<br />
board becomes on. Then move it downwards until the LED just turns <strong>of</strong>f<br />
and fix the board in this position.<br />
❏ * Verify the proper operation <strong>of</strong> the high pressure switching valve.<br />
Adjustment <strong>of</strong> Valve Sensor via <strong>Service</strong> Only<br />
❏ Follow step 1 to 2.<br />
❏ Enter SERVICE ONLY level and move to the Instr# and enter #6 to get the<br />
following display.<br />
INSTR# 6 VAL 248 ; 248 (metering device in home position).<br />
❏ Position the sensor that the display value just changes to 249. Move the<br />
sensor back until the value changes back to 248 and fix it in this position.<br />
❏ Verify proper operation <strong>of</strong> the switching valve.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 379
Sampler: Maintenance Information<br />
Adjust the Sensors<br />
Metering Device Home Sensor<br />
The metering drive home sensor determines the maximum allowed front<br />
position <strong>of</strong> the plunger. A lever mounted to an spindle mechanism moves into<br />
the light switch to stop the motor. Adjustment is necessary that the plunger<br />
can not run into the mechanical stop <strong>of</strong> the analytical head and to be<br />
compatible with future options.<br />
The adjustment for the metering home sensor is not critical. Therefore a<br />
rough alignment without firmware support is sufficient.<br />
The sensor housing has a slot for the adjustment. Mount the sensor into a<br />
middle position <strong>of</strong> the sensor housing.<br />
Use the test functions to move the piston to home position. The plunger<br />
should stop before the mechanical stop. If the plunger moves into the stop<br />
adjust the sensor slightly back and try again.<br />
380 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
16<br />
16 Sampler: Parts Information<br />
This chapter provides information on parts <strong>of</strong> the<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Autosampler
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
This chapter gives diagrams for parts identification and the complete parts<br />
listings respectively for the <strong>1050</strong> (Ti) Autosampler.<br />
Electronic Boards<br />
Ti - Parts<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Solvent Flow Path<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Metering Drive and Analytical Head<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
Pneumatic Valve Assembly<br />
382 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Electronic Boards and Fuses<br />
Electronic Boards and Fuses<br />
Electronic Boards<br />
Table 89 Electronic Boards<br />
Fuses<br />
Table 90 Fuses<br />
Item Description Part Number Exchange<br />
1 Power Supply Board DPS-B 5061-3374 0<strong>1050</strong>-69374<br />
2 Maxi Tray Drive Board for 18596A/L MTD 01078-66503 01078-69503<br />
3 Maxi Tray Drive Board for 18596B/M MTD 01078-66513 01078-69513<br />
4 Rotor Reader Drive Board RRC 01078-66507<br />
5 Valve Metering Drive Board VMD 01078-66501 01078-69501<br />
6 Firmware Board FIM 01078-66506<br />
7 Needle Mini Tray Drive Board NMD 01078-66502 01078-69502<br />
8 Communication Interface Board CIB 5061-3382 0<strong>1050</strong>-69582<br />
9 Common Main Processor Board CMP 50613380 0<strong>1050</strong>-69580<br />
10 Fluorescent Indicator Module FIP 5061-3376<br />
11 Motherboard ALM 01078-66504<br />
Description Board Part Number<br />
Fuse 110V operation (3 A) DPS-B 2110-0003<br />
Fuse 220V operation (2 A) DPS-B 2110-0002<br />
Fuse F12, 250 mA VMD 2110-0004<br />
Fuse: ICP1 1 A FIP 2110-0099<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 383
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Complete List <strong>of</strong> Ti-Parts<br />
Complete List <strong>of</strong> Ti-Parts<br />
Following is a complete list <strong>of</strong> all special Ti parts. For the assemblies and<br />
accessories kits only the Ti parts are mentioned.<br />
Table 91 Complete List <strong>of</strong> Ti-Parts<br />
Description Part Number Description Part Number<br />
Ti - Needle 01079-67201 High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
Exchange<br />
01079-60004<br />
01079-69004<br />
Ti - ZDV Fitting 5021-1871 Ti - Rotor Seal TEFZEL pH 12.5 0101-0627<br />
Ti - Loop Capillary 100 µl<br />
ID 0.5 1.08 m lg<br />
Ti - Valve Metering Capillary<br />
ID 0.25 140 mm lg<br />
Ti - Seat Capillary<br />
ID 0.17 180 mm lg<br />
Ti - Capillary 500 µl Volume<br />
ID 0.5 2.8 m lg<br />
Ti - Capillary 2 ml Volume<br />
ID 0.94 2.8 m lg<br />
01079-87302 Ti - Pump Capillary ID 0.25 70 cm lg 01079-87306<br />
01079-87301 Ti - Sampling Unit 01079-60001<br />
01079-87303 Ti - Needle Seat (Peek) 01079-67101<br />
01079-87307<br />
01079-87308<br />
Ti - Flush Union 01079-23203 Analytical Head Assembly, includes 01079-60003<br />
Ti - Column Capillary ID 0.17 70 cm lg 01079-87305 Ti- Piston Seal 0905-1199<br />
Ti - Head Body 01079-27710<br />
384 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Overall Diagram 79855A/B<br />
Table 92 Overall Diagram<br />
Overall Diagram 79855A/B<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
1 Foot Support 01078-21001 21 Flexible Tubing (12ft) 5021-7127<br />
2 100 Sample Tray 18596L/M 22 Press Switching Cable 01078-61601<br />
3 Tray Support Assembly 01078-64701 23 Nut M4 0535-0056<br />
4 Screw M3.5 6 mm lg 0515-0889 24 Pneumatic Assembly 01078-66101<br />
5 Cover Hinge 01078-44112 25 Screw M4 35 mm lg 0515-1666<br />
6 Screw M3.5 6 mm lg 0515-0889 26 Name Plate 5041-2170<br />
7 Fan Holder 01078-02302 27 Logo Base 5041-2144<br />
8 Fan Assembly 3160-0862 28 Front Panel 01078-60301<br />
Fan Upgrade Kit (for ALS without<br />
fan)<br />
01078-68720 29 Inner Cabinet 01078-64401<br />
9 Screw M4 20 mm lg (special) 0515-1918 30 Screw M3.5 8 mm lg 5021-1862<br />
10 Sheet Metal Kit 01078-68701 31 Power Switch Base 5041-2145<br />
11 Screw M3.5 6 mm lg 0515-0889 32 Leak Assembly, includes 33, 34,<br />
35<br />
5062-8551<br />
12 Bumper 0403-0427 36 Sample Tray 01078-44501<br />
13 Foot Front 5041-2161 37 Sample Tray 34 vials 01078-44511<br />
14 Push bottom, white 5041-1203 38 Sampling Unit 01078-60001<br />
15 Actuator 5041-2162 39 Screw M3.5 6 mm lg 0515-0887<br />
16 Spring Compression 1460-1510 40 Flexible Tubing (12ft) 5021-7127<br />
17 Front Plate 5001-3725 41 Connector 0100-1175<br />
18 Leak Sensor 5061-3356 42 Muffler 0100-1176<br />
19 Screw M3 10 mm lg 0515-1105 43 Adapter 79846-23202<br />
20 Leak Tub 01078-44502 44 Connector, long 0100-1047<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 385
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Overall Diagram 79855A/B<br />
Table 92 Overall Diagram<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
45 Valve Metering Capillary<br />
ID 0.25 140 mm lg<br />
01078-87301 59 Screw M4 6 mm lg 0515-0898<br />
46 Top Cover 01078-04110 60 Analytical Head Assembly 01078-60003<br />
47 Loop Capillary 100 µl<br />
ID 0.5 1.08 m lg<br />
01078-87302 61 Metering Drive 01078-60002<br />
48 DPS-B 5061-3374 62 Cable; FIP to ALM 5061-3400<br />
49 Plate Cover P/S 5001-3728 63 HPS Valve<br />
Exchange<br />
50 MTD Board (18596A/L)<br />
Exchange<br />
50 MTD Board (18596B/M)<br />
Exchange<br />
01078-66503<br />
01078-69503<br />
01078-66513<br />
01078-69513<br />
64 Valve Waste Capillary<br />
ID 0.5 130 mm lg<br />
01078-60004<br />
01078-69004<br />
01078-87304<br />
65 Screw M4 6 mm lg 0515-1963<br />
51 Cover large (3 inch) 01078-04115 66 Screw M5 6 mm lg 0515-1117<br />
52 FIM Board 01078-66506 67 Valve Base Plate part <strong>of</strong> (10)<br />
53 Screw M3 6 mm lg 0515-0912 68 Valve Holder Plate 01078-02310<br />
54 VMD Board<br />
Exchange<br />
55 NMD Board<br />
Exchange<br />
01078-66501<br />
01078-69501<br />
01078-66502<br />
01078-69502<br />
69 Card Cage part <strong>of</strong> (10)<br />
70 Keyboard Module 01078-60201<br />
56 Cover small (1.3 inch) 5001-3721 71 Fluorescent Interface 5061-3376<br />
57 CMP Board<br />
Exchange<br />
5061-3380<br />
0<strong>1050</strong>-69580<br />
58 Screw M5 10 mm lg 0515-1117<br />
72 ALM 01078-66504<br />
386 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Overall Diagram 79855A/B<br />
Figure 135 Overall Diagram Part 1<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 387
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Overall Diagram 79855A/B<br />
Figure 136 Overall Diagram Part 2<br />
388 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Hydraulic Flow Path<br />
Hydraulic Flow Path<br />
Table 93 Hydraulic Flow Path Autosampler<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Item Description Part Nmber<br />
1 Pump Capillary ID 0.25 70 cm lg 01078-87306 6 Multi Draw Kit, includes 01078-68704<br />
1 Ti - Pump Capillary<br />
ID 0.25 70 cm lg<br />
2 Valve Metering Capillary<br />
ID 0.25 140 mm lg<br />
2 Ti - Valve Metering Capillary<br />
ID 0.25 140 mm lg<br />
3 Loop Capillary 100 µl<br />
ID 0.5 1.08 m lg<br />
3 Ti - Loop Capillary 100 µl<br />
ID 0.5 1.08 m lg<br />
01079-87306 500 µl Volume<br />
ID 0.5 2.8 m lg<br />
01078-87301 2 ml Volume<br />
ID 0.94 3.1 m lg<br />
01078-87307<br />
01078-87308<br />
01079-87301 Flush Union 79846-23203<br />
01078-87302 6 Ti - Multi Draw Kit, incudes 01079-68704<br />
01079-87302 Ti - Capillary 500 µl Volume<br />
ID 0.5 2.8 m lg<br />
4 ZDV Fitting 0100-0900 Ti - Capillary 2 ml Volume<br />
ID 0.94 2.8 m lg<br />
01079-87307<br />
01079-87308<br />
4 Ti - ZDV Fitting 5021-1871 Ti - Flush Union 01079-23203<br />
5 Needle (fitting laser welded) 01078-67200<br />
5 Ti - Needle 01079-67201 7 Column Capillary<br />
ID 0.17 80 cm lg<br />
5 Needle Grooved 01078-67202 7 Ti - Column Capillary<br />
ID 0.17 70 cm lg<br />
6 Seat Capillary<br />
ID 0.17 180 mm lg<br />
6 Ti - Seat Capillary<br />
ID 0.17 180 mm lg<br />
01078-87303 8 Valve Waste Capillary<br />
ID 0.5 130 mm lg<br />
01079-87303<br />
01078-87305<br />
01079-87305<br />
01078-87304<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 389
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Hydraulic Flow Path<br />
Figure 137 Solvent Flow Path<br />
390 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Table 94 Sampling Unit<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Item Description Part Nmber<br />
Complete Assembly 01078-60001 18 Lubrication Ring 5001-3749<br />
Complete Ti - Assembly 01079-60001 19 Coupler Assembly 01078-63201<br />
1 Tray Motor Assembly 01078-64702 20 Plug Hole 6960-0076<br />
2 Screw M3 12 mm lg 0515-1110 21 Motor Coupler 1500-0796<br />
3 Washer 3050-0890 22 Set Screw M5 10 mm lg 0515-1741<br />
4 Screw M2.5 6 mm lg 0515-0894 23 Belt 1500-0698<br />
5 BOS Board 01078-66505 24 Belt Roller 01078-22501<br />
6 Screw M3.5 6 mm lg (older<br />
version)<br />
0515-0887 25 Bearing Sleeve 1410-1253<br />
6 Screw M3.0 6 mm lg 0515-0886 26 Washer 3050-0891<br />
7 Washer 3050-0892 27 Screw M3 25 mm lg 0515-1060<br />
8 Cable Clamp 1400-0082 28 Needle Seat 79846-67101<br />
9 Retaining Ring 0510-1310 28 Ti - Needle Seat (Peek) 01079-67101<br />
10 Washer Spring 3050-1299 29 Seat Capillary<br />
ID 0.17 180 mm lg<br />
11 Bearing Sleeve 1410-1261 29 Ti - Seat Capillary<br />
ID 0.17 180 mm lg<br />
01078-87303<br />
01079-87303<br />
12 Sampler Body no PN 30 Socket 01078-25201<br />
13 Screw M2.5 6 mm lg 0515-0894 31 Shock Mount 1520-0260<br />
14 Washer 3050-0890 32 Screw M3 6 mm lg 0515-0886<br />
15 Home Sensor 5180-0861 33 Spindle Motor Assembly 01078-64703<br />
16 Traction Relief 5001-3752 34 Spring 1460-2365<br />
17 Tray Coupler 01078-43201 35 Needle Arm Assembly 01078-60000<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 391
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Table 94 Sampling Unit<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Item Description Part Nmber<br />
36 Washer 3050-0890 43 Ti - ZDV-Fitting 5021-1871<br />
37 Screw M2.5 6 mm lg 0515-0894 44 Needle (fitting laser welded) 01078-67200<br />
38 Interrupter Sensor 5041-2142 45 Connector Cable 01078-61602<br />
39 Cable Clamp 1400-0082 46 Traction Relief 5001-3752<br />
40 Washer 3050-0892 47 Quadrature Encoder 1990-1265<br />
41 Screw M3.5 6 mm lg (old version) 0515-0887 48 Screw M2.5 25 mm lg 0515-1640<br />
41 Screw M3.0 6 mm lg 0515-0886 49 Screw M3.5 6 mm lg<br />
(older version)<br />
0515-0887<br />
42 Needle (old design) 49 Screw M3.0 6 mm lg 0515-0886<br />
42 Ti - Needle 01079-67201 50 Gear Cover 01078-04101<br />
43 ZDV-Fitting 0100-0900 51 Bumper Foott 0403-0282<br />
392 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Figure 138 Sampling Unit I<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 393
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Figure 139 Sampling Unit II<br />
394 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Sampling Unit<br />
Arm Assembly Spare Parts<br />
Table 95 Arm Assembly Spare Parts<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Item Description Part Nmber<br />
Arm Spare Part Kit 01078-68706 3 Bottle Vane no PN<br />
1 Bottle Vane Screw no PN 4 Clamp Plate no PN<br />
2 Screw M3.5 10 mm lg no PN<br />
Figure 140 Arm Assembly Spare Parts<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 395
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Metering Drive and Analytical Head<br />
Metering Drive and Analytical Head<br />
Metering Drive<br />
Table 96 Metering Drive<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Item Description Part Nmber<br />
Metering Drive Assembly 01078-60002 3 Interrupter Sensor 5041-2142<br />
1 Metering Motor no PN 4 Screw M2.5 6 mm lg 0515-0894<br />
2 Belt 1500-0697 5 Washer 3050-0890<br />
Analytical Head (Old Version)<br />
Table 97 Analytical Head (old version)<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Item Description Part Nmber<br />
Analytical Head Assembly 01078-60003 11 Seal Keeper order (10a)<br />
Ti - Analytical Head Assembly 01079-60003 12 Seal (2/pk) 5062-8516<br />
6 Spring Support no PN 12 Ti-Seal 0905-1199<br />
7 Sapphire Plunger 5063-6586 13 Head Body 01078-27710<br />
8 Spring 1460-2220 13 Ti - Head Body 01079-27710<br />
9 Adapter see new<br />
version<br />
14 Screw M4 40 mm lg 0515-0850<br />
10 Support Ring order (10a) 15 Set Screw M3 5 mm lg 0515-1039<br />
10a Support Seal Assembly 5001-3739 16 Screw M5 60 mm lg 0515-2118<br />
396 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Metering Drive and Analytical Head<br />
Figure 141 Metering Drive and Analytical Head (old version)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 397
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Metering Drive and Analytical Head<br />
Analytical Head (New Version)<br />
Table 98 Analytical Head (new version)<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
Analytical Head Assembly 01078-60003 5 Seal (2/pk) 5062-8516<br />
Ti - Analytical Head Assembly 01079-60003 5 Ti-Seal 0905-1199<br />
1 Sapphire Plunger 5063-6586 6 Head Body 01078-27710<br />
2 Screw M4 40 mm lg 0515-0850 6 Ti - Head Body 01079-27710<br />
3 Adapter with spring 01078-23202 7 Screw M5 60 mm lg 0515-2118<br />
4 Support Seal Assembly 5001-3739<br />
Figure 142 Analytical Head (new version)<br />
398 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
Table 99 High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
Assembly<br />
Exchange Assembly excluding<br />
items 11 to 17<br />
01078-60004 7 Valve Sensor Board 79846-66504<br />
01078-69004 8 Bracket Actuator 79846-01206<br />
Ti - New Assembly 01079-60004 9 Screw M5 6 mm lg 0515-1510<br />
Exchange Assembly excluding<br />
items 11 to 17<br />
01079-69004 10 Elbow Fitting 0100-1408<br />
1 Rotor Seal VESPEL 0101-0626 11 Valve Waste Capillary<br />
ID 0.5 130 mm lg<br />
01078-87304<br />
Ti - Rotor Seal TEFZEL pH 12.5 0101-0627 12 Valve Holder Plate 01078-02310<br />
2 Stator 1535-4044 13 Valve Base Plate part <strong>of</strong><br />
01078-68701<br />
3 Isolation Seal 1535-4046 14 Screw M5 6 mm lg 0515-1510<br />
4 Stator Screw 1535-4857 15 Screw M4 6 mm lg (flat head) 0515-1963<br />
5 Stator Set Screw no PN 16 Screw M3.5 8 mm lg 0515-1105<br />
6 Bearing Ring 1535-4045 17 Screw M2.5 6 mm lg 0515-0894<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 399
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
Figure 143 High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
400 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Pneumatic Valve Assembly<br />
Table 100 Pneumatic Assembly<br />
Pneumatic Valve Assembly<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Item Description Part Nmber<br />
Complete Assembly excluding<br />
items 5, 6 and 7<br />
Figure 144 Pneumatic Valve Assembly<br />
01078-66101 4 Elbow Fitting 0100-1408<br />
1 Solenoid Valve 0101-0559 5 Screw M4 35 mm lg 0515-1666<br />
2 Low Air Pressure Switch 1/8” 3107-0019 6 Nut M4 0535-0056<br />
3 Push-in Fitting Male 0100-1410 7 Pressure Switch Cable 01078-61601<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 401
Sampler: Parts Information<br />
Pneumatic Valve Assembly<br />
402 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
17<br />
17 Sampler: Additional Information<br />
This chapter provides additional information<br />
about the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler
Sampler: Additional Information<br />
This section gives the following informations:<br />
Autosampler Prefix History<br />
Autosampler Firmware History<br />
Update to Firmware Revision 4.0<br />
Adding the 100 vial tray<br />
Intermittant E17<br />
Update the autosampler with a fan<br />
404 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Additional Information<br />
Product History<br />
Product History<br />
Since introduction <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler in 1988 a couple <strong>of</strong> hardware and<br />
firmware changes have been implemented into the production. With most <strong>of</strong><br />
this changes the serial number prefix has been changed too. Following is a<br />
list <strong>of</strong> all prefix changes done in Waldbronn and Little Falls.<br />
Table 101 Product History 79855A/B<br />
S/N Prefix Changes<br />
2813 G ... 28XX A ... Introduction <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler<br />
2848 G ... 2902 A ... Introduction <strong>of</strong> firmware revision 2.0<br />
2934 G ... 2941 A ... Introduction <strong>of</strong> firmware revision 2.1<br />
2944 G ... 2950 A ... #024 (add 100 vial capacity) for support <strong>of</strong> 18596B/M tray<br />
3020 G ... 30XX A ... Fan Assembly added to the autosampler<br />
3031 G ... 30XX A ... Introduction <strong>of</strong> <strong>1050</strong> Ti Autosampler<br />
3031 G ... 3033 A ... Introduction <strong>of</strong> firmware revision 3.1<br />
3117 G ... 3121 A ... Introduction <strong>of</strong> firmware revision 4.0<br />
3130 G ... 3130 A ... Support Ring for Analytical Head with Ceramic Insert<br />
3141 G ... 3141 A ... Introduction <strong>of</strong> firmware revision 4.1<br />
3313 G ... 3315 A ... New Revision <strong>of</strong> High Pressure Switching Valve<br />
3313 G 02712 or 3315 A 02247 Modification <strong>of</strong> ALM board to increase fan voltage<br />
3334 G ... Introduction <strong>of</strong> support seal assembly<br />
3338 G ... Introduction <strong>of</strong> firmware rev. 4.2<br />
3404 G ... 3406 A ... Analytical Head - Spring integrated in the adapter<br />
May 1995 Needle with integrated Fitting<br />
October 1998 Adapter (Analytical Head) with new spring<br />
3442 G ... 3443 A ... Sampling Unit - ZDV Fitting Laser welded to the Needle<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 405
Sampler: Additional Information<br />
Firmware Revisions<br />
Firmware Revisions<br />
Firmware Revision 1.0<br />
Rev 1.0 was the firmware at introduction <strong>of</strong> the 79855A Autosampler.<br />
Known Problem: Time table execution<br />
Problem is in the timetable execution, if there is more then one entry in the<br />
timetable. Manually stop <strong>of</strong> the run (before elapsing the stoptime) may lead<br />
to wrong behavior <strong>of</strong> the relay contacts in the next run.<br />
Workaround/Solution<br />
1 To stop a run manually reduce the stoptime to a value lower then the<br />
actual run time.<br />
2 Other <strong>1050</strong> modules do not show this problem and can be used as an<br />
alternative to control the relay contacts.<br />
Firmware Revision 2.0<br />
Europe/ICON 2848 G .....<br />
US/Canada 2902 A .....<br />
Firmware revision 2.0 incorporates:<br />
Support <strong>of</strong> 18596A/L sample tray.<br />
Configuration <strong>of</strong> BCD output (either 2 digit BCD or 8 bit binary coded)<br />
Draw Offset Position for the needle.<br />
Fix <strong>of</strong> revision 1.0 bug.<br />
406 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Additional Information<br />
Firmware Revisions<br />
Firmware Revision 2.1<br />
Europe/ICON 2934 G .....<br />
US/Canada 2941 A .....<br />
Revision 2.1 incorporates:<br />
Support <strong>of</strong> 18596B/M sample tray (Killer Bee).<br />
NOTE The 18596B/M sample tray is not compatible to the 18596A/L tray. It does<br />
requires a change in firmware and hardware (MTD board). Nevertheless<br />
firmware revision 2.1 support both versions <strong>of</strong> the tray.<br />
Known Problem: Intermittant BUS ADDRESS ERRORS<br />
Intermittant BUS ADDRESS ERRORS or similar lock ups <strong>of</strong> the autosampler<br />
may occur when the 100 vial tray is connected.<br />
A firmware bug in combination with a weak air supply genereates the<br />
problem. During the injection cycle a underpressure condition may be<br />
detected. This condition might be misinterpreted and then leads to the error.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 407
Sampler: Additional Information<br />
Firmware Revisions<br />
Firmware Revision 3.0<br />
Europe/ICON 3020 G .....<br />
US/Canada 3019 A .....<br />
Revision 3.0 incorporates:<br />
Communication with the HPIB communication interfaces.<br />
Support <strong>of</strong> the Roto Reader <strong>of</strong> the 18596A/B tray.<br />
Support <strong>of</strong> the 34 vial tray in the autosampler.<br />
Introduces the AUTO-ON feature.<br />
Known Problems<br />
❏ Serious Problem with 21 vial tray.<br />
If the 21 vial tray is not in home position at the begin <strong>of</strong> an injection, the<br />
tray will be recognized as 34 vial tray and positioned accordingly. Damage<br />
<strong>of</strong> the needle can be the result.<br />
Any time the 21 vial tray has been moved or replaced, perform a RESET<br />
INJECTOR prior to starting an injection.<br />
❏ Reset during injection Break.<br />
If the injection cycle is interrupted (injection break-stop during injection)<br />
and followed by a RESET INJECTOR hardware crashes may appear. It<br />
was observed that either the syringe piston was forced into the<br />
mechanical stop or the tray was moved against the needle arm. Swtching<br />
<strong>of</strong>f and on the autosampler will cure the problem.<br />
Do not use the RESET INJECTOR during injection break.<br />
❏ Teach Mode<br />
If one <strong>of</strong> the possible teach modes (tray or bar code reader) is done<br />
without a vial in position 101 the autosampler is forced into an error<br />
mode. The error LED is blinking and the display shows the value 3000.<br />
ESCAPE and RESET INJECTOR brings the autosampler back into the<br />
normal operation mode.<br />
408 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Additional Information<br />
Firmware Revisions<br />
Firmware Revision 3.1<br />
Europe/ICON 3031 G .....<br />
US/Canada 3033 A .....<br />
The final tests for the DOS workstation revealed some firmware bugs in the<br />
autosampler firmware. Revision 3.1 fixes these communication bugs.<br />
Known Problems<br />
❏ Problems with Relay Contact 2.<br />
Relay Contact 2 generates a double pulse each time it is turned on or <strong>of</strong>f.<br />
❏ Intermittant E26, E32, E33 or E34: 100 vial tray arm moves two vials into<br />
position #16 <strong>of</strong> the 21 vial tray.<br />
A firmware bug in the synchronization between the autosampler and the<br />
100 vial tray generates the problem. The firmware expects that the<br />
metering syringe is already in home position before the 100 vial tray<br />
places its vial into the 21 vial tray. With large injection volumes (for<br />
example100 µl) and lower eject speed (for example
Sampler: Additional Information<br />
Firmware Revisions<br />
Firmware Revision 4.0<br />
Europe/ICON 3117 G .....<br />
US/Canada 3121 A .....<br />
Revision 4.0 incorporates:<br />
Support <strong>of</strong> Injector Program.<br />
Introduction <strong>of</strong> additional displays.<br />
Changes in tray movement.<br />
Addition <strong>of</strong> error messages.<br />
Fixes <strong>of</strong> known bugs.<br />
NOTE Autosamplers with serial number prefix below 3117 G ..... and 3121 A ..... need<br />
a modification <strong>of</strong> the NMD board when updated to revision 4.0. A capacitor<br />
(100 pF part number 0160-4801) has to be soldered between pin 5 and 7 <strong>of</strong> U26<br />
on the NMD board.<br />
Known Problems<br />
❏ Incorrect BCD output for vials in 100 vial tray.<br />
When working from the 100 vial tray the transfer position is always used<br />
as output for the BCD output. Therefore the bottle number displayed on<br />
the integrator is always 16 for BCD, or 10 for BIN, if the bottle number is<br />
transfered via a BCD cable. PHOENIX and LC APPAC do not show the<br />
problem.<br />
❏ Using the injector program feature allows a work around for the problem.<br />
{{ 10 DRAW def µl from SMPL SPEED def µl/min OFFSET def mm}}<br />
{{ 20 UTILITY OUTPUT SMPL }}<br />
❏ Intermittant hang-up <strong>of</strong> a sequence that uses overlap and return mode for<br />
the 100 vial tray.<br />
❏ Adjustment <strong>of</strong> the sampling unit home (hall) sensor via the service only is<br />
not possible. INSTR# 4 gives incorrect values.<br />
410 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Additional Information<br />
Firmware Revisions<br />
Firmware Revision 4.1<br />
Europe/ICON 3141 G .....<br />
US/Canada 3141 A .....<br />
Revision 4.1 incooperates:<br />
Fix <strong>of</strong> the three known bugs <strong>of</strong> revision 4.0<br />
The default transfer position is redifined (better position).<br />
The utility ’tray move’ command <strong>of</strong> the injector program allows to use the<br />
sample vial option now.<br />
The wait after a post time represents a seperate event (for future<br />
workstation only).<br />
Keep/Return configuration changes during the injection are possible now.<br />
Firmware Revision 4.2<br />
The following two bugs in the revison 4.1 firmware have been fixed with<br />
revision 4.2.<br />
The LC ChemStation could not access all Injector Program features. The<br />
bar code reader did not function in this mode.<br />
Autosampler with 100 vial tray in KEEP mode show a malfunction when a<br />
injection >1 is interrupted (STOP during the injection cycle) and then<br />
aborted. The inject LED remains on and a new START command will result<br />
in a "Not Ready Wait 0.00" display and no injection will take place.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 411
Sampler: Additional Information<br />
Firmware Revisions<br />
Table 102 Compatibility Table<br />
If you update the firmware to revision 4.0 and greater<br />
Firmware revision 4.0 requires a modification <strong>of</strong> the NMD board otherwise<br />
incorrect positioning <strong>of</strong> the 21/34 vial tray may appear.<br />
The new firmware revealed an already existing problem <strong>of</strong> the NMD board.<br />
Noise on a signal line which is used more <strong>of</strong>ten then in previous firmware<br />
versions might lead to incorrect data words for the 21/34 vial tray.<br />
A 100 pF capacitor (part number 0160-4801) soldered between pin 5 and 7 <strong>of</strong><br />
U26 on the NMD board cures the problem. All autosampler with serial<br />
number prefix 3117 G ... and 3121 A ... do have the capacitor already installed.<br />
If you add a 100 vial tray to the autosampler<br />
The update for the additional 100 vial tray comprises an option or upgrade kit<br />
for the autosampler, which consists <strong>of</strong> bracket, electronic controler board<br />
and firmware (if required) and the unmodified GC tray 18596.<br />
Currently there are two 100 vial trays in the field, the 18596A and the<br />
HP 18596B. Looking the same from the outside they differ and are not<br />
compatible. Different electronic boards (MTD) are neccessary to control the<br />
two trays. The basic difference is the controller firmware on the MTD board.<br />
18596A/L 18596B/M<br />
Firmware 2.0 or higher 2.1 or higher<br />
SN Prefix 2848 G / 2902A 2944 G / 2950 A<br />
MTD Board 01078-66503 / -69503 01078-66513 / -69513<br />
MTD firmware (U33) 18594-80295<br />
412 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Sampler: Additional Information<br />
Firmware Revisions<br />
If you have Intermittant E17: Needle cannot move out <strong>of</strong><br />
vial<br />
Variations in the size <strong>of</strong> the vial ground might be the source <strong>of</strong> the problem. If<br />
the needle touches the ground during the injection cycle the error might<br />
appear.<br />
If the down movement <strong>of</strong> the needle is stopped by the vial ground it may<br />
happen that the interrupter sensor gets activated. This indicates that the<br />
needle is in the home position (seat). The up movement <strong>of</strong> the needle is<br />
prohibited when the interrupter sensor is activated and results in the error<br />
message.<br />
Using the draw <strong>of</strong>fset command for the needle will solve the problem.<br />
All firmware revisions 3.1 and below may show this problem. Revision 4.0<br />
and greater do not show the problem because <strong>of</strong> the changes done for the<br />
injector program.<br />
If you have to update the autosampler with a fan<br />
In August 1990 a fan was added to the autosampler (see also “Product<br />
History” on page 405). It cools down the electronic boards and prevents an<br />
increase <strong>of</strong> the electronical failure rate when the card cage is equipped with<br />
one or more additional option boards (for example MTD board, RRC board<br />
or CIB board).<br />
All autosampler equipped with the 100 vial tray (MTD RRC) or/and the HPIB<br />
board (CIB) should be updated with the fan.<br />
The fan upgrade kit 01078-68720 allows to retr<strong>of</strong>it autosampler without fan.<br />
If the fan in the autosampler does not work properly<br />
There is a possible problem with the fan in the <strong>1050</strong> Autosampler. It has been<br />
realized that the fan does not start in all cases when the autosampler is<br />
switched on. Measurements showed that the voltage at the fan can drop<br />
below the needed +12V during the turn on cycle <strong>of</strong> the fan. Depending on the<br />
quality <strong>of</strong> the fan (batch related) it will not start in any case.<br />
All autosampler with serial number prefix 3313 G 02712 or 3315 A 02247 have<br />
the voltage for the fan increased by changing R1 on the motherboard (ALM)<br />
from 100 Ohm 2 Watt to 33.2 Ohm 0.5 Watt (0757-0995).<br />
NOTE The noise <strong>of</strong> the fan will be slightly increased by this modification.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 413
Sampler: Additional Information<br />
Firmware Revisions<br />
Update <strong>of</strong> existing Autosampler<br />
Check wether the fan <strong>of</strong> the autosampler is running or not. Make also sure<br />
that the fan will start at turn on <strong>of</strong> the module. If not, replace R1 on the<br />
motherboard with the 33.2 Ohm resistor.<br />
❏ Identify R1 which is located next to the connector J8 for the keyboard<br />
cable.<br />
❏ Cut the wires <strong>of</strong> the 100 Ohm resistor close to its body. This allows you to<br />
solder the new 33.2 Ohm resistor (0757-0995) to the existing wires without<br />
removing the ALM board from the card cage.<br />
If the needle lifts the vial out <strong>of</strong> the tray<br />
When the needle is raised out <strong>of</strong> the vial during an injection, cycle it may<br />
happen that the vial is lifted out <strong>of</strong> its position (but finally drops back into the<br />
tray). The reason might be a too weak spring in the bottle in place sensor<br />
assembly. This happens only, if the septa is very tight. All autosamplers with<br />
serial number prefix 3313 G... have a stronger spring 1460-2365 installed.<br />
The new spring is much stronger then the old one and will keep the vial in<br />
place also with tight septa.<br />
If the injections are not reproducible (grooved needle)<br />
It has been reported that a couple <strong>of</strong> customers had reproducibilty problems<br />
when injecting larger volumes from vials that have been crimped very tight.<br />
For such cases a grooved needle has been set up.<br />
414 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
In This Book<br />
This manual contains technical<br />
information about the Agilent <strong>1050</strong><br />
liquid chromatographs.<br />
This manual is available as electronic<br />
version (Adobe Acrobat Reader file)<br />
only.
<strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong><br />
<strong>Modules</strong><br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> -<br />
Diode Array Detector<br />
(G1306A) and Multiple<br />
Wavelength Detector<br />
(79854A)
© Copyright Agilent<br />
Technologies 2001<br />
All rights reserved.<br />
Reproduction, adaption,<br />
or translation without<br />
prior written permission<br />
is prohibited, except as<br />
allowed under the<br />
copyright laws.<br />
Part No. NONE<br />
11/2001<br />
Printed in Germany<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
Hewlett-Packard-Strasse 8<br />
76337 Waldbronn<br />
Germany<br />
Warranty<br />
The information<br />
contained in this<br />
document is subject to<br />
change without notice.<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
makes no warranty <strong>of</strong><br />
any kind with regard to<br />
this material,<br />
including, but not<br />
limited to, the implied<br />
warranties or<br />
merchantability and<br />
fitness for a particular<br />
purpose.<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
shall not be liable for<br />
errors contained herein<br />
or for incidental or<br />
consequential damages<br />
in connection with the<br />
furnishing, performance,<br />
or use <strong>of</strong> this material.<br />
IMPORTANT NOTE<br />
This version <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong><br />
service manual includes<br />
all sections from the<br />
0<strong>1050</strong>-90102 edition 4<br />
(1995) and G1306-90102<br />
edition 2 (May 1994). It<br />
merges both sections,<br />
the MWD and the DAD.<br />
The series I opticals<br />
information (79854A<br />
MWD) information has<br />
been removed (product<br />
went out <strong>of</strong> support<br />
during 2000).<br />
Part numbers have been<br />
updated as <strong>of</strong> 11/2001.<br />
Contact your local<br />
Agilent support <strong>of</strong>fice in<br />
case <strong>of</strong> part number<br />
issues or upgrades.<br />
The latest version <strong>of</strong> this<br />
manual is available as<br />
Adobe Acrobat Reader<br />
(PDF) version only and<br />
can be downloaded from<br />
the Agilent Technolgies<br />
web page<br />
www.agilent.com.
18<br />
18 DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
This chapter provides general information about<br />
the <strong>1050</strong> Diode Array and Multiple Wavelength<br />
Detectors
DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
This chapter gives general information on<br />
about this detector<br />
repair policy<br />
features<br />
user-interfaces<br />
specifications<br />
About the Detector<br />
General<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> Diode Array Detector (G1306A DAD) and Multiple Wavelength<br />
Detector (79854A MWD) module houses the optical system and the<br />
electronic circuitry which acquire and process absorbance data. Control <strong>of</strong><br />
optics (radiation source shutter photo diode array etc.) is an integral part <strong>of</strong><br />
the electronics. The module is controlled through the user interface through<br />
which the operator defines his requirements (detection parameters etc.) and<br />
through which the system presents the required analytical information.<br />
Repair Policy<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> DAD/MWD is designed that you can access all components easily.<br />
Customers are able to repair certain parts <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> DAD/MWD described<br />
in the User <strong>Handbook</strong>s.<br />
For details on repair policy refer to “Repair Policy” on page 38 in chapter<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Common Information.<br />
420 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
About the Detector<br />
Identification<br />
The module is identified by a 5 digit product number (G1306A or 79854A) and<br />
a 10 unit serial number on a label attached to the wall inside the module. The<br />
first four digits <strong>of</strong> the serial number are the serial prefix. The letter identifies<br />
the country <strong>of</strong> origin. The last five digits are an identification number unique<br />
to each module.<br />
Any changes to the modules will be covered initially by <strong>Service</strong> Notes. They<br />
will be sent out to all <strong>Service</strong> personnel prior to implementation <strong>of</strong> the<br />
change to the instrument. With every reprint these changes will be<br />
incorporated into the service documentation.<br />
Compatibility<br />
The replacement parts <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> MWD are usable in the <strong>1050</strong> DAD and vice<br />
versa. The <strong>1050</strong> MWD can be upgraded to a <strong>1050</strong> DAD.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 421
DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
DAD Differences<br />
DAD Differences<br />
The G1306A Diode Array Detector (DAD) is basically the <strong>1050</strong> Multiple<br />
Wavelength Detector (MWD). The DAD has the same hardware as the <strong>1050</strong><br />
MWD with two exceptions: keyboard and firmware are different.<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> DAD is NO replacement for the <strong>1050</strong> MWD.<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> DAD adds spectra capabilities to the existing <strong>1050</strong> MWD,<br />
necessary for workstation controlled 3D detection systems.<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> DAD needs control by the <strong>HPLC</strong> DOS ChemStation (PHOENIX<br />
3D-PLUS) to become operable.<br />
Upgrade from <strong>1050</strong> MWD to <strong>1050</strong> DAD will need new firmware and a new<br />
user interface (keyboard).<br />
Added features<br />
The following features are new (compared to the <strong>1050</strong> MWD):<br />
up to five independent signals (sample and reference wavelength each)<br />
up to 5 spectra/second (time programmed, periodically or peak controlled)<br />
temporary storage <strong>of</strong> up to 90 spectra in internal run buffer<br />
up to 1 spectrum/second for monitor output<br />
lamp-on time information<br />
Removed features from local keyboard<br />
The following features are removed from local keyboard access (compared<br />
to the <strong>1050</strong> MWD). The functionality is covered by the workstation:<br />
reduced run buffer size for signal data (shared between signal and spectra)<br />
no local spectra evaluation (e.g. spectra plot to analog output and<br />
spectrum maximum calculations). This also affects the diagnostic<br />
functions holmium test and intensity pr<strong>of</strong>ile plots.<br />
No signal arithmetic for the analog outputs.<br />
Signal A is analog output 1 and signal B is analog output 2.<br />
422 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
DAD Differences<br />
The signal multiplication factor has been removed from signal parameter<br />
set points.<br />
no max monitor screen.<br />
Restrictions <strong>of</strong> user interface<br />
The user interface does have the following restrictions:<br />
no access to method parameter including the time table (e.g. signal<br />
settings, external contacts).<br />
no method storage functionality (includes ’on error method’).<br />
no access to time-out or auto-on function.<br />
DATE&TIME will be monitored but cannot be set locally.<br />
no parameter lock on/<strong>of</strong>f.<br />
no settings <strong>of</strong> the analog output functions and <strong>of</strong>fsets.<br />
Compatibility<br />
The replacement parts <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> MWD are usable in the <strong>1050</strong> DAD and vice<br />
versa. The <strong>1050</strong> MWD can be upgraded to a <strong>1050</strong> DAD. An upgrade kit will<br />
contain the necessary hardware and instructions (see section Parts<br />
Identification).<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> DAD cannot be operated properly in an integrator based system.<br />
The LC APPACK s<strong>of</strong>tware will not recognize the <strong>1050</strong> DAD as a module to<br />
control.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 423
DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
DAD Differences<br />
Local User Interface<br />
Figure 145 Local User Interface<br />
The keyboard <strong>of</strong> the user interface has been changed. A different keypad foil<br />
shows a limited number <strong>of</strong> available keys (see Figure 145 on page 424).<br />
424 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
DAD Differences<br />
The following functions remain the same as for the 79854A MWD (same<br />
keys):<br />
LAMP ON/OFF<br />
Pressing NEXT LAMP ON FOR n hours and<br />
RESET LAMPHOURS (enter)are displayed.<br />
BALANCE<br />
START and STOP<br />
Status line including signal A monitor, not ready conditions, logbook,<br />
installed options and firmware revisions.<br />
The following functions are hidden behind the STATUS key for maintenance<br />
purpose):<br />
DATE&TIME<br />
REVISION<br />
CONFIGURATION<br />
❏ remote configuration.<br />
❏ set GPIB address.<br />
❏ autobalance on/<strong>of</strong>f.<br />
❏ lamp current setting.<br />
❏ set wavelength calibration factor.<br />
❏ set analog output voltage.<br />
TEST FUNCTIONS<br />
❏ measure intensity.<br />
❏ Holmium spectrum.<br />
❏ lamp intensity.<br />
❏ gain (ASC).<br />
❏ D/A converter.<br />
❏ electronics noise.<br />
❏ shutter position.<br />
❏ wavelength calibration check.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 425
DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
DAD Differences<br />
Workstation Interface<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> DAD must be operated with the LC ChemStation.<br />
Rawdata File<br />
The run buffer within the detector is shared by signal and spectra data. In<br />
case the run buffer is going to overflow, the signal data will have the higher<br />
priority: the last stored spectrum is removed from the run buffer. This will<br />
guarantee useful signal data but may cause loss <strong>of</strong> interesting spectral data.<br />
The run buffer can hold up to 30000 signal data points or about 90 spectra.<br />
Peak Detector<br />
The peak detector (PD) always uses signal A as the ’pilot’ signal. The PD is<br />
adjusted by means <strong>of</strong> the two set points peak width and threshold. Both<br />
setpoint are time programmable. Whereas the PD-threshold is a method<br />
parameter <strong>of</strong> its own, the PD-peak width parameter is derived from the<br />
general peak width (PKWD) parameter. At start <strong>of</strong> the run the value for the<br />
PD-peak width is set equal to the PKWD setpoint. During the run the PD-peak<br />
width parameter can be changed by time programming.<br />
Spectra Acquisition Modes<br />
The spectra acquisition mode allows automatic storage <strong>of</strong> spectra during a<br />
run. The mode can be changed during the run by time programming.<br />
Compared to the 1040 DAD the <strong>1050</strong> DAD will have two new features<br />
storing spectra at the baseline before the begin <strong>of</strong> a peak<br />
periodically store spectra during a peak and at a reduced data rate.<br />
The modes in detail are:<br />
426 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
DAD Differences<br />
Table 103 Spectra Acquisition Modes<br />
Mode Details<br />
none no spectra is stored<br />
apex top <strong>of</strong> peak spectra is stored<br />
apex + baselines last baseline spectrum before peak, top <strong>of</strong> peak<br />
spectrum and first baseline spectrum after peak is<br />
stored.<br />
apex + slopes spectrum in peak upslope, at top <strong>of</strong> peak and in peak<br />
downslope is stored.<br />
apex + slopes + baselines combined apex + slopes and apex + baselines.<br />
all in peak compared to storing all spectra periodically, only<br />
stores spectra within a peak at doubled period. Starts<br />
with last baseline spectrum before peak and ends<br />
with first baseline spectrum after peak. If baseline<br />
spectra are not detected, the spectrum before the first<br />
spectrum in peak or the spectrum after the last<br />
spectrum within the peak is stored instead.<br />
all periodically all spectra are stored. The period depends<br />
on the peak width setting. For peak width setting=0<br />
(narrowest peak), the spectrum data rate would be<br />
20 Hz<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 427
DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
DAD Differences<br />
Test Functions<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> DAD has a reduced user interface and no analog output (DAC board<br />
is optional). It has no means to display (plot) the spectra (or intensity scans)<br />
<strong>of</strong> some <strong>of</strong> the built-in tests. These plots can be retrieved with the<br />
Workstation.<br />
Options<br />
Because the <strong>1050</strong> DAD is only operable together with the workstation, the<br />
Communication Interface Board (CRB) is mandatory.<br />
Because the <strong>1050</strong> DAD typically needs no analog output signals, the Digital to<br />
Analog Conversion Board (DAC) is optional.<br />
For complete description <strong>of</strong> test conditions used to obtain specifications, see<br />
Owner’s manual.<br />
428 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
Specifications DAD/MWD<br />
Specifications DAD/MWD<br />
Table 104 Specification <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> DAD/MWD (<strong>Series</strong> II Optical)<br />
Detection Type Double beam photometer<br />
Signals Up to 3 (MWD) or 5 (DAD), each defined by a sample<br />
wavelength and bandwidth and an optional reference<br />
wavelength and bandwidth.<br />
Signal Combinations Sum <strong>of</strong> two signals; difference <strong>of</strong> two signals; ratio <strong>of</strong><br />
two signals, with definable range and threshold;<br />
window plot with definable ratio, range and<br />
threshold.<br />
Noise < ±2.0 x 10 -5 AU peak-to-peak, at 254 nm with 4 nm<br />
bandwidth, flowing water at 1 ml/min, 1 second<br />
response time (10-90%).<br />
Drift < 2 x 10 -3 AU/hour, at 254 nm, after warm-up.<br />
Wavelength Range 190-600 nm, selectable in 1 nm increments.<br />
Bandwidth Range 2-400 nm, selectable in 1 nm increments.<br />
Wavelength Accuracy ±1 nm.<br />
Linear Absorbance Range Better than 1% up to 1.5 AU, using acetone at<br />
265 nm.<br />
Response Time 8 choices, ranging from 0.1 to 20 seconds (10-90%).<br />
Spectra Storage <strong>of</strong> at least 8 spectra, with definable<br />
wavelength range from 190-600 nm (total number <strong>of</strong><br />
spectra depends on range defined). Post-run plotting<br />
<strong>of</strong> original or subtracted spectra possible.<br />
Spectra Resolution depends on slit width.<br />
Absorbance Resolution < 5 x 10 -6 AU<br />
Spectra Acquisition 12.5 ms from 190 to 600 nm; according to the<br />
response time settings scans are accumulated for one<br />
data point for improved sensitivity.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 429
DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
Specifications DAD/MWD<br />
Table 104 Specification <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> DAD/MWD (<strong>Series</strong> II Optical)<br />
Light Source Deuterium lamp.<br />
Flow Cell (<strong>Series</strong> II) SST cell, 8 µl volume with 6 mm path length or 13 µl<br />
volume with 10 mm path length and 120 bar (1760 psi)<br />
maximum pressure. Optional high-pressure cells<br />
(400 bar).<br />
Display 2 line by 16 character fluorescent display with<br />
real-time display <strong>of</strong> operating parameters or<br />
absorbance and wavelength <strong>of</strong> maximum absorbance.<br />
Control Integrated keyboard with function keys; parameter<br />
editing during run possible; keyboard lock. External<br />
control via GPIB with ChemStation or RS-232.<br />
Integrated keyboard with function keys; limited<br />
functionality and control on DAD.<br />
Parameters Signal definitions (wavelengths/bandwidths),<br />
attenuation, response time, zero <strong>of</strong>fset, balance;<br />
spectra definitions; external contacts; analog outputs.<br />
Time-programmable<br />
Parameters<br />
Wavelengths/bandwidths, attenuation, spectra<br />
acquisition, external contacts.<br />
Methods Battery-backed storage <strong>of</strong> up to ten methods (depends<br />
on length <strong>of</strong> method), including initial and<br />
time-programmed parameters. Automatic startup and<br />
shutdown methods. Editing <strong>of</strong> stored methods<br />
possible during run.<br />
Analog Outputs Two analog outputs are available (on DAD optional)<br />
for output <strong>of</strong> signals and/or signal combinations; both<br />
1 V/2 AU or 100 mV/2 AU, user-selectable.<br />
Communications START (in- and output), STOP (in- and output), READY<br />
(output), SHUTDOWN (output) for synchronization<br />
with other LC modules; two external contacts<br />
including: 1 relay with 24 V and 250 mA; 1 contact<br />
closure with maximum 30 V and 250 mA.<br />
430 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
Specifications DAD/MWD<br />
Table 104 Specification <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> DAD/MWD (<strong>Series</strong> II Optical)<br />
Safety Aids Extensive diagnostics, error detection and display via<br />
front-panel LED’s and status logbook. User-definable<br />
shutdown method activated in case <strong>of</strong> error. Leak<br />
detection, safe leak handling, leak output signal to<br />
shutdown the pump.<br />
Environment Temperature range: 5 to 55 °C<br />
Humidity: < 85% (non-condensing)<br />
Power Requirements Line voltage: 100-120 or 220-240 VAC ±10%<br />
Line frequency: 48-66 Hz<br />
Power consumption: 150 VA max.<br />
Dimensions Height: 208 mm (8.2 inch)<br />
Width: 325 mm (12.8 inch)<br />
Depth: 560 mm (22.0 inch)<br />
Weight: 16 kg (35 lb.)<br />
For complete description <strong>of</strong> test conditions used to obtain specifications, see<br />
Owner’s manual.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 431
DAD/MWD: General Information<br />
Specifications DAD/MWD<br />
432 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
19<br />
19 DAD/MWD: Hardware<br />
Information<br />
This chapter provides hardware information<br />
about the 050 Diode Array and Multiple<br />
Wavelength Detectors
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
This chapter gives general and technical information about the hardware<br />
components <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Diode Array and Multiple Wavelength Detectors.<br />
overview about the optical system<br />
overview about the electronics<br />
detector hardware<br />
❏ optical units<br />
❏ flow cells<br />
❏ heat exchanger<br />
❏ lamp<br />
❏ shutter assembly<br />
❏ leak sensor<br />
❏ fans<br />
NOTE This chapter describes the <strong>Series</strong> II optical unit hardware only.<br />
434 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Figure 146 Optical System<br />
1 - deuterium lamp<br />
2 - windows<br />
3 - shutter<br />
4 - achromat<br />
5 - flow cell<br />
6 - slit assembly<br />
7 - lens<br />
8 - grating<br />
9 - array<br />
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
Overview: Optical System<br />
Overview: Optical System<br />
The light from the deuterium lamp is passing an achromat lens system and is<br />
focussed first on the exit <strong>of</strong> the flow cell. Then it passes a lens and is<br />
focussed again on the slit assembly. Due to this separation <strong>of</strong> flow cell and<br />
slit and the availability <strong>of</strong> flow cells with different path lengths (6 and 10 mm)<br />
and slit assemblies with different optical slit width (2, 4, 8 nm), it is now<br />
possible to optimize the signal-to-noise and the spectral resolution. The<br />
optical unit is optimized for the flow cell with 6 mm path length together with<br />
the 4 nm slit assembly.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 435
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
Overview: Electronics<br />
Overview: Electronics<br />
Figure 147 shows a block diagram <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> DAD/MWD.<br />
The Common Main Processor (CMP) controls all functions <strong>of</strong> the module.<br />
The CMP communicates with the AQB, controls directly the shutter <strong>of</strong> the<br />
optical unit and the power supply. If a leak is detected inside the optical unit,<br />
this leak message is connected to the CMP. The CMP also provides the I/O<br />
Remote connections.<br />
To the CMP the common main processor BUS is connected which allows the<br />
communication with the user interface (keyboard), Digital to Analog<br />
Converter (DAC) and GPIB/RS232 interface.<br />
The Digital to Analog Converter interface is optional.<br />
Because <strong>of</strong> the structure <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> the module specific controller<br />
firmware is piggy-back loaded to the Data Acquisition Board (AQB). The<br />
AQB controls the Analog to Digital Conversion Board (ASC) and the Photo<br />
Diode Array (PDA).<br />
436 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
Overview: Electronics<br />
Figure 147 Block Diagram <strong>1050</strong> DAD/MWD<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 437
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Figure 148 Optical Unit<br />
The main areas <strong>of</strong> the optical unit are:<br />
Optical housing same for use in <strong>1050</strong> MWD and 1040/90 DAD<br />
(different flow cell, cover and slit).<br />
flow cell available as stainless steel (SST) with different path<br />
lengths (6/10 mm, 8/13 µl) for high pressure use (120<br />
bar). Additional high-pressure cells (400 bar) are also<br />
available.<br />
Slit assembly available with optical slit width <strong>of</strong> 2, 4 and 8 nm slit.<br />
LPC board interface between leak sensor/shutter assembly and<br />
main electronics.<br />
Due to this separation <strong>of</strong> flow cell and slit and the availability <strong>of</strong> flow cells<br />
with different path lengths and slit assemblies with different optical slit<br />
width, it is now possible to optimize the signal-to-noise and the spectral<br />
resolution. The optical unit is optimized for the flow cell with 6 mm path<br />
length together with the 4 nm slit assembly.<br />
438 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Figure 149 Flow Cell<br />
Table 105 Flow Cell Data<br />
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Flow Cell Assemblies<br />
The new flow cell design allows the work up to higher pressure and the<br />
possibility <strong>of</strong> maintaining and replacing parts. The flow cells can be<br />
disassembled, cleaned or repaired.<br />
STD HP-STD HP-Micro<br />
Volume 8 or 13 13 1.7 µl<br />
Path length 6 or 10 10 6 mm<br />
Maximum pressure in the cell 120 400 400 bar<br />
Inlet capillary id 0.17 0.17 0.12 mm<br />
Outlet capillary id 0.17 0.17 0.12 mm<br />
recommended pH range >2.3 to 9.5<br />
STD Standard Flow Cell<br />
HP-STD High Pressure Cell with 13 µl volume<br />
HP-Micro High Pressure Cell with 1.7 µl volume<br />
CAUTION Because the very small inner diameter (0.17 or 0.12 mm) <strong>of</strong> the inlet capillary<br />
only very clean solvents should be used.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 439
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Additional Information <strong>of</strong> High Pressure Cells<br />
Typical applications <strong>of</strong> the high-pressure flow cells are:<br />
Hyphenated systems (LC-MS)<br />
Super Critical Fluid Chromatography (SFC)<br />
Multi-detector systems<br />
Narrow-bore column applications<br />
The main difference between the standard and high-pressure flow cells is the<br />
design <strong>of</strong> the window assemblies. The high-pressure flow cells have a<br />
different window screw, window and seal ring, washer, and a different<br />
number and orientation <strong>of</strong> conical disk (bevelled) springs, see Figure 150.<br />
The seal rings support and hold the window and at the same time form the<br />
high-pressure seal.<br />
Figure 150 Cross-section <strong>of</strong> Window Assembly<br />
Windows<br />
Conical Disk Springs (see<br />
below)<br />
Detail <strong>of</strong> Conical Disk<br />
Springs Showing<br />
Orientation<br />
The following materials are in contact with solvents:<br />
Stainless steel (AISI 316)<br />
Quartz<br />
Washer<br />
Washer<br />
Window Screw<br />
Vespel ® (polyamide) Vespel is a registered trademark <strong>of</strong> DuPont.<br />
440 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Under standard conditions (1 ml/min water flow, 254 nm detection<br />
wavelength, 4 nm bandwidth, 1 s response time) the noise <strong>of</strong> the<br />
high-pressure micro flow cell might increase.<br />
The high-pressure micro flow cell is supplied with an additional 0.12 mm i.d.<br />
capillary, allowing you to bypass the heat exchanger.<br />
Slit Assembly<br />
Figure 151 Slit Assembly<br />
The separation <strong>of</strong> the slit from the flow cell allows to change the slits<br />
according the needs to optimize signal-to-noise and spectral resolution.<br />
Available slit sizes are 2, 4 and 8 nm.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 441
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Deuterium Lamp Assembly<br />
The deuterium lamp used in the <strong>1050</strong> DAD is the known lamp from the 1040<br />
Diode Array Detector, the <strong>1050</strong> DAD/MWD and the <strong>1050</strong> Variable Wavelength<br />
Detector (79853C).<br />
The reduction <strong>of</strong> energy emission <strong>of</strong> the lamp (Figure 153 on page 443) is<br />
time and wavelength dependent and is significantly higher within the first<br />
days and for wavelengths in the ultra violet range compared to the visible<br />
range (change in transmission <strong>of</strong> lamp glass).<br />
Usually, the response maximum <strong>of</strong> the lamp is near 230 nm, but can be<br />
shifted to a higher wavelength for an aged lamp. It has no relevance for<br />
intensity degradation at other wavelengths.<br />
Figure 152 Deuterium Lamp Assembly<br />
Two versions were used:<br />
79880-60002 was the original lamp<br />
79883-60002 with 20% higher initial energy<br />
442 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Figure 153 Intensity Degradation <strong>of</strong> Lamp (79883-60002)<br />
Measured wavelength is 230 nm<br />
initial intensity about 20% higher than 79880-60002<br />
should be used with 2 nm slit initially top prevent overload <strong>of</strong> photo diodes<br />
(if intensity is to high).<br />
decrease in intensity is less with use<br />
NOTE The lamp should be replaced only if the following two criteria are both<br />
fulfilled:<br />
Baseline Noise (with test cell) has increased significantly.<br />
Amount <strong>of</strong> counts <strong>of</strong> the lamp (with test cell) has decreased to less than 50%<br />
<strong>of</strong> the count record <strong>of</strong> this same lamp when newly installed).<br />
The decision to replace the lamp due to criteria 2 alone is not relevant,<br />
because the signal/noise may be still within instrument specifications.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 443
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Heat Exchanger Assembly<br />
The MWD may exhibit severe noise under certain solvent and LC conditions.<br />
This is most noticeable when Acetonitrile is the mobile phase. Therefore a<br />
heat exchanger assembly is installed underneath the optical unit. The outlet<br />
capillary <strong>of</strong> the heat exchanger is mounted at the flow cell and is led then into<br />
the inlet <strong>of</strong> the flow cell connected by a union.<br />
The heat exchanger contains 60 cm capillary <strong>of</strong> 0.17 mm i.d. Pressure drop<br />
with water at 1 ml/min approximately 25 bar.<br />
Figure 154 Heat Exchanger and Flow Cell<br />
444 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Shutter Assembly<br />
Figure 155 Shutter Assembly<br />
The Shutter Assembly is located in the cell compartment <strong>of</strong> the optical unit.<br />
The stepper motor is responsible for moving the shutter into one <strong>of</strong> three<br />
possible positions:<br />
3 Shutter not in light path (normal operation)<br />
4 Shutter in filter mode (a holmium filter is moved into the light), refer to<br />
TEST FUNCTIONS, see “Shutter Position” on page 506.<br />
5 Shutter in dark position (no light is coming through the cell; this is<br />
necessary for dark current measurements carried out for calibration<br />
purposes).<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 445
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Leak Sensor Assembly<br />
A leak sensor is located just under the cell. Should the cell leak, solvent<br />
would cool the leak sensor (self-heating thermistor). The resulting change in<br />
resistance, measured by comparators on the CMP board would generate an<br />
error message on the CMP board and switch the instrument to STANDBY. A<br />
drain is located at the bottom <strong>of</strong> the cell compartment and is led to the<br />
module waste system.<br />
Damage to the array compartment is prevented by a window which separates<br />
the cell from the array compartment.<br />
NOTE In a <strong>1050</strong> System (using remote connections) the leak message will switch <strong>of</strong>f<br />
the pump.<br />
Figure 156 Leak Sensor Assembly<br />
To switch <strong>of</strong>f non-<strong>1050</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> refer to operating manual.<br />
446 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
Fans<br />
Fans<br />
Figure 157 Fans<br />
Fan cover not shown<br />
Two DC-fans are located between the optical unit and the motherboard,<br />
inserted in a set <strong>of</strong> foam. The left one provides air for the lamp housing and<br />
power supply and the right one provides air for the electronics in the rear.<br />
For replacement refer to section Procedures.<br />
In May 1994, a protection cover for the left fan (close to the lamp connector)<br />
was introduced for safety reasons (not shown in Figure 157).<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 447
DAD/MWD: Hardware Information<br />
Fans<br />
448 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
20<br />
20 DAD/MWD: Electronic<br />
Information<br />
This chapter provides electronic information<br />
about the <strong>1050</strong> Diode Array and Multiple<br />
Wavelength Detectors
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
This chapter gives information about the electronic <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Diode Array<br />
and Multiple Wavelength Detectors:<br />
Overview<br />
Array Signal Conversion Board (ASC)<br />
Data Acquisition Board (AQB)<br />
Firmware Board (FIM)<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
Communication Interface Board (CRB)<br />
Fluorescent Indicator Module (FIP)<br />
Motherboard (LUM)<br />
LPC Board<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A)<br />
Digital to Analog Conversion Board (DAC)<br />
NOTE For additional details <strong>of</strong> the assemblies you may refer to the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Service</strong><br />
<strong>Handbook</strong>, Chapter Common Information.<br />
450 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Overview<br />
Overview<br />
Table 106 Electronic Boards<br />
All electronic boards (except the FIP, behind the keyboard and the LPC, in<br />
the optical unit) are located in the rear part <strong>of</strong> the module and they are<br />
connected to the Motherboard (LUM). The rear <strong>of</strong> the detector is shown in<br />
Figure 158 on page 452.<br />
In the <strong>1050</strong> DAD the following electronic assemblies are available:<br />
Description Part Number Exchange<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A) 5061-3375 0<strong>1050</strong>-69375<br />
Common Main Processor (CMP) 5061-3380 0<strong>1050</strong>-69380<br />
Array Signal Conversion (ASC) 01048-66501<br />
Digital/Analog Conversion (DAC) (optional) 01048-66502<br />
Data Acquisition (AQB) 01048-66543<br />
Firmware Board (FIM) for DAD G1306-66524<br />
Firmware Board (FIM) for MWD 01048-66504<br />
Leak/Shutter Interface (LPC) 79883-66509<br />
Motherboard (LUM) 01048-66510<br />
Display Interface Board (FIP) 5061-3376<br />
Communication Interface (CRB) 5062-2482<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 451
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Overview<br />
Figure 158 Rear <strong>of</strong> <strong>1050</strong> DAD/MWD<br />
NOTE The DAC board is optional in the <strong>1050</strong> DAD.<br />
452 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Overview<br />
The system consists <strong>of</strong> the Photo Diode Array (PDA) with 211 elements, the<br />
Array Front End Board (AFE), the Analog Signal Conversion Board (ASC)<br />
and the Acquisition Processor Board (AQB).<br />
The PDA detects a spectrum <strong>of</strong> incident light in the wavelength from<br />
190...600 nm with 2 nm increments.<br />
The AFE Board consists <strong>of</strong> a Readout Amplifier, which transfers the<br />
accumulated charge from the diodes and generates the PDA signal.<br />
The ASC Board consists <strong>of</strong> a variable gain amplifier, a 16-bit A/D converter, a<br />
microprocessor interface and a control logic to control the PDA, the<br />
amplifier and the microprocessor interface.<br />
Figure 159 Block Diagram <strong>of</strong> Electronics<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 453
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Array Signal Conversion Board (ASC)<br />
Array Signal Conversion Board (ASC)<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 107 Part Numbers for ASC Board<br />
Item Part Number<br />
ASC board 01048-66501<br />
The two main functions <strong>of</strong> the ASC board are:<br />
providing <strong>of</strong> control signals for the readout routine <strong>of</strong> the photo diode<br />
array;<br />
analog to digital conversion <strong>of</strong> the array signal.<br />
Photo Diode Array Readout Routine<br />
The readout cycle (12.5 ms) is divided into 225 time slots each 55.55 µs.<br />
Time Slot Function<br />
0 not used<br />
1 dummy diode, not used<br />
2 Bit 1 <strong>of</strong> shift register, not used<br />
3...211 information <strong>of</strong> intensity<br />
212 Bit 213 <strong>of</strong> shift register, not used<br />
213 dummy diode, not used<br />
214 not used<br />
215 Offset value, Gain = 1<br />
216 Offset value, Gain = 2<br />
217 Offset value, Gain = 4<br />
218...224 not used<br />
454 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Array Signal Conversion Board (ASC)<br />
Figure 160 Block Diagram ASC Board<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 455
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Array Signal Conversion Board (ASC)<br />
The analog ARRAY SIGNAL coming from the AFE board is in the range <strong>of</strong><br />
-5 V to - 10 V depending on the intensity <strong>of</strong> the light falling on to the photo<br />
diodes.<br />
Analog/Digital Conversion<br />
The principle <strong>of</strong> conversion is based on the Triple-Slope technique see Figure<br />
161.<br />
During the TRACK phase the integration capacitor is loaded by a constant<br />
voltage U c . This voltage is proportional to the ARRAY SIGNAL voltage. The<br />
voltage U c is in the range <strong>of</strong> 0...10 V and is present for 12.37 µs.<br />
Figure 161 Triple Slope Integration<br />
During the HOLD phase (the ARRAY Signal voltage is disconnected). U c is<br />
discharged by two constant bipolar currents I 1 and I 2 and the discharge time<br />
is measured. U c is discharged with I 1 until the zero passage is reached. The<br />
time used for this down slope is counted with the clock (18.432 MHz) and will<br />
represent the upper 9 bits <strong>of</strong> the 16 bit data word.<br />
After the zero passage I 1 is switched <strong>of</strong>f with the next active clock and the<br />
negative residual charge is discharged with I 2 until the zero passage is<br />
reached the second time. The time between both zero passages represent the<br />
lower 7 bits <strong>of</strong> the 16 bit data word.<br />
In reality only I 1 is switched and I 2 is on permanent to avoid failures due to<br />
multiple switching.<br />
456 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Array Signal Conversion Board (ASC)<br />
The cycle for the conversion takes 55.55 µs (18 kHz) and is divided into 1024<br />
steps <strong>of</strong> 54.2 ns (18.432 MHz) which is the internal clock on the board.<br />
During steps 0...227 the amplified input voltage (ARRAY SIGNAL) is switched<br />
through and the integration capacitor is charged. The gain level can be 1, 2 or<br />
4 depending on the instrument characteristic <strong>of</strong> the light source. These<br />
amplification factors are measured for each diode at the begin <strong>of</strong> a<br />
chromatographic run when a BALANCE is made. The values are put as a<br />
table into memory on the AQB Board.<br />
Starting with step 228 the input voltage is disconnected from the capacitor<br />
and a RESET pulse resets all flip-flops and counters. Current I 1 is switched<br />
on. The conversion starts.<br />
Up to this point the described timing sequence is independent <strong>of</strong> the input<br />
voltage. The following processes are controlled by the zero passages.<br />
The 9-bit counter counts the clock pulses until the comparator sees a zero<br />
passage <strong>of</strong> the integrator voltage. Then I 1 and the 9-bit counter are switched<br />
<strong>of</strong>f. I 2 and a 8-bit counter are now active discharging the negative integrator<br />
voltage until the next zero passage. The 8-bit counter stops.<br />
During steps 1012...1016 the 16 bit data word is build. The 16 bit word is<br />
moved into the output registers from where the AQB Board takes the<br />
information. Because <strong>of</strong> the ‘long’ availability <strong>of</strong> the data word (55.55 µs) the<br />
AQB processor has enough time to get the data.<br />
Input Amplifier and Integrator<br />
The ARRAY SIGNAL coming from the AFE Board is in the range <strong>of</strong> +0.1 V<br />
(dark) and -5.1 V (bright). A input amplifier transfers this voltage into the<br />
range <strong>of</strong> -0.7 V to -11.1 V which is the input <strong>of</strong> an amplification switch. This<br />
switch changes the amplification factor <strong>of</strong> the integrator stage (gain factor 1,<br />
2 or 4). The adjustment <strong>of</strong> the separate photo diodes is done by the AQB<br />
Board.<br />
Ramp Amplifier and Comparator<br />
The ramp amplifier is used to increase the slope speed <strong>of</strong> the integrator<br />
voltage.<br />
The comparator looks for the zero passage and provides the signals COMP<br />
and COMP- for the time and control logic.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 457
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Array Signal Conversion Board (ASC)<br />
DC-Voltages<br />
The internal reference voltages +10 V and -10 V are derived from the +15 V.<br />
Input voltages: +19 V, -19 V, AGND<br />
+5 V, DGND<br />
Output Voltages: +15 V, -15 V, AGND<br />
+5 V, DGND<br />
Digital Sections<br />
This section provides all timing and control signals used on the ASC Board.<br />
The timing is done with a Programmable Array Logic (PAL) that gets 8<br />
synchronous input signals in the range <strong>of</strong> 2.304 MHz and 18 KHz all derived<br />
out <strong>of</strong> the 18.432 MHz main clock.<br />
A SYNC signal is used for synchronization <strong>of</strong> the switching power supply.<br />
The comparator signals COMP and COMP- (generated in the analog part)<br />
control the 9-bit and 8-bit counter.<br />
The 16-bit data word is transferred to the Data Acquisition Board (AQB) via<br />
the 16-bit Data Register.<br />
Status information is transferred to the Data Acquisition Board (AQB) via the<br />
Status Register.<br />
458 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Data Acquisition Board (AQB)<br />
Data Acquisition Board (AQB)<br />
Repair Level: Board and Fuse F11, F12 and Firmware<br />
Table 108 Part Numbers for AQB Board<br />
Item Part Number also used for<br />
AQB Board 01048-66543/-69543 G1600A CE<br />
Firmware Board DAD/CE G1306-66524 G1600A CE<br />
Firmware Board MWD 01048-66504<br />
Fuse F11, F12 (250 mA) 2110-0004<br />
The Data Acquisition Board (AQB) is the ’personality module’. It contains the<br />
firmware for the main processor system.<br />
Firmware including address decoder will be located piggy back on the FIM<br />
board. But the main purpose <strong>of</strong> this board is to hold special hardware only<br />
necessary for the DAD/MWD. This is frontend control hardware and a data<br />
reduction processor system including dual port RAM for data transfer to<br />
main processor.<br />
Main Functions<br />
max. four EPROM main firmware on FIM board<br />
FIM board piggy back on AQB board<br />
lamp control hardware<br />
stepper motor driver hardware for shutter<br />
2 external contacts<br />
❏ 2 connectors on rear panel<br />
❏ 1 contact without supply (only contact closure) max. 30 V (fused with<br />
250 mA)<br />
❏ 1 contact with internal 24 V supply (fused with 250 mA)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 459
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Data Acquisition Board (AQB)<br />
Figure 162 Block diagram <strong>of</strong> AQB Board<br />
460 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Data Acquisition Board (AQB)<br />
Frontend Processor Area<br />
6809 running at 2 MHz<br />
A/D converter interface<br />
frontend firmware 512 byte<br />
8 Kilobyte dual port RAM including interrupt register<br />
Main Processor Area<br />
max. four EPROM main firmware on FIM board<br />
FIM board piggy back on AQB board<br />
lamp control hardware<br />
❏ lamp on/<strong>of</strong>f (anode voltage)<br />
❏ heater on/<strong>of</strong>f<br />
❏ lamp start (600 V ignition)<br />
❏ 2 lines for lamp current select status<br />
stepper motor driver hardware for light shutter<br />
❏ motor on/<strong>of</strong>f<br />
❏ 4 bit step pattern lines<br />
bus buffer for backplane bus connection<br />
2 external contacts<br />
Input / Output<br />
2 external contacts<br />
❏ 2 connectors on rear panel<br />
❏ 1 contact without supply (only contact closure) max. 30 V/250 mA<br />
❏ 1 contact with internal 24 V supply (max. 250 mA output with fuse)<br />
via motherboard<br />
❏ stepper motor lines to optical unit<br />
❏ lamp control to power supply<br />
❏ connection to ASC board<br />
❏ backplane bus<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 461
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Data Acquisition Board (AQB)<br />
Figure 163 Layout <strong>of</strong> AQB Board<br />
462 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Firmware Board (FIM)<br />
Firmware Board (FIM)<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 109 Part Numbers for FIM Board<br />
Figure 164 Layout <strong>of</strong> FIM Board<br />
Item Part Number also used for<br />
Firmware Board DAD/CE G1306-66524/-69524 G1600A CE<br />
Firmware Board MWD 01048-66504<br />
The FIM board is a piggy back board, placed on AQB board (’personality<br />
module’).<br />
The programmed FIM contains the firmware <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> DAD module.<br />
The board is designed for on board programming.<br />
The FIM contains up to four 128K x 8bit EPROM (U4 to U7).<br />
All inputs/outputs are pulled down for electrostatic discharge protection.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 463
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 110 Part Numbers for CMP Board<br />
Item Part Number also used for<br />
CMP Board 5061-3380/0<strong>1050</strong>-69580 G1600A CE<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> functions for the main processor are:<br />
display handling<br />
keyboard polling<br />
remote control input and output<br />
leak sensing<br />
option interfacing<br />
time programming<br />
method storage<br />
module configuration<br />
memory switching<br />
32 kilobyte RAM with battery back-up for parameter storage.<br />
Firmware is not part <strong>of</strong> this board, because parts <strong>of</strong> the main processor’s<br />
s<strong>of</strong>tware are module specific. The main processor firmware will be located<br />
on the ’personality module’ (AQB Board) or on an optional board.<br />
464 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
Figure 165 Block diagram CMP<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 465
Table 111<br />
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Common Main Processor Board (CMP)<br />
Remote Control<br />
The CMP board provides two remote connectors.<br />
Remote Signals<br />
Pin Signal Active Color<br />
1 Digital ground white<br />
2 Prepare run LOW brown<br />
3 Start LOW gray<br />
4 Shut down LOW blue<br />
5 Reserved pink<br />
6 Power ON HIGH yellow<br />
7 Ready HIGH red<br />
8 Stop LOW green<br />
9 Start request LOW black<br />
Remote Configuration<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> provides three remote configurations:<br />
HPsystem Start <strong>of</strong> automatic operation from any modules’ start key.<br />
Start request is outputted.<br />
GLOBAL Synchronized start <strong>of</strong> several modules for a single run.<br />
Start / Stop is outputted.<br />
LOCAL Single modules’ start. No pulses outputted.<br />
The signal level are defined as standard TTL levels<br />
(0 V is logic true, + 5 V is logic false).<br />
The remote lines can be input or output (wired or technique).<br />
Fan-out is 10<br />
Input Load 2 kOhm against + 5 V<br />
Outputs are open collector type<br />
466 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Communication Interface (CRB)<br />
Communication Interface (CRB)<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 112 Part Numbers for CRB Board<br />
Item Part Number also used for<br />
CRB Board 5062-2482 G1600A CE<br />
The communication interface board is necessary for the control by a<br />
Personal Computer and to connect printer or plotter devices. The<br />
communication interface board provides one GPIB and one RS232 interface.<br />
The CRB for the <strong>1050</strong> DAD has a 96 kilobyte run buffer for the data/spectrum<br />
operation with the Multiple Wavelength Detector. The interface is located in<br />
Slot #2 <strong>of</strong> the module.<br />
The board contains a baud rate generator. The baud rate is selectable up to<br />
19200 baud from the keyboard. The transmitter and receiver baud rate are<br />
independent adjustable.<br />
The implemented serial interface is a subset <strong>of</strong> the RS232 standard only. It<br />
contains at<br />
PIN 2 RxD receive data (data input)<br />
PIN 3 TxD transmit data (data output)<br />
PIN 4 GND (Ground)<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> modules are designed as DCE (data communication equipment)<br />
without hardware handshake.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 467
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Digital to Analog Conversion Board (DAC)<br />
Digital to Analog Conversion Board (DAC)<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 113 Part Numbers for DAC Board<br />
Item Part Number also used for<br />
DAC Board 01048-66502 G1600A CE<br />
The main functions <strong>of</strong> the DAC board are:<br />
conversion <strong>of</strong> digital data into analog signals compatible with external<br />
integrators;<br />
provide two independent analog outputs.<br />
The DAC board comprises two independent pulse-width modulated 16 bit<br />
D/A converters with noise
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Digital to Analog Conversion Board (DAC)<br />
Figure 166 Block diagram <strong>of</strong> DAC Board<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 469
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Digital to Analog Conversion Board (DAC)<br />
Address Decoder and Data Storage<br />
The digital signal prepared for conversion is sent from AQB through LUM<br />
data bus in 8 bit portions. The appropriate address is available on LUM<br />
address bus. This address is decoded by the address decoder and the data<br />
storage circuit is activated and the digital word is stored. The two channels<br />
are separated only through the appropriate address recognized by the<br />
address decoder.<br />
Timers<br />
Three 16 bit timers are available on the DAC. One is fixed as a divider<br />
(6.555 MHz/90 Hz) and provides the 90 Hz clock for the control logic. The<br />
other two timers work as Pulse width Modulator for channel 1 and 2. They<br />
are loaded with the digital word stored in the data storage and activated with<br />
a 90 Hz clock. Starting with the loaded word each counter will count<br />
downwards with the 6.555 MHz cycle.<br />
Pulse Width Modulator<br />
The pulses generated in the counter section are fed to diode switches that are<br />
responsible to switch the constant current source on or <strong>of</strong>f to the low pass<br />
filter section.<br />
Low Pass Filter<br />
All low pass filters should suppress the 90 Hz cycle. The cut<strong>of</strong>f frequency is<br />
100 dB. The second low pass filter is a<br />
variable low pass filter dependent on the rise time (0.1/0.3/1/3 s). The third<br />
low pass filter has a variable gain which allows a scale factor for the analog<br />
output voltage at 50 mV/AU or 0.5 V/AU.<br />
Rise time<br />
The rise time is s<strong>of</strong>tware selectable to 0.1 s, 0.3 s, 1 s, or 3 s. This rise time is<br />
varied in combination with the peak width setting. The default setting is 1 s.<br />
Refer to Operating Manual for more details.<br />
Power Supply<br />
The ±19 V from the Power Supply is used to generate ±15 V and + 10 V as a<br />
reference voltage for the constant current source.<br />
470 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Digital to Analog Conversion Board (DAC)<br />
Figure 167 Layout <strong>of</strong> DAC Board<br />
Board Diagnostics<br />
There are two possibilities to troubleshoot the DAC board:<br />
output voltage check, see User Manual<br />
D/A converter test, see “D/A Converter Test” on page 500<br />
Both <strong>of</strong> these tests can be done on both output channels.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 471
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Fluorescent Indicator Module (FIP)<br />
Fluorescent Indicator Module (FIP)<br />
Repair Level: Board or Fuse ICP1<br />
Table 114 Part Numbers for FIP Board<br />
Figure 168 Board Layout FIP<br />
Item Part Number<br />
FIP Board 5061-3376<br />
Fuse 1 A 2110-0099<br />
The FIP module is located behind the keyboard module <strong>of</strong> pump, autos<br />
ampler and multiple wavelength detector.<br />
The function <strong>of</strong> the FIP module is to provide an interface between a host<br />
system and the user. Messages can be displayed with up to 32 characters<br />
(2 lines x 16 characters/line). A matrix keyboard is scanned for numeric or<br />
special function input and status information is displayed through 4 LEDs.<br />
The characters are displayed in a 5 x 7 dot matrix.<br />
In case <strong>of</strong> a dark display, check the on board fuse ICP1 which is soldered in<br />
close to the connector P1/P2.<br />
472 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Motherboard (LUM)<br />
Motherboard (LUM)<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 115 Part Numbers for LUM Board<br />
Figure 169 Layout <strong>of</strong> Motherboard<br />
Item Part Number<br />
LUM Board 01048-66510<br />
The Motherboard contains all connectors for the boards and the assemblies<br />
in the front part, like fans, optical unit and keyboard.<br />
Figure 169 shows the location <strong>of</strong> all connectors.<br />
J1 - DPS J6 - Not used J10 - Shutter/Leak<br />
J2 - ASC J7 - CMP J11 - Lamp<br />
J3 - AQB J8 - FIP J12 - not used<br />
J4 - DAC J9 - PDA J13 - Fan (left)<br />
J5 - not used J14 - Fan (right)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 473
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Motherboard (LUM)<br />
Figure 170 Connection Table LUM (I)<br />
474 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Motherboard (LUM)<br />
Figure 171 Connection Table LUM (II)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 475
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Motherboard (LUM)<br />
Figure 172 Connection Table LUM (III)<br />
476 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
LPC Board<br />
LPC Board<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 116 Part Numbers for LUC/LPC Board<br />
Figure 173 LPC Board Assembly<br />
Item Part Number also used for<br />
LPC Board 79883-66509 G1600A CE<br />
The board routes the signals from the leak sensor and signals to the shutter<br />
assembly. Via J3 it is connected to J10 <strong>of</strong> the LUM board (Motherboard).<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 477
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A)<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A)<br />
Repair Level: Fuses and DPS-A<br />
Table 117 Part Numbers for LUC/LPC Board<br />
Item Part Number also used for<br />
DPS-A 5061-3375/0<strong>1050</strong>-69375 G1600A CE<br />
Fuse for 110 V operation 3 A 2110-0003<br />
Fuse for 220 V operation 2 A 2110-0002<br />
For detailed information refer to the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong>, Chapter<br />
Common Information.<br />
General Description<br />
The power supply is a primary switching regulated type. It consists <strong>of</strong> two<br />
parts. the Base Supply and the Lamp Supply. The Base Supply provides<br />
outputs <strong>of</strong> +5 V, ±19 V, +24 V and +36 V. In addition the Lamp Supply<br />
provides all circuits necessary for the operation <strong>of</strong> a deuterium lamp.<br />
Lamp Ignition<br />
The heater output made by a series regulator is in the pre-heating status 2.5 V<br />
always. After ignition the heater voltage is switched <strong>of</strong>f (DAD/MWD).<br />
Figure 174 Deuterium Lamp Ignition<br />
478 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A)<br />
Figure 175 Block Diagram DPS-A (Base Supply)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 479
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A)<br />
Figure 176 Block Diagram DPS-A (Lamp Supply I)<br />
480 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A)<br />
Figure 177 Block Diagram DPS-A (Lamp Supply II)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 481
DAD/MWD: Electronic Information<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A)<br />
482 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
21<br />
21 DAD/MWD: Diagnostic &<br />
Troubleshooting Information<br />
This chapter provides information on error<br />
messages and diagnostic features <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Diode Array and Multiple Wavelength Detectors
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic &<br />
Troubleshooting Information<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> DAD/MWD provides<br />
STATUS information during the normal operation (e.g. conditions errors);<br />
ERROR MESSAGES that identify the problem;<br />
DIAGNOSTIC features on special request to allow troubleshooting <strong>of</strong> the<br />
module.<br />
484 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
STATUS Information<br />
STATUS Information<br />
Status Modes<br />
Status Modes<br />
Status LEDs<br />
Warnings<br />
SYSTEM INIT initializing .....<br />
After turning on the module runs through an initialization.<br />
STANDBY <strong>1050</strong> STANDBY 01:A 0.00mAU<br />
All LEDs and the deuterium lamp are <strong>of</strong>f. Edit <strong>of</strong> all parameters is possible (if<br />
PARAMETER LOCK is <strong>of</strong>f).<br />
LAMP IGNITION LAMP ON ENTER<br />
LAMP IGNITION 01:A 0.00mAU<br />
During the ignition process the NOT READY LED is on.<br />
PRERUN PRERUN 01:A 0.00mAU<br />
The same as in STANDBY mode except that the deuterium lamp is on now.<br />
Transition to RUN only possibly by pressing START (LOCAL) or via<br />
REMOTE.<br />
RUN timeprogram starting<br />
is displayed for 2 seconds. Then actual display shows<br />
RUN 01:A 0.00mAU.<br />
The RUN LED is on and the timetable commands are executed. The<br />
deuterium lamp cannot be switched to <strong>of</strong>f.<br />
timeprogram stopped<br />
POSTRUN POSTRUN 01:A 0.00mAU<br />
The RUN LED is blinking. If post time has elapsed or STOP occurs the<br />
instrument switches to BALANCE mode (calibration) if auto calibration<br />
parameter is ON else to PRERUN mode.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 485
BALANCE balancing<br />
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
STATUS Information<br />
A calibration in performed and the NOT READY LED is on.<br />
SYSTEM TEST This mode is normally skipped and has to be called up through the TEST<br />
functions or during power on by pressing<br />
STATUS and LINE~ switch. Then ROM- RAM- and DISPLAY Test is<br />
performed. For details see “ROM/RAM/DISPLAY Tests” on page 507.<br />
Status LEDs<br />
ERROR LED ON This state indicates an error condition and requires an interaction <strong>of</strong> the user.<br />
A message will be written into the system logbook. The display will be<br />
overwritten with a messages:<br />
NOT READY LED ON This state indicates a NOT READY condition (action not yet finished<br />
see also mode description). A logbook entry is made. The following reasons<br />
may be reported on display for 2 seconds:<br />
lamp ignition in progress<br />
amp test in progress<br />
balancing<br />
LAMP LED ON Deuterium lamp on.<br />
RUN LED ON Instrument in RUN mode. If instrument is in POSTRUN mode the RUN LED<br />
is blinking.<br />
Warnings<br />
A warning is written into the logbook if a problem occurs which doesn’t<br />
cause the user to stop analysis. A message is written to the display for<br />
2 seconds. Possible warnings can be:<br />
lamp below intensity test limit;<br />
excessive leakage current <strong>of</strong> one <strong>of</strong> the photo diodes (non-linear);<br />
intensity too high (wrong calibration at gradient run);<br />
temporary memory overflow.<br />
486 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Error Messages<br />
Error Messages<br />
This section describes the troubleshooting <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> DAD/MWD according<br />
to the error messages. The error messages will help to locate and repair a<br />
failure. In case an error message appears the Error LED will be turned on and<br />
the message will be written into the system logbook.<br />
Selftest<br />
ROM<br />
RAM and display can be tested via the build in selftest. The selftest will be<br />
performed when STATUS will be pressed while the module is turned on at<br />
the LINE~ switch. In case <strong>of</strong> a failure one <strong>of</strong> the following messages appears.<br />
The complete test requires approximately two minutes.<br />
ROM test failed ( ROM test failed )<br />
The ROMs on the FIM board are tested. In case <strong>of</strong> a checksum error the ROM<br />
test fails. Replacement <strong>of</strong> the FIM board will probably fix the problem.<br />
RAM test failed ( RAM test failed )<br />
The RAM’s on the CMP board will be tested. In case <strong>of</strong> a failure the error<br />
message appears and the CMP has to be replaced.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 487
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Error Messages<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Error Messages<br />
The common messages are either event or error messages which may appear<br />
in all the <strong>1050</strong> series modules. The messages are identical or very similar in<br />
the various modules.<br />
E00: Power Fail E00 HH:MM DDMMM power fail ><br />
clock stopped set time&date<br />
E01: Leak Detected In<br />
Detector<br />
This message indicates that the instrument has either been disconnected<br />
from line source or a line power voltage drop occurred.<br />
E01 HH:MM DDMMM leak detected ><br />
leak detected > in detector<br />
The leak detection circuit is located on the CMP board and checks<br />
continuously for presence and leak conditions. If the sensor is missing<br />
(defect) or in leak condition the PTC is cooled down the error message<br />
appears. When the module is turned on the leak message is disabled for some<br />
time to allow the sensor to reach its working range. The deuterium lamp is<br />
switched OFF.<br />
Working condition <strong>of</strong> the PTC<br />
Normal: about 75°C 400...500 Ohm<br />
Error: below 55°C about 150 Ohm<br />
Actions:<br />
❏ Check connector <strong>of</strong> the sensor.<br />
❏ Check resistance <strong>of</strong> leak sensor.<br />
❏ Change leak sensor.<br />
❏ Change CMP board.<br />
❏ Change FIM board.<br />
488 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
E02: Error In Other<br />
Module<br />
E03: Error Method<br />
loaded<br />
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Common <strong>1050</strong> Error Messages<br />
E02 HH:MM DDMMM shut down ><br />
serious error in other module<br />
An external device pulled the shut down line down (pins 1 and 4 <strong>of</strong> REMOTE<br />
connector), for example when a leak is detected.<br />
E03 HH:MM DDMMM error method ><br />
error method has been loaded<br />
An error has come up in the DAD and this caused to load an error method (if<br />
specified) and turned <strong>of</strong>f the lamp.<br />
E04: Time Out E04 HH:MM DDMMM time out ><br />
lamp turned <strong>of</strong>f automatically<br />
E05: Turn On Lamp<br />
Automatically<br />
If the time after finishing the last run or a not ready condition exceed the<br />
value <strong>of</strong> set time-out time the deuterium lamp is turned <strong>of</strong>f automatically. A<br />
time out occurs (pin 1 and 7 <strong>of</strong> REMOTE connector).<br />
E05 HH:MM DDMMM lamp has been ><br />
turned on automatically<br />
If the lamp was programmed to be turned on automatically this message is<br />
displayed.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 489
E11/12: WL<br />
Calibration out <strong>of</strong><br />
range<br />
E13: Spectra buffer<br />
full<br />
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>1050</strong> DAD/WMD Error Messages<br />
<strong>1050</strong> DAD/WMD Error Messages<br />
The following error messages are <strong>1050</strong> DAD/MWD specific.<br />
E11 HH:MM DDMMM WLcalibration ><br />
WLcal factor more than +12<br />
E12 HH:MM DDMMM WLcalibration ><br />
WLcal factor more than -12<br />
This message occurs when the wavelength calibration test failed.<br />
Actions:<br />
❏ Check whether the cell is inserted properly.<br />
❏ Check for air bubbles in cell.<br />
❏ Perform WL-Calibration Test.<br />
E13 HH:MM DDMMM spectramem.full><br />
not all ttbl spectra stored<br />
Too many spectra were taken during time program.<br />
Actions:<br />
❏ Reduce number <strong>of</strong> spectra or time programmed spectra.<br />
E14: No lamp current E14 HH:MM DDMMM lamp failed ><br />
no lamp current lamp is <strong>of</strong>f<br />
Actions:<br />
❏ Check lamp.<br />
❏ Change lamp current.<br />
❏ Check connections.<br />
❏ Replace power supply.<br />
❏ Replace AQB board.<br />
490 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
E15: Lamp ignition<br />
failed<br />
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>1050</strong> DAD/WMD Error Messages<br />
E15 HH:MM DDMMM ignition failed><br />
lamp failed during ignition<br />
Actions:<br />
❏ Turn lamp on.<br />
❏ Check lamp connector.<br />
❏ Perform lamp test.<br />
❏ Change lamp.<br />
❏ Replace AQB.<br />
❏ Replace power supply.<br />
E16: Low intensity E16 HH:MM DDMMM intensity test><br />
low intensity make lamptest<br />
Actions:<br />
❏ Perform lamp test.<br />
❏ Change lamp.<br />
❏ Change flow cell.<br />
E17: Data overflow E17 HH:MM DDMMM data overflow ><br />
intensity too high<br />
Actions:<br />
❏ Check whether cell is inserted correctly.<br />
❏ Reduce lamp current.<br />
❏ Change lamp.<br />
E18: Data underflow E18 HH:MM DDMMM data underflow><br />
ASC data too low<br />
Actions:<br />
❏ Check whether cell is inserted correctly.<br />
❏ Increase lamp current.<br />
❏ Change lamp.<br />
❏ Change ASC, cable, AFE.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 491
E19: Lamp turned on<br />
automatically<br />
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>1050</strong> DAD/WMD Error Messages<br />
E19 HH:MM DDMMM lamp turned on><br />
lamp turned on automatically<br />
The lamp has been switched on per time program.<br />
492 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Diagnostic Features<br />
Diagnostic Features<br />
The instrument <strong>of</strong>fers several built-in test features. Some are limited to<br />
ChemStation operation (for details see descriptions <strong>of</strong> tests):<br />
intensity test<br />
holmium oxide test<br />
lamp intensity test<br />
ASC test<br />
D/A-Converter test<br />
electronic noise test<br />
close/open shutter<br />
check wavelength calibration<br />
RAM test<br />
ROM test<br />
Display test<br />
NOTE When using these test functions the <strong>1050</strong> DAD/MWD must not be in RUN<br />
MODE.<br />
Press BALANCE prior to perform the test.<br />
When test cell is mentioned, remove cell and insert 4 nm slit for <strong>Series</strong> II<br />
optical<br />
Entering the Test Functions<br />
You are entering the TEST FUNCTIONS by pressing STATUS followed by<br />
PREV (4x). TEST FUNCTIONS ENTER.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 493
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Measure Intensity Pr<strong>of</strong>ile<br />
Measure Intensity Pr<strong>of</strong>ile<br />
NOTE This function is available from local keyboard only!<br />
An intensity pr<strong>of</strong>ile <strong>of</strong> the optical unit is measured. No calibration is made<br />
before the measurement and the actual gain values are used. Perform this<br />
test after the flow cell is flushed or removed with 4 nm slit installed.<br />
MEASURE INTENSITYPROFILE<br />
Taking the Pr<strong>of</strong>ile<br />
After pressing ENTER the message scanning ... is displayed for a second<br />
and an intensity measurement between 190...600 nm is taken and stored like<br />
a spectrum. The wavelength and the count number at maximum are<br />
displayed max at max 17805cts at 234nm ; 0.00min.<br />
Plotting the Pr<strong>of</strong>ile (MWD only)<br />
❏ Press SPECTR and RIGHT to display<br />
PLOT 01 REF -- ;ints 0.00min.<br />
❏ You can change now the wavelength range (190...600 nm) and the output<br />
channel (out 1) if necessary.<br />
❏ Press ENTER.<br />
START INTEGR. AT SPEED=30 (enter)<br />
❏ Start the integrator with the PLOT key and the spectrum <strong>of</strong> the intensity<br />
pr<strong>of</strong>ile is plotted after pressing ENTER.<br />
❏ When the plot has finished max 17805cts at 234nm ; 0.00min is<br />
displayed.<br />
❏ Press ESC to return to beginning <strong>of</strong> line.<br />
494 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Measure Intensity Pr<strong>of</strong>ile<br />
Find Maximum <strong>of</strong> Spectrum (MWD only)<br />
❏ Press SPECTR, DOWN and RIGHT.<br />
MAX. 01 REF -- ;ints 0.00min<br />
❏ You can change now the wavelength range (190...600 nm) and the output<br />
channel if necessary.<br />
❏ The maximum is shown after pressing ENTER.<br />
max 17805cts at 234nm ; 0.00min<br />
Figure 178 Intensity Pr<strong>of</strong>ile with Test Cell<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 495
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Lamp Intensity Test<br />
Lamp Intensity Test<br />
NOTE This function is available from local keyboard and from ChemStation!<br />
An integral measurement <strong>of</strong> the lamp intensity is made in the range <strong>of</strong> 210 to<br />
350 nm and the average counts are displayed (test is performed with<br />
minimum gain = 0).<br />
Now you can retrieve the plots or the maximum information. The plotted<br />
curve should be within ±3% deviation from the intensity pr<strong>of</strong>ile. Otherwise<br />
the gain switching on the ASC board may not work properly.<br />
NOTE The characteristics vary from instrument to instrument depending on optics<br />
lamp and array characteristics.<br />
Figure 179 DAD/MWD Test: Lamp Intensity<br />
496 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Lamp Intensity Test<br />
On local keyboard<br />
If performed locally the display shows:<br />
LAMP INTENSITY TEST ; 0<br />
ENTER<br />
LAMP INTENSITY TEST ; 14296<br />
On ChemStation<br />
If performed on the ChemStation this test is part <strong>of</strong> the DAD Test, see Figure<br />
179 on page 496. The pr<strong>of</strong>ile (190 to 600 nm) is stored on the ChemStation.<br />
❏ Select Instrument, More DAD, DAD Tests...<br />
❏ Press Measure and the instrument will perform the Lamp Intensity Test<br />
and the Holmium Test automatically.<br />
❏ Press Save to store both pr<strong>of</strong>iles.<br />
❏ To print the pr<strong>of</strong>ile refer to How to print the DAD Pr<strong>of</strong>iles, page 5-29.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 497
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Measure Holmium Spectrum<br />
Measure Holmium Spectrum<br />
NOTE This function is available from ChemStation only!<br />
The shutter is moved to holmium filter position and a spectrum is measured<br />
and plotted (full scale set to 4 AU).<br />
Perform a BALANCE before entering this function.<br />
The scan (190 to 600 nm) is stored.<br />
NOTE The characteristics vary from instrument to instrument depending on optics<br />
lamp and array characteristics.<br />
Figure 180 DAD/MWD Test: Holmium Spectrum<br />
NOTE At least one point should be >3000 mAU in the range <strong>of</strong> 190...300 nm.<br />
498 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Measure Holmium Spectrum<br />
On ChemStation<br />
On the ChemStation this test is part <strong>of</strong> the DAD Test, see Figure 180. The<br />
pr<strong>of</strong>ile (190 to 600 nm) is stored on the ChemStation.<br />
❏ Select Instrument, More DAD, DAD Tests...<br />
❏ Press Measure and the instrument will perform the Lamp Intensity Test<br />
and the Holmium Test automatically.<br />
❏ Press Save to store both pr<strong>of</strong>iles.<br />
❏ To print the pr<strong>of</strong>ile refer to How to print the DAD Pr<strong>of</strong>iles, page 5-29.<br />
On local keyboard<br />
MAX. 01 REF -- ;holm 0.00min<br />
ENTER<br />
max 3912mAU at 228nm ; 0.00min<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 499
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
D/A Converter Test<br />
D/A Converter Test<br />
NOTE This function is available from local keyboard only and is used to test the DAC<br />
board (DAD optional)!<br />
D/A CONVERTER TEST OFF<br />
D/A CONVERTER TEST ON<br />
Figure 181 D/A Converter Test<br />
The DAC board is tested by generation <strong>of</strong> a test pattern as DAC input. The<br />
output voltages (out 1 and out 2) should show a constant value<br />
corresponding to the ZERO OFFSET value. On top <strong>of</strong> this constant voltage is<br />
a switched voltage with a duration <strong>of</strong> 12 seconds and a height <strong>of</strong> 15 µV, see<br />
Figure 181.<br />
If the D/A converter and the plotting device are in specification then the noise<br />
is depending on the peak width (5 µV are equal to 1 x 10 -5 AU).<br />
500 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
D/A Converter Test<br />
When the function is switched on start the plotter (ATTN -5, ZERO=50) and<br />
zero it.<br />
Table 118 Limits <strong>of</strong> D/A Converter Test<br />
Peak widths Noise (pp) / Step height<br />
< 0.01 / > 0.01 / > 0.02 1.3<br />
> 0.05 / > 0.1 / > 0.2 0.5<br />
> 0.4 / > 0.8 0.3<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 501
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Electronic Noise Test<br />
Electronic Noise Test<br />
NOTE This function is available from local keyboard only!<br />
ELECTRONIC NOISE TEST OFF<br />
ELECTRONIC NOISE TEST ON<br />
Figure 182 Electronic Noise Test<br />
The optical unit and its electronic is tested with the possibility <strong>of</strong> changing<br />
the parameters wavelength bandwidth peak width (before entering this<br />
function).<br />
The shutter is closed and the gain is fixed to minimum=0.<br />
You can leave this function ONLY by switching to OFF.<br />
With this test non-logarithmic intensity is measured. Result <strong>of</strong> test must not<br />
exceed a given limit. If test fails the ASC DAC or optical unit may be<br />
defective. If DAC test is OK then ASC or optical unit may be the problem.<br />
502 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Electronic Noise Test<br />
Table 119 Limits <strong>of</strong> Electronic Noise Test<br />
Peak width Rise time µVpp<br />
Limit<br />
3390/2/3 Limit 3394/96 ATTN<br />
< 0.01 0.1 s 90 13.5 mm 27 mm - 1<br />
> 0.01 0.2 s 90 13.5 mm 27 mm - 1<br />
> 0.03 0.3 s 50 15.0 mm 30 mm - 2<br />
> 0.05 1.0 s 30 18.0 mm 36 mm - 3<br />
> 0.10 1.3 s 30 18.0 mm 36 mm - 3<br />
> 0.20 2.6 s 20 12.0 mm 24 mm - 3<br />
> 0.40 5.2 s 20 12.0 mm 24 mm - 3<br />
> 0.85 10.0 s 20 12.0 mm 24 mm - 3<br />
Measurement conditions<br />
Any sample wavelength, bandwidth 4 nm, reference is switched <strong>of</strong>f<br />
automatically, 1 V full scale.<br />
NOISE 1: Test as described.<br />
Table 120 Noise Test Results<br />
NOISE 2: Test as described under NOISE 1 but with PDA/LUM cable<br />
disconnected<br />
Result Explanation<br />
System OK If NOISE 1 > NOISE 2 and in specification.<br />
Electrical Problem If NOISE 1 > limit and NOISE 2 >= limit.<br />
Optical Problem If NOISE 1 > limit and NOISE 2 < NOISE 1<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 503
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Check <strong>of</strong> Wavelength Calibration<br />
Check <strong>of</strong> Wavelength Calibration<br />
NOTE This function is available from local keyboard and from ChemStation.<br />
The maximum absorbance <strong>of</strong> the Holmium filter is measured at 361 nm and<br />
compared with a stored value. The difference in wavelength is displayed.<br />
On local keyboard<br />
CHECK WL CALIBRATION<br />
IT SHOULD BE 2 AND IT IS 0<br />
The value <strong>of</strong> 2 corresponds to 1 nm.<br />
To change/correct the setting use function SET WL CALIB.<br />
On ChemStation<br />
❏ Select Instrument, More DAD, Wavelength Calibration.<br />
Figure 183 Wavelength Calibration<br />
❏ The wavelength calibration is started automatically (if lamp is on) see<br />
Figure 183.<br />
❏ If the value <strong>of</strong> Current and Should be is not equal then use Adjust to<br />
correct.<br />
❏ Press OK to store the new values and to add them to the Calibration<br />
history.<br />
❏ To print the pr<strong>of</strong>iles refer to How to print the DAD Pr<strong>of</strong>iles page 5-29.<br />
504 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
ASC Test<br />
ASC Test<br />
NOTE This function is available from local keyboard only!<br />
ASC TEST WITH GAIN 0 ; 0<br />
ASC TEST WITH GAIN 0 ; 3871<br />
ASC TEST WITH GAIN 1 ; 4462<br />
ASC TEST WITH GAIN 2 ; 4654<br />
The ASC board is tested by closing the shutter and measuring the dark<br />
current <strong>of</strong> the photo diodes with three possible gains (0, 1, 2). Start test with<br />
minimum gain first. High values may reflect in a non-linearity. (Default is<br />
minimum gain = 0). The value that is shown is the average dark current<br />
counts <strong>of</strong> a all photo diodes.<br />
A value between 2500...5500 is the limit measured with gain 0. The value in<br />
gain 1 and 2 may have a difference <strong>of</strong> ±1500 compared to the value from<br />
gain 0.<br />
NOTE High values may reflect in a non-linearity.<br />
The scan (190 to 600 nm) is stored.<br />
You can change now the wavelength range (190...600 nm) and the output<br />
channel if necessary.<br />
Now you can retrieve the plots or the maximum information.<br />
MAX. 01 REF -- ;tasc 0.00min<br />
ENTER<br />
max 3885cts at 475nm ; 0.00min<br />
NOTE If the difference between average and maximum is >100 then the array has a<br />
problem at this particular wavelength. This might be no problem if the<br />
customer is using a different wavelength.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 505
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Shutter Position<br />
Shutter Position<br />
NOTE This function is available from local keyboard only!<br />
SHUTTERPOSITION OPEN<br />
SHUTTERPOSITION HOLMIUM/CLOSED<br />
The shutter can be positioned manually to OPEN, HOLMIUM and CLOSED<br />
(dark current).<br />
Leave this function by switching to OPEN.<br />
506 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
ROM/RAM/DISPLAY Tests<br />
ROM/RAM/DISPLAY Tests<br />
The following functions are also performed during power on when both<br />
STATUS and the LINE~ switch are pressed.<br />
ROM TEST (enter)<br />
The ROM checksum is compared with a stored value and the firmware<br />
revision is displayed.<br />
ROM TEST <br />
( ROM test failed )<br />
Action: Replace the FIM board.<br />
RAM TEST (enter)<br />
The RAM is tested.<br />
RAM TEST <br />
( RAM test failed )<br />
Action: Replace CMP board.<br />
DISPLAY TEST (enter)<br />
The 32 characters <strong>of</strong> the display and the LEDs are tested. This test is the<br />
same as performed during power on.<br />
DISPLAY TEST <br />
Action: If the display shows nothing, check first the soldered in on-board<br />
fuse, see “Fluorescent Indicator Module (FIP)” on page 472.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 507
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Using the Built-in Test Chromatogram<br />
Using the Built-in Test Chromatogram<br />
NOTE This function is available from ChemStation only!<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> DAD has a built-in Test Chromatogram that can be used to check<br />
the signal path from the detector to the ChemStation and the data analysis.<br />
See Figure 184 and Figure 185 on page 509. The chromatogram is repeated<br />
continuously until a stop is performed per stop time or manually.<br />
To use the function proceed as follows:<br />
❏ Set peak width to >0.05 minutes and run time to 4.5 minutes.<br />
For a peak width <strong>of</strong>
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Using the Built-in Test Chromatogram<br />
Figure 184 Test Chromatogram: Peak width
Figure 186 DAD Test<br />
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Using the Built-in Test Chromatogram<br />
How to print the DAD Pr<strong>of</strong>iles<br />
Figure 186 shows the ChemStation screen when having performed the DAD<br />
Test.<br />
Using Paintbrush<br />
❏ Press ALT and Print Screen keys to make screen capture.<br />
❏ Leave the DAD Test and enter Paintbrush from the Program Manager.<br />
❏ Select View and click Zoom Out.<br />
❏ Select Edit and Paste (2x).<br />
❏ Select View and click Zoom In.<br />
❏ Select File, Print and [[OK]].<br />
510 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Using the Built-in Test Chromatogram<br />
Using the Data Editor<br />
❏ Select View, Data Analyses.<br />
❏ Select View, Review DAD Test...<br />
❏ Select from the table the spectrum <strong>of</strong> interest see Figure 187 or Figure 188.<br />
❏ Press [[Show Selected Spectrum]] and select the window. At this point you<br />
may zoom a certain part <strong>of</strong> the pr<strong>of</strong>ile.<br />
❏ Select File, Print, Selected Window for print.<br />
Figure 187 DAD Test: Lamp Intensity<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 511
Figure 188 DAD Test: Holmium<br />
DAD/MWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Using the Built-in Test Chromatogram<br />
512 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
22<br />
22 DAD/MWD: Maintenance<br />
Information<br />
This chapter provides provide procedures for<br />
service and maintenance <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Diode Array<br />
and Multiple Wavelength Detectors
DAD/MWD: Maintenance<br />
Information<br />
This chapter describes the following procedures that have to be performed<br />
during servicing and maintenance <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> DAD.<br />
removing the optical unit;<br />
flow cell maintenance;<br />
cleaning the quartz window;<br />
replacing fans;<br />
replacing shutter assembly or LUC/LPC board;<br />
replacing the leak sensor;<br />
upgrade to new optical unit;<br />
performance verification.<br />
Tools Needed<br />
❏ Screw driver flat 6 mm<br />
❏ Hex wrench 6 mm<br />
❏ Hex wrench 4 mm and length <strong>of</strong> 200 mm<br />
❏ Pozidriv small<br />
❏ cleaning tissue<br />
514 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Warnings and Notes<br />
WARNING Dangerous voltages capable <strong>of</strong> causing serious personal injury are<br />
present in this instrument. Use extreme caution when handling testing<br />
and adjusting.<br />
NOTE DO NOT<br />
open the screws <strong>of</strong> the large cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. This may result in<br />
misalignments <strong>of</strong> the optical path.<br />
exchange lamp housing. They are matched to the optical and replacement may<br />
result in a misalignment <strong>of</strong> the optical path.<br />
return defective exchange optical without information about the problem (use<br />
attached info-note).<br />
return flooded optical without information about the last used solvents (this<br />
is needed for recycling).<br />
NOTE The lamp housing may be hot when you have to work at the optical unit.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 515
Figure 189 Optical Unit<br />
1 - deuterium lamp<br />
2 - union holder<br />
3 - waste tube<br />
4 - bolts<br />
5 - connector shutter<br />
6 - connector PDA<br />
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Removing the Optical Unit<br />
Removing the Optical Unit<br />
❏ Turn OFF the instrument and unplug the power.<br />
❏ Remove top cover.<br />
❏ Disconnect flow cell at union holder [2], remove cell from optical unit and<br />
place it in front <strong>of</strong> the heat exchanger.<br />
❏ Disconnect PDA [6] and Shutter [5] cable at optical unit and the Display<br />
cable at the motherboard (LUM).<br />
❏ Disconnect lamp connector [1].<br />
❏ Disconnect the waste tube [3].<br />
❏ Loosen the three bolts [4] that hold the optical unit (4 mm hex key<br />
> 100 mm long) and take out the optical unit.<br />
516 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Flow Cell Maintenance<br />
Flow Cell Maintenance<br />
Flushing Procedure<br />
To cleaning the flow cell (by using a glass syringe!) perform as described<br />
below:<br />
6 Flush with iso-Propanol.<br />
7 Flush with bi-distilled water.<br />
8 Flush with nitric acid : water (5 : 95).<br />
9 Flush with bi-distilled water.<br />
10 Flush with iso-Propanol<br />
CAUTION This concentration <strong>of</strong> nitric acid is dangerous and proper attention to safety<br />
should be given. Also the nitric acid flushing procedure is not a certain cure<br />
for a dirty cell. It is to be used as a last attempt to salvage the cell before cell<br />
replacement. Note that the cell is essentially a consumable item.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 517
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Flow Cell Maintenance<br />
Replacements on Standard Flow Cells<br />
Replacing the Gaskets<br />
❏ Take out the flow cell.<br />
❏ Take a flat screwdriver (6 mm width) or a 6 mm hex wrench and turn out<br />
the flow cell window assembly [1].<br />
❏ In case <strong>of</strong> an leakage replace the gasket [2].<br />
❏ Fix the flow cell window assembly.<br />
Figure 190 Disassembled Flow Cell<br />
Replacing Window Assembly Parts<br />
❏ Take out the flow cell window assembly (Figure 190, item 1).<br />
❏ Take out the quartz window carefully by pressing it out <strong>of</strong> the window<br />
holder.<br />
NOTE If the washers have fallen out <strong>of</strong> the assembly they have to be inserted in the<br />
correct order. Otherwise the window may break or will be leaky see.<br />
❏ Clean or replace the window.<br />
❏ Fix the window assembly.<br />
518 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Flow Cell Maintenance<br />
1 Flow cell window assembly. 2 Window assembly schematic.<br />
1 - window screw<br />
2 - spring washers<br />
3 - compression washers<br />
4 - window holder<br />
5 - quartz window<br />
6 - gasket<br />
3 Assembling <strong>of</strong> the washers. 4 Assembling <strong>of</strong> Teflon ring and window<br />
assembly.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 519
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Flow Cell Maintenance<br />
5 Replacing flow cell window in window<br />
assembly.<br />
Replacements on High Pressure Flow Cells<br />
For cleaning the flow cell windows you will need<br />
❏ a 4 mm hexagonal key (supplied with flow cell)<br />
❏ a 20 mm open-ended wrench<br />
❏ tweezers and<br />
❏ a toothpick.<br />
Figure 191 Cross-section <strong>of</strong> Window Assembly<br />
Windows<br />
Conical Disk Springs (see<br />
below)<br />
Detail <strong>of</strong> Conical Disk<br />
Springs Showing<br />
Orientation<br />
Washer<br />
Washer<br />
Window Screw<br />
520 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Flow Cell Maintenance<br />
Stage 1: Disassembling the Window Assembly<br />
❏ Take flow cell out <strong>of</strong> optical unit.<br />
❏ Unscrew window assembly (see Figure 191) using a 4 mm hexagonal<br />
key--use a 20 mm open-ended wrench to hold the flow cell.<br />
❏ Carefully take out window using a toothpick or a 4 mm hexagonal key.<br />
❏ Take out the conical disk springs and discard them.<br />
❏ Clean window in ultrasonic bath filled with methanol or ethanol.<br />
Stage 2: Assembling the Window Assembly<br />
❏ Put conical disk springs in window screw see Figure 191. Always use new<br />
conical disk springs.<br />
❏ Press window and seal rings together using tweezers.<br />
❏ Put window and seal rings in window screw. Keep window facing upwards<br />
to prevent it falling out.<br />
❏ Screw window assembly into flow cell until finger tight.<br />
❏ Tighten window assembly using a 4 mm hexagonal key, use a 20 mm<br />
open-ended wrench to hold flow cell.<br />
❏ Check flow cell for leaks.<br />
If you have an <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> pumping system use flow test method<br />
described in Installing and Maintaining Your Pumping System.<br />
Connect inlet capillary <strong>of</strong> flow cell to pump outlet. Connect blank nut to<br />
outlet capillary <strong>of</strong> flow cell.<br />
If flow cell leaks tighten window screw and check again for leaks.<br />
❏ Put flow cell in optical unit.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 521
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Lamp House Window Maintenance<br />
Lamp House Window Maintenance<br />
This procedure can to be performed in case the intensity gets low and lamp<br />
exchange does not increase the light trough put.<br />
Between the lamp housing and the achromat lens system a quartz window is<br />
located to protect the achromat against contaminations.<br />
Removing the Quartz Window<br />
Refer to Figure 192 on page 523.<br />
❏ Take optical unit out <strong>of</strong> the instrument.<br />
❏ Remove the lamp housing (2 screws).<br />
❏ Remove the securing ring (1) with a pliers.<br />
❏ Take out the spring (2) the aperture (3) and the window (4).<br />
❏ Clean or replace the window.<br />
NOTE Use ethanol or methanol and lens paper to clean the window. DO NOT touch<br />
or scratch the surface <strong>of</strong> the window. This will result in loss <strong>of</strong> intensity.<br />
❏ Replace all parts in correct order. Watch for correct direction <strong>of</strong> the<br />
aperture!<br />
522 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Lamp House Window Maintenance<br />
Figure 192 Removing Lamp House Parts<br />
1 Removing <strong>of</strong> lamp housing. 2 Removing the quartz window.<br />
1 = Securing Ring, 2 = Spring, 3 = Aperture, 4 = Window<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 523
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacing the Achromat<br />
Replacing the Achromat<br />
To replace the achromat assembly proceed as follows:<br />
❏ Switch <strong>of</strong>f the power from the instrument.<br />
❏ Take the optical unit out <strong>of</strong> the instrument.<br />
❏ Remove the cover plate above the flow cell/shutter compartment.<br />
CAUTION Do not touch the AFE connector board!<br />
❏ Unscrew the achromat assembly (hex key) and remove it.<br />
❏ Insert the new achromat assembly completely and fix it.<br />
❏ Replace the optical cover and reconnect the cables.<br />
❏ Reinstall the optical unit and turn on the power.<br />
❏ Perform a WL CALIBRATION TEST and correct the ‘is’ and ‘should be’<br />
values if required (should be within ±3 steps from the original value from<br />
step 1). If not within the range, rotate the achromat and repeat this step.<br />
Figure 193 Location <strong>of</strong> Achromat Assembly<br />
Setscrew<br />
Achromat Assembly<br />
AFE Connector<br />
524 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacing Fans<br />
Replacing Fans<br />
Figure 194 Removing Fans<br />
Fan cover not shown<br />
❏ Remove top cover and disconnect ALL cables from Motherboard.<br />
❏ Take out the foam part which contains the fans completely.<br />
NOTE Take care that no connector on the Motherboard breaks when removing or<br />
inserting the foam part.<br />
❏ Note the position <strong>of</strong> the fan and replace it (arrow on the fan).<br />
❏ Replace foam part carefully into the module.<br />
❏ Connect ALL cables at the Motherboard and replace top cover.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 525
Figure 195 Shutter Assembly<br />
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacement <strong>of</strong> Shutter or LPC Board<br />
Replacement <strong>of</strong> Shutter or LPC Board<br />
In case the shutter assembly or the LPC board shows a malfunction it can be<br />
replaced.<br />
❏ Remove the main cover to have access to optical unit.<br />
❏ Disconnect flow cell and remove it.<br />
❏ Remove slit assembly.<br />
❏ Remove the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical compartment (5 screws).<br />
❏ Disconnect LPC board from shutter assembly.<br />
❏ Replace shutter assembly or LPC board.<br />
❏ Replace all parts in correct order.<br />
526 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacement <strong>of</strong> Leak Sensor<br />
Figure 196 Leak Sensor Assembly<br />
Replacement <strong>of</strong> Leak Sensor<br />
In case the leak sensor assembly shows a malfunction it can be replaced.<br />
❏ Remove the main cover to have access to optical unit.<br />
❏ Disconnect flow cell and remove it.<br />
❏ Remove slit assembly.<br />
❏ Remove the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical compartment (5 screws).<br />
❏ Disconnect leak sensor from LPC board using a pliers.<br />
❏ Replace leak sensor.<br />
❏ Replace all parts in correct order.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 527
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Upgrade to from 79854A MWD to G1306A DAD<br />
Upgrade to from 79854A MWD to G1306A<br />
DAD<br />
When upgrading 79854A MWD to DAD capabilities the keyboard and the<br />
firmware board has to be exchanged. For parts list refer to “Upgrade Parts<br />
MWD to DAD” on page 546.<br />
CAUTION Electronic boards are sensitive for electrostatic discharge. Use ESD<br />
protection when replacing electronic boards.<br />
❏ Remove the AQB board.<br />
❏ Update the firmware board (FIM) to DAD version.<br />
❏ Install the AQB board.<br />
❏ Disconnect cable from keyboard electronics (FIP) to LUM (motherboard).<br />
❏ Remove keyboard module from instrument.<br />
❏ Remove metal cover at the rear.<br />
❏ Remove FIP from MWD keyboard module.<br />
❏ Install FIP into DAD keyboard module.<br />
❏ Install keyboard module in the instrument.<br />
❏ Reconnect cables.<br />
528 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Upgrade MWD with <strong>Series</strong> II Optical<br />
Upgrade MWD with <strong>Series</strong> II Optical<br />
NOTE For required parts refer to “Upgrade Parts MWD to <strong>Series</strong> II Optical” on<br />
page 547.<br />
1 If an AQB board 01048-66543 (latest version) is installed skip step 2 and 3.<br />
2 Check the AQB board for presence <strong>of</strong> 220 Ohm resistor that is located<br />
between fuse F22 and the rear connector J1 (SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-016). If not exist,<br />
replace.<br />
3 Q1C should be cut out only if the resistor on the AQB, mentioned in<br />
SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-016, has a value <strong>of</strong> 220 ohms and the firmware has revision 3.<br />
Otherwise the current will be too low to move the shutter correctly<br />
(SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-021A).<br />
4 Install new FIM board (3.10) if required.<br />
5 Install series II optical unit.<br />
6 Install series II flow cell.<br />
7 Reconnect capillaries.<br />
8 Check for leaks.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 529
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Verifying the Performance<br />
Verifying the Performance<br />
Specifications<br />
The noise and drift specifications <strong>of</strong> your detector are 4 x 10 -5 AU and<br />
2x10 -3 AU/h respectively at 254 nm, 4 nm bandwidth, 1 second response<br />
time and 1 ml/min flow <strong>of</strong> water after warm-up.<br />
What You Need<br />
To check these specifications you need:<br />
A pump that can deliver bi-distilled water at a rate <strong>of</strong> up to 1 ml/min against<br />
a back-pressure <strong>of</strong> about 200 bar;<br />
A column: we recommend a 100 x 4.6 mm i.d. 5 µm Hypersil ODS column.<br />
A recording device that can accept the output signal from your detector<br />
and that has attenuation set to about 35 cm/mV.<br />
Preparations<br />
❏ Prime the pump and ensure there are no air bubbles in the system.<br />
❏ Thoroughly degas about 300 ml <strong>of</strong> bi-distilled water.<br />
❏ Set pump to deliver bi-distilled water at a flow rate <strong>of</strong> 1 ml/min.<br />
❏ Set the attenuation <strong>of</strong> the recording device to about 35 cm/mV.<br />
❏ Set run time to 6.0 minutes.<br />
❏ Turn ON detector and allow intensity <strong>of</strong> emitted radiation from radiation<br />
source to stabilize.<br />
❏ Set detection wavelength to 254 nm and bandwidth to 4 nm. Set reference<br />
wavelength to 450 nm and bandwidth to 100 nm.<br />
❏ Set peak width to >0.05 minutes.<br />
❏ Set output signal so that 1 AU is equivalent to 0.5V.<br />
❏ Start a run, press [[START]] [[ENTER]].<br />
530 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Verifying the Performance<br />
Figure 197 Example <strong>of</strong> Noise Plot<br />
The baseline noise should not exceed 20 µV (4 x 10 -5 AU) equivalent to 12 mm<br />
at attenuation - 3 on a3390/2/3 integrator and equivalent to 24 mm at<br />
attenuation - 3 on a 3394/6 integrator.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 531
DAD/MWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Verifying the Performance<br />
Scaling Factors<br />
The table below shows the scaling factors for the 339XA family <strong>of</strong><br />
integrators. The 3390A, 3392A and 3393A have a full scale deflection <strong>of</strong><br />
75 mm. The 3394A and the 3396A have a full scale deflection <strong>of</strong> 150 mm, they<br />
also have an attenuation range between -8 and 36.<br />
Table 121 Scaling Factors on 339X integrators<br />
ATTN mV full scale mAU full scale<br />
-3 0.125 0.25<br />
-2 0.25 0.5<br />
-1 0.5 1<br />
0 1 2<br />
1 2 4<br />
2 4 8<br />
3 8 16<br />
4 16 32<br />
5 32 64<br />
6 64 128<br />
7 128 256<br />
8 256 512<br />
9 512 1024<br />
10 1024 2048<br />
532 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
23<br />
23 DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
This chapter provides information on parts <strong>of</strong> the<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Diode Array and Multiple Wavelength<br />
Detectors
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
This chapter gives diagrams for parts identification and the complete parts<br />
listings respectively.<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Heat Exchanger and Flow Cell<br />
Flow Cell Kits<br />
Upgrade Parts MWD to DAD<br />
Accessory Kit<br />
534 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Table 122 Overall Diagram<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
1 Fan Base (set <strong>of</strong> two) 01048-47701 24 Keyboard Module (DAD) 01048-60202<br />
2 Fan DC Axial 01048-68500 Keyboard Module (MWD) 01048-60201<br />
Fan Cover 3160-0544 25 FIP Board 5061-3376<br />
# 3 Mainframe 26 Cable FIP/LUM 5061-3400<br />
4 Screw M4 20 mm lg 0515-0175 27 Optical Unit see page 538<br />
5 Screw M3.5 8 mm lg 0515-0889 28 Cable PDA/SHUTTER-LUM 5062-2410<br />
6 Foot Rear 0403-0427 29 Heat Exchanger/Flow Cell see page 540<br />
7 Foot Front 5041-2161 30 Cable Lamp/LUM 01048-61603<br />
8 Cover Hinge 5041-2147 # 31 Cover Power Supply 01048-04104<br />
9 PWR Switch Actuator 5041-2162 32 Power Supply Assembly 0<strong>1050</strong>-69375<br />
10 PWR Switch Spring 1460-1510 33 ASC Board Assembly 01048-66501<br />
11 PWR Switch Push Button G1600-47400 34 AQB Board Assembly 01048-69543<br />
#12 Frame + Cover Keyboard (42) 35 FIM Board Assembly (DAD) G1306-66524<br />
13 Filter Part <strong>of</strong> 16 FIM Board Assembly (MWD) 01048-66504<br />
14 Ring Filter Part <strong>of</strong> 16 Screw M3 6 mm lg 0515-0886<br />
15 Logo Base/Name Plate 5041-2144/n.a. 36 DAC Board Assembly 01048-66502<br />
16 Front Panel (incl. 13, 14) 01048-60301 37 Plate Cover (33 mm width) 5001-3721<br />
17 Power Switch Base 5041-2145 38 CMP Board Assembly 0<strong>1050</strong>-69580<br />
18 Leak Interface TOP 5062-8551 39 Top Cover 5001-3724<br />
19 Leak Interface BOTTOM Part <strong>of</strong> 18 # 40 Card Cage Assembly 01048-84501<br />
20 Leak Interface Adapter Part <strong>of</strong> 18 41 LUM Mother Board Assembly 01048-66510<br />
21 Tube Flexible 6.5 mm i.d. (5 m) 5062-2463 43 Communication Interface Board CRB 5062-2482<br />
22 Tube Flexible 0.7 mm i.d. (5 m) 5062-2462 # These items are part <strong>of</strong> Sheet Metal Kit 01048-68701<br />
23 Bolt 5041-2164<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 535
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Figure 198 Overall Diagram Part 1 (<strong>Series</strong> II)<br />
536 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Figure 199 Overall Diagram Part 2 (<strong>Series</strong> II)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 537
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Table 123 Optical Unit<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
# Optical Unit - New 01048-60024 # 15 Flow Cell Assembly STD see page 541<br />
# Optical Unit - Exchange 01048-69024 Flow Cell Assembly HP-STD see page 542<br />
# 1 Shutter Assembly 79883-61901 Flow Cell Assembly HP-Micro see page 543<br />
2 Screw M3 6mm lg 0515-0886 Cell Clamp Assembly 79883-85001<br />
# 3 LPC Board Assembly 79883-66509 Screw M2.5 6mm lg 0515-1056<br />
4 Screw M2.5 6mm lg 0515-0894 # 16 Capillary IN 0.17 79883-87303<br />
5 Bolt 5021-1853 # 17 Capillary OUT 0.17 79883-87304<br />
6 RFI Strip 01048-09101 18 Union 0100-0900<br />
7 Damper 5041-2165 19 Clamp Union 79883-00502<br />
8 Deuterium Lamp Assembly 79883-60002 # 20 Screw 0515-0922<br />
9 Screw M3 10mm lg 0515-0757 21 Heat Exchanger Assembly 01048-87305<br />
10 Union Holder 01048-02321 22 Screw M3 8mm lg 0515-0897<br />
11 Screw M3 8mm lg 0515-1430 23 Tubing Flexible 80mm lg 0890-0581<br />
12 Set Screw M3 6mm lg 0515-0031 24 Elbow Fitting (Plastic) 0100-1428<br />
13 Union 0100-0900 25 Leak Sensor Assembly 5061-3356<br />
# 14 Slit Assembly 2 nm 79883-80002 26 Nut M3 0535-0004<br />
Slit Assembly 4 nm 79883-80004 27 Screw M3 8mm lg 0515-1430<br />
Slit Assembly 8 nm 79883-80008 # 28 Cover Illum Compartment 79883-04101<br />
# 29 Achromat Assembly 79883-60000<br />
# These parts are not interchangeable with the previous optical unit design<br />
(<strong>Series</strong> I).<br />
538 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Figure 200 Optical Unit<br />
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
29<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 539
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
Heat Exchanger and Flow Cell<br />
Heat Exchanger and Flow Cell<br />
Table 124 Heat Exchanger and Flow Cell<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
1 Heat Exchanger 01048-87305 5 Capillary OUT see flow cell<br />
2 Screw M3 8mm lg 0515-0897 6 Union 0100-0900<br />
3 Flow Cell STD see page 541 7 Clamp Union 79883-00502<br />
Flow Cell High Pressure STD see page 542 8 Screw M2.5 8mm lg 0515-0922<br />
Flow Cell High Pressure Micro see page 543 Capillary Column/MWD (60 cm lg 01048-87302<br />
4 Capillary IN see flow cell<br />
0.17 mm i.d.)<br />
Figure 201 Heat Exchanger and Flow Cell<br />
Since 1992 with two<br />
welded ZDV<br />
540 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
Flow Cell Parts (STD-SST)<br />
Table 125 Standard Flow Cell<br />
Flow Cell Parts (STD-SST)<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
Flow cell SST 6 mm, 8 µl 79883-60051 5 Compression Washer 79883-28801<br />
Flow cell SST 10 mm, 13 µl 79883-60052 6 Washer (pack <strong>of</strong> 10) 5062-8553<br />
Cell Repair Kits see page 544 7 Window Screw 79883-22402<br />
Capillary IN 0.17, 100 mm lg 79883-87303 8 Cell Clamp Assembly 79883-85001<br />
Capillary OUT 0.17, 150 mm lg 79883-87304 Screw M2.5 x 4 mm lg (cell body) 0515-1056<br />
1 Window Assembly<br />
consists <strong>of</strong> 3, 4, 5, 6, 7<br />
Figure 202 Flow Cell Parts (STD-SST)<br />
Clamp Union 79883-00502<br />
Screw M2.5 x 8 mm lg (clamp) 0515-0922<br />
2 Cell Gasket see page 544 Wrench 4 mm for fittings 8710-1534<br />
3 Window Quartz 1000-0488 Hex Key 6 mm for cell screw 8710-2023<br />
4 Window Holder 79883-22301<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 541
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
High Pressure Flow Cell Parts (HP-STD-SST)<br />
High Pressure Flow Cell Parts<br />
(HP-STD-SST)<br />
Table 126 High Pressure Flow Cell<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
High Pressure Flow Cell 79883-60054 5 Washer (pack <strong>of</strong> 10) 5062-8553<br />
Cell Repair Kits see page 544 6 Window Screw SST 79883-22404<br />
1 Window Assembly<br />
consists <strong>of</strong> 2, 3, 4, 5, 6<br />
Figure 203 High Pressure Flow Cell (HP-STD-SST)<br />
Cell IN 50 .17, 100 mm lg 79883-87303<br />
Cell OUT 50 .17, 150 mm lg 79883-87304<br />
2 Seal ring HP 79883-27101 Hex Key 6 mm for cell screw 8710-2023<br />
3 Window Quartz HP 1000-0953 Wrench 4 mm for fittings 8710-1534<br />
4 Compression Washer HP 79883-28802<br />
542 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
High Pressure Flow Cell Parts (HP-Micro-SST)<br />
High Pressure Flow Cell Parts<br />
(HP-Micro-SST)<br />
Table 127 High Pressure Flow Cell<br />
Item Description Part Number Item Description Part Number<br />
Micro Flow Cell 1.7 µl 79883-60055 5 Washer (pack <strong>of</strong> 10) 5062-8553<br />
Cell Repair Kits see page 544 6 Window Screw SST 79883-22404<br />
1 Window Assembly<br />
consists <strong>of</strong> 2, 3, 4, 5, 6<br />
Figure 204 High Pressure Flow Cell (HP-Micro-SST))<br />
Cell IN 50 .17, 100 mm lg 79883-87303<br />
Cell IN .12, 100 mm lg 79883-87305<br />
2 Seal ring HP 79883-27101 Cell OUT 50 .12, 370 mm lg 79883-87306<br />
3 Window Quartz 1000-0953 Hex Key 6 mm for cell screw 8710-2023<br />
4 Compression Washers HP 79883-28802 Wrench 4 mm for fittings 8710-1534<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 543
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
Cell Repair Kits<br />
Cell Repair Kits<br />
Table 128 Cell Repair Kits<br />
Description contains (Qty) Part Number<br />
Cell Repair Kit 79883-68701<br />
Seal Kit 79883-68702<br />
Cell Screw Kit 79883-68703<br />
Seal Kit Cell Gasket (12) 79883-68702<br />
Cell Screw Kit 79883-68703<br />
Window Quartz (2) 1000-0488<br />
Compression Washers (2) 79883-28801<br />
Window Holder (2) 79883-22301<br />
Window Screw (1) 79883-22402<br />
Spring Washers (10) 5062-8553<br />
Cell Kit High Pressure 79883-68700<br />
Window Quartz HP (1) 1000-0953<br />
Spring Washers (10) 5062-8553<br />
Seal ring HP (2) 79883-27101<br />
544 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
Lamp Housing<br />
Lamp Housing<br />
Table 129 Lamp Housing<br />
Figure 205 Lamp Housing<br />
# Description Part Number<br />
1 Retaining Ring 0510-1219<br />
2 Spring Compression 1460-2254<br />
3 Aperture 79883-24601<br />
4 Window 79880-28111<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 545
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
Upgrade Parts MWD to DAD<br />
Upgrade Parts MWD to DAD<br />
The following parts are required to upgrade a <strong>1050</strong> MWD (79854A) to <strong>1050</strong><br />
DAD (G1306A).<br />
Table 130 <strong>1050</strong> Upgrade Parts MWD to DAD<br />
Description Part Number<br />
Firmware Board FIM G1306-66524<br />
Keyboard (plastics) 01048-60202<br />
Installation Note see “Upgrade to from 79854A MWD<br />
to G1306A DAD” on page 528<br />
546 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
Upgrade Parts MWD to <strong>Series</strong> II Optical<br />
Upgrade Parts MWD to <strong>Series</strong> II Optical<br />
The following parts are required to upgrade a <strong>1050</strong> MWD (79854A) to <strong>1050</strong><br />
MWD <strong>Series</strong> II optical.<br />
Table 131 Upgrade Parts MWD to <strong>Series</strong> II Optical<br />
Description Part Number<br />
Optical Unit 79883-60024<br />
Firmware Board FIM 01048-66504 *<br />
Slit assemblies as required see “Optical Unit” on page 538<br />
Flow cell as required see Flow Cells<br />
Resistor for AQB board modification<br />
220 Ohm 5% 2W<br />
0698-3628 ** or<br />
AQB board (latest version) 01048-69543<br />
*<br />
Only required, if firmware revision is < 3.1.<br />
** Only required if AQB board does not have the resistor that is located between fuse F22 and the rear<br />
connector J1 (SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-016).<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 547
Table 132 Accessories<br />
DAD/MWD: Parts Information<br />
List <strong>of</strong> Accessories<br />
List <strong>of</strong> Accessories<br />
The following list shows parts that were part <strong>of</strong> the STD Accessory Kit.<br />
Please order by item if required.<br />
Description Part Number<br />
Hex Key for flow cell 8710-2023<br />
Capillary Column/MWD 0.17 mm i.d. 800 mm lg 01048-87302<br />
Crimp Terminals 0362-0321<br />
Screw M3 6 mm lg 0515-0886<br />
Tube Flexible 0.7 mm i.d. (re-order 5 m) 5062-2462<br />
CONT CONN UTIL F 1251-3911<br />
CONN UTIL 2PIN F 1251-4782<br />
Fuse 2 A 250 V NTD 2110-0002<br />
Fuse 3 A 2110-0003<br />
Fuse 250 V 0.25 A NB 2110-0004<br />
Ferrule 5041-2121<br />
Gripper 5041-2122<br />
Male 5041-2123<br />
Buffer Disc 5041-2124<br />
Wrench 5/16-1/4 8710-0510<br />
Screwdriver POZI 1 PT 3 8710-0899<br />
Hex Key 3 mm 8710-0911<br />
Hex Key 6 mm for cell screw 8710-2023<br />
548 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
24<br />
24 DAD/MWD: Additional<br />
Information<br />
This chapter provides additional information<br />
about the <strong>1050</strong> Diode Array and Multiple<br />
Wavelength Detectors
DAD/MWD: Additional<br />
Information<br />
This section gives the following informations:<br />
Hardware changes<br />
Firmware changes<br />
Known Problems<br />
550 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Additional Information<br />
Product History<br />
Product History<br />
The introduction <strong>of</strong> the 79854A Multiple Wavelength Detector was in 1988.<br />
The introduction <strong>of</strong> the G1306A Diode Array Detector was in 1993.<br />
The following hardware and firmware changes have been implemented.<br />
Hardware Changes<br />
Table 133 Hardware Changes<br />
Date Serial Number Change<br />
1990 3016G.... Introduction <strong>of</strong> <strong>Series</strong> II optical<br />
Jul 1992 Introduction <strong>of</strong> new cell screw design for<br />
<strong>Series</strong> II flow cells. 6 mm hexagonal key<br />
instead <strong>of</strong> screw with slit.<br />
Nov 1992 Introduction <strong>of</strong> High Pressure Cell with 13 µl<br />
and 1.7 µl for 400 bar operation (for <strong>Series</strong> II).<br />
Oct 1993 3343G00938 New AQB board, same for 79854A MWD,<br />
G1306A DAD and G1600A CE.<br />
Apr 1994 Introduction <strong>of</strong> Fan Cover and new part<br />
number for fans<br />
Apr 1994 3414G00321 New Firmware 1.10 (see “Firmware Changes”<br />
on page 552).<br />
May 1994 3423G../3423A... Introduction <strong>of</strong> n-MOS optical units.<br />
Jul 1994 Change on ASC board (delay time <strong>of</strong><br />
amplifier), revision D-3444.<br />
Dec 1995 DAD New Firmware 1.20 (see “Firmware Changes”<br />
on page 552).<br />
May 1997 DAD New Firmware 1.30 (see “Firmware Changes”<br />
on page 552).<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 551
DAD/MWD: Additional Information<br />
Firmware Changes<br />
Firmware Changes<br />
Table 134 DAD Firmware Revisions<br />
Revision Major Changes Comments<br />
1.00 First <strong>of</strong>ficial release for G1306A<br />
1.10 Instrument checks for lamp overflow<br />
before WL calibration and returns an<br />
error message (RE3001) if lamp<br />
overflow occurs.<br />
1.20 added fraction collection for G1600A<br />
(CE)<br />
1.30 for use with new ChemStation<br />
S<strong>of</strong>tware<br />
Table 135 MWD Firmware Revisions<br />
Revision Major Changes Comments<br />
Essential for optical used in Capillary<br />
Electrophoresis instruments.<br />
FIM board same in G1306A and<br />
G1600A (CE)<br />
same in G1306A and G1600A (CE)<br />
same in G1306A and G1600A (CE)<br />
1.00 No GPIB communication First <strong>of</strong>ficial release for 79854A<br />
3.00 GPIB communication for <strong>HPLC</strong><br />
ChemStation.<br />
Showed some GPIB communication<br />
problems. Should be replaced<br />
with revision 3.1 (01048-66504).<br />
3.10 GPIB communication problems solved Replaced version 3.00 (01048-66504).<br />
552 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
DAD/MWD: Additional Information<br />
Known Problems<br />
Known Problems<br />
Panic Errors<br />
Intermittent PANIC errors are mostly generated by spikes (disturbances) on<br />
the bus lines. A dynamic bus termination has been added to the FIM board to<br />
suppress the spikes and to reduce the possibility <strong>of</strong> this failure mode.<br />
All FIM boards with revision C and higher do have the dynamic bus<br />
termination installed (RC-network instead <strong>of</strong> R-network).<br />
In case <strong>of</strong> intermittent PANIC errors replace FIM boards (revision A or B)<br />
with the current version.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 553
DAD/MWD: Additional Information<br />
Known Problems<br />
554 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
In This Book<br />
This manual contains technical<br />
information about the Agilent <strong>1050</strong><br />
liquid chromatographs.<br />
This manual is available as electronic<br />
version (Adobe Acrobat Reader file)<br />
only.
<strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong><br />
<strong>Modules</strong><br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> -<br />
Variable Wavelength<br />
Detector (79853C)
© Copyright Agilent<br />
Technologies 2001<br />
All rights reserved.<br />
Reproduction, adaption,<br />
or translation without<br />
prior written permission<br />
is prohibited, except as<br />
allowed under the<br />
copyright laws.<br />
Part No. NONE<br />
11/2001<br />
Printed in Germany<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
Hewlett-Packard-Strasse 8<br />
76337 Waldbronn<br />
Germany<br />
Warranty<br />
The information<br />
contained in this<br />
document is subject to<br />
change without notice.<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
makes no warranty <strong>of</strong><br />
any kind with regard to<br />
this material,<br />
including, but not<br />
limited to, the implied<br />
warranties or<br />
merchantability and<br />
fitness for a particular<br />
purpose.<br />
Agilent Technologies<br />
shall not be liable for<br />
errors contained herein<br />
or for incidental or<br />
consequential damages<br />
in connection with the<br />
furnishing, performance,<br />
or use <strong>of</strong> this material.<br />
IMPORTANT NOTE<br />
This version <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong><br />
service manual includes<br />
all sections from the<br />
0<strong>1050</strong>-90102 edition 4<br />
(1995).<br />
The series I opticals<br />
information (79854A<br />
MWD) and the 79853A<br />
VWD information has<br />
been removed (products<br />
went out <strong>of</strong> support<br />
during 2000).<br />
Part numbers have been<br />
updated as <strong>of</strong> 11/2001.<br />
Contact your local<br />
Agilent support <strong>of</strong>fice in<br />
case <strong>of</strong> part number<br />
issues or upgrades.<br />
The latest version <strong>of</strong> this<br />
manual is available as<br />
Adobe Acrobat Reader<br />
(PDF) version only and<br />
can be downloaded from<br />
the Agilent Technolgies<br />
web page<br />
www.agilent.com.
25<br />
25 VWD: General Information<br />
This chapter provides general information about<br />
the <strong>1050</strong> Variable Wavelength Detectors
VWD: General Information<br />
This chapter gives general information on<br />
about this detector<br />
repair policy<br />
specifications<br />
560 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: General Information<br />
About the Detector<br />
About the Detector<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> Variable Wavelength Detector (VWD) is a detector <strong>of</strong> the modular<br />
type liquid chromatograph <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong>. This is a standalone<br />
grating/photodiode type general purpose detector. The performance and<br />
features match the requirements <strong>of</strong> the routine analysis and QC/QA analysis.<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> VWD is a standard size detector <strong>of</strong> <strong>1050</strong> modular type LC series and<br />
can be build up with other LC modules, such as pump and automatic sampler.<br />
Since it is standalone type, it can be also used as an ordinary LC detector. It<br />
has a functional keyboard and 16-character fluorescent display which<br />
provides you easy operation.<br />
Versions vs. Support Periods (EOS)<br />
79853A<br />
The 79853A VWD was shipped between May 1988 and January 1992. The<br />
support with parts ended November 1, 2000.<br />
79853C<br />
The 79853C VWD replaced the model 79853A VWD in January 1992. The<br />
end <strong>of</strong> support (EOS) will be August 1, 2006 with all <strong>1050</strong> series <strong>HPLC</strong><br />
modules.<br />
The 79853C VWD got a redesigned optical unit (“D” enhanced optical, see<br />
“VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information” on page 705) that replaced the<br />
original “C” optical unit in June 1995. The end <strong>of</strong> support (EOS) for the “C”<br />
optical unit parts will be August 1, 2006 with all <strong>1050</strong> series <strong>HPLC</strong> modules.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 561
VWD: General Information<br />
Repair Policy<br />
Repair Policy<br />
The <strong>1050</strong> VWD is designed that you can access all components easily. You can<br />
recalibrate wavelength using control functions. Customers are able to<br />
maintain certain parts <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> VWD see Operator’s <strong>Handbook</strong>.<br />
For details on repair policy refer to “Repair Policy” on page 38 in chapter<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Common Information.<br />
562 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: General Information<br />
Specifications<br />
Specifications<br />
Table 136 Specifications <strong>of</strong> 79853C VWD<br />
Detection Type Double beam photometer.<br />
Noise < 1.5 x 10 -5 AU peak-to-peak at 254 nm, flowing<br />
water at 1 ml/min, 1 second response time (10-90%),<br />
standard flow cell.<br />
Drift < 5 x 10 -4 AU/hour at 254 nm after warm-up.<br />
Wavelength Range 190 - 600 nm, settable in 1 nm increments.<br />
Wavelength Accuracy ±2 nm.<br />
Wavelength Reproducibility ±0.3 nm.<br />
Bandwidth 6.5 nm.<br />
Linear Absorbance Range Better than 1% up to 1.2 AU using acetone at 265 nm.<br />
Response Time 0.25, 1 or 4 seconds (10-90%); user-selectable.<br />
Spectra Storage <strong>of</strong> 1 spectrum during run; scan rate<br />
10 nm/sec; range from 190 to 600 nm, selectable.<br />
Post-run plotting speed from 1 to 50 nm/sec<br />
selectable; plotting <strong>of</strong> background-corrected<br />
spectrum.<br />
Light Source Deuterium lamp from 1090/40/50 DAD.<br />
Flow Cells Standard 14 µl volume, 8 mm pathlength cell with<br />
40 bar (588 psi) pressure maximum. Optional micro,<br />
preparative, high-pressure cells are available.<br />
Display Single line, 16 character fluorescent display with real<br />
time display <strong>of</strong> operating parameters and/or<br />
absorbance.<br />
Control Integrated keyboard with function keys; parameter<br />
editing during run possible; keyboard lock; optional<br />
control by computer or 3396 <strong>Series</strong> II integrator.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 563
VWD: General Information<br />
Specifications<br />
Table 136 Specifications <strong>of</strong> 79853C VWD<br />
Parameters Wavelength, output range, response time, zero,<br />
<strong>of</strong>fset, balance, spectrum acquisition.<br />
Diagnostic Aids Wavelength calibration check with Holmium oxide<br />
filter.<br />
Time-programs Time-programmable wavelength and output range;<br />
storage <strong>of</strong> up to 5 time-programs.<br />
Analog Output One output user-configurable as recorder or<br />
integrator. For recorder: 100 mV or 1 V output range<br />
from 0.001 to 4 AU, user-selectable; for integrator:<br />
100 mV/2 AU full scale or 1 V/2 AU full scale,<br />
user-selectable.<br />
Communications START (input/output), STOP (input/output), READY<br />
(output), SHUTDOWN (output) for synchronization<br />
with other LC modules.<br />
Safety Aids Extensive diagnostics, error detection and display via<br />
front-panel LED’s. Leak detection, safe leak handling,<br />
leak output signal for shutdown pumping system. Low<br />
voltages in major maintenance areas.<br />
Environment Temperature range: 5 to 55°C<br />
Humidity: < 95% (non-condensing)<br />
Power Requirements Line voltage: 100-120 or 220-240 VAC ±10%<br />
Line frequency: 48-66 Hz<br />
Power consumption: 150 VA max.<br />
Dimensions Height: 133 mm ( 5.2 inch)<br />
Width: 325 mm (12.8 inch)<br />
Depth: 545 mm (21.5 inch)<br />
Weight: 14 kg ( 31 lb)<br />
564 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
26<br />
26 VWD: Hardware Information<br />
This chapter provides hardware information<br />
about the <strong>1050</strong> Variable Wavelength Detectors
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Overview<br />
NOTE The information in this chapter is based on the original optical unit (version<br />
“C”). In June 1995 this optical was replaced by the enhanced version “D” to<br />
overcome baseline stability problems in unstable environments.<br />
For details on this “D” version refer to section Enhanced Optical Unit<br />
Information “VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information” on page 705.<br />
Figure 206 on page 567 shows the block diagrams <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> VWD 79853C.<br />
The main components are:<br />
Table 137 Main Components Overview<br />
Component Purpose<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A) provides all voltages within the instruments<br />
Detector Controller Board<br />
(DCB)<br />
controls power supply, grating stepper motor,<br />
cut<strong>of</strong>f filter, keyboard, display and GPIB<br />
interface. It processes the signals coming<br />
from the pre-amplifier boards (sample and<br />
reference), the information from the grating<br />
and filter position sensor, leak sensor, remote<br />
control lines and the GPIB interface.<br />
Optical Unit contains all optical parts<br />
Keyboard/Display entry and display <strong>of</strong> parameter<br />
GPIB Interface communication with external controllers via<br />
GPIB<br />
566 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Overview<br />
Figure 206 Block Diagram <strong>of</strong> VWD<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 567
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical System Overview<br />
Optical System Overview<br />
Figure 207 Light Path <strong>of</strong> Detector<br />
Figure 207 shows the optical diagram <strong>of</strong> the 79853C VWD. The radiation from<br />
the deuterium lamp is focused on a spherical mirror (M1). The light beam<br />
passes then a plane mirror (M2) the cut<strong>of</strong>f filter, the entrance slit, a spherical<br />
mirror (M3), the grating, again a spherical mirror (M4), a beam splitter and<br />
the flow cell to the sample diode. The beam through the flow cell is absorbed<br />
depending on the solutions in the cell, where UV absorption takes place. The<br />
intensity is converted to an electrical signal by means <strong>of</strong> the sample<br />
photodiode. Part <strong>of</strong> the light is directed to the reference photodiode by the<br />
beam splitter to obtain reference signal for compensation <strong>of</strong> intensity<br />
fluctuation <strong>of</strong> the light source. A slit in front <strong>of</strong> the reference photodiode<br />
focusses the light. Wavelength selection is made by rotating the grating,<br />
which is driven directly by a stepper motor. This configuration allows fast<br />
change <strong>of</strong> the wavelength. The cut<strong>of</strong>f filter is moved into the lightpath above<br />
370 nm to reduce higher order light.<br />
568 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Leak Interface Assembly<br />
Figure 208 Leak Interface<br />
Leak Interface Assembly<br />
To route waste from a module standing above the <strong>1050</strong> VWD to a module<br />
below a leak interface can be installed at the detector. It is part <strong>of</strong> the<br />
accessory kit.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 569
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Leak Sensor Assembly<br />
Leak Sensor Assembly<br />
A drain is located at the bottom <strong>of</strong> the cell compartment and can be led to the<br />
waste container or the <strong>1050</strong> waste handling system (the VWD has to stand on<br />
top <strong>of</strong> another module when the leak interface is not used).<br />
A leak sensor is located behind the front panel assembly (Figure 209).<br />
Solvent would cool the leak sensor (self heating thermistor). The resulting<br />
change in resistance, measured by comparators on the Detector Controller<br />
Board (DCB), would generate an error message and switch the deuterium<br />
lamp OFF.<br />
NOTE In the <strong>1050</strong> System remote mode the leak message will turn <strong>of</strong>f the pump.<br />
Figure 209 Leak Sensor Assembly<br />
570 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Fan Assemblies<br />
Fan Assemblies<br />
The instrument is equipped with two fans.<br />
On the 79853C VWD, the fans are <strong>of</strong> different type:<br />
HIGH type this fan is located close to the lamp housing and runs<br />
with a higher speed<br />
LOW type this fan is located at the rear under the GPIB interface<br />
and runs with a lower speed<br />
The fans are connected to +24 VDC on the DCB Board.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 571
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Optical Unit<br />
NOTE The information in this chapter is based on the original optical unit (version<br />
“C”). In June 1995 this optical was replaced by the enhanced version “D” to<br />
overcome baseline stability problems in unstable environments.<br />
For details on this “D” version refer to section Enhanced Optical Unit<br />
Information “VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information” on page 705.<br />
The Optical Unit houses all parts, from the deuterium lamp to the photodiode<br />
pre-amplifiers.<br />
NOTE The repair level is component.<br />
Figure 210 Optical Unit<br />
The optical unit is also available as assembly.<br />
572 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Flow Cells<br />
Figure 211 STD Flow Cell<br />
There are several flow cells available as stainless steel or as titanium version,<br />
see Table 138 on page 574. The flow cell (Figure 211) can be exchanged<br />
easily. No adjustments are necessary. After disassembling <strong>of</strong> the flow cell,<br />
gaskets and windows can be replaced (refer to section “Flow Cell<br />
Maintenance” on page 655).<br />
There are several kits set up with replacement parts like gaskets and<br />
windows, see “Standard Flow Cell “C” (SST/Ti)” on page 693 and the<br />
following pages.<br />
NOTE At the outlet <strong>of</strong> the flow cell a defined peek capillary (from the accessories<br />
must be connected to build up a certain back pressure (noise reduction). See<br />
“Standard Flow Cell “C” (SST/Ti)” on page 693 and the following pages for<br />
parts.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 573
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Table 138 Flow Cell Data<br />
STD<br />
(SST)<br />
UHP<br />
(SST)<br />
MICRO<br />
(SST)<br />
NOTE The gaskets, windows and rings are not compatible with the high pressure<br />
Cell (79853-60009 - OBSOLETE) that has been replaced by the ultra high<br />
pressure Cellflow cell (79853-60013). See “Ultra High Pressure Flow Cell<br />
(SST)” on page 697 for details.<br />
STD<br />
(TI)<br />
PREP<br />
(TI)<br />
Maximum Pressure 40 400 40 40 40 bar<br />
Pathlength 8 8 5 8 VAR mm<br />
Volume 14 14 1 14 VAR µl<br />
Inlet i.d. 0.25 0.25 0.10 0.25 0.80 mm<br />
Inlet length 555 555 555 555 67 mm<br />
Outlet i.d. 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.80 mm<br />
Outlet length 67 67 67 67 100 mm<br />
Outer diameter 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 inch<br />
Used materials for SST flow cells: SST, quartz and PTFE or Polyimide HP cell<br />
Used materials for TI flow cells: TI, quartz and PTFE<br />
STD Standard Flow Cell<br />
HP High Pressure Flow Cell (replaced by UHP early 1993)<br />
UHP Ultra High-Pressure Flow Cell (replaces HP early<br />
1993), see details on “Ultra High-Pressure Flow Cell”<br />
on page 575.<br />
PREP Variable Preparative Flow Cell with volume <strong>of</strong> 0.9, 1.8,<br />
4.4 or 8.8 µl depending on which gasket is used.<br />
MICRO Semi Micro Flow Cell<br />
574 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Table 139 Correction factors for 79853C flow cells<br />
Flow cell type Cell volume Part number<br />
Ultra High-Pressure Flow Cell<br />
Typical applications <strong>of</strong> the high-pressure flow cells are:<br />
Hyphenated systems (LC-MS)<br />
Supercritical Fluid Chromatography (SFC)<br />
Multidetector systems<br />
Narrow-bore column applications<br />
The main difference between the standard and high-pressure flow cells is the<br />
design <strong>of</strong> the window assemblies. The high-pressure flow cells have different<br />
windows, seal ring and gaskets, see Figure 212. The seal rings support and<br />
hold the window and at the same time form the high-pressure seal.<br />
NOTE The gaskets, windows and rings are not compatible with the high pressure<br />
Cell (79853-60009 - OBSOLETE) that has been replaced by the ultra high<br />
pressure Cellflow cell (79853-60013). See “Ultra High Pressure Flow Cell<br />
(SST)” on page 697 for details.<br />
The following materials are in contact with solvents: Stainless steel<br />
(AISI 316), Quartz, Kapton ® polyimide (Kapton is a registered trademark <strong>of</strong><br />
DuPont).<br />
Recommended pH range: 2.3 to 9.5<br />
Path length<br />
(nominal)<br />
Path length<br />
(actual)<br />
Correction<br />
factor<br />
Standard flow cell 14 µl 79853-60000 8 mm 8.00 ± 0.19 mm 8/8.05<br />
Standard flow cell TI 14 µl 79853-60011 8 mm 8.00 ± 0.19 mm 8/8.00<br />
Micro flow cell 1 µl 79853-60010 5 mm 5.00 ± 0.19 mm 5/5.00<br />
Ultra High pressure flow cell 14 µl 79853-60013 8 mm 8.00 ± 0.19 mm 8/8.00<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 575
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Figure 212 Exploded Diagram <strong>of</strong> High-Pressure Flow Cell<br />
Deuterium Lamp<br />
On the 79853C VWD, the deuterium lamp (Figure 213) is the high intensity<br />
lamp (79883-60002), which is same as in the 1040/90/50 series Diode Array<br />
Detectors.<br />
The reduction <strong>of</strong> energy emission <strong>of</strong> the lamp (Figure 214 on page 577) is<br />
time and wavelength dependent and is significantly higher within the first<br />
days and for wavelengths in the ultra violet range compared to the visible<br />
range (change in transmission <strong>of</strong> lamp glass).<br />
Usually, the response maximum <strong>of</strong> the lamp is near 230 nm, but can be<br />
shifted to a higher wavelength for an aged lamp. It has no relevance for<br />
intensity degradation at other wavelengths.<br />
The deuterium lamp filament is heated only during the ignition phase. The<br />
deuterium lamp can be exchanged easily. The lamp needs no adjustments.<br />
576 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Figure 213 Deuterium Lamp<br />
Figure 214 Intensity Degradation <strong>of</strong> Lamp (79883-60002)<br />
Measured wavelength is 230 nm<br />
initial intensity about 20% higer than 79880-60002<br />
decrease in intensity is less with use<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 577
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
NOTE The lamp should be replaced only if the following two criterias are both<br />
fulfilled:<br />
Baseline Noise (with test cell) has increased significantly.<br />
Amount <strong>of</strong> counts <strong>of</strong> the lamp (with test cell) has decreased to less than 50%<br />
<strong>of</strong> the count record <strong>of</strong> this same lamp when newly installed).<br />
The decision to replace the lamp due to criterium 2 alone is not relevant,<br />
because the signal/noise may be still within instrument specifications.<br />
578 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Photodiodes Assemblies<br />
Two photodiode assemblies (Figure 215) are installed in the optical unit. The<br />
sample diode assembly is located at the right side <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. The<br />
reference diode assembly is located in the front <strong>of</strong> the optical unit.<br />
NOTE Neither, the diodes nor the pre-amplifier boards are interchangeable.<br />
NOTE Refer to “Replacing Pre-amplifiers or Photodiodes” on page 667 for cleaning.<br />
Figure 215 Photodiode Assemblies<br />
sample diode reference diode<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 579
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Filter Assembly<br />
On the 79853C VWD (Figure 216), the Filter Assembly has a three filters [1]<br />
installed and is processor controlled. It can move into four positions:<br />
A photo sensor [3] determines the correct position.<br />
NOTE Refer to “Replacing Filter Assembly Parts” on page 670 for cleaning.<br />
Figure 216 Filter Assembly<br />
OPEN nothing in lightpath at wavelength < 370 nm<br />
CUTOFF cut <strong>of</strong>f filter in lightpath at wavelength > 370 nm<br />
DARK 0 order calibration filter to reduce the light throughput to the<br />
photodiode during grating calibration at 0 order light<br />
HOLMIUM holmium filter for grating motor alignment<br />
580 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Figure 217 Grating Asembly<br />
Grating Assembly and Motor<br />
The Grating has 1200 lines/mm and is directly rotated by the Grating Drive<br />
Stepper Motor, depending on the wavelength entry. The whole range<br />
(190...600 nm) is equal to 1238 steps (15.5°). The step angle <strong>of</strong> the stepper<br />
motor rotation is 3.75° and is reduced to 1/300 by a gear mounted directly to<br />
the motor shaft. The stepper motor is controlled and driven by the Detector<br />
Controller Board (DCB). The stepper motor reference position is determined<br />
by a plate fitted on the motor shaft interrupting a beam <strong>of</strong> a photo sensor.<br />
The wavelength calibration <strong>of</strong> the grating is done at the 0 order light position<br />
and at at 656 nm, which is the emission line <strong>of</strong> the deuterium lamp.<br />
If the motor assembly has to be exchanged it is necessary to do a<br />
compensation <strong>of</strong> motor tolerances. Refer to “Replacing Grating Assembly<br />
Parts” on page 668.<br />
NOTE The grating is coated with magnesium fluoride. The grating surface should not<br />
be touched or cleaned (see also “Replacing Grating Assembly Parts” on<br />
page 668). This will destroy the surface and reduce the light reflection.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 581
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Mirrors<br />
The instrument contains four mirrors (M1, M2, M3, M4). Three <strong>of</strong> them are<br />
spherical type, one plane. On M2, M3 and M4 the beam height is adjustable.<br />
Mirror M3 and M4 are identical.<br />
NOTE The mirrors are coated with magnesium fluoride. They should not be touched<br />
or cleaned (see also “Replacing Mirrors, Beamsplitter and Slits” on<br />
page 670). This will destroy the surface and reduce the light reflection.<br />
Slit Assemblies<br />
The instrument has two slit assemblies. The first slit is located at the light<br />
entry into the main optical compartment and focused the light on mirror M3.<br />
The second slit is in front <strong>of</strong> the reference diode.<br />
Beam Splitter<br />
The beam splitter splits the light beam. One part goes directly to the sample<br />
diode. The reference diode gets the other part. The height <strong>of</strong> the light beam is<br />
adjustable.<br />
Refer to “Replacing Mirrors, Beamsplitter and Slits” on page 670 for<br />
cleaning.<br />
582 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Enhanced Optical Unit (“D”)<br />
Enhanced Optical Unit (“D”)<br />
In June 1995 this original optical unit was replaced by the enhanced version<br />
“D” to overcome baseline stability problems in unstable environments.<br />
For details on this “D” version refer to section Enhanced Optical Unit<br />
Information “VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information” on page 705.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 583
VWD: Hardware Information<br />
Enhanced Optical Unit (“D”)<br />
584 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
27<br />
27 VWD: Electronic Information<br />
This chapter provides electronic information<br />
about the <strong>1050</strong> Variable Wavelength Detectors
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
This chapter gives information about the electronic <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Variable<br />
Wavelength Detector:<br />
Overview<br />
Interconnection Diagram<br />
Detector Controller Board (DCB)<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A)<br />
Keyboard/-electronics<br />
Pre-amplifier Boards<br />
Power Supply Connection Board (PSC)<br />
GPIB Communication Interface<br />
586 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Location <strong>of</strong> Electronic Assemblies<br />
Table 140 Electronic Assemblies<br />
Location <strong>of</strong> Electronic Assemblies<br />
In the <strong>1050</strong> VWD, the following electronic assemblies are available (for item<br />
numbers refer to Figure 218 on page 588):<br />
Item Description<br />
1 GPIB Interface<br />
Firmware ROM GPIB<br />
2 Fan Assembly (LOW)<br />
3 Fan Assembly (HIGH)<br />
4 Connection Board (PSC)<br />
5 Deuterium Lamp Assembly<br />
6 Sample Diode Assembly (SDA)<br />
6 Pre-Amplifier Board SAMP<br />
7 Display Interface Board (KDI)<br />
7 Display Module (VFD)<br />
8 Leak Sensor Assembly<br />
9 Reference Diode Assembly (RDA)<br />
9 Pre-Amplifier Board REF<br />
10 Controller Board (DCB)<br />
11 Firmware ROM DCB<br />
12 Power Supply Assembly (DPS-A)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 587
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Location <strong>of</strong> Electronic Assemblies<br />
Figure 218 Location <strong>of</strong> Electronic<br />
588 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Interconnection Diagram<br />
Interconnection Diagram<br />
Figure 219 Interconnection Diagram<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 589
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Detector Controller Board (DCB)<br />
Detector Controller Board (DCB)<br />
Repair Level: EPROM and Board<br />
Table 141 Part Numbers for DCB<br />
tem Part Number Comment<br />
DCB (Exchange) 79853-69511 for use with PSC -66512<br />
DCB 79853-66511 for use with PSC -66512<br />
DCB 79853-66506 (OBSOLETE) for use with PSC -66509 (OBSOLETE)<br />
Firmware ROM DCB 79853-13005<br />
NOTE If the DCB board is replaced by 79853-66511 version, the PSC board MUST be<br />
changed to 79853-66512.<br />
Main Functions The main functions <strong>of</strong> the Detector Controller Board (DCB) are:<br />
CPU<br />
signal processing display<br />
A/D conversion<br />
D/A conversion<br />
analog output<br />
digital input/output<br />
control <strong>of</strong> Optical Unit deuterium lamp ignition<br />
remote control<br />
grating movement<br />
filter movement<br />
leak detector<br />
590 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Detector Controller Board (DCB)<br />
Figure 220 Block Diagram DCB<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 591
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Detector Controller Board (DCB)<br />
Digital Section<br />
CPU A 8-bit 1-chip Microprocessor 7810 is used as CPU. The 7810 includes<br />
256 byte-RAM, 8 channel 8-bit A/D Converter, 16-bit timer/event counter,<br />
2-channel 8-bit timer and two 8-bit I/O Ports. The Data Bus is 8-bit<br />
multiplexed with the address.<br />
ROM/RAM/EEPROM The ROM contains the firmware <strong>of</strong> the the detector and can be exchanged<br />
separately. In addition to the built-in functions, the 7810 has 64 Kbyte| <strong>of</strong><br />
external memory address and 32 Kbyte-ROM, 8 Kbyte-SRAM and 2<br />
Kbyte-EEPROM are added.<br />
The EEPROM contains:<br />
the time program;<br />
the grating calibration constant;<br />
D/A converter calibration constant;<br />
parameters set by key input (wavelength, range, response time, mode).<br />
Clock The main clock (24 MHz) is divided and distributed to:<br />
24 MHz A/D Converter Count Pulse<br />
12 MHz CPU Clock<br />
6 MHz D/A Converter Count Pulse<br />
3 MHz GPIB Controller, Key/Display<br />
Controller Clock<br />
1.2 KHz A/D Converter Integration<br />
period<br />
After the power turns on, for about 100 ms the RESET signal is supplied to<br />
CPU, GPIB Controller and Key/Display controller. Also, anytime when power<br />
voltage becomes less than 4.7 V, the RESET signal is generated. The CPU<br />
controls directly the Buzzer and the Stepper Motor Driver to move the filters<br />
on the filter assembly.<br />
The stepper motor for the grating, the input and the output port are<br />
connected to the internal BUS (DATA ADDRESS and CONTROL) and are<br />
controlled by the CPU. The grating motor and the filter motor are driven by a<br />
motor controller IC and phase pattern are coming from CPU.<br />
592 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Detector Controller Board (DCB)<br />
Figure 221 Block Diagram DCB - Digital<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 593
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Detector Controller Board (DCB)<br />
Analog Sections<br />
Signal Processing The light beam from the SAMPLE and REFERENCE enters the photodiode<br />
respectively. Its current output is converted into a voltage by pre-amplifier.<br />
The gain <strong>of</strong> the pre-amplifier can be changed into four stages with CPU<br />
control.<br />
The voltage signal from the pre-amplifiers are multiplexed and converted into<br />
digital form by a 18-bit A/D Converter. The conversion time <strong>of</strong> A/D Converter<br />
is 25 ms and is performed cyclically in the order <strong>of</strong><br />
Zero Sample-Reference<br />
(Zero=GNDA)<br />
Electrically zero calibration is done while balancing.<br />
Digital data is transmitted to the CPU, digitally filtered based on response<br />
time and converted into the absorbance unit using the equation shown<br />
below:<br />
AU<br />
10 REF ( )<br />
log<br />
10 SAMP ( )<br />
log –<br />
=<br />
The input voltage range <strong>of</strong> the integrator is -0.5..+9.5 V.<br />
594 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Detector Controller Board (DCB)<br />
Figure 222 Block Diagram DCB - A/D Conversion<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 595
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Detector Controller Board (DCB)<br />
A/D Converter Method for the A/D conversion is feedback type Pulse Width Modulation<br />
(PWM).<br />
Figure 223 A/D Converter<br />
Positive or negative reference voltage is alternately added to the integrator.<br />
Duty cycles <strong>of</strong> each reference voltage is controlled by the output <strong>of</strong> a<br />
comparator connected to the output <strong>of</strong> integrator. Input voltage (U1) is<br />
converted to pulse width so that sum <strong>of</strong> both reference voltages is balanced<br />
with the U1. Clock voltage and ±ES control this system and determines the<br />
period. The sum <strong>of</strong> clock voltage in one cycle is set to zero.<br />
Pulse width, which is proportional to input voltage U1, is counted and is<br />
converted into a digital output.<br />
The A/D converter has 18 bits resolution with 25 ms conversion time.<br />
D/A Converter D/A converter combines a Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) and a 12-bit DAC.<br />
The lower 4 bits <strong>of</strong> the DAC pulse width modulated with 12 bit resolution is<br />
added to the upper 8 bits <strong>of</strong> the DAC. The upper 8 bits are also modulated by<br />
fixed pulse width so that the lower 4 bits balances to LSB <strong>of</strong> the upper 8 bits<br />
(pulse width is 15/16). The lower 4 bits are scaled to each bit <strong>of</strong> the upper 8<br />
bits when using 44:DAC CALIBRATION. The output <strong>of</strong> the 12-bit DAC is<br />
passed through a low-pass filter and 20-bit resolution analog signal is<br />
outputted to the BNC Connector. The cut<strong>of</strong>f frequency <strong>of</strong> a low-pass filter is<br />
set at 17 Hz while conversion frequency is 183 Hz.<br />
596 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Figure 224 D/A Conversion<br />
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Detector Controller Board (DCB)<br />
Signal Output The signal output is classified into three types: Display Out, Analog Out,<br />
Digital In/Out.<br />
Display Out The display module receives ASCII codes via Keyboard Interface Board via<br />
the Data Bus. On the Display Module, the ASCII code is converted to display<br />
code and gives output on fluorescent display with 5 x 7 dots and 16<br />
characters.<br />
Signal (Analog) Out The Signal (Analog) Out is available at a BNC connector at the rear <strong>of</strong> the<br />
instrument. It is generated by 20-bit D/A converter. The conversion cycle <strong>of</strong><br />
the D/A converter is about 5.5 ms. The output <strong>of</strong> the D/A converter is filtered<br />
by a low-pass filter. The output can be switched to:<br />
Digital In/Out The digital signal is delivered to the GPIB Interface (option) via the Data Bus<br />
and is converted into an GPIB signal.<br />
Control <strong>of</strong> Deuterium<br />
Lamp<br />
Full Scale Output Impedance<br />
1 V 1000 Ohm<br />
0.1 V 100 Ohm<br />
The deuterium lamp is ignited using Anode Current, Trigger Voltage and<br />
Heater Voltage supplied from the Power Supply Unit. The ignition<br />
procedures are controlled by the CPU signal. The heater voltage is switched<br />
from 2.5 V during ignition to 0 V after ignition.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 597
Control <strong>of</strong> Grating<br />
Assembly<br />
Control <strong>of</strong> Filter<br />
Assembly<br />
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Detector Controller Board (DCB)<br />
The wavelength is set by rotating the grating with a 2-phase stepper motor.<br />
The step angle <strong>of</strong> the stepper motor rotation (1 step angle 3.75°) and is<br />
reduced to 1/300 by a gear. The stepper motor is controlled and driven by<br />
DCB. The CPU contrls the motor controller IC that drives the motor. Stepper<br />
Motor reference position is determined by a plate fitted on the swing arm<br />
interrupting a beam <strong>of</strong> photo interrupter. The output signal <strong>of</strong> the photo<br />
interrupter is read by a 8-bit ADC <strong>of</strong> the CPU.<br />
The rotation <strong>of</strong> stepper motor controls the insertion <strong>of</strong> a diffterent filters into<br />
the light path (cut<strong>of</strong>f, holmium, light reduction).<br />
The stepper motor is controlled and driven by DCB. The CPU controls the<br />
motor controller IC that drives the motor.<br />
Remote Control The REMOTE connectors communicate start or stop, error and not ready<br />
signal inputs and outputs.<br />
For detailed description <strong>of</strong> remote control refer to the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Service</strong><br />
<strong>Handbook</strong>, chapter Common Information.<br />
NOTE When the 79853C VWD is used in a system which is connected via remote, the<br />
VWD should be switched on as first module. Otherwise it may influence other<br />
modules at power on.<br />
Leak Detection The leakage from a flow cell is detected by change <strong>of</strong> Thermal Radiation<br />
Constant <strong>of</strong> NTC thermistor. Wheatstone bridge is constructed from NTC<br />
thermistor and resistors on the DCB. Its supply voltage is varied by<br />
controlling 24 V-power with Switching Regulator controller. The supply<br />
voltage is controlled to keep the thermistor at about 150 Ohm (150°C)<br />
constantly. If leakage occurs and the thermistor is soaked in the leaked<br />
liquid, the thermal radiation constant are changed and gives higher supply<br />
voltage at both ends <strong>of</strong> wheatstone bridge. This change is read by the CPU<br />
and compensated with ambient temperature.<br />
Error condition is when LS > LL. The values are visable with<br />
33:LEAK TEST.<br />
598 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Detector Controller Board (DCB)<br />
Figure 225 Block Diagram - Leak Detection<br />
Change in Thermal Radiation Constant with surrounding temperature change<br />
is compensated by second NTC thermistor having same characteristics.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 599
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Detector Controller Board (DCB)<br />
Figure 226 Board Layout DCB<br />
Table 142 Test Connector J16<br />
Pin Purpose Pin Purpose Pin Purpose Pin Purpose Pin Purpose<br />
1 Photocurrent<br />
REF<br />
2 Photocurrent<br />
SAMP<br />
6 +5 V 7 A/D Clock<br />
1.2 kHz<br />
3 +15 V 4 -15 V 5 Digital GND<br />
8 Ref Voltage<br />
+10 V<br />
9 Analog GND 10<br />
600 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A)<br />
Power Supply (DPS-A)<br />
Repair Level: Fuses and Exchange DPS-A<br />
Table 143 Part Numbers for DPS-A<br />
Item Part Number<br />
DPS-A (Exchange) 0<strong>1050</strong>-69375<br />
DPS-A (New) 5061-3375<br />
Fuse for 110 V operation 3 A 2110-0003<br />
Fuse for 220 V operation 2 A 2110-0002<br />
For detailed information on the power supply refer the <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Service</strong><br />
<strong>Handbook</strong>, chapter <strong>1050</strong> Common Information.<br />
Lamp Ignition<br />
The heater output made by a series regulator is in the pre-heating status 2.5 V<br />
always. After ignition a different output voltage is selected depending on the<br />
lamp type used: In the 79853C VWD the heater is switched <strong>of</strong>f after ignition.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 601
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Keyboard<br />
Keyboard<br />
Figure 227 Keyboard<br />
The flat keys at the front panel is composed <strong>of</strong> 6 x 4 matrix. Data is read by<br />
scanning at Key/Display Controller on the Keyboard Display Interface Board.<br />
Key entry is checked by reading the status <strong>of</strong> the controller by the CPU at<br />
every 10 ms. The Key/Display Controller also controls LED lamp lighting.<br />
602 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Keyboard<br />
Keyboard Electronics (KDI / VFD)<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 144 Part Numbers for Keyboard Electronics<br />
Keyboard Display<br />
Interface<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Keyboard Display Interface (KDI) 79853-66502<br />
Display Module Board (VFD) 79853-66503<br />
Behind the frontpanel two electronic boards are located: Keyboard Interface<br />
Board (KDI) and the Display Module Board (VFD).<br />
The Keyboard Interface Board (KDI) is connected to the DCB board and<br />
contains:<br />
interface between key-matrix (6 x 4) and DATA bus<br />
LED driver for the status messages ERROR, NOT READY, LAMP and RUN<br />
buzzer.<br />
Display Module The Display Module Board (VFD) is connected to the KDI and contains:<br />
CPU for control <strong>of</strong> latch driver<br />
latch driver for the Vacuum Fluorescence Display (FLD)<br />
DC/DC converter to provide the voltages for the FLD.<br />
Refer to “Replacing Display Boards” on page 662, when replacing this<br />
board.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 603
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Keyboard<br />
Figure 228 Block Diagram <strong>of</strong> Keyboard Electronics<br />
604 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Pre-Amplifier Boards<br />
Pre-Amplifier Boards<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 145 Part Numbers for Pre-Amplifiers<br />
The light (absorbtion) from the deuterium lamp (flow cell) is detected by the<br />
sample and the reference photodiode. Its current is then amplified by the<br />
pre-amplifiers. The signal then is routed to the DCB.<br />
Figure 229 Photodiode Assemblies<br />
Item Part Number<br />
Pre-Amplifier Board Sample 79853-66507<br />
Pre-Amplifier Board Reference 79853-66508<br />
Sensor Sample 79853-61109<br />
Sensor Reference 79853-61110<br />
The wires from the photodiodes are soldered onto the board.<br />
Sample Reference<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 605
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
Power Supply Connection Board (PSC)<br />
Power Supply Connection Board (PSC)<br />
Repair Level: Board<br />
Table 146 Part Numbers for PSC Board<br />
NOTE If the DCB board is replaced by 79853-66511 version, the PSC board MUST be<br />
changed to 79853-66512.<br />
Figure 230 Board Layout PSC<br />
Item Part Number<br />
PSC Board (for DCB -66511) 79853-66512<br />
PSC Board (for DCB -66506 OBSOLETE) 79853-66509 OBSOLETE<br />
This board connects the Power Supply DPS-A with the DCB and the<br />
Deuterium Lamp Assembly. The wires <strong>of</strong> the lamp cable are soldered in.<br />
606 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
GPIB Communication Interface<br />
GPIB Communication Interface<br />
Repair Level: Board, Firmware<br />
Table 147 Part Numbers for GPIB Interface Board<br />
Item Part Number<br />
GPIB Board (with cable) 79853-68711<br />
GPIB Cable to DCB Board<br />
Firmware ROM GPIB 79853-13004<br />
Parallel Interface Dual direction transceiver for data bus between master and slave CPU’s. 8 bit<br />
aux code from DCB to GPIB board. 3 bit control code from GPIB board to<br />
DCB<br />
Microprocessor Single chip microprocessor with 1 Mbyte address capability, 512 byte internal<br />
RAM and 32 I/O ports.<br />
Memories 32 Kbyte <strong>of</strong> ROM for program memory and 128 Kbyte RAM for the run buffer.<br />
Firmware Description The GPIB board performs all interruption processing from the GPIB<br />
controller. DCB and GPIB board communicate with hardware interrupts.<br />
Receiving GPIB commands the GPIB board passes them to the DCB with 3<br />
bit control code. This control code shows the kind <strong>of</strong> bus data such as GPIB<br />
commands, error codes or requesting data code and whether the data ended<br />
or not. During run or monitor mode the DCB send chromatogram data<br />
immediately to the GPIB board with 8 bit aux code. This aux code shows the<br />
kind <strong>of</strong> bus data such as chromatogram data, parameters, time tables, remote<br />
line status or GPIB board control code and whether the data ended or not.<br />
The GPIB board writes the received data into the run buffer. The GPIB sends<br />
out the formatted data adding the start and the end record.<br />
GPIB Address Setting The GPIB address setting is done with a switch (1) at the rear <strong>of</strong> the GPIB<br />
board. The factory setting is ’10’ (position A).<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 607
VWD: Electronic Information<br />
GPIB Communication Interface<br />
Figure 231 Location <strong>of</strong> GPIB board<br />
GPIB Firmware Revisions<br />
Refer to “GPIB ROM Firmware Revisions” on page 733 for information on<br />
firmware revisions.<br />
608 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
28<br />
28 VWD: Diagnostic &<br />
Troubleshooting Information<br />
This chapter provides information on error<br />
messages and diagnostic features <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong><br />
Variable Wavelength Detectors
VWD: Diagnostic &<br />
Troubleshooting Information<br />
This section provides information on the<br />
diagnostic routines<br />
error messages<br />
user contol functions<br />
service control functions<br />
610 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Self Diagnosis<br />
Self Diagnosis<br />
At power on and after lamp ignition the instrument checks itself for correct<br />
operation. In case <strong>of</strong> malfunctions, error messages will inform the operator<br />
on the fault.<br />
During Power On<br />
The following tests are done automatically during power on. They are<br />
descibed on the next pages together with the error message:<br />
Vaccuum Fluorescent display<br />
ROM and RAM<br />
Display<br />
Leak sensor<br />
Voltages<br />
A/D Converter<br />
EEROM Data<br />
Grating Drive<br />
During Normal Operation<br />
The following tests are done automatically during normal operation:<br />
for light intensity<br />
for filter movement<br />
for leaks<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 611
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Error Messages Before Lamp Ignition<br />
Error Messages Before Lamp Ignition<br />
Error messages may come up during the power on state or the normal<br />
operation.<br />
At Power ON<br />
During power on the instrument run automatically through different selftest<br />
routines.<br />
If all test are passed, the display shows HP <strong>1050</strong> VWD.<br />
While initializing the CPU checks the response <strong>of</strong> the Vaccuum Fluorescent<br />
Display (VFD) module.<br />
If there is no problem, SELF DIAGNOSIS IN PROGRESS is displayed.<br />
If there is no response from the VFD, the ERROR lamp will light, the buzzer is<br />
heard for 2 seconds and is halted.<br />
❏ Check connection DCB/KDI and KDI/VFD module.<br />
❏ Replace VFD Module.<br />
❏ Replace KDI Board.<br />
❏ Replace DCB Board.<br />
❏ Replace DPS.<br />
ROM TEST FAILED The ROM Test calculates the checksum and compares it with a stored value.<br />
If a differrence is found, ERROR LED lights, ROM TEST FAILED is displayed<br />
and the CPU is halted. Otherwise ROM TEST OK is displayed.<br />
❏ Replace EPROM.<br />
❏ Replace DCB.<br />
RAM TEST FAILED During RAM Test, firstly every RAM address is uniformly written. Then in<br />
ascending order, each address is tested for contents and then the data is<br />
inverted and written. Then the same procedure is repeated in decending<br />
order with the inverted data. This cycle is repeated twice. If an error is found,<br />
RAM TEST FAILED is displayed and further operation is prohibited.<br />
Otherwise, RAM TEST OK is displayed.<br />
❏ Replace DCB.<br />
612 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Error Messages Before Lamp Ignition<br />
Display Test During Display Test every dot on the VFD module is set and you have to<br />
confirm it by yourself. If display is black or shows missing dots<br />
❏ Check connection <strong>of</strong> flat ribbon cable DCB to KDI.<br />
❏ Replace KDI.<br />
L.SENSOR TROUBLE The Leak Sensor Test checks the leak sensor and the leak sensor circuit, but<br />
not for a leak resulting from the cell. The voltage applied is measured using<br />
built-in 8 bit ADC (A/D Converter) <strong>of</strong> the CPU as well as temperature<br />
compensation voltage from a second thermistor.<br />
If the LS > LL, L.SENSOR TROUBLE is displayed.<br />
The range during turn on should be: LS:0.63..4.06 V and LL:2.82..4.00 V.<br />
❏ Use 33:LEAK S.VOLT to verify the values, (see message<br />
LEAK DETECTED.<br />
❏ Check connection <strong>of</strong> leak sensor to DCB.<br />
❏ Replace leak sensor.<br />
❏ Replace DCB.<br />
POWER FAILURE During Voltage Test this message is displayed if the voltages exceeds the<br />
tolerance. If a voltage is not correct, it is displayed for a short moment, for<br />
example +24V TROUBLE.<br />
Table 148 DC Voltages<br />
❏ Check voltages using function 34:VOLTAGE TEST:<br />
Voltages Used for<br />
+ 12 V (±1 V) filter and grating motor<br />
- 15 V, + 15 V (±1 V) analog circuits<br />
+ 24 V (± 4.8V) leak sensor, fans<br />
❏ Replace DCB.<br />
❏ Replace Power Supply.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 613
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Error Messages Before Lamp Ignition<br />
ADC TROUBLE During the A/D Converter Test the 18 bit ADC for photocurrent acquisition is<br />
tested with multiplexer channel fixed at analog ground. Pulse count for<br />
ground input is measured 20 times and calculate the average and the<br />
fluctuations. If the value exceeds the pre-determined value ADC TROUBLE is<br />
displayed.<br />
❏ Replace DCB.<br />
EEROM DATA LOST During EEROM Data Test various parameters such as monochrometer<br />
parameter and time table are stored in EEROM (Electrically Erasable Read<br />
Only Memory) in order to save the value in absence <strong>of</strong> power. At initializing<br />
those values are checked using checksum. If an error is found,<br />
EEROM DATA LOST is displayed and default values are set.<br />
Different types <strong>of</strong> EEROM DATA LOST messages are possible:<br />
EEROM DATA LOST0 The key settable parameters (wavelength, responsetime, and so on) or time<br />
time tables are lost. They are replaced by default values.<br />
❏ Re-enter the values.<br />
❏ Replace DCB.<br />
EEROM DATA LOST1 Wavelength parameter (zero order) are lost. They are replaced by default<br />
values. The monochromater parameters are differrent for each instrument.<br />
❏ Execute 20:0th CALIB. or enter the 0th order parameter directly using<br />
31:SET WL PARAM.<br />
❏ Execute 45:WL COMPENSATE.<br />
EEROM DATA LOST2 The DAC parameters are lost. The parameters are the scaling factors for each<br />
DAC bit and ZERO SPAN factors. The lost parameters are recoverable.<br />
❏ Execute 44:DAC CALIB.<br />
EEROM DATA LOST3 The DAC parameters are lost. The parameters are the <strong>of</strong>fset parameter <strong>of</strong> the<br />
ADC reading for the output <strong>of</strong> each DAC bit (used for DAC calibration).<br />
NOTE These parameters can be re-written at the factory only.<br />
❏ Perform 41:DAC TEST.<br />
If OK, then leave it as it is.<br />
If NOT OK, then continue.<br />
614 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Error Messages Before Lamp Ignition<br />
❏ Perform 44:DAC CALIB. The default values <strong>of</strong> the <strong>of</strong>fset parameters are<br />
taken now.<br />
❏ Perform 41:DAC TEST.<br />
If OK, then leave it as it is.<br />
If NOT OK, then replace DCB board.<br />
WL SET TROUBLE During the initialization <strong>of</strong> the grating motor position, the motor moves<br />
backward to the home position where position sensor detects the limit. If it is<br />
not able to detect the limit, WL SET TROUBLE is displayed.<br />
❏ Check connection <strong>of</strong> position sensor and grating drive motor.<br />
❏ Switch OFF lamp, remove top cover <strong>of</strong> optical unit to observe movement<br />
<strong>of</strong> grating mirror (changing wavelength).<br />
If grating will not rotate after changing the wavelength, replace DCB or<br />
the Grating Driver Assy.<br />
❏ Using 36:GRATING P.S. you can move the grating shaft automatically<br />
or stepwise by pressing the down/up key. Normally in the position <strong>of</strong> about<br />
-200 steps, the output voltage <strong>of</strong> the position sensor will change from LOW<br />
to HIGH, detecting the limit position. If the output voltage will never<br />
change, the position sensor is defective or the grating drive assembly has<br />
a problem and has to be replaced.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 615
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Error Messages After Lamp Ignition<br />
Error Messages After Lamp Ignition<br />
LAMP ERROR ❏ Check connections <strong>of</strong> lamp connector, PSC board and DPS to DCB.<br />
❏ Replace lamp, DPS, DCB.<br />
LOW ILLUMINATION Light intensity <strong>of</strong> deuterium lamp is checked after lamp ignition at the<br />
wavelength <strong>of</strong> 250 nm. If the reference voltage at 250 nm is < 0.6 V, the<br />
detector will check the reference voltage at 500 nm and if < 0.12 V,<br />
LOW ILLUMINATION will be displayed. In this case the detector will never<br />
return to the original wavelength. It will remain at 500 nm.<br />
This test is skipped if WL SET TROUBLE is displayed and unable to set the<br />
wavelength.<br />
❏ Check the lamp image on the entrance slit.<br />
If the image does not cover the slit properly, adjust mirror M1.<br />
❏ Check connection to pre-amplifiers.<br />
❏ Replace the lamp for deterioration <strong>of</strong> lamp.<br />
❏ Replace the mirrors M1 and M2 for deterioration <strong>of</strong> mirrors.<br />
FILTER ERROR During Filter Test the second order light cut<strong>of</strong>f filter is tested by inserting it<br />
at the wavelength <strong>of</strong> > 370 nm and measuring the change <strong>of</strong> light intensity. If<br />
an error is found FILTER ERROR is displayed.<br />
This message comes up if<br />
The reference current at 220 nm is more than 2.00 and at 500 nm more than<br />
1/16 <strong>of</strong> the value at 220 nm. Then the filter is always <strong>of</strong>f.<br />
The photocurrent at 220 nm is less than 2.00 and at 500 nm more than 0.04.<br />
Then the filter is always ON.<br />
The reference light beam is focussed far from the reference diode.<br />
❏ Flow cell should be clean and bubble free.<br />
❏ Check connection <strong>of</strong> filter motor.<br />
❏ Check correct operation <strong>of</strong> filter with 39:FILTER TEST and photo sensor<br />
<strong>of</strong> filter with 37:FILTER P.S.<br />
❏ Check beam splitter alignment.<br />
616 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Error Messages During Normal Operation<br />
Error Messages During Normal Operation<br />
LEAK DETECTED ❏ Enter service mode function 33:LEAK S. VOLT and check leak sensor<br />
voltages.<br />
Table 149 Working Ranges for LS and LL<br />
Error condition is when LS > LL. The normal range should be:<br />
LS signal LL signal<br />
2.35..2.85 V 2.95..3.45 V<br />
❏ If there is no leakage, check the connection leak sensor to DCB.<br />
❏ Replace Leak Detector board.<br />
❏ Replace Leak Sensor.<br />
DATA UNDERFLOW This message may come up only during BALANCING when the sample or<br />
referrence voltage is lower than 1 mV.<br />
❏ Check, whether the flow cell is in correct position and the screws are<br />
tightened.<br />
❏ Check the connection <strong>of</strong> pre-amplifier sample to DCB.<br />
❏ Clean cell windows.<br />
❏ Replace photo diode assembly.<br />
❏ Replace DCB.<br />
DATA OVERFLOW This message may come up only during BALANCING when the sample or<br />
referrence voltage exceeds 9.4 V.<br />
Check, whether the flow cell is in correct position and the screws are<br />
tightened.<br />
Replace DCB.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 617
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Error Messages During Normal Operation<br />
ADC OVERFLOW ❏ Execute BALANCE, so that the proper pre-amplifier gain is selected.<br />
❏ Check, whether the flow cell is in correct position and the screws are<br />
tightened.<br />
❏ Is apature gasket installed in flow cell?<br />
❏ Replace DCB.<br />
No response for HPIB ❏ set address switch correct.<br />
❏ check connection to DCB and GPIB cable.<br />
❏ change GPIB board.<br />
618 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
Error Messages During Use <strong>of</strong> Control Functions<br />
Error Messages During Use <strong>of</strong> Control<br />
Functions<br />
CALIB FAILURE When using 20:0th CALIB. this message may come up because the<br />
lamp is turned OFF or to much light reaches the sample diode.<br />
❏ Turn On the lamp.<br />
Figure 232 Calibration Failure<br />
❏ Reduce light to sample diode.<br />
When using 21:WL CALIBRATION this message may come up under the<br />
following reasons:<br />
If during scan the measured voltage <strong>of</strong> each step<br />
is the same (Figure 232-a), or<br />
is on an upslope (Figure 232-b) or<br />
is on a downslope (Figure 232-c).<br />
❏ Use other wavelength setting to get a different range,<br />
31:SET WL PARAM.<br />
❏ Recalibrate grating with 21:WL CALIBRATION.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 619
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
User Control Functions<br />
User Control Functions<br />
Table 150 User Control Functions<br />
These functions are accessable for every instrument user. They are used for<br />
parameter settings and special operating functions during normal work.<br />
# Display Used for<br />
1 1:SAMPLE SCAN takes a sample scan<br />
2 2:REF. SCAN takes a reference scan<br />
3 3:SPECTRUM OUT plots the spectrum<br />
4 4:SCAN FROM defines scan range from<br />
5 5:SCAN TO defines scan range to<br />
6 6:ZERO OFFSET zero <strong>of</strong>fset in %<br />
7 7:RESPONSETIME choices 0.25, 1 and 4 s<br />
8 8:AUTO LAMPOFF automatic lamp <strong>of</strong>f<br />
9 9:AUTO LAMP ON automatic lamp on<br />
10 10:OUTP. DEVICE integrator or recorder<br />
11 11:OUTPUT VOLT 1 V or 100 mV<br />
12 12:STATUS FW revision, errors or status<br />
13 13:START MODE local, remote, hpsystem<br />
14 14:OUTPUT CHECK checks the output voltage<br />
15 15:RESET reset to default<br />
16 16:PHOTOCURRENT sample and reference diode’s current<br />
17 17:PARAM. LOCK locks certain parameters<br />
18 18:WL SHIFT WL change on display<br />
19 19:POLARITY polarity <strong>of</strong> signal (analog/GPIB)<br />
20 20:0th CALIB. 0th order calibration<br />
620 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
User Control Functions<br />
Table 150 User Control Functions<br />
# Display Used for<br />
21 21:WL CALIBRATION 656 nm calibration<br />
22 22:HOLMIUMCHECK WL Calibration check<br />
Functions 1 to 21 are described in detail in the User Documentation.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 621
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
NOTE These functions are secured by a PASSWORD, because they are normally used<br />
by trained <strong>Service</strong> Engineers. Misuse <strong>of</strong> certain function may result in a<br />
misalignment <strong>of</strong> the optical path or electronical values.<br />
If the VWD is in service mode, the ERROR status lamp blinks.<br />
If the instrument enters into this mode accidentally, the easiest way to abort<br />
from this mode is: TURN OFF the power <strong>of</strong>f the instrument.<br />
Entering the <strong>Service</strong> Mode<br />
1 Press [CTRL] [3] [0] [ENTER]<br />
2 {30:SERVICE MODE} [ENTER]<br />
3 {Pass Word} [1] [0] [5] [0] [ENTER]<br />
This control function is the entry point for all service control functions. You<br />
can enter service control function only through this control function. Select<br />
your desired control function using [DOWN] or [UP]. Once you abort from this<br />
mode, you have to execute this function again. However if power has not<br />
switched <strong>of</strong>f since last entry, you can skip password by just pressing<br />
[ENTER].<br />
It is adviced that you will turn-<strong>of</strong>f the power, after you finished using service<br />
control functions to avoid the accidental entry to service control mode.<br />
In Table 151 on page 623 all service related functions are listed. Due to<br />
different firmware versions and improvements on 79853C VWD, the order <strong>of</strong><br />
the functions is different.<br />
622 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
The functions 20, 21 and 22 are part <strong>of</strong> the User Functions, but they are<br />
described in this section.<br />
Table 151 <strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
# Display Used for<br />
20 20:0th CALIB. Zero Order calibration<br />
21 21:WL CALIBRATION 656 nm calibration<br />
22 22:HOLMIUMCHECK Wavelength Calibration check<br />
31 31:SET WL PARAM. Parameter Set for Zero Order and 656 nm<br />
32 32:FIX SIGNAL Fixed voltage to sample or reference path<br />
33 33:LEAK S. VOLT Shows leak sensor voltages<br />
34 34:VOLTAGE TEST Shows DC Voltages<br />
35 35:ADC NOISE Check <strong>of</strong> ADC noise<br />
36 36:GRATING P.S. Check <strong>of</strong> Grating Sensor<br />
37 37:FILTER P.S. Check <strong>of</strong> Filter Sensor<br />
38 38:REMOTE TEST Check <strong>of</strong> Remote lines-<br />
39 39:FILTER CHECK Checks movement <strong>of</strong> Filter<br />
40 40:0TH TEST OFF Positions the Zero Order Beam<br />
41 41:DAC TEST Checks DAC<br />
42 42:PREAMP GAIN Checks linearity <strong>of</strong> gains<br />
43 43:EEROM TEST Checks EEROM data<br />
44 44:DAC CALIB . Calibrates the DAC<br />
45 45:WL COMPENSATE Compensates non-lineraties <strong>of</strong> grating<br />
CAUTION Important parameters might be lost. DO NOT use control functions 31 through<br />
45 until you have read this paragraph and fully understand the functions and<br />
result <strong>of</strong> operation. Some functions may change the monochrometer<br />
parameters and misuse <strong>of</strong> these functions leads to inaccurate wavelength<br />
setting.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 623
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Zero Order Calibration<br />
20:0th CALIB. This control function is used for the electrical calibration <strong>of</strong> the zero order<br />
beam <strong>of</strong> the monochrometer. The step number corresponds to the number in<br />
31:SET WL PARAM.<br />
The grating is driven by the stepper motor through steps 150 to 250 searching<br />
for a maximum. The step number with the maximum voltage is displayed,<br />
and if accepted, written into the EEROM.<br />
The intensity <strong>of</strong> the zero order light is reduced by inserting a filter in the<br />
calibration position automatically.<br />
Prior to the use <strong>of</strong> this function, the grating assembly should be pre-aligned<br />
on the zero order light, using control function 40:0TH TEST OFF.<br />
Table 152 Control Function: Zero Order Calibration<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
20:0th CALIB. Select function.<br />
ENTER nn step CHANGE? display current parameter or<br />
change to 200.<br />
ENTER or to continue calibration or<br />
CLEAR to abort.<br />
wait appr. 20 seconds.<br />
nn step x.xxxV starts the calibration scan<br />
from 150 step to 250step<br />
No key entry is allowed here.<br />
Possible error message at this<br />
point may be:<br />
CALIB. FAILURE Indicates that the lamp is<br />
OFF.<br />
DATA OVERFLOW Indicates that too much light<br />
reaches the sample photo<br />
diode. Reduce light and insert<br />
paper between cell and<br />
sample diode<br />
624 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Table 152 Control Function: Zero Order Calibration<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
DATA UNDERFLOW Indicates that not enough<br />
light reaches the sample<br />
photo diode. Check light path.<br />
The next line will be shown, if<br />
no error message occured.<br />
nn step y.yyyV Displays the step that gave<br />
the maximum light intensity.<br />
ENTER nnn step OK ? Promps for confirmation, to<br />
change the parameter.<br />
ENTER Takes the displayed step<br />
number.<br />
CLEAR Rejects the displayed step<br />
number.<br />
ENTER nnn step New parameter is written in<br />
EEROM and monochrometer<br />
is reset with new parameter.<br />
20:0th CALIB. End <strong>of</strong> Zero order beam<br />
calibration. You may repeat<br />
the procedure again.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 625
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Wavelength Calibration<br />
21:WL CALIBRATION This control function is used for the calibration <strong>of</strong> the monochrometer using<br />
the 656 nm line emission from the deuterium lamp. The step number<br />
appeared in this control function is the number <strong>of</strong> steps <strong>of</strong> stepper motor<br />
from the 0 order beam to the 656 nm emission line. Maximum light intensity<br />
is searched between ±50 steps <strong>of</strong> 656 nm value. If the maximum peak is<br />
found, the step number is written into EEROM and corresponds to the value<br />
in 31:SET WL PARAM.<br />
Table 153 Control Function: WL Calibration<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
21:WL CALIBRATION Select function.<br />
ENTER 656nm xxxx step Displays the wavelength for<br />
calibration and steps based<br />
on present PARAM.WL 656.<br />
ENTER or To continue calibration or<br />
CLEAR to abort.<br />
Wait appr. 30 seconds.<br />
xxxxstep y.yyyV Starts the calibration scan<br />
from 656 nm ±50 steps and<br />
seeks for maximum light<br />
intensity.<br />
No key entry is allowed here.<br />
Possible error message at this<br />
point may be:<br />
CALIB. FAILURE Indicates that there was no<br />
maximum found (see “CALIB<br />
FAILURE” on page 619).<br />
DATA UNDERFLOW Indicates that not enough<br />
light reaches the sample<br />
photodiode (
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Table 153 Control Function: WL Calibration<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
xxxxstep y.yyyV Displays the step that gave<br />
the maximum light intensity.<br />
ENTER 656nm xxxx step Displays the wavelength and<br />
step that gave the maximum<br />
light intensity.<br />
after 2 seconds 656nm xxxxstep Displays the new parameter<br />
at 546 nm and prompts the<br />
confirmation.<br />
ENTER Takes the displayed step<br />
number.<br />
CLEAR Rejects the displayed step<br />
ENTER 656 yyyystepOK New parameter is written in<br />
EEROM and monochrometer<br />
is reset with new parameter.<br />
after 2 seconds 21:WL CALIBRATION End <strong>of</strong> calibration. You can<br />
repeat the procedure again.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 627
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Wavelength Calibration Check<br />
22:HOLMIUMCHECK<br />
This control function is used for the automatic check <strong>of</strong> the instruments WL<br />
calibrations using the some specific lines on the Holmium oxide filter which<br />
is moved into the light path.<br />
Table 154 Control Function: HOLMIUMCHECK<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
ENTER CHECK?<br />
22:HOLMIUMCHECK Select function.<br />
CLEAR to leave function.<br />
ENTER to start the calibration check.<br />
360.8nm automatic verification<br />
418.5nm automatic verification<br />
536.4nm automatic verification<br />
HOLMIUM CHECK OK if within specification<br />
CLEAR to leave function.<br />
DOWN 360.8nm 360.7nm displays measured value<br />
DOWN 418.5nm 418.4nm displays measured value<br />
DOWN 536.4nm 536.4nm displays measured value<br />
CLEAR 22:HOLMIUMCHECK to leave function.<br />
If this test was not successful, perform 20:0th CALIB. and<br />
21:WL CALIBRATION.<br />
628 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
SET WL Parameter<br />
31:SET WL PARAM. This control function is used for the confirmation <strong>of</strong> monochrometer<br />
parameters or for changing them directly. PARM.WL0 is the number <strong>of</strong> steps<br />
<strong>of</strong> stepper motor from the position sensor, while PARM.WL656 is the number<br />
<strong>of</strong> steps from 0 order beam. As these values changes slightly from instrument<br />
to instrument, they are originally calibrated and written into EEROM.<br />
The parameter 360.8 nm, 418.5 nm, 486 nm and 536.4 nm cannot be changed.<br />
These four parameters set with 45:COMPENSATE are used to compensate<br />
non-linearity <strong>of</strong> the grating drive.<br />
If PARM.WL656 is changed, these four parameters are automatically shifted.<br />
Table 155 Control Function: SET WL PARAM.<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
31:SET WL PARAM. Select function.<br />
ENTER Parm.WL0 200 Displays the 0 order light<br />
parameter (same<br />
value found with<br />
20:0th CALIB. .<br />
UP Select the parameter WL656<br />
nm.<br />
Parm. 656yyyy Displays the step number at<br />
656 nm (same value found<br />
with 21:WL CALIBRATION.<br />
Enter the parameter using<br />
numeric keys.<br />
UP Parm.360.8yyyy Displays the step number at<br />
360.8 nm.<br />
UP Parm.418.5yyyy Displays the step number at<br />
418.5 nm.<br />
UP Parm. 486 yyyy Displays the step number at<br />
486 nm.<br />
UP Parm.536.4yyyy Displays the step number at<br />
536.4 nm.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 629
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Table 155 Control Function: SET WL PARAM.<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
ENTER 31:SET WL PARAM. Control function is displayed<br />
again.<br />
CLEAR On WL0 or WL656 parameter,<br />
reenters the displyed value.<br />
In order to change both parameters you have to repeat the above procedure<br />
for both wavelengths.<br />
630 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Fix Signal<br />
32:FIX SIGNAL If the <strong>1050</strong> VWD shows noise or drift problems, this function can help to<br />
isolate the cause. The reference or the sample diode can be set to an fixed<br />
electrical value to remove influences from the light path.<br />
This function can also be used to retrieve the instrument pr<strong>of</strong>ile <strong>of</strong> the<br />
instrument.<br />
Table 156 Control Function: FIX SIGNAL<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
32:FIX SIGNAL Select function.<br />
ENTER REF. CH. FIXED The photocurrent <strong>of</strong> reference<br />
photo diode is a fixed<br />
electrical value.<br />
DOWN or UP Select the parameter.<br />
NORMAL-NOT FIXED Return to normal condition<br />
(neither photocurrrent is<br />
fixed.)<br />
SMP. CH. FIXED The photocurrent <strong>of</strong> sample<br />
photo diode is a fixed value.<br />
ENTER 32:FIX SIGNAL Control function is displayed<br />
again.<br />
NOTE If either channel is fixed, the ERROR status lamp is blinking even after<br />
returning to analysis mode from service control mode. This is an alarm to<br />
show that the instrument is abnormal condition. You can return to normal<br />
condition by executing NORMAL-NOT FIXED or switching <strong>of</strong>f the power.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 631
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Use <strong>of</strong> FIX SIGNAL Use this function for<br />
❏ checking the noise <strong>of</strong> both sides separately;<br />
❏ taking the instrument pr<strong>of</strong>ile <strong>of</strong> both sides separately.<br />
With fixed signal, either the reference or the sample side is supplied with a<br />
constant current. So influences from the lamp effects only that side which is<br />
not fixed. Influence due to a drifting or defective photo diode effects both, a<br />
scan and the signal (noise). Small wavelength variations between fixed<br />
sample and reference scans are caused by the characteristics <strong>of</strong> the photo<br />
diodes.<br />
Noise with Reference Signal Fixed: If the noise is large, the problem may<br />
be caused by light path, flow cell or sample diode/pre-amplifier.<br />
Noise with Sample Signal Fixed: If the noise is large, the problem may be<br />
caused by light path, lamp or reference diode/pre-amplifier.<br />
To take an instrument pr<strong>of</strong>ile proceed as follows:<br />
❏ Enter 32:FIX SIGNAL and set SMP. CH. FIXED .<br />
❏ Press [ENTER] and leave function.<br />
❏ Press [BALANCE].<br />
❏ Take a reference scan 2:REF SCAN .<br />
❏ Take a sample scan 1:SAMPLE SCAN .<br />
❏ Set integrator to ATTN9, CS10 and Zero10%.<br />
❏ Press [BALANCE].<br />
❏ Enter 3:SPECTRUM OUT , press [ENTER] [ENTER].<br />
❏ Start plot on integrator and press [ENTER]. The intensity pr<strong>of</strong>ile is now<br />
plotted on the integrator.<br />
❏ Perform above steps with REF. CH. FIXED to check the light through<br />
put <strong>of</strong> the cell. Figure 233 on page 633 shows both plots.<br />
632 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Figure 233 Example <strong>of</strong> Intensity Pr<strong>of</strong>iles<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 633
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Leak Sensor Voltage<br />
33:LEAK S.VOLT You can check the leak sensor with this contol function in case <strong>of</strong> trouble.<br />
Table 157 Control Function: Leak Sensor Voltage<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
33:LEAK S.VOLT Select function.<br />
ENTER LS:2.70 LL:3.30 Displays LS (Leak Sensor<br />
Voltage) and LL (Temperature<br />
compensation voltage).<br />
Error condition is when<br />
LS > LL.<br />
The normal ranges are:<br />
LS signal 2.35..2.85 V,<br />
LL signal 2.95..3.45 V<br />
CLEAR 33:LEAK S.VOLT Leaves function.<br />
634 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Voltage Test<br />
34:VOLTAGE TEST<br />
You can check some (but not all) voltages with this contol function.<br />
Table 158 Control Function: Voltage Test<br />
Table 159 DC Voltages<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
34:VOLTAGE TEST Select function.<br />
ENTER 15.0 22.9 Displays first set <strong>of</strong> voltages.<br />
DOWN or UP 12.1 -15.0 Displays second set <strong>of</strong><br />
voltages.<br />
CLEAR 34:VOLTAGE TEST Leaves function.<br />
Voltages Used for<br />
+ 12 V (±1 V) filter and grating motor<br />
- 15 V, + 15 V (±1 V) analog circuits<br />
+ 24 V (± 4.8V) leak sensor, fans<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 635
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
ADC Noise<br />
35:ADC NOISE The output signal <strong>of</strong> the ADC noise corresponds to 196 AD counts at the<br />
Analog Output with 1 V full scale setting. The ADC noise must be within<br />
±10 counts (±50 mV) over a time <strong>of</strong> 10 minutes (Figure 234).<br />
Table 160 Control Function: ADC Noise<br />
Figure 234 ADC Noise<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
35:ADC NOISE Select function.<br />
ENTER TESTING ADC ADC noise is outputted.<br />
Start plotter in ATTN 7,<br />
ZERO 50, Chartspeed 1 (on<br />
HP 339X)<br />
CLEAR 35:ADC NOISE Leaves function.<br />
636 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Grating Photo Sensor<br />
36:GRATING P.S. This control function can be used to check the function <strong>of</strong> the photo sensor<br />
and the drive mechanism <strong>of</strong> the grating. The movement <strong>of</strong> the grating can be<br />
done automatically or step for step. It will provide the step number and the<br />
voltage <strong>of</strong> photo sensor which detects the backward limit when the drive<br />
mechanism moves into the photo sensor. The photo sensor voltage exceeds<br />
3 V when the photo sensor reaches at backward limit position.<br />
A normal step value for change from LOW to HIGH is around -200 steps.<br />
Table 161 Control Function: Grating Photo Sensor<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
36:GRATING P.S. Select function.<br />
ENTER STPxxx PS0.11 Present step <strong>of</strong> stepper motor<br />
and photo sensor voltage is<br />
displayed.<br />
DOWN or UP STPxxx PSy.yy You can move the stepper<br />
motor and observe the<br />
voltage.<br />
ENTER STP-nnn PS3.90 Starts automatically the<br />
search for the home position<br />
and displays the step number<br />
(nnn) and the corresponding<br />
voltage.<br />
CLEAR 36:GRATING P.S. Leaves function.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 637
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Filter Photo Sensor<br />
37:FILTER P.S. This control function can be used to check the function <strong>of</strong> the photosensor<br />
and the filter motor. The movement is done step for step. It will provide the<br />
step number and the voltage <strong>of</strong> photo sensor when the drive mechanism<br />
moves into the photo sensor.<br />
Table 162 Control Function: Filter Photo Sensor<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
Pressing<br />
37:FILTER P.S. Select function.<br />
ENTER STP0 PS4.98 Move to home position and<br />
shows steps and photo<br />
sensor voltage.<br />
DOWN or UP STPxxx PSy.yy You can move the stepper<br />
motor and observe the<br />
voltage. When the motor<br />
leaves the photo sensor, then<br />
PS changes to 0.01.<br />
CLEAR 37:FILTER P.S. Leaves function.<br />
UP once rotates the filter 1 step (7.5°) to the left.<br />
DOWN once rotates the filter 1 step (7.5° to the right.<br />
638 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Remote Test<br />
38:REMOTE TEST This control function is to test the remote control line. Disconnect the<br />
remote cables to avoid interferrence to and from other instruments.<br />
Remote lines tested are: START, SHUT DOWN, POWER DOWN, READY and<br />
STOP. PREPARE and START REQUEST are not tested.<br />
Table 163 Control Function: REMOTE Test<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
38:REMOTE TEST Select function.<br />
ENTER Disconnect REMOTE Cable and Press START<br />
START REMOTE LINE TEST The REMOTE LINE TEST<br />
starts.<br />
REMOTE LINE OK When test is passed.<br />
REMOTE FAILURE There’s a trouble.<br />
CLEAR 38:REMOTE TEST Leaves function.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 639
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Filter Check<br />
39:FILTER CHECK This control function is used to check the motion <strong>of</strong> second order cut<strong>of</strong>f<br />
filter. The cut<strong>of</strong>f filter returns to original position at the end <strong>of</strong> this control<br />
function.<br />
Table 164 Control Function: Filter Test<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
39:FILTER CHECK Select function.<br />
ENTER CUT FILTER OFF Displays present filter status.<br />
DOWN or UP CUT FILTER ON Cut<strong>of</strong>f Filter moves in or out.<br />
CLEAR 39:FILTER CHECK Leaves function.<br />
640 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Zero Order Test<br />
40:0TH TEST OFF This control function is used to move the stepper motor into the zero order<br />
position and has to be performed during the alignment <strong>of</strong> the grating.<br />
Table 165 Control Function: Zero Order Test<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
40:0TH TEST OFF Select function.<br />
The test is still <strong>of</strong>f and the<br />
grating is on set parameter<br />
wavelength.<br />
ENTER 0th STEP NOnnn Take the number <strong>of</strong> steps<br />
from 31:SET WL PARM. ,<br />
(default) or use 200 steps.<br />
ENTER 0TH TEST ON The stepper motor is moved<br />
to zero order position.<br />
CLEAR 40:0TH TEST OFF Leaves function and grating is<br />
turned to set wavelength.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 641
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
DAC Test<br />
41:DAC TEST This control function is used to check the D/A converter by setting different<br />
bits. An AC voltage is added to the DC output and should be < 0.8 x 10 -5 AU.<br />
Table 166 Control Function: DAC Test<br />
Table 167 DAC DC Values<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
41:DAC TEST Select function.<br />
ENTER TESTING BIT 0 Bit 0 is tested.<br />
UP TESTING BIT 1 Bit 1 is tested.<br />
UP TESTING BIT 2 Bit 2 is tested.<br />
UP TESTING BIT 3 Bit 3 is tested.<br />
UP TESTING BIT 4 Bit 4 is tested.<br />
UP TESTING BIT 5 Bit 5 is tested.<br />
UP TESTING BIT 6 Bit 6 is tested.<br />
UP TESTING BIT 7 Bit 7 is tested.<br />
CLEAR 41:DAC TEST Leaves function.<br />
Bit mV Decription<br />
0 27<br />
1 32 jump <strong>of</strong> 5 mV<br />
2 42 jump <strong>of</strong> 10 mV<br />
3 62 jump <strong>of</strong> 20 mV<br />
4 104 jump <strong>of</strong> 40 mV<br />
5 22 GND plus <strong>of</strong>fset voltage<br />
6 185 jump <strong>of</strong> 80 mV<br />
7 511 about half <strong>of</strong> maximum output voltage<br />
If you do not see a linear response, replace the DCB board.<br />
642 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Figure 235 DAC Test Bit 0 (AC)<br />
Figure 236 DAC Test Bit 7 (AC)<br />
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
An AC voltage is added to the DC output and should be < 0.8 x 10 -5 AU.<br />
If one or more tested bits are out <strong>of</strong> limit, then perform 44:DAC CALIB.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 643
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Pre-amplifier Gain<br />
42:PREAMP GAIN This control function allows the check <strong>of</strong> gain switching on the DCB.<br />
The gain can be switched to 1, 2, 4 and 8.<br />
Table 168 Control Function: Pre-Amplifier Gain<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
Change wavelength to 500<br />
nm to reduce intensity <strong>of</strong><br />
light.<br />
42:PREAMP GAIN Select function.<br />
ENTER G1 R0.115 S0.045 Shows the photocurrent <strong>of</strong><br />
reference and sample side<br />
with gain 1.<br />
DOWN G2 R0.227 S0.089 Shows the photocurrent <strong>of</strong><br />
reference and sample side<br />
with gain 2.<br />
DOWN G4 R0.455 S0.179 Shows the photocurrent <strong>of</strong><br />
reference and sample side<br />
with gain 4.<br />
DOWN G8 R0.914 S0.358 Shows the photocurrent <strong>of</strong><br />
reference and sample side<br />
with gain 8.<br />
The displayed values should<br />
double each time.<br />
If not, change wavelength to<br />
500 nm or change DCB.<br />
CLEAR 42:PREAMP GAIN Leaves function.<br />
644 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
EEROM Test<br />
43:EEROM TEST This control function checks the EEROM and is used as factory test.<br />
Table 169 Control Function: EEROM Test<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
43:EEROM TEST Select function.<br />
ENTER EEROM TEST****** The blinking * indicates the<br />
checked section.<br />
EEROM TEST OK Test was successful. If test<br />
failes, replace DCB.<br />
CLEAR 43:EEROM TEST Leaves function.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 645
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
DAC Calibration<br />
44:DAC CALIB. This control function does a scaling between lower 12 bits and upper 8 bits <strong>of</strong><br />
DAC and an automatic recalibration <strong>of</strong> the DAC internal voltages. It should<br />
be performed when the noise is higher than expected and a DAC<br />
non-linearity is found. The test runs automatically.<br />
The initial calibration is done at the factory.<br />
The lamp can be <strong>of</strong>f, but the instrument should be on for some time for<br />
stabilizing the instrument to reduce drift.<br />
Table 170 Control Function: DAC Calibration<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
44:DAC CALIB. Select function.<br />
ENTER Disconnect SIGNAL Cable<br />
and Press START<br />
START DAC SCALING Scaling starts.<br />
SCALING 0 Step 0 <strong>of</strong> 7 is displayed.<br />
f0 yyyy pre-scaling done for step 0.<br />
Now you steps 1 to 7 are<br />
done.<br />
DAC CALIB. OK Calibration was successful.<br />
ENTER 44:DAC CALIB. Takes new factors and leaves<br />
function.<br />
DAC CALIB.FAILED Calibration was not<br />
successful.<br />
CLEAR 44:DAC CALIB. Keeps previous factors when<br />
calibratio failed and leaves<br />
function.<br />
646 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Wavelength Compensation<br />
45:WL COMPENSATE This control function is used to compensate non-lineratity <strong>of</strong> the grating<br />
drive.<br />
NOTE If the grating motor or the grating has been replaced or moved, this function<br />
MUST be executed.<br />
During this test, the flow cell should be empty (no windows) or clean filled<br />
with water or methanol (no air bubbles). Absorption in the flow cell causes<br />
an error.<br />
First step is to search for the 656 nm line emission <strong>of</strong> the deuterium lamp<br />
within a window <strong>of</strong> ±50 steps.<br />
Then the processor sets the ideal (linear) steps for four interpolative<br />
points, 360.8 nm, 418.5 nm, 486 nm and 536.4 nm.<br />
360.8 nm and 418.5 nm are absorption points <strong>of</strong> the holmium oxide<br />
spectra. 536.4 nm is a line emission from the deuterium lamp.<br />
Next, it scans each ideal interpolative point (±25 steps) as reference.<br />
Then the holmium oxide filter is inserted and it scans again for the three<br />
absorption points <strong>of</strong> holmium oxide spectra (±25 steps).<br />
If all found values are in limit, then the parameters are written into EEROM<br />
(visable with 31:SET WL PARAM.).<br />
Table 171 Control Function: WL Compenstation<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
ENTER PARAM. CHANGE ?<br />
45:WL COMPENSATE Select function.<br />
ENTER to continue calibration<br />
CLEAR to abort calibration<br />
XXXstep y.yyyV displays steps and voltage<br />
during calibration<br />
CALIB. FINISHED new parameter, written into<br />
EEROM.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 647
VWD: Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Information<br />
<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions<br />
Table 171 Control Function: WL Compenstation<br />
Key Operation Display Description<br />
ENTER 45:WL COMPENSATE Takes new factors and leaves<br />
function.<br />
WL CALIB. FAILURE one or more peaks could not<br />
be found with ±25 steps.<br />
Parameters are set to<br />
previous values.<br />
CLEAR 45:WL COMPENSATE Keeps previous factors when<br />
calibration failed and leaves<br />
function.<br />
648 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
29<br />
29 VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
This chapter provides provide procedures for<br />
service and maintenance <strong>of</strong> the <strong>1050</strong> Variable<br />
Wavelength Detectors
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
NOTE The information in this chapter is based on the original optical unit (version<br />
“C”). In June 1995 this optical was replaced by the enhanced version “D” to<br />
overcome baseline stability problems in unstable environments.<br />
For details on this “D” version refer to section Enhanced Optical Unit<br />
Information “VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information” on page 705.<br />
Warnings<br />
WARNING Dangerous voltage is present in the cabinet, though it is covered and<br />
insulated. DO NOT TOUCH PARTS unless they are specified in the<br />
procedure.<br />
Be careful when you have to work in the optical unit. The lamp housing<br />
is hot.<br />
Be sure to wear a pair <strong>of</strong> safety or sun glasses. Since the deuterium<br />
lamp emits intensive ultraviolet light, it is dangerous to perform<br />
optical alignment without eye protection. Be careful not to expose<br />
your eyes directly to the light coming from the lamp.<br />
650 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Securing for Transport<br />
Securing for Transport<br />
Figure 237 Securing for Transport<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 651
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacement <strong>of</strong> Deuterium Lamp<br />
Replacement <strong>of</strong> Deuterium Lamp<br />
If the Deuterium lamp no longer ignites or the lamp emission has become too<br />
low and noisy, the lamp has to be replaced.<br />
The deuterium lamp is exchangeable by the user. No adjustment is necessary.<br />
For accurate wavelength setting excute user control function<br />
20:0th CALIB. and 21:WLCalibration after exchanging the lamp.<br />
Step 1: Replacement<br />
❏ Turn the lamp <strong>of</strong>f.<br />
❏ Loosen the two screws at the rear <strong>of</strong> the instrument which fix the cover<br />
and remove them.<br />
❏ Remove top cover.<br />
❏ Unplug the lamp and remove it.<br />
❏ Exchange the lamp (no adjustment is required).<br />
❏ Reconnect the lamp.<br />
❏ Replace top cover.<br />
❏ Turn the lamp on.<br />
652 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacement <strong>of</strong> Deuterium Lamp<br />
Step 2: 0th Order Calibration<br />
The instrument scans for the maximum <strong>of</strong> the zero-order light.<br />
During 0th order calibration a filter for reducing light intensity to prevent<br />
ADC data overflow will be inserted automatically.<br />
Select control function 20:0th CALIB.<br />
[ENTER] enters function<br />
200step CHANGE? displays the current parameter<br />
[ENTER] or [CLEAR] to continue or to abort<br />
150step 0.000V instrument scans now for maximum from step<br />
150 to 250<br />
201step X.XXXV maximum when calibration successfully<br />
finished, press [ENTER]<br />
201 step OK ? press [ENTER] to keep the new value and to<br />
leave function<br />
If CALIB. FAILURE occurs, press [CLEAR] to keep the old value and to<br />
leave function.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 653
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacement <strong>of</strong> Deuterium Lamp<br />
Step 3: WL CALIBRATION<br />
The instrument scans for maximum light intensity <strong>of</strong> 656 nm line spectrum <strong>of</strong><br />
deuterium lamp.<br />
Enter control function 21:WL CALIBRATION.<br />
[ENTER] enters function<br />
656nm 1900step displays the current parameter.<br />
[ENTER] or [CLEAR] to continue or to abort<br />
1875step 0.000V the instrument scans now for for maximum for<br />
100 steps<br />
1902step X.XXXV maximum when calibration successfully<br />
finished, press [ENTER]<br />
656 1902stepOK? press [ENTER] to keep the new value and to<br />
leave function.<br />
If CALIB. FAILURE occurs, press [CLEAR] to keep the old value and to<br />
leave function.<br />
654 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Flow Cell Maintenance<br />
Flow Cell Maintenance<br />
To replace or clean certain parts <strong>of</strong> the flow cell you should have a clean<br />
working area.<br />
Refer to “Standard Flow Cell “C” (SST/Ti)” on page 693 and the following<br />
pages for detailed flow cell schematics.<br />
Flow Cell Maintenance Kits<br />
There are several maintenance kits available with replacement parts for the<br />
flow cells.<br />
For details see“Standard Flow Cell “C” (SST/Ti)” on page 693 and the<br />
following pages.<br />
Replacing Cell Parts<br />
For the detailed procedures refer to the Operating Manual.<br />
❏ Remove flow cell.<br />
❏ Unscrew the cell screw using a 6 mm hexagon wrench, see Figure 238 on<br />
page 656, item 1.<br />
❏ Remove inner parts carefully and place them in the correct order in front<br />
<strong>of</strong> you.<br />
❏ Replace window, gaskets or other parts as needed.<br />
NOTE Once a gasket has been compressed or spoiled on the surface, DO NOT use it<br />
again. A used gasket may cause leakage.<br />
❏ Insert all parts in the correct order.<br />
❏ Tighten the cell screw.<br />
❏ Perform a “Leak Test” on page 657.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 655
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Flow Cell Maintenance<br />
Figure 238 Standard Flow Cell<br />
Flushing Procedure<br />
Cleaning the cell (by using a glass syringe!)<br />
❏ Flush with iso-Propanol.<br />
❏ Flush with bidistilled water.<br />
❏ Flush with nitric acid : water (5 : 95).<br />
❏ Flush with bidistilled water.<br />
❏ Flush with iso-Propanol<br />
CAUTION This concentration <strong>of</strong> nitric acide is dangerous and proper attention to safety<br />
should be given. Also, the nitric acid flushing procedure is not a certain cure<br />
for a dirty cell. It is to be used as a last attempt to salvage the cell before<br />
certain cell parts have to be replaced.<br />
656 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Flow Cell Maintenance<br />
Leak Test<br />
Remove the flow cell and connect the outlet tubing <strong>of</strong> the flow cell directly to<br />
the pump. Then flow an appropriate solvent (for example Isopropanol) at<br />
10 ml/min. After several minutes check the cell visually. If it is necessary to<br />
check it for higher pressure, put an appropriate stainless steel tubing which<br />
can build up a back-pressure.<br />
CAUTION DO NOT apply higher back pressure to the flow cell than maximum pressure<br />
<strong>of</strong> the flow cell.<br />
Table 172 Pressure Rating on Flow Cells<br />
Type Pressure<br />
Standard Flow Cell 40 bar<br />
Ultra High-Pressure Cell 400 bar<br />
Preparative Flow Cell 40 bar<br />
Semi-Micro Flow Cell 40 bar<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 657
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Using the Cuvette Holder<br />
Using the Cuvette Holder<br />
When required: If your own standard should be used to checkout the instrument.<br />
Tools required: None<br />
Parts required: Cuvette Holder 79853-60016<br />
Cuvette with the “standard”, e.g. NIST certified holmium oxide sample<br />
Figure 239 Cuvette Holder<br />
This cuvette holder can be placed instead <strong>of</strong> a flow cell in the variable<br />
wavelength detector. Standard cuvettes with standards in it, for example,<br />
National Institute <strong>of</strong> Standards & Technology (NIST) holmium oxide solution<br />
standard, can be fixed in it.<br />
This can be used for wavelength verifications.<br />
658 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Using the Cuvette Holder<br />
Preparation for this procedure are:<br />
❏ Remove the normal flow cell.<br />
❏ Install the cuvette holder in the instrument<br />
and perform a wavelength calibration.<br />
❏ Have cuvette with standard available.<br />
1 Locate the cuvette holder on the desk.<br />
2 Unscrew the bracket. 3 Insert the cuvette with the sample into the<br />
holder.<br />
Light path Clear side<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 659
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Using the Cuvette Holder<br />
4 Replace the bracket and fix the cuvette. 5 Install the cuvette holder in the instrument.<br />
6 Perform your verification.<br />
660 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacing DCB Board and Firmware<br />
Replacing DCB Board and Firmware<br />
When performing one <strong>of</strong> these tasks, take care for electrostatic discharge<br />
protection to keep the electronics alive.<br />
DCB Board<br />
❏ Note the parameters from 31:SET WL PARAM.<br />
❏ Disconnect the power from the instrument.<br />
❏ Remove main cover and disconnect all connectors from DCB.<br />
❏ Replace DCB after loosening the 3 fixing screws.<br />
❏ Fix all screws and reconnect all connectors to the DCB.<br />
❏ Carefully remove the firmware ROM from removed DCB and insert it on<br />
new DCB.<br />
❏ Replace main cover and turn the instrument ON.<br />
❏ Turn lamp on and wait some minutes to stabilize the lamp.<br />
❏ Perform functions 20:0th CALIB., 21:WL CALIBRATION,<br />
44:DAC CALIB. and 45:COMPENSATE to input the detector specific<br />
parameters into the EEROM.<br />
DCB Firmware<br />
❏ Disconnect the power from the instrument.<br />
❏ Remove main cover.<br />
❏ Carefully replace the firmware ROM.<br />
❏ Replace main cover and turn the instrument ON.<br />
❏ Turn lamp on and wait some minutes to stabilize the lamp.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 661
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacing Display Boards<br />
Replacing Display Boards<br />
❏ Remove front panel assembly and disconnect cables between front panel<br />
and DCB.<br />
❏ Unscrew the six screws which hold the plastic part at the metal frame<br />
(except the two screws that fix the leak assembly).<br />
❏ Disconnect the grounding cable and the cable between the two display<br />
boards.<br />
❏ Replace the defective board.<br />
Figure 240 Release <strong>of</strong> connector<br />
❏ To loosen the flat cable [3] from the keyboard, press a flat screwdriver<br />
onto the two noses on each side <strong>of</strong> the connector [1] to release the upper<br />
part [2] <strong>of</strong> the connector.<br />
662 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacing the Leak Interface<br />
Replacing the Leak Interface<br />
Leak Sensor Assembly<br />
❏ Remove the flow cell.<br />
❏ Remove top cover.<br />
❏ Disconnect leak cable from DCB and the flat ribbon cable from DCB to<br />
keyboard at the KDI board.<br />
❏ Unscrew the screws that fix the front panel.<br />
❏ Remove front panel.<br />
Figure 241 Leak Sensor Assembly<br />
❏ Replace sensor board or complete assembly.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 663
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacing the Leak Interface<br />
Leak Interface<br />
Figure 242 Leak Interface<br />
❏ Carefully remove the leak interface.<br />
❏ Replace the defective item. All three parts (top, bottom and tubing are<br />
coming together as kit).<br />
❏ Install the leak interface.<br />
664 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacements in the Optical Unit<br />
Replacements in the Optical Unit<br />
The repair level <strong>of</strong> optical unit parts is component level.<br />
Refer to section “Optical Unit “C”” on page 688 for additional parts.<br />
NOTE The information in this chapter is based on the original optical unit (version<br />
“C”). In June 1995 this optical was replaced by the enhanced version “D” to<br />
overcome baseline stability problems in unstable environments.<br />
For details on this “D” version refer to section Enhanced Optical Unit<br />
Information “VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information” on page 705.<br />
WARNING Be sure to wear a pair <strong>of</strong> safety or sun glasses. Since the deuterium<br />
lamp emits intensive ultraviolet light, it is dangerous to perform<br />
optical alignment without eye protection. Be careful not to expose<br />
your eyes directly to the light coming from the lamp.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 665
Figure 243 Optical Unit<br />
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacements in the Optical Unit<br />
Removing the Optical Unit<br />
❏ Disconnect power from instrument.<br />
❏ Remove flow cell.<br />
❏ Remove top cover.<br />
❏ Disconnect all cables that go from the optical to the Detector Controller<br />
Board (DCB).<br />
❏ Place the instrument on its left or right side.<br />
❏ Remove all nuts that fix the optical unit.<br />
❏ Take out the optical unit.<br />
666 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacements in the Optical Unit<br />
Replacing the PSC Board<br />
❏ Refer to “Removing the Optical Unit” on page 666.<br />
❏ Remove the PSC protection cover (2 screws).<br />
❏ Loosen the PSC board (3 screws).<br />
❏ Remove the lamp supply connector from the fan assembly.<br />
❏ Fed the wire carefully between fan cover and power supply cabinet. If not<br />
possible, loosen the fan cover.<br />
❏ Replace the PSC board and reuse the old cable to the DCB board.<br />
❏ When replacing the PSC protection cover, take care for correct routing <strong>of</strong><br />
the wire at the right side.<br />
Replacing Pre-amplifiers or Photodiodes<br />
❏ Remove the top cover and the front panel assembly.<br />
❏ Refer to Figure 244 for next steps.<br />
❏ Remove the cover that protects the pre-amplifier.<br />
❏ To replace the pre-amplifier boards<br />
❏ disconnect cable from pre-amplifier board<br />
❏ unscrew the board<br />
❏ unsolder the wire from the photodiode<br />
❏ replace the board.<br />
❏ To replace the photodiode<br />
❏ remove cover plate <strong>of</strong> photodiode<br />
❏ unsolder photodiode<br />
❏ unscrew photodiode<br />
❏ replace photodiode.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 667
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacements in the Optical Unit<br />
Figure 244 Location <strong>of</strong> Photodiodes<br />
Sample Reference<br />
Replacing Grating Assembly Parts<br />
Photo Sensor<br />
❏ Refer to “Removing the Optical Unit” on page 666.<br />
❏ Remove the bottom plate <strong>of</strong> the optical unit.<br />
❏ Unscrew the photo sensor and replace it.<br />
Grating<br />
For [ ] items refer to Figure 245 on page 669.<br />
❏ Remove the top cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit.<br />
❏ Use a hex key (2.5 mm) to loosen the grating screw [2].<br />
❏ Replace the grating [1].<br />
❏ Refer to “Optical Alignment Procedures” on page 671.<br />
668 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacements in the Optical Unit<br />
Grating Motor<br />
For [ ] items refer to Figure 245 on page 669.<br />
❏ Refer to “Removing the Optical Unit” on page 666.<br />
❏ Refer to “Replacing Grating Assembly Parts” on page 668 and take grating<br />
out.<br />
❏ Remove the bottom plate <strong>of</strong> the optical unit.<br />
❏ Remove the two springs.<br />
❏ Unscrew the three screws [6] that fix the motor assembly [5] and take it<br />
out. Keep spring [3] and gasket [4].<br />
❏ Replace the spring [3], gasket [4] and complete motor assembly [5].<br />
❏ Reinstall the grating [1].<br />
Figure 245 Grating Assembly<br />
❏ Refer to “Optical Alignment Procedures” on page 671.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 669
Figure 246 Filter Assembly<br />
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Replacements in the Optical Unit<br />
Replacing Filter Assembly Parts<br />
❏ Refer to Refer to “Removing the Optical Unit” on page 666.<br />
❏ Remove the bottom plate <strong>of</strong> the optical unit.<br />
❏ Unscrew the 2 screws that fix the filter assembly.<br />
❏ Take out the complete assembly.<br />
❏ Replace the complete filter assembly, sensor lever or the sensor.<br />
Replacing Mirrors, Beamsplitter and Slits<br />
❏ Open the optical untit's top cover.<br />
❏ Replace the item that need to be replaced.<br />
❏ Refer to “Optical Alignment Procedures” on page 671.<br />
NOTE DO NOT touch the surface <strong>of</strong> the mirrors, beam splitter and the grating.<br />
670 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Optical Alignment Procedures<br />
Optical Alignment Procedures<br />
Procedure 1: alignment after exchange <strong>of</strong> a specific part<br />
Procedure 2: alignment <strong>of</strong> complete optical (sample path)<br />
Procedure 3: alignment <strong>of</strong> complete optical (reference path)<br />
WARNING Be sure to wear a pair <strong>of</strong> safety or sun glasses. Since the deuterium<br />
lamp emits intensive ultraviolet light, it is dangerous to perform<br />
optical alignment without eye protection. Be careful not to expose<br />
your eyes directly to the light coming from the lamp.<br />
Procedure 1: Simple Alignment<br />
When replacing just a single part in the light path other than grating parts, M4<br />
and beam splitter, this procedure can be performed.<br />
❏ Execute 40:0th TEST which shows the step number from<br />
31: SET WL PARM. and watch the location <strong>of</strong> the images on the slit<br />
assemblies (entrance and reference slit) and the cell center.<br />
❏ Exchange the part Refer to Replacing ... for more information.<br />
❏ Position the part so that the image centers on entrance and reference slit.<br />
❏ Fix the part.<br />
❏ If image on exit slit is too high or low, follow procedure “Procedure 2:<br />
Sample Beam Alignment” on page 672.<br />
❏ If image on reference slit is too high or low, follow procedure “Procedure<br />
3: Reference Beam Alignment” on page 674.<br />
❏ Excute the 20:0th CALIB. and 21:WL CALIBRATION.<br />
❏ Refer to “Replacement <strong>of</strong> Deuterium Lamp” on page 652, Step 2 and 3.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 671
M1, M2, Entrance Slit,<br />
M3<br />
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Optical Alignment Procedures<br />
Procedure 2: Sample Beam Alignment<br />
For [ ] items refer to Figure 247.<br />
❏ Remove the entrance slit [3].<br />
Figure 247 Optical Unit Parts<br />
❏ Turn the deuterium lamp [1] on.<br />
❏ Make sure the light spot covers over mirror M1 [4].<br />
❏ Adjust the direction <strong>of</strong> mirror M1 [4] so that the light beam covers over<br />
mirror M2 [5].<br />
❏ Adjust the angle and direction <strong>of</strong> mirror M2 [5] so that the light beam<br />
covers over mirror M3 [6].<br />
❏ Install the entrance slit [3] where the light beam illuminates the center <strong>of</strong><br />
the slit.<br />
❏ Adjust the angle and direction <strong>of</strong> the mirror M3 [6] so that the light beam<br />
covers over the grating mirror [7].<br />
672 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Grating, M4, Beam<br />
Splitter<br />
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Optical Alignment Procedures<br />
❏ Excute control function 40:0TH TEST OFF to set the grating motor<br />
position to 200 steps (center step number).<br />
❏ Adjust the direction <strong>of</strong> the grating mirror [7] so that the light beam covers<br />
over the mirror M4 [6].<br />
❏ Remove the beam splitter [8] now so that you can see the center <strong>of</strong> the flow<br />
cell.<br />
❏ Adjust the angle and direction <strong>of</strong> the mirror M4 [6] so that the light beam<br />
illuminates the center <strong>of</strong> the flow cell.<br />
❏ Leave control function 40:0TH TEST OFF and return to normal display.<br />
❏ Excute the 20:0th CALIB. and 21:WL CALIBRATION. Refer to<br />
“Replacement <strong>of</strong> Deuterium Lamp” on page 652, Step 2 and 3.<br />
❏ If grating has been moved, use 45:COMPENSATE to compensate<br />
non-linearity <strong>of</strong> the grating motor.<br />
❏ Set wavelength to 254nm.<br />
❏ Place cover on optical unit (do not fix the screws at this time).<br />
M4 fine tuning ❏ Excute control function 16:PHOTOCURRENT.<br />
❏ Remove the blank screw for mirror M4 adjustment (Figure 243 on page<br />
666) on the top cover (leave the blank screw for beam splitter adjustment<br />
in).<br />
❏ Adjust the angle <strong>of</strong> the mirror M4 with inserting a hexagon wrench<br />
(1.5 mm) through the top cover screw hole to get maximum photocurrent<br />
for the sample. Turn right to move image down and left for up.<br />
❏ Replace the blank screw in the top cover.<br />
❏ Excute the 20:0th CALIB. and 21:WL CALIBRATION. Refer to<br />
“Replacement <strong>of</strong> Deuterium Lamp” on page 652, Step 2 and 3.<br />
❏ Install the beam splitter [8].<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 673
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Optical Alignment Procedures<br />
Procedure 3: Reference Beam Alignment<br />
For [ ] items refer to Figure 247 on page 672.<br />
❏ Excute 40:0TH TEST ON with calibrated step value displayed.<br />
❏ Open the top cover and adjust the angle and direction <strong>of</strong> the beam splitter<br />
[8], so that the light beam illuminates the center <strong>of</strong> the reference slit [12].<br />
❏ Place the cover on the optical unit.<br />
❏ Leave 40:0TH TEST ON and set wavelength to 254 nm.-<br />
❏ Remove the blank screw for beam splitter adjustment (Figure 243 on page<br />
666) in the top cover.<br />
❏ Excute 16:PHOTOCURRENT.<br />
❏ Adjust the angle <strong>of</strong> the beam splitter inserting a hexagon wrench through<br />
the top cover screw hole to get maximum photocurrent for the reference.<br />
Turn right to move image down and left for up.<br />
❏ Replace the blank screw in the top cover.<br />
❏ Repeat the 20:0TH CALIB. and 21:WL CALIBRATION. Refer to<br />
“Replacement <strong>of</strong> Deuterium Lamp” on page 652, Step 2 and 3.<br />
❏ Use 45:COMPENSATE to compensate non-linearity <strong>of</strong> the grating motor.<br />
674 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Cleaning <strong>of</strong> Optical Unit Parts<br />
Cleaning <strong>of</strong> Optical Unit Parts<br />
There are only a few parts within the optical unit that can be cleaned.<br />
Table 173 Cleanable Optical Parts<br />
NOT CLEANABLE grating and all mirrors<br />
Touching or cleaning will result in decrease <strong>of</strong><br />
reflaction/intensity<br />
CLEANABLE filters (holmium, cut<strong>of</strong>f and 0 order calibration), beam<br />
splitter, photo diodes<br />
You can wipe the surface with ethanol. In case you<br />
cannot remove stains, the part has to be replaced.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 675
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Upgrade to GPIB<br />
Upgrade to GPIB<br />
❏ Note the values for WL, 0 and 656 nm using 31:SET WL PARAM., just in<br />
case the EEROM looses the values.<br />
❏ Turn <strong>of</strong>f the instrument.<br />
❏ Remove top cover <strong>of</strong> the instrument.<br />
❏ Remove plate at the rear panel above the fan.<br />
❏ Install the GPIB board in that location using the screws that hold the plate.<br />
❏ Connect the GPIB cable to J12 <strong>of</strong> the DCB board.<br />
GPIB Address Setting<br />
The GPIB address setting is done with a switch (1) at the rear <strong>of</strong> the GPIB<br />
board. The factory setting is ’10’ (position A).<br />
Figure 248 Location <strong>of</strong> GPIB board<br />
676 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Performance Verification<br />
Performance Verification<br />
Table 174 Noise and Drift Specifications<br />
Noise 1.5 x 10 -5 AU<br />
Drift 5.0 x 10 -4 AU/h<br />
What you need<br />
❏ a pump that can deliver bidistilled water, at a rate <strong>of</strong> up to 1 ml/min against<br />
a back-pressure <strong>of</strong> about 200 bar.<br />
❏ a column: we recommend our 100 x 4.6 mm i.d., 5 µm Hypersil ODS<br />
column.<br />
❏ a recording device that can accept the output signal from your detector<br />
and that has attenuation set to about 35 cm/mV.<br />
Preparations<br />
❏ Prime the pump and ensure there are no air bubbles in the system.<br />
❏ Thoroughly degas about 300 ml <strong>of</strong> bidistilled water.<br />
❏ Set pump to deliver bidstilled water at a flow rate <strong>of</strong> 1 ml/min.<br />
❏ Set the attenuation to about 35 cm/mV.<br />
❏ Set run time on recorder to 6.0 min.<br />
❏ Turn-ON line power and deuterium lamp.<br />
❏ Set wavelength to 254 nm, response time to 1 second and output voltage to<br />
1 V.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 677
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Performance Verification<br />
Starting a run<br />
❏ Give the optical unit time to warm-up and stabilize.<br />
❏ Start a run.<br />
Figure 249 Example <strong>of</strong> Noise Plot<br />
The baseline noise should not exceed 7.5 µV (1.5 x 10 -5 AU|) equivalent to<br />
4.5 mm at attenuation - 3 on a 3390/2/3 integrator and equivalent to 9 mm<br />
at attenuation - 3 on a 3394/6 integrator.<br />
This plot was taken with<br />
a 79853C VWD<br />
an 35900C A/D converter<br />
a LC DOS workstation<br />
flow cell windows removed, but gasket #2 installed.<br />
It shows, that the drift on this example is < 1 x 10 -4 AU/hr and the noise at<br />
about < 1 x 10 -5 AU.<br />
678 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Performance Verification<br />
Scaling Factors<br />
The table below shows the scaling factors for the 339XA family <strong>of</strong><br />
integrators. The 3390A, 3392A and 3393A have a full scale deflection <strong>of</strong><br />
75 mm. The 3394A and the 3396A have a full scale deflection <strong>of</strong> 150 mm, they<br />
also have an attenuation range between -8 and 36.<br />
Table 175 Scaling Factors on 339X integrators<br />
ATTN mV full scale mAU full scale<br />
-3 0.125 0.25<br />
-2 0.25 0.5<br />
-1 0.5 1<br />
0 1 2<br />
1 2 4<br />
2 4 8<br />
3 8 16<br />
4 16 32<br />
5 32 64<br />
6 64 128<br />
7 128 256<br />
8 256 512<br />
9 512 1024<br />
10 1024 2048<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 679
VWD: Maintenance Information<br />
Performance Verification<br />
680 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
30<br />
30 VWD: Parts Information<br />
This chapter provides information on parts <strong>of</strong> the<br />
<strong>1050</strong> Variable Wavelength Detectors
VWD: Parts Information<br />
This chapter gives diagrams for parts identification and the complete parts<br />
listings respectively.<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Optical Unit<br />
Flowcell<br />
Flow Cell Kits<br />
Accessory Kit<br />
NOTE The information in this chapter is based on the original optical unit (version<br />
“C”). In June 1995 this optical was replaced by the enhanced version “D” to<br />
overcome baseline stability problems in unstable environments.<br />
For details on this “D” version refer to section Enhanced Optical Unit<br />
Information “VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information” on page 705.<br />
682 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Table 176 Overall Diagram<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Item Description Part Nmber<br />
1 Power Supply (5061-3375) 0<strong>1050</strong>-69375 15 Cover Assembly 79853-64101<br />
2 DCB Board Assembly, see *<br />
79853-69511 16 GPIB Board Assembly 79853-68711<br />
2 ROM DCB Firmware “C” only 79853-13005 16 ROM GPIB Firmware 79853-13004<br />
2 ROM DCB Firmware “D” only 79853-13000 Cable DCB-GPIB 79853-61610<br />
3 PSC Board for DCB 79853-66511 79853-66512 17 Fan Assembly (LOW) 79853-68503<br />
4 Cable PSC-DCB 79853-61605 18 Cover Fan 79853-04102<br />
5 Cover PSC N.A. 19 Sheet Fan N.A.<br />
6 Leak Sensor Board see page 687 20 Fan Assembly (HIGH) 79853-68502<br />
7 Leak Sensor Assembly see page 687 21 Switch Bearing 79853-61903<br />
8 Sheet Front Panel see page 687 22 Switch Bracket N.A.<br />
9 Front Panel Assembly see page 687 23 Switch Shaft 79853-61901<br />
10 Display Interface (KDI) 79853-66502 24 Switch Top 79853-61902<br />
11 Display Module (VFD) 79853-66503 25 Cable DCB-KDI 79853-61609<br />
12 Cable KDI-VFD 79853-61602 26 Optical Unit see page 688<br />
13 STD Flow Cell Assembly see page 693<br />
13 Semi-micro Flow Cell Assembly see page 695 Transport Screw Kit, contains 3<br />
screws with washer and spacer<br />
13 Ultra High Pressure Flow Cell<br />
Assembly<br />
*<br />
If installed in instruments with PSC -66509, then PSC must be updated to<br />
79853-66512.<br />
79853-68700<br />
see page 697 PEEK Inlet Tubing Kit 5062-8522<br />
13 Prep Flow Cell Assembly TI see page 698 PEEK Waste Tubing Kit 5062-8535<br />
14 Bracket DPS N.A.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 683
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Figure 250 Overall Diagram Part 1<br />
684 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Overall Diagram<br />
Figure 251 Overall Diagram Part 2<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 685
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Front Panel Parts<br />
Front Panel Parts<br />
Leak Interface<br />
Table 177 Leak Interface<br />
Figure 252 Leak Interface<br />
Top<br />
Tubing<br />
Bottom<br />
Description Part number<br />
Leak Interface Kit, contains 79853-68731<br />
Top, Bottom and Tubing<br />
686 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Front Panel Parts<br />
Font Panel<br />
Table 178 Front Panel<br />
Figure 253 Front Panel<br />
# Description Part number<br />
Front Panel Complete 79853-60203<br />
Front Panel 79853-60202<br />
1 Leak Sensor Board 79853-66510<br />
2 Leak Sensor Assembly 79853-66111<br />
3 Display Module Board (VFD) 79853-66503<br />
4 Cable KDI-VFD 79853-61602<br />
5 Display Interface (KDI) 79853-66502<br />
6 Cable DCB-KDI 79853-61609<br />
O-ring, Leak Assembly 79853-82501<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 687
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Optical Unit “C”<br />
Optical Unit “C”<br />
The parts identification <strong>of</strong> the optical unit is splitted into four sections:<br />
Optical Unit Inner Parts (Top)<br />
Optical Unit Inner Parts (Bottom)<br />
Grating Assembly<br />
Filter Assembly<br />
Flow Cell Assemblies<br />
NOTE The information in this chapter is based on the original optical unit (version<br />
“C”). In June 1995 this optical was replaced by the enhanced version “D” to<br />
overcome baseline stability problems in unstable environments.<br />
For details on this “D” version refer to section Enhanced Optical Unit<br />
Information “VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information” on page 705.<br />
For complete optical unit “C” replacements use part number 79853-60015.<br />
This upgrades to “D” version, see “Part Numbers for Enhanced “D” Optical<br />
Unit” on page 709<br />
688 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Optical Unit “C”<br />
Optical Unit “C” Inner Parts Top<br />
Table 179 Optical Unit “C” Inner Parts TOP<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Item Description Part Nmber<br />
Optical Unit (complete assembly) 79853-69015 7 Grating Assembly see page 691<br />
Plate Optical Top 79853-04108 8 Beam Splitter 79853-20402<br />
1 Deuterium Lamp Assembly 79883-60002 9 Pre-Amplifier Board, SAMPLE 79853-66507<br />
Lamp housing 79853-22006 10 Sensor, Sample 79853-61109<br />
2 Filter Assembly see page 692 11 Pre-Amplifier Board, REF 79853-66508<br />
3 Entrance Slit Assembly 79853-23103 12 Sensor, Reference 79853-61110<br />
4 Mirror #1 79853-68107 Reference Slit 79853-23104<br />
5 Mirror #2 79853-68108 Spacer Reference Sensor 79853-24702<br />
6 Mirror #3 or #4 79853-68109 PTFE Ring 53C 79853-24500<br />
Figure 254 Optical Unit “C” Inner Parts TOP<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 689
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Optical Unit “C”<br />
Optical Unit “C” Inner Parts Bottom<br />
Table 180 Optical Unit “C” Inner Parts Bottom<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Item Description Part Nmber<br />
Optical Unit (comple assembly) 79853-60015 7 Filter Assembly see page 692<br />
Plate Optical Base 79853-04109 7 Position Sensor Assembly, Filter 79853-61107<br />
1 Optical Body N/A 8 Cable Assembly, Sample 79853-61607<br />
2 Plate Sample Sensor 79853-04110 9 Cable Assembly, Reference 79853-61608<br />
3 Position Sensor Assembly,<br />
Grating<br />
Figure 255 Optical Unit “C” Inner Parts Bottom<br />
79853-61106 Spacer, Optical (metal foot) 79853-24701<br />
4 Plate Reference Sensor 79853-04111 Insulator, Optical (rubber foot) 79853-85401<br />
5 Spring #1, Grating 79853-29102 Foot Kit Optical 79853-22005<br />
6 Grating Assembly see page 691<br />
690 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Grating Assembly<br />
Grating Assembly<br />
Table 181 Grating Assembly<br />
Figure 256 Grating Assembly<br />
# Description Part number<br />
1 Grating 79853-64605<br />
Hex Screw M3 14 mm lg<br />
2 Spring #2, Grating 79853-29103<br />
3 Gasket<br />
4 Grating Motor Assembly 79853-64606<br />
5 Screws M3 6 mm long<br />
Photo Sensor 79853-61106<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 691
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Filter Assembly<br />
Filter Assembly<br />
Table 182 Filter Assembly<br />
Figure 257 Filter Assembly<br />
# Description Part number<br />
1 Filter Assembly 79853-67903<br />
2 Lever Position Sensor<br />
3 Position Sensor Filter 79853-61107<br />
4 Screws M3 6 mm long<br />
692 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Standard Flow Cell “C” (SST/Ti)<br />
Standard Flow Cell “C” (SST/Ti)<br />
Table 183 Standard Flow Cell “C” (SST/Ti)<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Qty<br />
1 Cell Screw 79853-27201<br />
2 Conical Spring 10/pk 79853-27203 10<br />
3 Ring 2/pk 79853-27202 2<br />
4 Gasket #1 PTFE<br />
5 Window Quartz<br />
6 Gasket #2 PTFE<br />
7 Gasket #3 PTFE<br />
STD Flow Cell 8 mm SST see Note below<br />
STD Flow Cell 8 mm Ti 79853-60011<br />
PEEK Inlet Tubing Kit 5062-8522<br />
Cell Kit STD, includes items 4 (2x), 5 (2x), 6<br />
(1x) and 7 (1x)<br />
79853-68718<br />
5 Window Quartz Kit 79853-68719 2<br />
4 Gasket #1 PTFE Kit STD 10/pk 79853-68720 10<br />
6 Gasket #2 PTFE Kit STD 5/pk 79853-68721 5<br />
7 Gasket #3 PTFE Kit STD 5/pk 79853-68722 5<br />
NOTE The original STD flow cell 79853-60008 was replaced in June 1995 by the “D”<br />
version 79853-60000. For parts ID refer to “Standard Flow Cell “D” Repair<br />
Parts” on page 710.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 693
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Standard Flow Cell “C” (SST/Ti)<br />
Figure 258 Standard Flow Cell “C” (SST/Ti)<br />
694 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Semi-Micro Flow Cell (SST)<br />
Semi-Micro Flow Cell (SST)<br />
Table 184 Semi-Micro Flow Cell (SST/Ti)<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Qty<br />
Figure 259 Semi-Micro Flow Cell (SST)<br />
1 Cell Screw (same as STD) 79853-27201<br />
2 Conical Spring (same as STD) 79853-27203 10/pk<br />
3 Ring (same as STD) 79853-27202 2/pk<br />
4 Gasket #1 PTFE (same as STD) 10/pk 79853-68720 10/pk<br />
5 Window Quartz (same as STD) 79853-68719 2/pk<br />
6 Gasket #2 PTFE Micro 79853-68724 10/pk<br />
Semi-Micro Flow Cell (complete) 79853-60010<br />
PEEK Capillary 400 mm lg ID 0.12 mm 5021-1823<br />
Fitting for PEEK capillary 0100-1516 2/pk<br />
Cell Kit Micro, includes items 4 (2x), 5 (2x) and<br />
6 (2x)<br />
79853-68723<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 695
VWD: Parts Information<br />
High Pressure Flow Cell (SST)<br />
High Pressure Flow Cell (SST)<br />
Table 185 High Pressure Flow Cell (SST)<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Qty<br />
1 Cell Screw (same as STD) 79853-27201<br />
2 Ring POLYIMIDE<br />
3 Window Quartz 79853-68740 2/pk<br />
4 Gasket #1 POLYIMIDE 79853-68729 10/pk<br />
5 Gasket #2 POLYIMIDE 79853-68730 5/pk<br />
High Pressure Flow Cell SST replaced by UHP Cell,<br />
see “Ultra High<br />
Pressure Flow Cell<br />
(SST)” on page 697<br />
PEEK Tubing Assembly 5062-8522<br />
Cell Kit HP, includes items 2 (2x), 3 (2x), 4 (2x)<br />
and 5 (1x)<br />
79853-68728<br />
NOTE The gaskets, windows and rings are not compatible with the Ultra High<br />
Pressure Cell (79853-600013) that replaced the high pressure flow cell<br />
(79853-60009). For parts identification refer to “Ultra High Pressure Flow Cell<br />
(SST)” on page 697.<br />
696 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Ultra High Pressure Flow Cell (SST)<br />
Ultra High Pressure Flow Cell (SST)<br />
Table 186 Ultra High Pressure Flow Cell (SST)<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Qty<br />
1 Cell Screw 79853-27200<br />
2 Ring PEEK UHP<br />
3 Window Quartz Kit, UHP 79853-68734 2/pk<br />
4 Gasket #1 POLYIMIDE Kit UHP 79853-68737 2/pk<br />
5 Gasket #2 POLYIMIDE Kit UHP 79853-68738 2/pk<br />
Ultra High Pressure Flow Cell SST 79853-60013<br />
PEEK Tubing Assembly 5062-8522<br />
Cell Kit UHP, includes items 2 (1x), 3 (2x), 4<br />
(2x) and 5 (2x)<br />
Figure 260 Ultra High Pressure Flow Cell (SST)<br />
79853-68733<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 697
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Preparative Flow Cell (Ti)<br />
Preparative Flow Cell (Ti)<br />
Table 187 Preparative Flow Cell (Titanium)<br />
Item Description Part Nmber Qty<br />
1 Cell Screw (same as STD) 79853-27201<br />
2 Conical Spring (same as STD) 79853-27203 10/pk<br />
3 Ring (same as STD) 79853-27202 2/pk<br />
4 Gasket #1 PTFE (same as STD) 79853-68720 10/pk<br />
5 Window #1 Quartz (same as STD) 79853-68719 2/pk<br />
6 Gasket #2 PTFE (0.1) for 0.9 µl<br />
6 Gasket #2 PTFE (0.2) for 1.8 µl<br />
6 Gasket #2 PTFE (0.5) for 4.4 µl<br />
6 Gasket #2 PTFE (1.0) for 8.8 µl<br />
7 Window #2 Quartz<br />
8 Gasket #3 PTFE<br />
Preparative Flow Cell (complete) 79853-60012<br />
PEEK Tubing Assembly 5062-8522<br />
Cell Kit PREP, includes items 4 (1x), 5 (1x),<br />
6 (1 <strong>of</strong> each size), 7 (1x) and 8 (1x)<br />
Window Quartz Kit PREP includes items 5 (1x),<br />
7(1x)<br />
Gasket Kit PREP includes one <strong>of</strong> each size <strong>of</strong><br />
gasket #2<br />
79853-68725<br />
79853-68726<br />
79853-68727<br />
698 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Preparative Flow Cell (Ti)<br />
Figure 261 Preparative Flow Cell (Ti)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 699
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Cuvette Holder<br />
Cuvette Holder<br />
Table 188 Control Module Parts<br />
Figure 262 Cuvette Holder<br />
Item Description Part Number<br />
Cuvette Holder 79853-60016<br />
For informationon the use <strong>of</strong> the cuvette holder, refer to “Using the Cuvette<br />
Holder” on page 658.<br />
700 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Accessories<br />
Accessories<br />
Table 189 Accessories<br />
These parts are shipped with the 79853C VWD<br />
Description Part number QTY<br />
Manual Getting Ready 0<strong>1050</strong>-90211 1<br />
Cable Remote 5061-3378 1<br />
PEEK Waste Accessory Kit 5062-8535 1<br />
Standard Accessory Kit 79853-68701 1<br />
includes<br />
Fitting 0100-1516 1<br />
Fuse 250 V 2A 2110-0002 3<br />
Fuse 250 V 3A 2110-0003 3<br />
Wrench 1/4-5/16 inch 8710-0510 1<br />
Screwdriver POZI 1 PT 3 8710-0899 1<br />
Leak Interface Kit 79853-68731 1<br />
Manual SOP 79853-90009 1<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 701
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Screws<br />
Screws<br />
Table 190 Screws<br />
Below table lists all screws within the instrument. They can be bought<br />
locally, if needed.<br />
Location Size Length Type<br />
filter motor M 2.3 4 mm lg hexagon socket set<br />
screw with cup point<br />
grating motor M 3 3 mm lg hexagon socket set<br />
screw with cup point<br />
mirror adjustment M 3 8 mm lg hexagon socket set<br />
screw with dog point<br />
grating adjustment M 3 14 mm lg hexagon socket cap<br />
screw<br />
grating motor M 3 4 mm lg countersink screw<br />
to fix assemblies on the optical body; cover on<br />
the DCB board; plate <strong>of</strong> lamp house; KDI and<br />
VFD board; mirrors, filter and grating;<br />
M 3 6 mm lg screw<br />
position sensor M 3 6 mm lg screw with smaller<br />
head<br />
REF sensor plate M 3 10 mm lg screw<br />
SAMP and REF amplifier boards M 3 18 mm lg screw<br />
cover assembly; optical unit top cover; DCB<br />
and GPIB boards from rear panel;<br />
to fix assemblies on the base; DCB abd GPIB<br />
board; leak detector assembly; front panel<br />
bracket; SAMP and REF covers; optical unit<br />
bottom cover; blank screws <strong>of</strong> optical unit top<br />
cover; plate for cell on the optical body;<br />
M 4 6 mm lg screw with lock<br />
washer<br />
M 4 5 mm lg screw<br />
blank plate <strong>of</strong> cell; lock screws M 4 12 mm lg screw<br />
702 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
Table 190 Screws<br />
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Screws<br />
Location Size Length Type<br />
lamp house M 4 14 mm lg screw<br />
fan assemblies M 4 35 mm lg screw<br />
cell M 5 10 mm lg screw<br />
All screws are plus-shaped type.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 703
VWD: Parts Information<br />
Screws<br />
704 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
31<br />
31 VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit<br />
Information<br />
This chapter provides information about the<br />
enhanced optical unit “D”
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit<br />
Information<br />
Since June 1995, the design <strong>of</strong> the optical unit for the 79853C Variable<br />
Wavelength Detector (VWD) was changed to improve its performance under<br />
unstable temperature conditions.<br />
Together with the enhanced optical unit (“D”), the standard flow cell was<br />
changed (79853-60000).<br />
NOTE In this document the term “D” is used for the new enhanced optical design and<br />
“C” for the original optical design.<br />
Compatibility<br />
This new enhanced optical unit (“D”) is fully backward compatible with all<br />
79853C VWDs shipped since January 1992.<br />
The new standard flow cell (79853-60000) is backward compatible with the<br />
“C” optical unit.<br />
Some <strong>of</strong> the parts for the enhanced optical unit (“D”) are not usable in the “C”<br />
version.<br />
In case <strong>of</strong> replacing a “C” optical unit with an enhanced “D” optical unit, the<br />
new standard flow cell is required.<br />
Support <strong>of</strong> Previous Optical Units<br />
The parts for the “C” optical unit will continue to be available as a repair part<br />
as long as the 79853C is supported (08/2006). In case the complete “C” optical<br />
must be replaced, use the “D” upgrade mentioned on “Part Numbers for<br />
Enhanced “D” Optical Unit” on page 709.<br />
706 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Introduction<br />
Introduction<br />
To overcome wander problems due to temperature variations <strong>of</strong> the lab<br />
environment, the optical unit <strong>of</strong> the 79853C Variable Wavelength Detector<br />
(VWD) has been modified.<br />
Following hardware modifications were implemented in June 1995:<br />
different coupling <strong>of</strong> the lamp housing (lens between lamp housing and<br />
optical casting).<br />
area around mirror M1 and M2 has been redesigned to eliminate one<br />
mirror - result is a mirror #1 assembly with a plane mirror.<br />
redesigned entrance slit holder. Slits are changeable (standard/test).<br />
beam splitter assembly no longer vertically adjustable.<br />
reference slit assembly redesigned for better optimization.<br />
new standard flow cell with different aperture material and different inlet<br />
capillary.<br />
Figure 263 Optical Path <strong>of</strong> Enhanced Optical Unit<br />
new entrance slit<br />
assembly<br />
new reference slit<br />
new lens assembly<br />
new mirror #1<br />
assembly<br />
new beam splitter<br />
assembly<br />
new standard flow cell<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 707
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Support Considerations<br />
Support Considerations<br />
Prefix Change<br />
The enhanced Optical Unit (“D” version) was introduced in production units<br />
in June 1995. Since the detector appears to look the same as before, a prefix<br />
change was made. All units with prefix 3522 J 04305 and above have the<br />
new optical installed.<br />
NOTE Some units with a prefix lower than 3522 J 04305 have been installed on<br />
customer sites prior to the <strong>of</strong>ficial shipments.<br />
Identification<br />
Following identifications for the enhanced “D” version are available:<br />
Prefix and serial number 3522 J 04305 and above (rear <strong>of</strong> instrument)<br />
firmware revision 4.31 (press CTRL 12 ENTER ENTER DOWN)<br />
label on the optical unit “ENHANCED ILLUMINATION SYSTEM”<br />
handle <strong>of</strong> new reference slit looking out <strong>of</strong> the optical’s cover plate (see<br />
Figure 266 on page 715).<br />
Compatibility Matrix<br />
Due to a redesign, several components are usable in the enhanced “D”<br />
version only. Refer to Table 191 on page 709 for details.<br />
NOTE Both optical unit versions (“C” and “D”) can be operated with firmware<br />
revision 4.24 (79853-13005). Due to the modifications, the photocurrent<br />
readings are about 50% <strong>of</strong> those <strong>of</strong> the original “C” opticals. To make them<br />
comparable the firmware for the enhanced “D” version got a new revision and<br />
part number.<br />
708 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Part Numbers for Enhanced “D” Optical Unit<br />
Part Numbers for Enhanced “D” Optical<br />
Unit<br />
Table 191 Enhanced “D” Version Part Numbers<br />
Part Number Description Comments<br />
79853-60000 Standard Flow Cell backward compatible * , for details see Table 192 on page<br />
710.<br />
79853-69014 Exchange “D” Optical<br />
includes firmware 79853-13000<br />
79853-69015 Exchange “D” Optical<br />
includes a Standard Flow Cell<br />
79853-60000 and firmware 79853-13000<br />
when “D” optical should be replaced,<br />
needs Standard Flow Cell 79853-60000<br />
when “C” optical should be replaced<br />
79853-68110 “D” Mirror 1 Assembly for “D” only, includes test slit<br />
79853-68111 “D” Mirror 3/4 Assembly backward compatible ** , includes test slit<br />
79853-68112 “D” Beam Splitter for “D” only, includes test slit<br />
79853-68113 “D” Lens Assembly for “D” only, includes test slit<br />
79853-66508 Pre-amplifier Board REF from “C” used for SAMPLE and REFERENCE on “D”<br />
79853-61109 Diode Sample from “C” used for SAMPLE and REFERENCE on “D”<br />
79853-64605 Grating Assembly same part number as before, but test slit added<br />
79853-13000 Firmware “D” rev 4.31 for “D” only, added also to<br />
79853-69014/15 and 79853-69511 (DCB)<br />
79853-68746 Slit Kit “D” Test slit plus STD slit<br />
* with “C” version optical units<br />
** with “C” version optical units; part number 79853-68109 should only be used for 79853C optical until stock has expired.<br />
NOTE The part numbers 79853-68110, -68111, -68112, -68113 and -64605 include<br />
beside the test slit in addition a seal to close the hole for Mirror 4 adjustment<br />
setscrew. Close the hole with this seal during replacements (see Figure 266 on<br />
page 715 for the location).<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 709
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Standard Flow Cell “D” Repair Parts<br />
Standard Flow Cell “D” Repair Parts<br />
Table 192 Standard Flow Cell “D” Repair Parts<br />
Item Description Part Number<br />
Figure 264 Standard Flow Cell “D” Repair Parts<br />
STD Flow Cell “D”, complete assembly 79853-60000<br />
1 Cell Screw 79853-27200<br />
Kits:<br />
Cell Kit STD “D”, consists <strong>of</strong>: two windows, two gaskets #1,<br />
one gasket #2 and one gasket #3.<br />
79853-68741<br />
2 Conical Spring “D”, Qty=10 79853-29100<br />
3 Ring SST “D”, Qty=2 79853-22500<br />
5 Window Quartz “D”, Qty=2 79853-68742<br />
4 Gasket #1 “D”, PTFE, Qty=10 79853-68743<br />
6 Gasket #2 “D”, Aperture, gold, Qty=5 79853-68744<br />
7 Gasket #3 “D”, PTFE, Qty=5 79853-68745<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
710 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001<br />
7<br />
5<br />
4<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Repair and Mainenance<br />
Repair and Mainenance<br />
WARNING These procedures need special knowledge on servicing the 79853C<br />
VWD and should be done by trained <strong>Service</strong> Engineers only.<br />
These procedures should be carried out in a room where the light can<br />
be reduced.<br />
Since the deuterium lamp emits intensive ultraviolet light, it is<br />
dangerous to perform optical alignment without eye protection.<br />
Tools required:<br />
❏ Test Slit (supplied with mirror or grating assembly)<br />
❏ Pozi Driv PT1<br />
❏ hexagonal wrench (1.5 mm)<br />
❏ hexagonal wrench (2.5 mm)<br />
❏ pair <strong>of</strong> tweezers (not too sharp points)<br />
Pre-requisites:<br />
❏ Assure that the flow cell is clean, flushed with water and bubble free.<br />
❏ Remove detector from system.<br />
❏ Place the detector on a bench.<br />
❏ Remove the main cover.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 711
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Additional Information<br />
Additional Information<br />
For additional information about replacements and the use <strong>of</strong> the <strong>Service</strong><br />
control Functions refer to “VWD: Maintenance Information” on page 649<br />
and “<strong>Service</strong> Control Functions” on page 622.<br />
Replacements and Calibrations<br />
The following procedures describe the replacements <strong>of</strong> parts separately.<br />
NOTE It is important that only one assembly (mirror, grating, beam splitter, ...) is<br />
changed and calibrated at a time. Otherwise you will lose correct optical<br />
assembly alignment during the calibration process.<br />
WARNING Do not remove the Entrance Slit Holder nor loosen it. Otherwise the<br />
optical unit has to be exchanged completely.<br />
NOTE The photocurrent readings with test slit installed are much lower than with<br />
the standard slit.<br />
712 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Installing the Test Slit<br />
Installing the Test Slit<br />
The small diameter <strong>of</strong> the test slit allows a straight forward alignment <strong>of</strong> the<br />
optical path. It enables the lamp image to be positioned optimally. This<br />
ensures correct illumination <strong>of</strong> the Entrance Slit and the Reference Slit.<br />
NOTE This procedure has to be carried out at the beginning <strong>of</strong> all replacement<br />
procedures.<br />
1 Turn on the detector and the lamp.<br />
2 Set the wavelength to 250 nm.<br />
3 Carefully remove the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. Take care for the reference<br />
aperture handle, see Figure 266 on page 715.<br />
4 Remove the standard slit from the entrance slit holder using a pair <strong>of</strong> tweezers<br />
and place it safe.<br />
Figure 265 Replacing the Entrance Slit<br />
entrance slit<br />
assembly<br />
entrance slit<br />
mirror #1<br />
assembly<br />
test slit<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 713
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Installing the Test Slit<br />
5 Carefully insert the test slit (with round hole) into the entrance slit holder. The<br />
slit must sit flat on the holder with the white side towards the incoming light.<br />
714 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Replacing Mirror #1 Assembly<br />
Replacing Mirror #1 Assembly<br />
1 Install the Test Slit, see “Installing the Test Slit” on page 713.<br />
2 Remove mirror #1 assembly.<br />
3 Install new Mirror #1 assembly.<br />
NOTE DO NOT remove or change its position <strong>of</strong> adapter plate underneath the<br />
mirror #1 assembly.<br />
4 Position the lamp image onto the test slit hole:<br />
- horizontally by rotating the mirror,<br />
- vertically using the setscrew on the mirror.<br />
5 Fix the mirror.<br />
6 Install the Standard Slit and perform grating calibrations, see “Installing the<br />
Standard Slit” on page 726.<br />
7 Carefully replace the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. Take care for the reference<br />
aperture handle.<br />
8 Reassemble the detector.<br />
Figure 266 Handle <strong>of</strong> the Reference Aperture<br />
handle <strong>of</strong> reference<br />
aperture<br />
hole / seal <strong>of</strong> Mirror #4 for<br />
alignment<br />
cover <strong>of</strong> optical unit<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 715
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Replacing Mirror #3 or #4 Assembly<br />
Replacing Mirror #3 or #4 Assembly<br />
NOTE Replace and calibrate one mirror at a time.<br />
1 Install the test slit, see “Installing the Test Slit” on page 713.<br />
2 Carefully replace the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. Take care for the reference<br />
aperture handle, see Figure 266 on page 715.<br />
3 Execute CTRL 20: 0th CALIB.<br />
4 Activate service function CTRL 40: 0TH TEST ON.<br />
5 Carefully remove the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. Take care for the reference<br />
aperture handle, see Figure 266 on page 715.<br />
6 Unlock the reference aperture, “Unlocking the Reference Aperture” on page<br />
723.<br />
7 Center the reference slit on the white image by moving the aperture up or<br />
down, see Figure 267. The image diameter is nearly equal to the reference slit<br />
diameter.<br />
Figure 267 Algning the Reference Slit<br />
handle <strong>of</strong> reference<br />
aperture<br />
reference image<br />
716 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Replacing Mirror #3 or #4 Assembly<br />
8 Install new mirror #3 or #4 assembly.<br />
9 Position the white image precisely onto the reference slit:<br />
- horizontally by rotating the mirror,<br />
- vertically using the setscrew <strong>of</strong> the mirror<br />
10 Carefully replace the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. Take care for the reference<br />
aperture handle.<br />
11 De-activate CTRL 40: 0TH TEST OFF, press CLEAR, CLEAR and BALANCE.<br />
12 Set λ=250 nm.<br />
13 Activate CTRL 16: PHOTOCURRENT.<br />
14 Optimize the sample readings using the setscrew <strong>of</strong> mirror #4 through the hole<br />
in the optical unit cover, see Figure 266 on page 715.<br />
15 Optimize the reference readings with the reference aperture, see “Optimizing<br />
the Reference Readings” on page 725.<br />
16 Install the standard slit and perform electronic calibrations, see “Installing the<br />
Standard Slit” on page 726.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 717
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Replacing the Grating or Grating Motor<br />
Replacing the Grating or Grating Motor<br />
NOTE To replace the Grating and/or the Grating Motor refer to “Replacing Grating<br />
Assembly Parts” on page 668 and continue with the Alignment Procedure<br />
below.<br />
1 Install the test slit, see “Installing the Test Slit” on page 713.<br />
2 Carefully replace the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. Take care for the reference<br />
aperture handle, see Figure 266 on page 715.<br />
3 Execute CTRL 20: 0th CALIB.<br />
4 Activate service function CTRL 40: 0TH TEST ON.<br />
5 Carefully remove the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. Take care for the reference<br />
aperture handle, see Figure 266 on page 715.<br />
6 Unlock the reference aperture, see “Unlocking the Reference Aperture” on<br />
page 723.<br />
7 De-activate CTRL 40: 0TH TEST OFF.<br />
8 Center the reference slit on the white image by moving the aperture up or<br />
down. The image diameter is nearly equal to the reference slit diameter.<br />
9 Remove the grating and reassemble new grating.<br />
NOTE Assure that the grating is not fixed on the shaft with the setscrew.<br />
10 Set the Param. λ=200, using service function CTRL 31: SET λ PARAM.<br />
11 Activate service function CTRL 40: 0TH TEST ON.<br />
12 Turn the grating so that the center <strong>of</strong> the image is on the reference slit (a small<br />
horizontal and vertical deviation can be accepted).<br />
13 Fix the grating with the setscrew.<br />
14 De-activate and re-activate CTRL 40: 0TH TEST and check the position <strong>of</strong><br />
the image on the reference slit.<br />
If not correct, loosen the grating and repeat steps 12 to 14.<br />
718 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Replacing the Grating or Grating Motor<br />
15 Do a vertical adjustment with Mirror #4 for precise vertical fit <strong>of</strong> image on<br />
reference slit, using the setscrew <strong>of</strong> mirror #4 through the hole in the optical<br />
unit cover, see Figure 266 on page 715.<br />
16 Carefully replace the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. Take care for the reference<br />
aperture handle.<br />
17 De-activate CTRL 40: 0TH TEST OFF, press [CLEAR], [CLEAR] and<br />
[BALANCE].<br />
18 Execute CTRL 20: 0th CALIB.<br />
19 Activate CTRL 40: 0TH TEST ON and readjust the Beam Splitter for ideal<br />
horizontal fit.<br />
20 De-activate CTRL 40: 0TH TEST OFF.<br />
21 Set λ=250 nm.<br />
22 Activate CTRL 16: PHOTOCURRENT.<br />
23 Optimize the sample readings, using the setscrew <strong>of</strong> mirror #4 through the<br />
hole in the optical unit cover, see Figure 266 on page 715.<br />
24 Unlock the reference aperture, see “Unlocking the Reference Aperture” on<br />
page 723.<br />
25 Optimize the reference readings with the reference slit, see “Optimizing the<br />
Reference Readings” on page 725.<br />
26 Install the standard slit and perform electronic calibrations, see “Installing the<br />
Standard Slit” on page 726.<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 719
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Replacing the Beam Splitter<br />
Replacing the Beam Splitter<br />
1 Install the test slit, see “Installing the Test Slit” on page 713.<br />
2 Execute CTRL 20: 0th CALIB.<br />
3 Carefully remove the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. Take care for the reference<br />
aperture handle, see Figure 266 on page 715.<br />
4 Activate service function CTRL 40: 0TH TEST ON.<br />
5 Unlock the reference aperture, see “Unlocking the Reference Aperture” on<br />
page 723.<br />
6 Center the reference slit on the white image by moving the aperture up or<br />
down. The image diameter is nearly equal to the reference slit diameter.<br />
7 Install the new beam splitter assembly.<br />
8 Position horizontally the white image center <strong>of</strong> the beam splitter onto the<br />
reference slit.<br />
9 Fix the beam splitter after precise image fit.<br />
10 Correct new vertical position with reference slit.<br />
11 Carefully replace the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. Take care for the reference<br />
aperture handle.<br />
12 De-activate CTRL 40: 0TH TEST OFF, press [CLEAR], [CLEAR] and<br />
[BALANCE].<br />
13 Set λ=250 nm.<br />
14 Activate CTRL 16: PHOTOCURRENT.<br />
15 Optimize the sample readings using the setscrew <strong>of</strong> mirror #4, using the<br />
setscrew <strong>of</strong> mirror #4 through the hole in the optical unit cover, see Figure 266<br />
on page 715.<br />
16 Optimize the reference readings, see “Optimizing the Reference Readings” on<br />
page 725.<br />
17 Install the standard slit and perform electronic calibrations, see “Installing the<br />
Standard Slit” on page 726.<br />
720 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Cleaning or Replacing the Lens<br />
Cleaning or Replacing the Lens<br />
The lens is located between lamp housing and casting and can be cleaned or<br />
replaced.<br />
1 Turn the detector <strong>of</strong>f.<br />
2 Disconnect the lamp connector and all other connectors to the DCB board.<br />
3 Remove the optical unit completely from the instrument.<br />
4 Unscrew the four screws <strong>of</strong> the lamp housing and remove lamp housing.<br />
Figure 268 Lens Assembly Location<br />
location <strong>of</strong> lens assembly<br />
casting <strong>of</strong> optical unit<br />
NOTE For easier repositioning the lens ring is marked with color paint, see Figure<br />
269 on page 722. The position <strong>of</strong> the marker could differ from instrument to<br />
instrument and may be different to the position shown in the figure.<br />
5 Remove, clean or replace the lens. If reusing old lens use markings for<br />
repositioning.<br />
lens assembly<br />
spring washer<br />
lamp housing<br />
with lamp<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 721
Figure 269 Lens Position<br />
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Cleaning or Replacing the Lens<br />
NOTE The more plane lens side with smaller aperture faces towards the lamp.<br />
NOTE If a new lens is installed, mirror #1 assembly has to be realigned after this<br />
procedure, see “Replacing Mirror #1 Assembly” on page 715.<br />
6 Reassemble the flat spring.<br />
7 Replace the Lamp housing and tighten it.<br />
8 Reassemble the detector.<br />
marker<br />
lens assembly<br />
722 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Unlocking the Reference Aperture<br />
Unlocking the Reference Aperture<br />
NOTE Only necessary, if required during a replacement procedure.<br />
For performance reasons, the reference aperture is fixed by one screw only<br />
and has to be unlocked prior to any replacement/calibration within the<br />
optical unit.<br />
1 Unscrew the front panel and place it in front <strong>of</strong> the detector to have access to<br />
the reference pre-amplifier area.<br />
NOTE When moving the front panel, assure that the keyboard cable is not partially<br />
disconnected - damage to the electronics is possible.<br />
2 Unscrew the right screw <strong>of</strong> the reference pre-amplifier cover and loosen the<br />
left screw.<br />
3 Turn the cover counter-clockwise until you can loosen the top screw <strong>of</strong> the<br />
photo diode holder sheet.<br />
Figure 270 Unlocking the Reference Slit<br />
handle <strong>of</strong> reference<br />
aperture<br />
lock screw<br />
reference diode assembly<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 723
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Unlocking the Reference Aperture<br />
4 Replace the reference pre-amplifier cover (to prevent stray light).<br />
5 Fit the front panel with one screw at the right <strong>of</strong> the mainframe.<br />
6 Turn on the detector and the lamp<br />
7 Set wavelength to 250 nm.<br />
8 Return to your replacement procedure.<br />
724 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Optimizing the Reference Readings<br />
Optimizing the Reference Readings<br />
1 Carefully replace the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. Take care for the reference<br />
aperture handle.<br />
2 Activate CTRL 16: PHOTOCURRENT.<br />
3 Shift reference aperture vertically for maximum reference readings.<br />
4 Fix the reference slit with the top lock screw <strong>of</strong> the photo diode assembly.<br />
5 Replace the reference photodiode cover.<br />
6 Continue with the next step <strong>of</strong> the procedure <strong>of</strong> the assembly you are<br />
replacing.<br />
Figure 271 Optimizing the Reference Readings<br />
handle <strong>of</strong> reference<br />
aperture<br />
lock screw<br />
reference diode assembly<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 725
VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit Information<br />
Installing the Standard Slit<br />
Installing the Standard Slit<br />
NOTE This procedure has to be carried out at the end <strong>of</strong> all replacement procedures.<br />
1 Carefully remove the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. Take care for the reference<br />
aperture handle, see Figure 266 on page 715.<br />
2 Remove the test slit from the entrance slit holder using a pair <strong>of</strong> tweezers and<br />
place it safe.<br />
Figure 272 Replacing the Entrance Slit<br />
entrance slit<br />
assembly<br />
test slit<br />
mirror #1<br />
assembly<br />
standard slit<br />
3 Carefully insert the standard slit into the entrance slit holder. The slit must sit<br />
plane on the holder.<br />
4 Carefully replace the cover <strong>of</strong> the optical unit. Take care for the reference<br />
aperture handle, see Figure 266 on page 715.<br />
5 Execute CTRL 20: 0th CALIB.<br />
6 Execute CTRL 21: l CALIBRATION.<br />
7 Reassemble the detector.<br />
726 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
32<br />
32 VWD: Additional Information<br />
This chapter provides additional information<br />
about the <strong>1050</strong> Variable Wavelength Detectors
VWD: Additional Information<br />
Since the introduction <strong>of</strong> the 79853C Variable Wavelength Detector in 1991,<br />
the following hardware and firmware changes have been implemented.<br />
728 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Additional Information<br />
Product History<br />
Product History<br />
Since introduction <strong>of</strong> the 79853C Variable Wavelength Detector in January<br />
1992 following changes have been implemented.<br />
Prefix Changes<br />
Table 193 Prefix Changes<br />
Serial Number Changes Additional Information<br />
3145 J 00101 Start <strong>of</strong> customer shipments ∅<br />
3152 J 00263 New amplification factor <strong>of</strong> reference<br />
side due to high output <strong>of</strong> new DAD<br />
lamps.<br />
3152 J 00489 Introduction <strong>of</strong> DCB firmware revision<br />
4.22<br />
3217 J 00603 Introduction <strong>of</strong> DCB firmware revision<br />
4.23<br />
3225 J 00773 Introduction <strong>of</strong> DCB firmware revision<br />
4.24<br />
3225 J 01801 Introduction <strong>of</strong> PTFE ring in optical<br />
unit<br />
Volume changes on Preparative Flow<br />
Cell in September 1992<br />
See “Modified<br />
Pre-Amplifier Gain” on<br />
page 734.<br />
See “SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-055” on<br />
page 734.<br />
See “SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-055” on<br />
page 734.<br />
See “SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-055” on<br />
page 734.<br />
See “SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-068” on<br />
page 734.<br />
See Table 138 on page<br />
574 and Table 187 on<br />
page 698.<br />
3225 J 02011 Introduction <strong>of</strong> new DCB/PSC boards See “SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-072” on<br />
page 734.<br />
3323 J 03117 Introduction <strong>of</strong> new lamp housing<br />
3334 J 03255 Change <strong>of</strong> manufacturing process for<br />
photo diodes mounting<br />
Ultra High Pressure cell replaced High<br />
Pressure Cell in 1993<br />
to improve stability<br />
against humidity<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 729
VWD: Additional Information<br />
Product History<br />
Table 193 Prefix Changes<br />
Serial Number Changes Additional Information<br />
3522 J 04305 Enhanced optical unit “D” with STD<br />
flow cell “D” in June 1995<br />
to improve temperature<br />
stability, see “VWD:<br />
Enhanced Optical Unit<br />
Information” on page 705<br />
730 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Additional Information<br />
DCB ROM Firmware Revisions<br />
DCB ROM Firmware Revisions<br />
Table 194 DCB ROM Firmware Revisions<br />
Revision Major Changes Comments<br />
4.08 Used for first internal<br />
Waldbronn/Avondale units and some<br />
demo units.<br />
4.09 PHOENIX problem: won’t stop when<br />
running with A/D Concerter (for<br />
example ABORT).<br />
4.21 CTRL 45 COMPENSATE bug fix,<br />
calibrated wavelength deviation<br />
might exceed the specification.<br />
CTRL 22 HOLMIUMCHECK for GLP<br />
reasons added.<br />
4.22 New algorithm for CTRL 45<br />
COMPENSATE and CTRL 22<br />
HOLMIUMCHECK.<br />
4.23 Removed bug: Incorrect wavelength<br />
setting during stepper motor<br />
intialisation bewteen 536.4 nm and<br />
600 nm.<br />
Not released.Used for internal<br />
Waldbronn/Avondale tests.<br />
Released for 79853C in January 1992.<br />
For replacements use part number<br />
79853-13005 (4.24).<br />
NEEDS GPIB ROM version 0.20 or<br />
above (79853-13004)<br />
Released for 79853C in March 1992.<br />
Started with serial number<br />
3152J00489.<br />
For replacements use part number<br />
79853-13005 (4.24).<br />
NEEDS GPIB ROM version 0.20 or<br />
above (79853-13004)<br />
Released for 79853C in April 1992.<br />
Started with serial number<br />
3217J00603.<br />
For replacements use part number<br />
79853-13005 (4.24).<br />
NEEDS GPIB ROM version 0.20 or<br />
above (79853-13004)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 731
VWD: Additional Information<br />
DCB ROM Firmware Revisions<br />
Table 194 DCB ROM Firmware Revisions<br />
Revision Major Changes Comments<br />
4.24 Removed bug : EEROM DATA LOST1<br />
Removed bug : Wavelength accuracy<br />
between 360 nm and 486 nm<br />
Released for 79853C in June 1992.<br />
Started with serial number<br />
3225J00773.<br />
For replacements use part number<br />
79853-13005 (4.24).<br />
NEEDS GPIB ROM version 0.20 or<br />
above (79853-13004)<br />
4.31 For Enhanced Optical Unit “D” only Released for 79853C in June 1995.<br />
Started with serial number<br />
3522J04305.<br />
For replacements use part number<br />
79853-13000 (4.31).<br />
NEEDS GPIB ROM version 0.20 or<br />
above (79853-13004)<br />
732 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
VWD: Additional Information<br />
GPIB ROM Firmware Revisions<br />
Table 195 GPIB ROM Revisions<br />
GPIB ROM Firmware Revisions<br />
The table below lists all GPIB ROM firmware revisions for the 79853A/C.<br />
Revision Major Changes Comments<br />
0.04 First <strong>of</strong>ficial realease for 79853A.<br />
0.05 LC APPACK problem: BUFFER<br />
OVERFLOW message preventing run<br />
buffer overflow.<br />
0.08 Also useable for 79853C. PHOENIX<br />
problem: prevents hang-ups at power<br />
on (if VWD is switched on after<br />
PHOENIX has been switched on).<br />
0.09 PHOENIX problem: prevents VECTRA<br />
486 hang-ups.<br />
0.20 additional changes for future<br />
PHOENIX enhancements.<br />
Released for 79853A.<br />
Released for 79853A and 79853C.<br />
For replacements use part number<br />
79853-13004 (0.2X)<br />
NOT <strong>of</strong>ficially released.<br />
Released for 79853A and 79853C in<br />
January 1992.<br />
Required for 79853C firmware<br />
revision 4.21 and above.<br />
For replacements use part number<br />
79853-13004 (0.2X)<br />
<strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001 733
VWD: Additional Information<br />
Hardware Changes and <strong>Service</strong> Notes<br />
Hardware Changes and <strong>Service</strong> Notes<br />
Modified Pre-Amplifier Gain<br />
First instruments where shipped with a pre-amplifier gain <strong>of</strong> 100% on the<br />
reference side. The new deuterium lamps (79883-60002) showed sometimes<br />
very high energies which gave very high numbers on the reference side<br />
16:PHOTOCURRENT. To prevent an overload the amplification factor was<br />
changed to 75%. The feedback resistors on the reference side changed from<br />
200 MOhm to 150 MOhm and on the sample side from 100 MOhm to<br />
75 MOhm.<br />
NOTE No revision change was made. The modified pre-amplifiers started with serial<br />
number 3145J00263.<br />
Important <strong>Service</strong> Note<br />
SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-055 <strong>Service</strong> Note <strong>1050</strong>-055 describes the introduction <strong>of</strong> the DCB firmware<br />
revision 4.24 and the problems with previous revisions in more detail.<br />
SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-068 This note describes problems with POM ring between lamp housing and<br />
optical casting. Exchange POM ring against PTFE Ring 53C (79853-24500).<br />
SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-072 This note describes problems with negative baseline jumps on analog output<br />
signal. New DCB (79853-66511) and PSC (79853-66512) Boards have been<br />
introduced.<br />
SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-085 This note describes the optimization for drift problems.<br />
SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-104 Introduction <strong>of</strong> Enhanced Optical Unit, see “VWD: Enhanced Optical Unit<br />
Information” on page 705.<br />
SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-107 Cuvette Holder for Wavelength Verification with Certified Standard Solutions<br />
available see “Cuvette Holder” on page 700.<br />
SN 0<strong>1050</strong>-112 Check <strong>of</strong> photometric accuracy - information on path lengths <strong>of</strong> flow cells,<br />
see “Correction factors for 79853C flow cells” on page 575.<br />
734 <strong>Service</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> for <strong>1050</strong> <strong>Series</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>HPLC</strong> <strong>Modules</strong> - 11/2001
In This Book<br />
This manual contains technical<br />
information about the Agilent <strong>1050</strong><br />
liquid chromatographs.<br />
This manual is available as electronic<br />
version (Adobe Acrobat Reader file)<br />
only.